project manual the city of miami community redevelopment ... · project manual the city of miami...

PROJECT MANUAL

The City of Miami Community Redevelopment Agency

Project No. B-30579

Renovation of Historic Fire Station No. 2 (Phase II-A)

Department of Capital Improvements

444 SW 2nd Avenue – Miami, Florida 33130

CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS April 16, 2010

BID SET – JUNE 2010

Prepared by Consultant:

M.C. Harry & Associates, Inc.

Architecture – Engineering – Planning

RENOVATION OF HISTORIC FIRE STATION NO. 2 (PHASE II-A) City of Miami Project No. B-30579 00010 - 1 of 3 TABLE OF CONTENTS

SECTION 00010

TABLE OF CONTENTS

DIVISION 0 -- INTRODUCTORY INFORMATION

SECTION 00300 - INFORMATION AVAILABLE TO BIDDERS

Appendix 1 - Geotechnical Subsurface Investigation Report.

Appendix 2 - Soils Percolation Test Report.

Appendix 3 - Fire Flow Test Report.

DIVISION 1 -- GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

SECTION 01010 - SUMMARY OF WORK

SECTION 01400 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS

SECTION 01425 - REFERENCE STANDARDS

SECTION 01600 - PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

SECTION 01700 - EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS

SECTION 01780 - CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

DIVISION 2 -- SITE CONSTRUCTION

SECTION 02223 - SELECTIVE DEMOLITION FOR REMODELING

SECTION 02300 - SITEWORK FOR BUILDINGS

SECTION 02361 - SOIL TREATMENT FOR TERMITE CONTROL

DIVISION 3 -- CONCRETE

SECTION 03100 - CONCRETE FORMWORK

SECTION 03200 - CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT

SECTION 03300 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

SECTION 03351 - POLISHED CONCRETE FINISHING

SECTION 03371 – SHOTCRETE

DIVISION 4 -- MASONRY

SECTION 04230 - REINFORCED MASONRY

SECTION 04810 - UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES


DIVISION 5 -- METALS

SECTION 05120 - STRUCTURAL STEEL

SECTION 05510 - METAL STAIRS

SECTION 05515 - LADDERS

SECTION 05525 - GUARDRAILS

SECTION 05710 - ORNAMENTAL METAL FABRICATIONS

DIVISION 6 -- WOOD AND PLASTICS

SECTION 06100 - ROUGH CARPENTRY

SECTION 06130 - HEAVY TIMBER CONSTRUCTION

SECTION 06150 - WOOD DECKING

DIVISION 7 -- THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION

SECTION 07212 - BUILDING INSULATION

SECTION 07321 - CLAY TILE ROOFING

SECTION 07410 - EXTERIOR WALL PANEL SYSTEM

SECTION 07550 - MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING

SECTION 07555 - PLAZA DECK ROOFING

SECTION 07620 - SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM

SECTION 07631 - GUTTERS AND DOWNSPOUTS

SECTION 07720 - ROOF ACCESSORIES

SECTION 07840 - FIRESTOPPING

SECTION 07900 - JOINT SEALERS

DIVISION 8 -- DOORS AND WINDOWS

SECTION 08110 - STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES

SECTION 08520 - ALUMINUM WINDOWS

SECTION 08710 - DOOR HARDWARE

Appendix 1 - Hardware Schedule

DIVISION 9 -- FINISHES

SECTION 09206 - METAL LATH

SECTION 09220 - PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER


SECTION 09900 - PAINTS AND COATINGS

DIVISION 10 – SPECIALTIES

SECTION 10210 - WALL LOUVERS

DIVISION 11 -- EQUIPMENT (NOT USED)

DIVISION 12 -- FURNISHINGS (NOT USED)

DIVISION 13 -- SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION (NOT USED)

DIVISION 14 -- CONVEYING SYSTEMS (NOT USED)

DIVISION 15 -- MECHANICAL

SECTION 15421 – DRAINS

DIVISION 16 -- ELECTRICAL (NOT USED)

END OF SECTION

RENOVATION OF HISTORIC FIRE STATION NO. 2 (Phase II-A) City of Miami Project No. B-30579 00300 - 1 of 2 INFORMATION AVAILABLE TO BIDDERS

SECTION 00300

INFORMATION AVAILABLE TO BIDDERS

EXISTING REPORTS AND SURVEYS

1.01 GEOTECHNICAL SUBSURFACE INVESTIGATION REPORT

A. A copy of a geotechnical report with respect to the building site is attached to this Section. 1. Title: Geotechnical Engineering Report & Concrete Testing Results,

Structural Assessment of Existing 2-Level Fire Station No. 2 2. Date: May 21, 2009. 3. Prepared by: Kaderabek Company (KACO).

B. This report identifies properties of below grade conditions and offers recommendations for the design of foundations, prepared primarily for the use of Consultant.

C. The recommendations described shall not be construed as a requirement of this Contract, unless specifically referenced in the Contract Documents.

D. This report, by its nature, cannot reveal all conditions that exist on the site. Should subsurface conditions be found to vary substantially from this report, changes in the design and construction of foundations will be made, with resulting credits or expenditures to the Contract Price accruing to City.

1.02 SOILS PERCOLATION TEST REPORT

A. A copy of a soils percolation test report with respect to the building site is attached to this Section. 1. Title: Percolation Tests Report, Historic Fire Station #2. 2. Date: January 14, 2010. 3. Prepared by: ATC Associates, Inc.

B. This report identifies properties of below grade conditions including soil profile, effective pumping rate and depth to water, prepared primarily for the use of Consultant.

C. This report, by its nature, cannot reveal all conditions that exist on the site. Should subsurface conditions be found to vary substantially from this report, changes in the design will be made, with resulting credits or expenditures to the Contract Price accruing to City.

1.03 FIRE FLOW TEST REPORT

A. A copy of a fire flow test report with respect to the building site is attached to this Section. 1. Title: Request for Fire Flow Approval in Accordance with Miami-Dade

County Article XIV-A, Water Supply for Fire Suppression. 2. Date: January 21, 2010. 3. Prepared by: Fire Prevention Bureau.

B. This report identifies fire hydrant number, location, pressure (PSI), outlet diameter (inches), and flow (GPM), prepared primarily for the use of Consultant.

RENOVATION OF HISTORIC FIRE STATION NO. 2 (Phase II-A) City of Miami Project No. B-30579 00300 - 2 of 2 INFORMATION AVAILABLE TO BIDDERS

C. This report, by its nature, cannot reveal all conditions that exist on the site. Should subsurface conditions be found to vary substantially from this report, changes in the design will be made, with resulting credits or expenditures to the Contract Price accruing to City.

END OF SECTION

Attachments:

Appendix 1 - GEOTECHNICAL SUBSURFACE INVESTIGATION REPORT.

Appendix 2 - SOILS PERCOLATION TEST REPORT.

Appendix 3 - FIRE FLOW TEST REPORT.

RENOVATION OF HISTORIC FIRE STATION NO. 2 (Phase II-A) City of Miami Project No. B-30579 01010 - 1 of 1 SUMMARY OF WORK

SECTION 01010

SUMMARY OF WORK

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY OF WORK

A. Project Description: The Phase II-A scope of work includes but is not limited to the following: 1. Selective demolition and gutting of historic 2-story building, including but not

limited to demolition and removal of existing 2nd floor and roof decks and framing, removal of windows and doors, and gutting of interior finishes, utilities and equipment.

2. Renovation of existing historic 2-story building envelope, including but not limited to: a. New 2nd floor deck assembly, including but not limited to columns,

foundations, framing and structural deck assembly. b. New roof framing and roof deck assemblies. c. Column and wall strengthening, and other structural improvements of

the building envelope. d. Replacement of interior open stair with a new stair assembly. e. Replacement of exterior doors and windows, except at large arched

openings at 1st floor which will be covered by temporary construction. f. Removal/repair/restoration of exterior plaster/stucco finish, and

repainting. g. New roofing systems, roof drains and rainwater drainage systems.

3. Construction of a new elevator hoistway and exit stair within new 2-story enclosure.

RENOVATION OF HISTORIC FIRE STATION NO. 2 (Phase II-A) City of Miami Project No. B-30579 01400 - 1 of 4 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS

SECTION 01400

QUALITY REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Quality assurance submittals.

B. Mock-ups.

C. Control of installation.

D. Tolerances.

E. Testing and inspection services.

1.02 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 01425 - Reference Standards.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. For submittal procedures, refer to Contract General Terms and Conditions, and Supplemental Terms and Conditions.

B. Testing Agency Qualifications: 1. Prior to start of Work, submit agency name, address, and telephone number,

and names of full time registered Engineer and responsible officer. 2. Submit copy of report of laboratory facilities inspection made by NIST

Construction Materials Reference Laboratory during most recent inspection, with memorandum of remedies of any deficiencies reported by the inspection.

C. Design Data: Submit for Consultant's knowledge as contract administrator or for the City, for information for the limited purpose of assessing conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the contract documents.

D. Test Reports: After each test/inspection, promptly submit two copies of report to Consultant and to Contractor. 1. Include:

a. Date issued. b. Project title and number. c. Name of inspector. d. Date and time of sampling or inspection. e. Identification of product and specifications section. f. Location in the Project. g. Type of test/inspection. h. Date of test/inspection. i. Results of test/inspection. j. Conformance with Contract Documents. k. When requested by Consultant, provide interpretation of results.

2. Test reports are submitted for Consultant's knowledge as contract administrator or for the City, for information for the limited purpose of


assessing conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the contract documents.

E. Certificates: When specified in individual specification sections, submit certification by the manufacturer and Contractor or installation/application subcontractor to Consultant, in quantities specified for Product Data. 1. Indicate material or product conforms to or exceeds specified requirements.

Submit supporting reference data, affidavits, and certifications as appropriate.

F. Manufacturer's Instructions: When specified in individual specification sections, submit printed instructions for delivery, storage, assembly, installation, start-up, adjusting, and finishing, for the City's information. Indicate special procedures, perimeter conditions requiring special attention, and special environmental criteria required for application or installation.

G. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Submit reports for Consultant's benefit as contract administrator or for City. 1. Submit for information for the limited purpose of assessing conformance with

information given and the design concept expressed in the contract documents.

1.04 REFERENCES AND STANDARDS - See Section 01425

1.05 TESTING AND INSPECTION AGENCIES – Refer to Contract General Terms and Conditions, and Supplemental Terms and Conditions.

A. Product and Material Testing: All tests will be performed by the Contractor. All costs for testing performed by Contractor shall be at the Contractor’s expense.

B. Employment of independent testing agency in no way relieves Contractor of obligation to perform Work in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents.

C. Contractor-Employed Independent Testing Agency: 1. Testing Agency: Comply with requirements of ASTM E 329, ASTM E 543,

ASTM C 1021, ASTM C 1077, and ASTM C 1093. 2. Inspection Agency: Comply with requirements of ASTM D 3740 and ASTM

E 329. 3. Laboratory: Authorized to operate in the State in which the Project is

located. 4. Laboratory Staff: Maintain a full time registered Engineer on staff to review

services. 5. Testing Equipment: Calibrated at reasonable intervals either by NIST or

using an NIST established Measurement Assurance Program, under a laboratory measurement quality assurance program.

PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 CONTROL OF INSTALLATION


A. Monitor quality control over suppliers, manufacturers, products, services, site conditions, and workmanship, to produce Work of specified quality.

B. Comply with manufacturers' instructions, including each step in sequence.

C. Should manufacturers' instructions conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Consultant before proceeding.

D. Comply with specified standards as minimum quality for the Work except where more stringent tolerances, codes, or specified requirements indicate higher standards or more precise workmanship.

E. Have Work performed by persons qualified to produce required and specified quality.

F. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings or as instructed by the manufacturer.

G. Secure products in place with positive anchorage devices designed and sized to withstand stresses, vibration, physical distortion, and disfigurement.

3.02 MOCK-UPS

A. Tests will be performed under provisions identified in this section and identified in the respective product specification sections.

B. Assemble and erect specified items with specified attachment and anchorage devices, flashings, seals, and finishes.

C. Accepted mock-ups shall be a comparison standard for the remaining Work.

D. Where mock-up has been accepted by Consultant and is specified in product specification sections to be removed, remove mock-up and clear area when directed to do so.

3.03 TOLERANCES

A. Monitor fabrication and installation tolerance control of products to produce acceptable Work. Do not permit tolerances to accumulate.

B. Comply with manufacturers' tolerances. Should manufacturers' tolerances conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Consultant before proceeding.

C. Adjust products to appropriate dimensions; position before securing products in place.

3.04 TESTING AND INSPECTION

A. Testing Agency Duties: 1. Test samples of mixes submitted by Contractor. 2. Provide qualified personnel at site. Cooperate with Consultant and

Contractor in performance of services. 3. Perform specified sampling and testing of products in accordance with

specified standards. 4. Ascertain compliance of materials and mixes with requirements of Contract

Documents. 5. Promptly notify Consultant and Contractor of observed irregularities or non-


conformance of Work or products. 6. Perform additional tests and inspections required by Consultant. 7. Submit reports of all tests/inspections specified.

B. Limits on Testing/Inspection Agency Authority: 1. Agency may not release, revoke, alter, or enlarge on requirements of

Contract Documents. 2. Agency may not approve or accept any portion of the Work. 3. Agency may not assume any duties of Contractor. 4. Agency has no authority to stop the Work.

C. Contractor Responsibilities: 1. Deliver to agency at designated location, adequate samples of materials

proposed to be used which require testing, along with proposed mix designs. 2. Cooperate with Consultant, Project Manager, and laboratory personnel, and

provide access to the Work and to manufacturers' facilities. 3. Provide incidental labor and facilities:

a. To provide access to Work to be tested/inspected. b. To obtain and handle samples at the site or at source of Products to be

tested/inspected. c. To facilitate tests/inspections. d. To provide storage and curing of test samples.

4. Notify Consultant and laboratory 24 hours prior to expected time for operations requiring testing/inspection services.

5. Employ services of an independent qualified testing laboratory and pay for additional samples, tests, and inspections required by Contractor beyond specified requirements.

6. Arrange with City's agency and pay for additional samples, tests, and inspections required by Contractor beyond specified requirements.

D. Re-testing required because of non-conformance to specified requirements shall be performed by the same agency on instructions by Consultant, at no additional cost to City.

3.05 DEFECT ASSESSMENT

A. Replace Work or portions of the Work not conforming to specified requirements.

B. If, in the opinion of Consultant, it is not practical to remove and replace the Work, Consultant will direct an appropriate remedy or adjust payment.

END OF SECTION

RENOVATION OF HISTORIC FIRE STATION NO. 2 (Phase II-A)

City of Miami Project No. B-30579 01425 - 1 of 23 REFERENCE STANDARDS

SECTION 01425

REFERENCE STANDARDS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Requirements relating to referenced standards.

B. Reference standards full title and edition date.

1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. For products or workmanship specified by reference to a document or documents not included in the Contract Documents, also referred to as reference standards, comply with requirements of the standard, except when more rigid requirements are specified or are required by applicable codes.

B. Conform to reference standard of date of issue specified in this section, except where a specific date is established by applicable code.

C. When required by the Contract Documents, Contractor shall obtain copies of designated reference standard document(s) and maintain at project site during submittals, planning, and progress of the specific work, until Substantial Completion.

D. The references listed in this section are hereby made a part of the Contract Documents the same as if herein repeated in full. In the event of any conflict between any of these standards and those specified, the most stringent shall govern unless otherwise stated.

E. Neither the contractual relationships, duties, or responsibilities of the parties in Contract nor those of the Consultant shall be altered by the Contract Documents by mention or inference otherwise in any reference document.

PART 2 CONSTRUCTION INDUSTRY ORGANIZATION DOCUMENTS

2.01 ALUMINUM ASSOCIATION (AA)

2.02 ALUMINUM ASSOCIATION OF FLORIDA (AAF)

2.03 ASSOCIATED AIR BALANCE COUNCIL (AABC)

2.04 AMERICAN ARCHITECTURAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (AAMA)

A. AAMA/NWWDA 101/I.S.2 -- Voluntary Specifications for Aluminum, Vinyl (PVC) and Wood Windows and Glass Doors; 1997 with revisions contained in "reprinting" of 1999.

B. AAMA 501 -- Methods of Test for Exterior Walls; 2005.

1. AAMA 501.2 -- Field Check of Metal Storefronts, Curtain Walls, and Sloped Glazing Systems for Water Leakage; (part of AAMA 501).

C. AAMA 502 -- Voluntary Specification for Field Testing of Windows and Sliding



Glass Doors; 2002.

D. AAMA 605.2 -- Voluntary Specification for High Performance Organic Coatings on Architectural Aluminum Extrusions and Panels; 1998.

E. AAMA 1302.5 -- Forced Entry Aluminum Prime Windows; 1976.

F. AAMA 1303.5 Forced Entry Resistant Aluminum Sliding Glass Doors.

G. AAMA 2603 -- Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for Pigmented Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels; 2002.

H. AAMA 2604 -- Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for High Performance Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels; 2005.

I. AAMA 2605 -- Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for Superior Performing Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels; 2005.

J. AAMA CW-10 -- Care and Handling of Architectural Aluminum From Shop to Site; 2004.

2.05 AMERICAN ASSOCIATION OF TEXTILE CHEMISTS & COLORISTS (AATCC)

2.06 AMERICAN ASSOCIATION OF STATE HIGHWAY AND TRANSPORTATION OFFICIALS (AASHTO)

A. AASHTO M 182 -- Burlap Cloth made from Jute or Kenaf.

2.07 AMERICAN CONCRETE INSTITUTE INTERNATIONAL (ACI)

A. ACI 117 -- Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; 2006.

B. ACI 211.1 -- Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Normal, Heavyweight, and Mass Concrete; 1991(R2002).

C. ACI 216.1 -- Method for Determining Fire Resistance of Concrete and Masonry Construction Assemblies; 1997.

D. ACI 301 -- Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings; 2005.

E. ACI 302.1R -- Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction; 2004 (errata 2007).

F. ACI 304 -- Recommended Practice for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting and Placing Concrete;

G. ACI 305R -- Hot Weather Concreting; 1999.

H. ACI 306R -- Cold Weather Concreting; 1988(R2002).

I. ACI 306.1 -- Standard Specification for Cold Weather Concreting; 1990(R2002).

J. ACI 308R -- Guide to Curing Concrete; 2001.

K. ACI 309R -- Guide for Consolidation of Concrete; 2005.



L. ACI 311.4R -- Guide for Concrete Inspection; 2005.

M. ACI 311.5 -- Guide for Concrete Plant Inspection and Testing of Ready-Mixed Concrete; 2004.

N. ACI 315 -- Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement.

O. ACI 317 -- Standard Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials.

P. ACI 318 -- Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary; 2005.

Q. ACI 347 -- Recommended Practice for Concrete Formwork.

R. ACI 347R -- Guide to Formwork for Concrete; 2004.

S. ACI 506 -- Recommended Practice for Shotcreting.

T. ACI 506.2 -- Specification for Shotcrete.

U. ACI 524R -- Guide to Portland Cement-Based Plaster; 2004.

V. ACI 530/ASCE 5/TMS 402 -- Building Code Requirements for Masonry Structures; American Concrete Institute International; 2005.

W. ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 -- Specification For Masonry Structures; American Concrete Institute International; 2005.

X. ACI CP-60 -- Shotcrete Nozzleman Craftsman Workbook; 2002.

Y. ACI SP-2 -- ACI Manual of Concrete Inspection; 1999.

Z. ACI SP-4 -- Formwork For Concrete; 2005 (7th edition).

AA. ACI SP-66 -- ACI Detailing Manual; 2004.

2.08 AIR DIFFUSION COUNCIL (ADC)

2.09 ASSOCIATED GENERAL CONTRACTORS OF AMERICA (AGC)

2.10 AMERICAN FOREST AND PAPER ASSOCIATION (AFPA)

A. AFPA (NDS) -- National Design Specification for Wood Construction; 2005 (with 2005 Supplement).

B. AFPA (WFCM) -- Wood Frame Construction Manual; 2001.

2.11 AMERICAN HARDBOARD ASSOCIATION (AHA)

2.12 AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, INC. (AISC)

A. AISC (AMAN) -- ASD Manual of Steel Construction; 1989, Ninth Edition.

B. AISC (HSS) -- Specification for the Design of Steel Hollow Structural Sections.

C. AISC (LMAN) -- LRFD Manual of Steel Construction, Volume I - Structural Members, Specifications and Codes; 2001, Third Edition.

D. AISC 360 -- Specification for Structural Steel Buildings; 2005.

E. AISC 335 -- Specification for Structural Steel Buildings - Allowable Stress



Design and Plastic Design; 1989, including Supplement No.1, 2001.

F. AISC S303 -- Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges; 2005.

G. AISC S348 -- Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or ASTM A 490 Bolts; 2001.

2.13 AMERICAN IRON AND STEEL INSTITUTE (AISI)

A. AISI SG02-1 -- North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members; 2001 with 2004 supplement. (replaced AISI SG-971)

B. AISI SG02-5 -- Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing-Truss Design, 2004.

C. AISI SG-971 -- Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members; 1996, with 2000 Supplement.

D. AISI SG-973 -- Cold-Formed Steel Design Manual; 1996.

E. AISI Truss -- Standard for Cold-formed Steel Framing-Truss Design; 2004.

2.14 AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF TIMBER CONSTRUCTION (AITC)

A. AITC 104 -- Typical Construction Details; 2003.

B. AITC 108 -- Standard for Heavy Timber Construction; American Institute of Timber Construction; 1993.

C. AITC 112 -- Standard for Tongue and Groove Heavy Timber Roof Decking; 1993, and errata.

2.15 AIR MOVEMENT AND CONTROL ASSOCIATION INTERNATIONAL, INC. (AMCA)

2.16 AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARDS INSTITUTE (ANSI)

A. ANSI A13.1 -- Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems; 1996(R2002).

B. ANSI A41.1 -- Building Code Requirements for Masonry.

C. ANSI A41.2 -- Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Masonry.

D. ANSI A224.1 -- American National Standard Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Prime Painted Steel Surfaces for Steel Doors and Frames; 1990.

E. ANSI A250.6 -- (formerly SDI 107) Hardware on Standard Steel Doors (Reinforcement-Application); 2003.

F. ANSI A250.8 -- (formerly SDI 100) Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and Frames; 2003.

G. ANSI A250.10 -- Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Prime Painted Steel Surfaces for Steel Doors and Frames; 1998 (Revised 2004).

H. ANSI A250.11 -- (formerly SDI 105) Recommended Erection Instructions for Steel Frames; 2001.

I. ANSI Z97.1 -- American National Standard for Safety Glazing Materials Used in Buildings, Safety Performance Specifications and Methods of Test; 1984 (R1994).

2.17 THE ENGINEERED WOOD ASSOCIATION (APA)



A. APA PRP-108 -- Performance Standards and Qualifications Policy for Structural Use Panels; 2002.

B. APA V345 -- Concrete Forming, Design/Construction Guide.

C. APA V995 -- PS1-95 Construction and Industrial Plywood (With Typical APA Trademarks).

D. APA Y510 -- Plywood Design Specification; 1997(R1998).

2.18 AIR-CONDITIONING, HEATING, AND REFRIGERATION INSTITUTE (AHRI or ARI)

2.19 AMERICAN SOCIETY OF CIVIL ENGINEERS (ASCE)

A. ASCE 3 -- Structural Design of Composite Slabs; 1991.

B. ASCE 7 -- Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures; 2005.

C. ASCE 8 -- Specification for the Design of Cold--formed Stainless Steel Structural Members; 2002.

2.20 AMERICAN SOCIETY OF HEATING, REFRIGERATING AND AIR-CONDITIONING ENGINEERS, INC. (ASHRAE)

2.21 THE AMERICAN SOCIETY OF MECHANICAL ENGINEERS (ASME)

A. ASME B18.2.1 -- Square and Hex Bolts and Screws (Inch Series); 1996.

B. ASME B18.2.2 --

C. ASME B18.6.1 -- Wood Screws (Inch Series); 1997.

D. ASME B18.21.1 -- Lock Washers (Inch Series); 1999.

E. ASME B18.22.1 -- Plain Washers; 1965 (2003).

2.22 AMERICAN SOCIETY OF SANITARY ENGINEERING (ASSE)

2.23 AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS -- (ASTM A Series)

A. ASTM A 6 -- Standard Specification for General Requirements for Rolled Structural Steel Bars, Shapes, and Sheet Piling; 2004a.

B. ASTM A 36 -- Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel; 2004.

C. ASTM A 53 -- Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless; 2007.

D. ASTM A 82 -- Standard Specification for Steel Wire, Plain, for Concrete Reinforcement; 2002.

E. ASTM A 123 -- Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products; 2002.

F. ASTM A 153 -- Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware; 2003.

G. ASTM A 167 -- Standard Specification for Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip; 1999(R2004).

H. ASTM A 185 -- Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement,



Plain, for Concrete; 2002.

I. ASTM A 307 -- Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60 000 PSI Tensile Strength; 2003.

J. ASTM A 325 -- Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength; 1994.

K. ASTM A 490 -- Standard Specification for Structural Steel Bolts, Alloy Steel, Heat Treated, 150 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength; 2008b.

L. ASTM A 496 -- Standard Specification for Steel Wire, Deformed, for Concrete Reinforcement; 2002.

M. ASTM A 500 -- Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes; 2007.

N. ASTM A 525 -- Standard Specification for General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot-Dip Process; 1987.

O. ASTM A 563 -- Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts; 2007a.

P. ASTM A 568 -- Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Carbon, Structural, and High-Strength, Low Alloy, Hot Rolled and Cold Rolled, General Requirements for; 2009a.

Q. ASTM A 570 -- Standard Specification for Structural Steel, Sheet and Strip, Carbon, Hot-Rolled; 1998.

R. ASTM A 591 -- Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Electrolytic Zinc-Coated, for Light Coating Weight (Mass) Applications; 1998.

S. ASTM A 611 -- Standard Specification for Structural Steel (SS), Sheet, Carbon, Cold-Rolled; 1997.

T. ASTM A 615 -- Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Carbon Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement; 2004a.

U. ASTM A 641 -- Standard Specification for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Carbon Steel Wire; 2003

V. ASTM A 653 -- Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2004a.

W. ASTM A 666 -- Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar; 2003.

X. ASTM A 706 -- Standard Specification for Low-Alloy Steel Deformed and Plain Bars for Concrete Reinforcement; 2004a.

Y. ASTM A 767 -- Standard Specification for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement; 2000b.

Z. ASTM A 780 -- Standard Practice for Repair of Damaged and Uncoated Areas of Hot-Dip Galvanized Coatings; 2001(R2006).

AA. ASTM A 792 -- Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, 55% Aluminum-Zinc



Alloy-Coated by the Hot-Dip Process; 2003.

AB. ASTM A 924 -- Standard Specification for General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Metallic-Coated by the Hot-Dip Process; 2004.

AC. ASTM A 992 -- Standard Specification for Structural Steel Shapes; 2006a.

AD. ASTM A 1008 -- Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy and High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability; 1989.

AE. ASTM A 1011 -- Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Hot-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy and High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability; 2007.

2.24 AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS -- (ASTM B Series)

A. ASTM B 32 -- Standard Specification for Solder Metal; 2004.

B. ASTM B 88 -- Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube; 2003.

C. ASTM B 117 -- Standard Practice for Operating Salt Spray (Fog) Apparatus; 2007a.

D. ASTM B 209 -- Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate; 2004.

E. ASTM B 221 -- Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes; 2006.

2.25 AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS -- (ASTM C Series)

A. ASTM C 5 -- Lime shall conform to the Standard Specification for Quicklime for Structural Purposes; 2003.

B. ASTM C 31 -- Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field; 1998.

C. ASTM C 33 -- Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates; 2003.

D. ASTM C 36 -- Standard Specification for Gypsum Wallboard; 2003.

E. ASTM C 39 -- Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens; 1999ae1.

F. ASTM C 42 -- Standard Test Method for Obtaining and Testing Drilled Cores and Sawed Beams of Concrete; 1999.

G. ASTM C 55 -- Standard Specification for Concrete Brick; 2003.

H. ASTM C 90 -- Standard Specification for Loadbearing Concrete Masonry Units; 2003.

I. ASTM C 91 -- Standard Specification for Masonry Cement; 2003a.

J. ASTM C 94 -- Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete; 2004.

K. ASTM C 129 -- Standard Specification for Nonloadbearing Concrete Masonry Units; 2006.



L. ASTM C 140 -- Standard Test Methods of Sampling and Testing Concrete Masonry Units and Related Units; 2003.

M. ASTM C 143 -- Standard Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic-Cement Concrete; 2005a.

N. ASTM C 144 -- Standard Specification for Aggregate for Masonry Mortar; 2003.

O. ASTM C 150 -- Standard Specification for Portland Cement; 2004.

P. ASTM C 171 -- Standard Specification for Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete; 2007.

Q. ASTM C 172 -- Standard Practice for Sampling Freshly Mixed Concrete; 2003.

R. ASTM C 173 -- Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Volumetric Method; 2007.

S. ASTM C 206 -- Standard Specification for Finishing Hydrated Lime; 2003

T. ASTM C 207 -- Standard Specification for Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes; 2004.

U. ASTM C 209 -- Standard Test Methods for Cellulosic Fiber Insulating Board; 2007.

V. ASTM C 219 -- Standard Terminology Relating to Hydraulic Cement; 2003e1.

W. ASTM C 231 -- Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Pressure Method; 2008.

X. ASTM C 236 -- Steady--State Thermal Performance of Building Assemblies by Means of a Guarded Hot Box; 1989(R1993).

Y. ASTM C 260 -- Standard Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete; 2006.

Z. ASTM C 270 -- Standard Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry; 2004.

AA. ASTM C 309 -- Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete; 2007.

AB. ASTM C 330 -- Standard Specification for Lightweight Aggregates for Structural Concrete; 2004.

AC. ASTM C 332 -- Standard Specification for Lightweight Aggregates for Insulating Concrete; 2007.

AD. ASTM C 404 -- Standard Specification for Aggregates for Masonry Grout; 2007.

AE. ASTM C 473 -- Standard Test Methods for Physical Testing of Gypsum Panel Products; 2003.

AF. ASTM C 476 -- Standard Specification for Grout for Masonry; 2002.

AG. ASTM C 494 -- Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete; 1999.



AH. ASTM C 595 -- Standard Specification for Blended Hydraulic Cements; 2009.

AI. ASTM C 618 -- Standard Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan for Use as a Mineral Admixture in Concrete; 2005.

AJ. ASTM C 665 -- Standard Specification for Mineral-Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light Frame Construction and Manufactured Housing; 2006.

AK. ASTM C 685 -- Standard Specification for Concrete Made by Volumetric Batching and Continuous Mixing; 1998a.

AL. ASTM C 744 -- Standard Specification for Prefaced Concrete and Calcium Silicate Masonry Units; 1999.

AM. ASTM C 754 -- Standard Specification for Installation of Steel Framing Members to Receive Screw-Attached Gypsum Panel Products; 2004.

AN. ASTM C 779 -- Standard Test Method for Abrasion Resistance of Horizontal Concrete Surfaces; 2005.

AO ASTM C 780 -- Standard Test Method for Preconstruction and Construction Evaluation of Mortars for Plain and Reinforced Unit Masonry; 2007a.

AP. ASTM C 834 -- Standard Specification for Latex Sealants; 2005.

AQ. ASTM C 881 -- Standard Specification for Epoxy-Resin-Base Bonding Systems for Concrete; 2002.

AR. ASTM C 919 -- Standard Practice for Use of Sealants in Acoustical Applications; 2002.

AS. ASTM C 920 -- Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants; 2005.

AT. ASTM C 926 -- Standard Specification for Application of Portland Cement-Based Plaster; 1998a(R2005).

AU. ASTM C 932 -- Standard Specification for Surface-Applied Bonding Compounds for Exterior Plastering; 2003.

AV. ASTM C 954 -- Standard Specification for Steel Drill Screws for the Application of Gypsum Panel Products or Metal Plaster Bases to Steel Studs from 0.033 in. (0.84 mm) to 0.112 in. (2.84 mm) in Thickness; 2000.

AW. ASTM C 955 -- Standard Specification for Load-bearing, Transverse and Axial Steel Studs, Runners, Tracks, and Bracing or Bridging, for Screw Application of Gypsum Panel Products and Metal Plaster Bases; 2003.

AX. ASTM C 989 -- Standard Specification for Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag for Use in Concrete and Mortars; 1999.

AY. ASTM C 1002 -- Standard Specification for Steel Self-Piercing Tapping Screws for the Application of Gypsum Panel Products or Metal Plaster Bases to Wood Studs or Steel Studs; 2001.

AZ. ASTM C 1007 -- Standard Specification for Installation of Load Bearing (Transverse and Axial) Steel Studs and Related Accessories; 2004.



BA. ASTM C 1017 -- Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Use in Producing Flowing Concrete; 2003.

BB. ASTM C 1019 -- Standard Test Method for Sampling and Testing Grout; 1997.

BC. ASTM C 1021 -- Standard Practice for Laboratories Engaged in Testing of Building Sealants; 2008.

BD. ASTM C 1059 -- Standard Specification for Latex Agents for Bonding Fresh to Hardened Concrete; 1999.

BE. ASTM C 1063 -- Standard Specification for Installation of Lathing and Furring to Receive Interior and Exterior Portland Cement-Based Plaster; 2003.

BF.ASTM C 1064 -- Standard Test Method for Temperature of Freshly Mixed Hydraulic-Cement Concrete; 2005.

BG. ASTM C 1077 -- Standard Practice for Laboratories Testing Concrete and Concrete Aggregates for Use in Construction and Criteria for Laboratory Evaluation; 2009b.

BH. ASTM C 1093 -- Standard Practice for Accreditation of Testing Agencies for Unit Masonry; 2007.

BI. ASTM C 1107 -- Standard Specification for Packaged Dry, Hydraulic-Cement Grout (Non-shrink); 2007a.

BJ. ASTM C 1140 -- Standard Practice for Preparing and Testing Specimens from Shotcrete Test Panels; 2003a.

BK.ASTM C 1167 -- Standard Specification for Clay Roof Tiles; 2003.

BL. ASTM C 1184 -- Standard Specification for Structural Silicone Sealants; 2005.

BM. ASTM C 1193 -- Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants; 2005a.

BN. ASTM C 1224 -- Reflective Insulation for Building Applications.

BO. ASTM C 1278 -- Standard Specification for Fiber-Reinforced Gypsum Panel; 2003.

BP ASTM C 1289 -- Standard Specification for Faced Rigid Cellular Polyisocyanurate Thermal Insulation Board; 2007.

BQ. ASTM C 1315 -- Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds Having Special Properties for Curing and Sealing Concrete; 2007.

BR. ASTM C 1338 -- Determining the Fungi Resistance of Insulation Materials and Facings.

BS. ASTM C 1371 -- Determination of Emittance of Materials Near Room Temperature Using Portable Emissometers.

2.26 AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS -- (ASTM D Series)

A. ASTM D 16 -- Standard Terminology for Paint, Related Coatings, Materials, and Applications; 2007.



B. ASTM D 41 -- Standard Specification for Asphalt Primer Used in Roofing, Dampproofing, and Waterproofing; 1994-00-e01.

C. ASTM D 43 -- Standard Specification for Coal Tar Primer Used in Roofing, Dampproofing and Waterproofing; 1994(R2000).

D. ASTM D 226 -- Standard Specification for Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt Used in Roofing and Waterproofing; 1997a.

E. ASTM D 235 -- Standard Specification for Mineral Spirits (Petroleum Spirits) (Hydrocarbon Dry Cleaning Solvent); 2002(R2007).

F. ASTM D 312 -- Standard Specification for Asphalt Used in Roofing; 2000.

G. ASTM D 1079 -- Terminology Relating to Roofing and Waterproofing; 2002.

H. ASTM D 1556 -- Standard Test Method for Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by the Sand-Cone Method; 2007.

I. ASTM D 1557 -- Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort (56,000 ft-lbf/ft3 (2,700 kN m/m3)); 2002.

J. ASTM D 1621 -- Standard Test Method for Compressive Properties Of Rigid Cellular Plastics; 2004a.

K. ASTM D 1622 -- Standard Test Method for Apparent Density of Rigid Cellular Plastics; 2003.

L. ASTM D 1623 -- Standard Test Method for Tensile And Tensile Adhesion Properties of Rigid Cellular Plastics; 2003.

M. ASTM D 1634 -- Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Soil-Cement Using Portions of Beams Broken in Flexure (Modified Cube Method); 2000(R2006).

N. ASTM D 1667 -- Standard Specification for Flexible Cellular Materials-Vinyl Chloride Polymers and Copolymers (Closed-Cell Foam); 2005.

O. ASTM D 1751 -- Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction (Non-extruding and Resilient Bituminous Types); 2004.

P. ASTM D 1761 -- Test Methods for Mechanical Fasteners in Wood; 1988(2000).

Q. ASTM D 1970 -- Standard Specification for Self-Adhering Polymer Modified Bituminous Sheet Materials Used as Steep Roofing Underlayment for Ice Dam Protection; 2001.

R. ASTM D 2126 -- Standard Test Method for Response of Rigid Cellular Plastics to Thermal and Humid Aging; 2004.

S. ASTM D 2127 -- Method of Test for Water Absorption of Rigid Cellular Plastics (Withdrawn 1969; replaced by ASTM D 2842).

T. ASTM D 2178 -- Standard Specification for Asphalt Glass Felt Used in Roofing and Waterproofing; 1997a.



U. ASTM D 2487 -- Standard Practice for Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes (Unified Soil Classification System); 2000.

V. ASTM D 2626 -- Standard Specification for Asphalt-Saturated and Coated Organic Felt Base Sheet Used in Roofing; 2004.

W. ASTM D 2822 -- Standard Specification for Asphalt Roof Cement; 1991(R1997)e01.

X. ASTM D 2842 -- Standard Test Method for Water Absorption of Rigid Cellular Plastics; 2006.

Y. ASTM D 2856 -- Standard Test Method for Open-Cell Content of Rigid Cellular Plastics by the Air Pycnometer; 1994(R1998).

Z. ASTM D 2922 -- Standard Test Methods for Density of Soil and Soil-Aggregate in Place by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth); 2005.

AA. ASTM D 3019 -- Standard Specification for Lap Cement Used with Asphalt Roll Roofing, Non Fibered, Asbestos Fibered, and Non Asbestos Fibered; 1994 (2002)e01.

AB. ASTM D 3273 -- Standard Test Method for Resistance to Growth of Mold on the Surface of Interior Coatings in an Environmental Chamber; 2000(R2005).

AC. ASTM D 3310 -- Determining Corrosivity of Adhesive Materials.

AD. ASTM D 3498 -- Standard Specification for Adhesives for Field-Gluing Plywood to Lumber Framing for Floor Systems; 2003.

AE. ASTM D 3740 -- Standard Practice for Minimum Requirements for Agencies Engaged in the Testing and/or Inspection of Soil and Rock as Used in Engineering Design and Construction; 2004a.

AF. ASTM D 3746 -- Standard Test Method for Impact Resistance of Bituminous Roofing Systems; 1985(1996) e1.

AG. ASTM D 3909 -- Standard Specification for Asphalt Roll Roofing (Glass Felt) Surfaced With Mineral Granules; 1997b(R2004)e1.

AH. ASTM D 4214 -- Standard Test Methods for Evaluating the Degree of Chalking of Exterior Paint Films; 2007.

AI. ASTM D 4397 -- Standard Specification for Polyethylene Sheeting for Construction, Industrial, and Agricultural Applications; 2002.

AJ. ASTM D 4442 -- Standard Test Methods for Direct Moisture Content Measurement of Wood and Wood-Base Materials; 1992(R2003).

AK. ASTM D 4444 -- Standard Test Method for Laboratory Standardization and Calibration of Hand-Held Moisture Meters; 2008.

AL. ASTM D 4479 -- Standard Specification for Asphalt Roof Coatings - Asbestos-Free; 2000.

AM. ASTM D 4586 -- Standard Specification for Asphalt Roof Cement, Asbestos-Free; 2000.



AN. ASTM D 5664 -- Standard Test Method for Evaluating the Effects of Fire-Retardant Treatments and Elevated Temperatures on Strength Properties of Fire-Retardant Treated Lumber; 2002.

AO. ASTM D 6083 -- Standard Specification for Liquid Applied Acrylic Coating Used in Roofing; 1997a.

AP. ASTM D 6162 -- Standard Specification for Styrene Butadiene Styrene (SBS) Modified Bituminous Sheet Materials Using a Combination of Polyester and Glass Fiber Reinforcements; 2000a.

AQ. ASTM D 6163 -- Standard Specification for Styrene Butadiene Styrene (SBS) Modified Bituminous Sheet Materials Using Glass Fiber Reinforcements; 2000e01.

AR. ASTM D 6164 -- Standard Specification for Styrene Butadiene Styrene (SBS) Modified Bituminous Sheet Materials Using Polyester Reinforcements; 2000.

2.27 AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS - (ASTM E Series)

A. ASTM E 84 -- Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; 2004.

B. ASTM E 96 -- Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials; 2000e01.

C. ASTM E 108 -- Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Roof Coverings; 2004.

D. ASTM E 119 -- Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials; 2000a.

E. ASTM E 136 -- Standard Test Method for Behavior of Materials in a Vertical Tube Furnace At 750 Degrees C; 2004.

F. ASTM E 283 -- Standard Test Method for Determining the Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across the Specimen; 2004.

G. ASTM E 329 -- Standard Specification for Agencies Engaged in the Testing and/or Inspection of Materials Used in Construction; 2007a.

H. ASTM E 330 -- Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Doors, Skylights and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference; 2002.

I. ASTM E 331 -- Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Skylights, Doors, and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference; 2000.

J. ASTM E 336 -- Standard Test Method for Measurement of Airborne Sound Insulation in Buildings; 2007.

K. ASTM E 413 -- Classification for Rating Sound Insulation; 2004.

L. ASTM E 488 -- Standard Test Methods for Strength of Anchors in Concrete and



Masonry Elements; 1996(R2003).

M. ASTM E 514 -- Standard Test Method for Water Penetration and Leakage Through Masonry; 2009.

N. ASTM E 543 -- Standard Practice for Agencies Performing Nondestructive Testing; 2008.

O. ASTM E 814 -- Standard Test Method for Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Fire Stops; 2002.

P. ASTM E 1105 -- Standard Test Method for Field Determination of Water Penetration of Installed Exterior Windows, Skylights, Doors, and Curtain Walls by Uniform or Cyclic Static Air Pressure Difference; 2000.

Q. ASTM E 1155 -- Standard Test Method for Determining F(F) Floor Flatness and F(L) Floor Levelness Numbers; 1996(R2008).

R. ASTM E 1190 -- Standard Test Methods for Strength of Power-Actuated Fasteners Installed in Structural Members; 1995(2000)e1.

S. ASTM E 1300 -- Standard Practice for Determining Load Resistance of Glass in Buildings; 1998.

T. ASTM E 1408 -- Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of the Sound Transmission Loss of Door Panels and Door Systems; 1991(R2000).

U. ASTM E 1613 -- Standard Test Method for Determination of Lead by Inductively Coupled Plasma Atomic Emission Spectrometry (ICP-AES), Flame Atomic Absorption Spectrometry (FAAS), or Graphite Furnace Atomic Absorption Spectrometry (GFAAS) Techniques; 2004.

V. ASTM E 1729 -- Standard Practice for Field Collection of Dried Paint Samples for Subsequent Lead Determination; 2005.

2.28 AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS - (ASTM F Series)

A. ASTM F 436 -- Standard Specification for Hardened Steel Washers; 2007a.

B. ASTM F 568 -- Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Externally Threaded Metric Fasteners; 2007.

C. ASTM F 588 -- Standard Test Methods for Measuring the Forced Entry Resistance of Window Assemblies, Excluding Glazing Impact; 2007.

D. ASTM F 844 -- Standard Specification for Washers, Steel, Plain (Flat), Unhardened for General Use; 2004e1.

E. ASTM F 959 -- Standard Specification for Compressible-Washer-Type Direct Tension Indicators for Use with Structural Fasteners; 2007a.

F. ASTM F 1554 -- Standard Specification for Anchor Bolts, Steel, 36, 55, and 105-ksi Yield Strength; 2007a.

G. ASTM F 1852 -- Standard Specification for “Twist Off” Type Tension Control Structural Bolt/Nut/Washer Assemblies, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength; 2008.



H. ASTM F 1667 -- Standard Specification for Driven Fasteners: Nails, Spikes, and Staples; 2003.

2.29 AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS - (ASTM G Series)

A. ASTM G 53 -- Standard Practice for Operating Light- and Water-Exposure Apparatus (Fluorescent UV-Condensation Type) for Exposure of Nonmetallic Materials; 1996.

B. ASTM G 85 -- Standard Practice for Modified Salt Spray (Fog) Testing; 2002e1.

C. ASTM G 152 -- Standard Practice for Operating Open Flame Carbon Arc Light Apparatus for Exposure of Nonmetallic Materials; 2006.

D. ASTM G 153 -- Standard Practice for Operating Enclosed Carbon Arc Light Apparatus for Exposure of Nonmetallic Materials; 2004.

E. ASTM G 154 -- Standard Practice for Operating Fluorescent Light Apparatus for UV Exposure of Nonmetallic Materials; 2006.

F. ASTM G 155 -- Standard Practice for Operating Xenon Arc Light Apparatus for Exposure of Nonmetallic Materials; 2005a.

2.30 ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK INSTITUTE (AWI)

2.31 AMERICAN WOOD-PRESERVERS' ASSOCIATION (AWPA)

A. AWPA C2 -- Lumber, Timber, Bridge Ties and Mine Ties -- Preservative Treatment by Pressure Processes; 2001.

B. AWPA C9 -- Plywood - Preservative Treatment by Pressure Processes; 2000.

C. AWPA C15 -- Wood for Commercial-Residential Construction - Preservative Treatment by Pressure Processes.

D. AWPA C20 -- Structural Lumber - Fire-Retardant Treatment by Pressure Processes; 2002.

E. AWPA C31 -- Lumber Used Out of Contact with the Ground and Continuously Protected From Liquid Water - Treatment by Pressure Processes; 2003.

F. AWPA E1 - Standard Method for Laboratory Evaluation to Determine Resistance to Subterranean Termites; 2006.

G. AWPA M4 -- Standard for the Care of Preservative-Treated Wood Products; 2006.

H. AWPA U1 -- Use Category System: User Specification for Treated Wood; 2004.

2.32 AMERICAN WOOD PRESERVERS BUREAU (AWPB)

2.33 AMERICAN WELDING SOCIETY (AWS)

A. AWS A2.4 -- Standard Symbols for Welding, Brazing, and Nondestructive Examination; 2007.



B. AWS D1.1 -- Structural Welding Code - Steel; 2004.

C. AWS D1.3 -- Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel; 1998.

D. AWS D1.4 -- Structural Welding Code - Reinforcing Steel; 1998.

2.34 AMERICAN WATER WORKS ASSOCIATION (AWWA)

2.35 BAY AREA AIR QUALITY MANAGEMENT DISTRICT (BAAQMD)

2.36 BUILDERS HARDWARE MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (BHMA)

A. BHMA A156.1 -- American National Standard for Butts and Hinges; 2006 (ANSI/BHMA A156.1).

B. BHMA A156.3 -- American National Standard for Exit Devices; 2001 (ANSI/BHMA A156.3).

C. BHMA A156.4 -- American National Standard for Door Controls - Closers; 2000 (ANSI/BHMA A156.4).

D. BHMA A156.6 -- American National Standard for Architectural Door Trim; 2005 (ANSI/BHMA A156.6).

E. BHMA A156.9 -- American National Standard for Cabinet Hardware; 2003 (ANSI/BHMA A156.9).

F. BHMA A156.16 -- American National Standard for Auxiliary Hardware; 2002 (ANSI/BHMA A156.16).

2.37 CARPET AND RUG INSTITUTE (CRI)

2.38 CAST IRON SOIL PIPE INSTITUTE (CISPI)

2.39 COLD-FORMED STEEL ENGINEERS INSTITUTE (CFSEI)

2.40 CONCRETE REINFORCING STEEL INSTITUTE (CRSI)

A. CRSI (DA4) -- Manual of Standard Practice; 2001.

2.41 DOOR AND HARDWARE INSTITUTE (DHI)

A. DHI (LOCS) -- Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames; 2004.

B. DHI WDHS.3 -- Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Flush Wood Doors; 1993 (also in WDHS-1/WDHS-5 Series, 1996).

C. DHI A115 Series -- Specifications for Steel Doors and Frame Preparation for Hardware; 2000 (ANSI/DHI A115 Series).

D. DHI (INST) -- Installation Guide for Doors and Hardware; 1994.

2.42 FACTORY MUTUAL RESEARCH CORPORATION (FM)

A. FM 4450 -- Class I Insulated Steel Roof Decks; 1992.

B. FM 4470 -- Class I Roof Covers; 1992.

C. FM 4471 -- Class 1 Panel Roof (Uplift Evaluation); 1995.



D. FM 4991 -- Approval of Firestop Contractors; 2001.

E. FM DS 1-28 -- Loss Prevention Data 1-28, Design Wind Loads; 2005.

F. FM DS 1-29 -- Loss Prevention Data 1-29, Roof Deck Securement and Above Deck Roof Components; 2006.

G. FM DS 1-52 -- Loss Prevention Data 1-52, Field Uplift Tests; 2007.

H. FM-1-49 -- Loss Prevention Data SH Perimeter Flashing; 2000.

2.43 FLORIDA BUILDING CODE (FBC)

A. FBC -- Florida Building Code; 2007 edition, with 2009 Supplement. 1. FBC-B: Florida Building Code, Building. 2. FBC-M: Florida Building Code, Mechanical. 3. FBC-P: Florida Building Code, Plumbing. 4. FBC-EB: Florida Building Code, Existing Building. 5. FBC-TPHVHZ: Florida Building Code, Test Protocols for High-Velocity

Hurricane Zones: a. FBC-TPHVHZ RAS 109 -- Roofing Application Standard (RAS) No. 109. b. FBC-TPHVHZ RAS 109(A) -- Roofing Application Standard (RAS) No.

109, Detail Drawings. c. FBC-TPHVHZ RAS 111 -- Roofing Application Standard (RAS) No. 111,

Standard Requirements for Attachment of Perimeter Woodblocking and Metal Flashing.

d. FBC-TPHVHZ TAS 105 -- Testing Application Standard (TAS) No. 105-98, Test Procedure for Field Withdrawal Resistance Testing.

e. FBC-TPHVHZ TAS 110 -- Testing Application Standard (TAS) No. 110-2000, Testing Requirements for Physical Properties of Roof Membranes, Insulation, Coatings, and Other Roofing Components.

f. FBC-TPHVHZ TAS 114(H) -- Testing Application Standard (TAS) No. 114-95, Test Procedures for Roof System Assemblies in the High-Velocity Hurricane Zone Jurisdiction.

g. FBC-TPHVHZ TAS 201 -- Testing Application Standard (TAS) 201-94, Impact Test Procedures.

h. FBC-TPHVHZ TAS 202 -- Testing Application Standard (TAS) 202-94, Criteria for Testing Impact & Non-impact Resistant Building Envelope Components Using Uniform Static Air Pressure.

i. FBC-TPHVHZ TAS 203 -- Testing Application Standard (TAS) 203-94, Criteria for Testing Products Subject to Cyclic Wind Pressure Loading.

2.44 FOREST STEWARDSHIP COUNCIL US (FSC)

A. FSC STD-01-001 -- FSC Principles and Criteria for Forest Stewardship.

2.45 GREEN SEAL (GS)

2.46 GYPSUM ASSOCIATION (GA)

A. GA-600 -- Fire Resistance Design Manual; 2003.

2.47 GLASS ASSOCIATION OF NORTH AMERICA (GANA)

A. GANA 01 or GANA (GM) -- GANA Glazing Manual; 2004.



B. GANA 02 or GANA (SM) -- FGMA Sealant Manual; 1990.

C. GANA 03 or GANA (LGDG) -- Laminated Glass Design Guide; 2006.

D. GANA 04 -- Tempered Glass Engineering Standard Manual; 2001.

2.48 HARDWOOD PLYWOOD VENEER ASSOCIATION (HPVA)

2.49 ICBO EVALUATION SERVICE, INC. (ICBO-ES)

2.50 INTERNATIONAL CODE COUNCIL, INC. (ICC)

A. ANSI/ICC A117.1 -- American National Standard for Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities; 2003.

B. ICC-ES AC58 -- Acceptance Criteria for Adhesive Anchors in Concrete and Masonry Elements; ICC Evaluation Service, Inc.; 2005.

C. ICC ESR-1328 -- ICC Evaluation Service Report for Tapcon Screw Anchors; 2006.

D. ICC ESR-1671 -- ICC Evaluation Service Report for Tapcon with Advanced Threadform Technology Anchors; 2006.

2.51 INSTITUTE OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONIC ENGINEERS (IEEE)

2.52 INTERNATIONAL FIRESTOP COUNCIL (IFC)

A. IFC (GEFSEJ) -- Guidelines for Evaluating Firestop Systems Engineering Judgments; 2001.

2.53 INTERNATIONAL SOLID SURFACE FABRICATORS ASSOCIATION (ISSFA)

A. ISSFA-2 -- Classification and Standards for Solid Surfacing Material; 2001(R2002).

2.54 LIGHT GAUGE STEEL ENGINEERS ASSOCIATION (LGSEA)

A. LGSEA 5000 -- Refer to CFSEI 5000.

2.55 McGRAW-HILL BOOK COMPANY (M-H)

2.56 MASTER PAINTERS INSTITUTE, MASTER PAINTERS AND DECORATORS ASSOCIATION (MPI)

A. MPI (APL) -- Master Painters Institute Approved Products List; Master Painters and Decorators Association; current edition, www.paintinfo.com.

B. MPI (APSM) -- Master Painters Institute Architectural Painting Specification Manual; 2004.

2.57 MANUFACTURERS STANDARDIZATION SOCIETY OF THE VALVE AND FITTINGS INDUSTRY, INC. (MSS)

2.58 THE NATIONAL ASSOCIATION OF ARCHITECTURAL METAL MANUFACTURERS (NAAMM)

2.59 NATIONAL ASSOCIATION OF MIRROR MANUFACTURERS (NAMM)

2.60 NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CONTRACTORS ASSOCIATION (NECA)



2.61 NATIONAL ELECTRICAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (NEMA)

A. NEMA MG 1 -- Motors and Generators; 2006.

2.62 NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA)

A. NFPA 10 -- Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers; 2002.

I. NFPA 70 -- National Electrical Code; 2005.

L. NFPA 80 -- Standard for Fire Doors and Fire Windows; 1999.

O. NFPA 101 (FL) -- Code for Safety to Life from Fire in Buildings and Structures; 2006, including Florida revisions as adopted in the Florida Fire Prevention Code.

R. NFPA 241 - Standard for Safeguarding Construction, Alteration, and Demolition Operations; 2004.

2.63 NATIONAL FENESTRATION RATING COUNCIL, INC. (NFRC)

A. NFRC 100 -- Procedures for Determining Fenestration Product U-factors; ; 2004, with 2005 addendum.

B. NFRC 200 -- Procedure for Determining Fenestration Product Solar Heat Gain Coefficients at Normal Incidence; 2001.

C. NFRC (CPD) -- Certified Products Directory; current edition.

2.64 NATIONAL FLOOR SAFETY INSTITUTE (NFSI)

A. NFSI 101-A - Standard for Evaluating High-Traction Flooring Materials, Coatings, and Finishes.

B. NFSI/ANSI B101.1 - Test Method for Measuring Wet SCOF of Common Hard-Surface Floor Materials; 2009.

2.65 NATIONAL HARDWOOD LUMBER ASSOCIATION (NHLA)

2.66 NATIONAL INSTITUTE OF STANDARDS AND TECHNOLOGY (NIST)

2.67 NATIONAL ROOFING CONTRACTORS ASSOCIATION (NRCA)

A. NRCA ML104 -- The NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual; Fifth Edition, with interim updates.

B. NRCA MS104 -- The NRCA Steep Roofing Manual; 2001, Fifth Edition, with interim updates.

2.68 NATIONAL SANITATION FOUNDATION INTERNATIONAL (NSF)

2.69 NATIONAL WOOD WINDOW AND DOOR ASSOCIATION (name changed to WDMA) (NWWDA)

2.70 PLUMBING AND DRAINAGE INSTITUTE (PDI)

2.71 PORTLAND CEMENT ASSOCIATION

A. PCA EB049 -- Portland Cement Plaster/Stucco Manual; 2003.

B. PCA EB088 -- Concrete Masonry Handbook for Architects, Engineers and



Builders; 1991.

C. PCA IS526 -- Repair of Portland Cement Plaster (Stucco).

2.72 PORTLAND ENERGY CONSERVATION, INC. (PECI)

2.73 REUNION INTERNATIONALE DES LABORATOIRES D'ESSAIS ET DE RECHERCHES SUR LES MATERIAUX ET LES CONSTRUCTIONS (RILEM):

A. RILEM Test Method 11.4 -- Standard Measurement of Reduction of Moisture Penetration through Horizontal Concrete Surfaces.

2.74 SOUTH COAST AIR QUALITY MANAGEMENT DISTRICT (SCAQMD)

2.75 SCIENTIFIC CERTIFICATION SYSTEMS (SCS)

2.76 STEEL DOOR INSTITUTE (SDI)

A. SDI 111 -- Recommended Standard Details for Steel Doors & Frames; 2000.

B. SDI 113 -- Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Apparent Thermal Performance of Steel Door and Frame Assemblies; 2001.

C. SDI 122 -- Installation and Troubleshooting Guide for Standard Steel Doors and Frames; 2007.

2.77 SAFETY GLAZING CERTIFICATION COUNCIL (SGCC)

A. SGCC (CPD) -- Certified Products Directory: Safety Glazing Material Used in Buildings; current edition

2.78 SHEET METAL AND AIR CONDITIONING CONTRACTORS' NATIONAL ASSOCIATION, INC. (SMACNA)

A. SMACNA (ASMM) -- Architectural Sheet Metal Manual; 2003.

2.79 STEEL STUD MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (SSMA)

A. SSMA (PTI) -- Product Technical Information; current edition.

2.80 SOUTHERN PINE INSPECTION BUREAU, INC. (SPIB)

A. SPIB (GR) -- Grading Rules; 2002.

2.81 SINGLE-PLY ROOFING INSTITUTE (SPRI)

A. SPRI ES-1 -- Wind Design Standard for Edge Systems Used with Low Slope Roofing Systems; 2003.

2.82 THE SOCIETY FOR PROTECTIVE COATINGS (SSPC)

A. SSPC-Paint 20 -- Zinc-Rich Primers (Type I, "Inorganic," and Type II, "Organic"); 2002 (Ed. 2004).

B. SSPC-Paint 25 -- Red Iron Oxide, Zinc Oxide, Raw Linseed Oil and Alkyd Primer; 1991 (Part of Steel Structures Painting Manual, Vol. Two).

C. SSPC-PA 11 -- Power Tool Cleaning to Bare Metal; 1987(2004).

2.83 TILE COUNCIL OF NORTH AMERICA, INC. (TCNA)

2.84 TRUSS PLATE INSTITUTE (TPI)



A. TP1 1 -- National Design Standard for Metal Plate Connected Wood Truss Construction; 2002 (ANSI/TPI 1).

2.85 UNIFORM BUILDING CODE (UBC)

A. UBC 7-2, Part II -- Test Standard for Smoke- and Draft-control Assemblies; International Conference of Building Officials; 1997.

B. UBC 43-2 -- Fire Test of Door Assemblies; 1991.

2.86 UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES INC. (UL)

A. UL (BMD) -- Building Materials Directory; current edition.

B. UL (FRD) -- Fire Resistance Directory; current edition.

C. UL 10C -- Standard for Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies; 1998.

D. UL 555 -- Standard for Fire Dampers; 1999.

E. UL 580 -- Standard for Tests for Uplift Resistance of Roof Assemblies; 1994.

F. UL 790 -- Standard for Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Roof Coverings; 2004.

G. UL 1479 -- Standard for Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Firestops; 1994.

H. UL 1784 -- Standard for Air Leakage Tests of Door Assemblies; 2001.

I. UL 1897 -- Uplift Tests for Roof-Covering Systems; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; 2002.

J. UL 2079 -- Standard for Tests for Fire Resistance of Building Joint Systems; 1998.

2.87 UNITED STATES GREEN BUILDING COUNCIL (USGBC)

2.88 WINDOW AND DOOR MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (formerly NWWDA) (WDMA)

2.89 WESTERN WOOD PRODUCTS ASSOCIATION (WWPA)

A. WWPA G-5 -- Western Lumber Grading Rules; 2005.

PART 3 GOVERNMENT AND RELATED AGENCIES DOCUMENTS

3.01 U.S. CODE OF FEDERAL REGULATIONS (CFR)

A. 16 CFR 1201 -- Safety Standard for Architectural Glazing Materials; 1977.

B. 29 CFR 1926 -- U.S. Occupational Safety and Health Standards; current edition. (for construction work)

1. 29 CFR 1926.58 - Asbestos, Tremolite, Anthophyllite, and Actinolite.

2. 29 CFR 1926.62 - Lead.

3. 29 CFR 1926.850 - Demolition, Preparatory Operations.



4. 29 CRF 1926.1101 - Asbestos.

C. 40 CFR 59, Subpart D -- National Volatile Organic Compound Emission Standards for Architectural Coatings; U.S. Environmental Protection Agency; current edition.

D. 40 CFR 261 -- United States Environmental Protection Agency Regulations.

3.02 U.S. ARCHITECTURAL AND TRANSPORTATION BARRIERS COMPLIANCE BOARD (ATBCB)

A. ATBCB ADAAG -- Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines; 2004.

3.03 CORPS OF ENGINEERS, U.S. ARMY (COE)

3.04 COMMERCIAL ITEM DESCRIPTION, U.S. GENERAL SERVICES ADMINISTRATION, FEDERAL ACQUISITION SERVICE (CID)

A. CID A-A-55615 -- Shield, Expansion (Wood Screw and Lag Bolt Self Threading Anchors); 1995.

3.05 U.S. CONSUMER PRODUCTS SAFETY COMMISSION (CPSC)

A. CPSC 16 CFR 1201 -- Safety Standard for Architectural Glazing Materials; 1977, with 1984 Revision.

B. CPSC Doc. No. 423 – What You Should Know About Using Paint Strippers.

3.06 U.S. ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY (EPA)

A. EPA (NPDES) -- National Pollutant Discharge Elimination System (NPDES), Construction General Permit; current edition; http://cfpub.epa.gov/npdes/stormwater/cgp.cfm.

3.07 FEDERAL HIGHWAY ADMINISTRATION (FHWA)

3.08 FEDERAL SPECIFICATIONS AND STANDARDS, U.S. GENERAL SERVICES ADMINISTRATION (FS)

A. FS FF-B-588 -- Bolt, Toggle; and Expansion Sleeve, Screw; Revision D, 1989.

B. FS FF-B-561 -- Bolts, (Screw), Lag; 1993.

C. FS FF-N-105 -- Nails, Brads, Staples and Spikes; Wire, Cut and Wrought.

D. FS FF-S-111 -- Screw, Wood; Revision D, 1974, and Amendment 1, 1989.

E. FS FF-S-325 -- Shield, Expansion; Nail Expansion; and Nail, Drive Screw (Devices, Anchoring, Masonry); 1957, and Amendment 3, 1965.

F. FS FF-W-84 -- Washers, Lock (Spring).

G. FS QQ-Z-325C -- Zinc Coating, Electrodeposited, Requirements for

H. FS UU-B-790 -- Building Paper, Vegetable Fiber (Kraft, Waterproofed, Water Repellent and Fire Resistant).

3.09 U.S. GENERAL SERVICES ADMINISTRATION (GSA)

3.10 U.S. MILITARY SPECIFICATIONS AND STANDARDS (MIL)



3.11 PRODUCT STANDARDS, U.S. DEPARTMENT OF COMMERCE (PS)

A. PS 1 -- Construction and Industrial Plywood; 1995.

B. PS 20 -- American Softwood Lumber Standard; 2005.

3.12 FLORIDA DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION (FDOT)

END OF SECTION

RENOVATION OF HISTORIC FIRE STATION NO. 2 (Phase II-A) City of Miami Project No. B-30579 01600 - 1 of 2 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

SECTION 01600

PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. General product requirements.

B. Transportation, handling, storage and protection.

C. Product option requirements.

D. Substitution limitations and procedures.

E. Spare parts and maintenance materials.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Submittal Procedures: Refer to Contract General Terms and Conditions and Supplemental Terms and Conditions.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 NEW PRODUCTS

A. Provide new products unless specifically required or permitted by the Contract Documents.

2.02 PRODUCT OPTIONS

A. Products Specified by Reference Standards or by Description Only: Use any product meeting those standards or description.

B. Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers: Use a product of one of the manufacturers named and meeting specifications, no options or substitutions allowed.

C. Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers with a Provision for Substitutions: Submit a request for substitution for any manufacturer not named.

D. Substitutions: Refer to Section 2 – Contract General Terms and Conditions.

2.03 SPARE PARTS AND MAINTENANCE PRODUCTS

A. Provide spare parts, maintenance, and extra products of types and in quantities specified in individual specification sections.

B. Deliver to and place in location as directed; obtain receipt prior to final payment.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES

A. Document each request with complete data substantiating compliance of proposed substitution with Contract Documents.

RENOVATION OF HISTORIC FIRE STATION NO. 2 (Phase II-A) City of Miami Project No. B-30579 01600 - 2 of 2 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

B. Substitutions will not be considered when they are indicated or implied on shop drawing or product data submittals, without separate written request, or when acceptance will require revision to the Contract Documents.

C. Substitution Submittal Procedure: Refer to Section 2 – Contract General Terms and Conditions.

3.02 TRANSPORTATION, HANDLING, STORAGE AND PROTECTION

A. General: Refer to Section 2 – Contract General Terms and Conditions.

B. Designate receiving/storage areas for incoming products so that they are delivered according to installation schedule and placed convenient to work area in order to minimize waste due to excessive materials handling and misapplication.

C. Store with seals and labels intact and legible.

D. Store sensitive products in weather tight, climate controlled, enclosures in an environment favorable to product.

E. For exterior storage of fabricated products, place on sloped supports above ground.

F. Cover products subject to deterioration with impervious sheet covering. Provide ventilation to prevent condensation and degradation of products.

G. Store loose granular materials on solid flat surfaces in a well-drained area. Prevent mixing with foreign matter.

H. Prevent contact with material that may cause corrosion, discoloration, or staining.

I. Provide equipment and personnel to store products by methods to prevent soiling, disfigurement, or damage.

J. Arrange storage of products to permit access for inspection. Periodically inspect to verify products are undamaged and are maintained in acceptable condition.

END OF SECTION

RENOVATION OF HISTORIC FIRE STATION NO. 2 (Phase II-A) City of Miami Project No. B-30579 01700 - 1 of 7 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS

SECTION 01700

EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Requirements for alterations work, including selective demolition, except removal, disposal, and/or remediation of hazardous materials and toxic substances.

B. Pre-installation meetings.

C. Cutting and patching.

D. Surveying for laying out the work.

E. Starting of systems and equipment.

F. Demonstration and instruction for City’s personnel.

G. Closeout procedures, except payment procedures.


A. Section 01010 - Summary of Work: Limitations on working in existing building; continued occupancy; work sequence; identification of salvaged and relocated materials.

B. Section 01400 - Quality Requirements: Testing and inspection procedures.

C. Section 01600 - Product Requirements.

D. Section 01780 - Closeout Submittals: Project record documents, operation and maintenance data, warranties and bonds.

E. Section 07840 - Firestopping.

F. Individual Product Specification Sections: 1. Advance notification to other sections of openings required in work of those

sections. 2. Limitations on cutting structural members.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. For submittal procedures, refer to Section 2 - General Terms and Conditions and Section 3 - Supplemental Terms and Conditions.

B. Survey Work (Laying Out the Work): Submit name, address, and telephone number of Surveyor before starting survey work. 1. On request, submit documentation verifying accuracy of survey work. 2. Submit a copy of site drawing and certificate signed by the Land Surveyor,

that the elevations and locations of the work are in conformance with Contract Documents.

3. Submit surveys and survey logs for the project record.

C. Cutting and Patching: Submit written request in advance of cutting or alteration which affects:


1. Structural integrity of any element of Project. 2. Integrity of weather exposed or moisture resistant element. 3. Efficiency, maintenance, or safety of any operational element. 4. Visual qualities of sight exposed elements. 5. Work of City or separate Contractor. 6. Include in request:

a. Identification of Project. b. Location and description of affected work. c. Necessity for cutting or alteration. d. Description of proposed work and products to be used. e. Alternatives to cutting and patching. f. Effect on work of City or separate Contractor. g. Written permission of affected separate Contractor. h. Date and time work will be executed.

D. Project Record Documents: Accurately record actual locations of capped and active utilities.

1.04 QUALIFICATIONS

A. For survey work, employ a land surveyor registered in the State in which the Project is located and acceptable to Consultant and Project Manager. Submit evidence of Surveyor's Errors and Omissions insurance coverage in the form of an Insurance Certificate.

1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Grade site to drain. Maintain excavations free of water. Provide, operate, and maintain pumping equipment.

B. Protect site from puddling or running water. Provide water barriers as required to protect site from soil erosion.

C. Ventilate enclosed areas to assist cure of materials, to dissipate humidity, and to prevent accumulation of dust, fumes, vapors, or gases.

D. Dust Control: Execute work by methods to minimize raising dust from construction operations. Provide positive means to prevent air-borne dust from dispersing into atmosphere.

E. Noise Control: Provide methods, means, and facilities to minimize noise produced by construction operations.

F. Pest Control: Provide methods, means, and facilities to prevent pests and insects from damaging the work.

G. Rodent Control: Provide methods, means, and facilities to prevent rodents from accessing or invading premises.

H. Pollution Control: Provide methods, means, and facilities to prevent contamination of soil, water, and atmosphere from discharge of noxious, toxic substances, and pollutants produced by construction operations.

1.06 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate scheduling, submittals, and work of the various sections of the Project Manual to ensure efficient and orderly sequence of installation of interdependent


construction elements.

B. Notify affected utility companies and comply with their requirements.

C. Verify that utility requirements and characteristics of new operating equipment are compatible with building utilities. Coordinate work of various sections having interdependent responsibilities for installing, connecting to, and placing in service, such equipment.

D. Coordinate space requirements, supports, and installation of mechanical and electrical work which are indicated diagrammatically on Drawings. Follow routing shown for pipes, ducts, and conduit, as closely as practicable; place runs parallel with lines of building. Utilize spaces efficiently to maximize accessibility for other installations, for maintenance, and for repairs.

E. In finished areas, conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring within the construction. Coordinate locations of fixtures and outlets with finish elements.

F. Coordinate completion and clean-up of work of separate sections.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 PATCHING MATERIALS

A. New Materials: As specified in product sections; match existing products and work for patching and extending work.

B. Type and Quality of Existing Products: Determine by inspecting and testing products where necessary, referring to existing work as a standard.

C. Product Substitution: For any proposed change in materials, submit request for substitution described in Section 01600. See also, Section 2 - General Terms and Conditions.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that existing site conditions and substrate surfaces are acceptable for subsequent work. Start of work means acceptance of existing conditions.

B. Verify that existing substrate is capable of structural support or attachment of new work being applied or attached.

C. Examine and verify specific conditions described in individual specification sections.

D. Take field measurements before confirming product orders or beginning fabrication, to minimize waste due to over-ordering or misfabrication.

E. Verify that utility services are available, of the correct characteristics, and in the correct locations.

F. Prior to Cutting: Examine existing conditions prior to commencing work, including elements subject to damage or movement during cutting and patching. After uncovering existing work, assess conditions affecting performance of work. Beginning of cutting or patching means acceptance of existing conditions.


3.02 PREPARATION

A. Clean substrate surfaces prior to applying next material or substance.

B. Seal cracks or openings of substrate prior to applying next material or substance.

C. Apply manufacturer required or recommended substrate primer, sealer, or conditioner prior to applying any new material or substance in contact or bond.

D. Provide adequate temporary support as necessary to assure structural value or integrity of affected portion of work.

E. Provide devices and methods to protect other portions of Project from damage.

3.03 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS

A. When required in individual specification sections, convene a pre-installation meeting at the site prior to commencing work of the section.

B. Require attendance of parties directly affecting, or affected by, work of the specific section.

C. Notify Consultant and Project Manager at least four days in advance of meeting date.

D. Prepare agenda and preside at meeting: 1. Review conditions of examination, preparation and installation procedures. 2. Review coordination with related work.

E. Record minutes and distribute copies within two days after meeting to participants, with two copies each to Consultant, Project Manager, participants, and those affected by decisions made.

3.04 LAYING OUT THE WORK

A. Verify locations of survey control points prior to starting work.

B. Promptly notify Consultant and Project Manager of any discrepancies discovered.

C. Contractor shall locate and protect survey control and reference points.

D. Control datum for survey is that established by City-provided survey.

E. Protect survey control points prior to starting site work; preserve permanent reference points during construction.

F. Promptly report to Consultant and Project Manager the loss or destruction of any reference point or relocation required because of changes in grades or other reasons.

G. Replace dislocated survey control points based on original survey control. Make no changes without prior written notice to Consultant and Project Manager.

H. Utilize recognized engineering survey practices.

I. Establish a minimum of two permanent bench marks on site, referenced to established control points. Record locations, with horizontal and vertical data, on project record documents.

J. Establish elevations, lines and levels. Locate and lay out by instrumentation and similar appropriate means:


1. Site improvements including pavements; stakes for grading, fill and topsoil placement; utility locations, slopes, and invert elevations.

2. Grid or axis for structures. 3. Building foundation, column locations, ground floor elevations.

K. Periodically verify layouts by same means.

L. Maintain a complete and accurate log of control and survey work as it progresses.

3.05 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

A. Install products as specified in individual sections, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations, and so as to avoid waste due to necessity for replacement.

B. Make vertical elements plumb and horizontal elements level, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Install equipment and fittings plumb and level, neatly aligned with adjacent vertical and horizontal lines, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Make consistent texture on surfaces, with seamless transitions, unless otherwise indicated.

E. Make neat transitions between different surfaces, maintaining texture and appearance.

3.06 CUTTING AND PATCHING

A. Execute cutting and patching including excavation and fill to complete the work, to uncover work in order to install improperly sequenced work, to remove and replace defective or non-conforming work, to remove samples of installed work for testing when requested, to provide openings in the work for penetration of mechanical and electrical work, to execute patching to complement adjacent work, and to fit products together to integrate with other work.

B. Execute excavating and backfilling by methods which will prevent settlement or damage to other work.

C. Execute work by methods to avoid damage to other work, and which will provide appropriate surfaces to receive patching and finishing. In existing work, minimize damage and restore to original condition.

D. Employ original installer to perform cutting for weather exposed and moisture resistant elements, and sight exposed surfaces.

E. Cut rigid materials using masonry saw or core drill. Pneumatic tools not allowed without prior approval.

F. Restore work with new products in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents.

G. Fit work air tight to pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduit, and other penetrations through surfaces.

H. At penetrations of fire rated walls, partitions, ceiling, or floor construction, completely seal voids with fire rated material in accordance with Section 07840,


to full thickness of the penetrated element.

I. Refinish surfaces to match adjacent finish. For continuous surfaces, refinish to nearest intersection or natural break. For an assembly, refinish entire unit.

J. Make neat transitions. Patch work to match adjacent work in texture and appearance. Where new work abuts or aligns with existing, perform a smooth and even transition.

K. Patch or replace surfaces that are damaged, lifted, discolored, or showing other imperfections due to patching work. Repair substrate prior to patching finish. Finish patches to produce uniform finish and texture over entire area. When finish cannot be matched, refinish entire surface to nearest intersections.

3.07 PROGRESS CLEANING

A. General: Refer to Section 2 - General Terms and Conditions.

B. Maintain site in a clean and orderly condition.

C. Contractor shall at all times keep the premises free from accumulation of waste materials, debris, and rubbish caused by its operations. 1. Remove debris and rubbish from pipe chases, plenums, attics, crawl spaces,

and other closed or remote spaces, prior to enclosing the space. 2. Collect and remove waste materials, debris, and trash/rubbish from site and

dispose off-site; do not burn or bury. 3. All combustible waste materials shall be removed from the Project(s) at the

end of each day.

D. Cleaning operations should be controlled to limit dust and other particles adhering to existing surfaces.

3.08 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED WORK


B. Protect installed work from damage by construction operations.

C. Provide special protection where specified in individual specification sections.

D. Provide temporary and removable protection for installed products. Control activity in immediate work area to prevent damage.

E. Provide protective coverings at walls, projections, jambs, sills, and soffits of openings.

F. Prohibit traffic or storage upon waterproofed or roofed surfaces. If traffic or activity is necessary, obtain recommendations for protection from waterproofing or roofing material manufacturer.

G. Remove protective coverings when no longer needed; reuse or recycle plastic coverings if possible.

3.09 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust operating products and equipment to ensure smooth and unhindered operation.

3.10 FINAL CLEANING



B. Execute final cleaning after Substantial Completion but before making final application for payment.

C. Use cleaning materials that are non-hazardous.

D. Clean interior and exterior glass, surfaces exposed to view; remove temporary labels, stains and foreign substances.

E. Clean debris from roofs, gutters, downspouts, and drainage systems.

F. Clean site; sweep paved areas, rake clean landscaped surfaces.

G. Remove waste, surplus materials, trash/rubbish, and construction facilities from the site; dispose of in legal manner; do not burn or bury.

3.12 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES

A. General: 1. Make submittals that are required by governing or other authorities.

a. Provide copies to Consultant and Project Manager. 2. Notify Consultant and Project Manager when work is considered ready for

Substantial Completion. 3. Submit written certification that Contract Documents have been reviewed,

work has been inspected, and that work is complete in accordance with Contract Documents and ready for review by Consultant and Project Manager.

4. Correct items of work listed in executed Certificates of Substantial Completion.

5. Notify Consultant and Project Manager when work is considered finally complete.

6. Complete items of work determined by Consultant's and Project Manager’s final inspection.

B. Substantial Completion, Punch List and Final Completion: Refer to Section 2 - General Terms and Conditions.

C. Contractor's Closeout Submittals: Refer to Section 2 - General Terms and Conditions. 1. Record Set of Contract Documents: Refer to Section 2 - General Terms and

Conditions. 2. As-Built Drawings: Refer to Refer to Section 2 - General Terms and

Conditions. 3. Warranties and guarantees.

a. Warranties required by the Contract Documents shall commence on the date of Final Acceptance completion of the Work or designated portion thereof unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents.

4. Refer to Section 01780 for additional requirements.

END OF SECTION

RENOVATION OF HISTORIC FIRE STATION NO. 2 (Phase II-A) City of Miami Project No. 30579 01780 - 1 of 3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

SECTION 01780

CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Project Record Documents.

B. Warranties and bonds.


A. Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Contract closeout procedures.

B. Individual Product Sections: 1. Warranties required for specific products or Work.

1.03 SUBMITTALS


B. Evidence of Compliance with Requirements of Governing Authorities: 1. Certificate of Completion, submitted upon Substantial Completion.

a. Certificate of Completion: A written certification that the work specified in the permit has been completed according to code and the premises are fit for inhabitancy.

b. FBC-B SECTION 308.1 states that "The permit holder must apply for and obtain a Certificate of Completion of any building after all inspections have been approved by the Building Official."

C. Project Record Documents: Submit documents to Consultant with claim for final Application for Payment. 1. Record Set of Contract Documents: Refer to Section 2 - General Terms and

Conditions. 2. As-Built Drawings: Refer to Refer to Section 2 - General Terms and

Conditions. a. As-Built Drawings shall be legibly marked to record actual construction. b. Include horizontal and vertical locations of underground utilities and

appurtenances, referenced to permanent surface improvements; signed and sealed by a surveyor registered in the State of Florida.

3. Specifications and Addenda; legibly mark each Section to record. 4. Changes made by Field Order or by Change Order.

D. Warranties and Guarantees: 1. For equipment or component parts of equipment put into service during

construction with Project Manager's permission, submit documents within ten days after acceptance.

2. Make other submittals within ten days after Date of Substantial Completion, prior to final Application for Payment.

3. For items of Work for which acceptance is delayed beyond Date of Substantial Completion, submit within ten days after acceptance, listing the


date of acceptance as the beginning of the warranty period.

E. Itemized List for Spare Parts and Extra Stock: Submit in accordance with requirements of individual sections of the Technical Specifications, by Substantial Completion.

F. Itemized List for Keys and Keying Schedule: Submit in accordance with requirements of Section 08710, by Substantial Completion.

G. Evidence of Payment and Release of Claims: In accordance with the General Conditions and Subcontractor's Affidavit(s) of Satisfaction and/or Consent of Surety to Final Payment.

PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

A. Maintain on site one set of the following record documents; record actual revisions to the Work: 1. Drawings. 2. Specifications. 3. Addenda. 4. Change Orders and other modifications to the Contract. 5. Reviewed shop drawings, product data, and samples. 6. Manufacturer's instruction for assembly, installation, and adjusting.

B. Ensure entries are complete and accurate, enabling future reference by City.

C. Store record documents separate from documents used for construction.

D. Record information concurrent with construction progress.

E. Specifications: Legibly mark and record at each product section description of actual products installed, including the following: 1. Manufacturer's name and product model and number. 2. Product substitutions or alternates utilized. 3. Changes made by Addenda and modifications.

F. Record Drawings and Shop Drawings: Legibly mark each item to record actual construction including: 1. Measured depths of foundations in relation to finish first floor datum. 2. Measured horizontal and vertical locations of underground utilities and

appurtenances, referenced to permanent surface improvements. 3. Measured locations of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in

construction, referenced to visible and accessible features of the Work. 4. Field changes of dimension and detail. 5. Details not on original Contract drawings.

3.02 PRODUCT DATA

A. For Each Product or System: List names, addresses and telephone numbers of Subcontractors and suppliers, including local source of supplies and replacement


parts.

B. Product Data: Mark each sheet to clearly identify specific products and component parts, and data applicable to installation. Delete inapplicable information.

C. Typed Text: As required to supplement product data. Provide logical sequence of instructions for each procedure, incorporating manufacturer's instructions.

3.03 MATERIALS AND FINISHES DATA

A. For Each Product, Applied Material, and Finish: 1. Product data, with catalog number, size, composition, and color and texture

designations. 2. Information for re-ordering custom manufactured products.

B. Instructions for Care and Maintenance: Manufacturer's recommendations for cleaning agents and methods, precautions against detrimental cleaning agents and methods, and recommended schedule for cleaning and maintenance.

C. Additional information as specified in individual product specification sections.

D. Provide a listing in Table of Contents for design data, with tabbed fly sheet and space for insertion of data.

3.04 WARRANTIES, GUARANTEES AND BONDS

A. Obtain warranties and bonds, executed in duplicate by responsible Subcontractors, suppliers, and manufacturers, within ten days after completion of the applicable item of work. Except for items put into use with Project Manager's permission, leave date of beginning of time of warranty until the Date of Substantial completion is determined.

B. Verify that documents are in proper form, contain full information, and are notarized.

C. Co-execute submittals when required.

D. Retain warranties and bonds until time specified for submittal.

E. Manual: Bind in commercial quality 8-1/2 x 11 inch (216 x 279 mm) three D side ring binders with durable plastic covers.

F. Cover: Identify each binder with typed or printed title WARRANTIES AND BONDS, with title of Project; name, address and telephone number of Contractor and equipment supplier; and name of responsible company principal.

G. Table of Contents: Neatly typed, in the sequence of the Table of Contents of the Project Manual, with each item identified with the number and title of the specification section in which specified, and the name of product or work item.

H. Separate each warranty or bond with index tab sheets keyed to the Table of Contents listing. Provide full information, using separate typed sheets as necessary. List Subcontractor, supplier, and manufacturer, with name, address, and telephone number of responsible principal.

END OF SECTION

RENOVATION OF HISTORIC FIRE STATION NO. 2 (Phase II-A) City of Miami Project No. B-30579 02223 - 1 of 7 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION FOR REMODELING

SECTION 02223

SELECTIVE DEMOLITION FOR REMODELING

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Selective demolition, gutting and removal, and off-site disposal of designated portions of the existing building, including but not necessarily limited to the following: 1. Structural elements, including but not limited to columns, foundations,

beams, and elevated floor deck. 2. Roof elements, including but not limited to roof trusses and joists, decking

and roofing systems. 3. Stairs. 4. Interior partitions. 5. Doors and frame assemblies. 6. Windows. 7. Interior finishes, including but not limited to flooring and wall finishes, ceiling

systems, wall bases, furring, etc. 8. Utilities, including but not limited to mechanical, electrical and plumbing

systems. 9. Miscellaneous other construction indicated on drawings or as required to

accommodate new construction.

B. Identification of utilities; capping of pipes.


A. Section 01600 - Product Requirements.

B. Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: 1. Cutting and patching.

a. Requirements and limitations for cutting and patching of Work. b. Cutting and core-drilling of existing structural members (e.g., concrete

floor slab, structural concrete columns and beams, and masonry walls) as necessary to allow for construction of new work.

C. Section 07840 - Firestopping.

1.03 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: 1. Demolition Schedule:

a. Submit schedule prior to commencement of work. b. Indicate proposed methods and sequence of operations for selective

demolition work. c. Include coordination for shut-off, capping and continuation of utility

services, together with details for dust and noise protection.


C. Project Record Documents: 1. Photographs: Prior to commencement of demolition, submit photographs of

existing conditions within work area, and of adjacent structures and site improvements.

2. Capped Utilities Locations: Accurately record actual locations of capped utilities.

3. Disposal Manifests: Copies of the disposal manifests shall be submitted to Project Manager at the conclusion of the demolition activities.


A. Safeguards during Construction, Alteration, and Demolition Operations: Conform to applicable requirements of the governing building code and other applicable codes and standards for demolition work, dust control, products requiring electrical disconnection and re-connection, and other work as indicated.

1.05 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

A. Comply with governing US Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) notification regulations before beginning demolition work. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Conform to applicable requirements of the governing building code and other applicable codes and standards for demolition work, dust control, products requiring electrical disconnection and re-connection, and other work as indicated. 1. Comply with directives of the Authority Having Jurisdiction, and other

applicable requirements governing construction safety. 2. Conform to requirements of governing building code and applicable

reference standards for safeguards during demolition, including but not limited to NFPA 241.

C. Obtain required permits from authorities.

D. Do not close or obstruct egress from any building exit or any component of a required means of egress, except as specifically allowed by the Authority Having Jurisdiction.

E. Maintain access for City of Miami Fire and Rescue Department vehicles and personnel to required fire lanes, fire hydrants and hose valves at all times during the construction, except as specifically allowed by the Authority Having Jurisdiction.

F. Do not disable or disrupt building fire protection or other life safety systems without at least 5 working days' prior written notice to Consultant, Project Manager, and Authority Having Jurisdiction.

G. Hazardous or Contaminated Materials: 1. Conform to applicable regulatory procedures when hazardous or

contaminated materials are discovered. 2. Prior to demolishing any chiller unit, AC unit, or other mechanical equipment,

the chemically-treated waters, sludge materials, and/or refrigerants/chemicals contained therein shall be pumped out, removed from the site and properly disposed of. No chemically-treated waters, sludge materials, refrigerants, or other chemicals from any such chiller unit, AC unit,


or other mechanical equipment shall be released into the drainage system, except as authorized in writing by DERM.

3. Removal of any asbestos-containing materials shall be coordinated with Project Manager.

H. Waste Management for Mercury Containing Lamps and Devices: Conform to applicable local, State and Federal regulatory requirements, including but not limited to FS 403.7186, FAC Chapter 62-737, and 40 CFR Part 273. 1. Mercury-containing lamps and devices shall not be disposed of or

incinerated in any manner prohibited by FS 403.7186 or by the rules of the Florida Department of Environmental Protection (FDEP) promulgated under FS 403.7186.

2. Mercury-containing lamps and devices (e.g., fluorescent lamps and ballasts) removed from fixtures during demolition shall be sent to an FDEP-authorized recycler.


A. Occupancy by City: 1. City does not intend to occupy the building during selective demolition

operations.

B. Existing Utilities - General: 1. Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain or necessary for continued

operation of occupied facilities and equipment; existing utilities to remain in service shall be protected against damage during demolition operations.

2. Do not interrupt existing utilities serving occupied or operating facilities unless authorized in writing by Project Manager and authority having jurisdiction. Where interruption to existing utility service is authorized, provide temporary service acceptable to Project Manager and authority having jurisdiction for duration of interruption.

C. Existing Utilities - Electrical Services: 1. Where wiring of proprietary systems is encountered, instructions shall be

secured in writing from the system’s owner. 2. Cutover of electrical service to new, permanent service shall be continuously

and adequately supervised. 3. The Contractor shall notify electrical power and telephone utility companies

of interference of their materials with work to be accomplished, and shall schedule an adequate time for such work as is provided by the utility companies.

4. Special attention shall be provided by the Contractor to the field determination of exact areas which are presently served by the various lighting, power, signal, communication and supervisory systems which are in operation.

5. Prior to commencement of demolition operations, the Contractor shall determine location and extent of existing electrical work which will be affected thereby.

6. All temporary wiring shall be of proper type, and shall be protected from damage and from contact. Provide raceways for temporary work, where required by governing building code.


D. Condition of Structures: Comply with requirements for Inspection and Preparation. 1. City assumes no responsibility for actual condition of items or structures to

be demolished. 2. Conditions existing at time of commencement of contract to be maintained

by City insofar as practicable. a. Variations within existing structure may occur by City's removal and

salvage operations prior to start of selective demolition work.

E. Partial Demolition and Removal: Items indicated to be removed but of salvable value to Contractor may be removed from structure as work progresses. 1. Transport salvaged items from site as they are removed. 2. Storage or sale of removed items on site will not be permitted.

F. Procedures - General: 1. Isolation: It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to completely isolate

all areas during demolition. This shall include placement of temporary barriers, closure of floor openings, erecting dust-tight temporary partitions, or other methods required to protect against unauthorized access or contamination. The Contractor is responsible for all methods and materials for the complete protection of the public.

2. Damages: The Contractor shall promptly repair or replace damages caused to adjacent facilities by demolition work, as directed by the Consultant and at no additional cost to City.

3. Pollution Controls: a. During demolition activities, erosion and sediment control practices must

be implemented to avoid sediments from entering the drainage system. b. Use temporary enclosures and/or other suitable methods as necessary

to limit dust and dirt rising and scattering in the air. 4. Fill Voids: Completely fill below grade areas and voids created by demolition

operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing prior to start of work. 5. Explosives: Not allowed.

1.07 REPAIR OF DAMAGED WORK

A. Where damage to adjacent facilities is caused by demolition work, Contractor shall promptly repair or replace such damaged work at no additional cost to City.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 REPAIR MATERIALS

A. Use repair materials identical to existing materials, except as otherwise indicated. If identical materials are not available or cannot be used for exposed surfaces, use materials that visually match adjacent existing surfaces to the fullest extent possible. 1. Refer to Section 01600 and Section 01700 for additional requirements.

B. Comply with material and installation requirements specified in individual sections.

C. In locations where fire-rated assembly is cut or core-drilled to allow for installation


of new work, such penetration shall be firestopped in accordance with applicable requirements of the governing building code. 1. Refer to Section 07840 for additional information.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSPECTION

A. Prior to commencement of selective demolition work, inspect and document, using photography or other appropriate means, areas in which work will be performed.

B. Survey of Existing Conditions: 1. Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to

determine extent of demolition work required. a. Survey of conditions of structural elements, including but not limited to

framing, floors and walls, shall conform to requirements of 29 CFR 1926.850(a) and applicable regulatory requirements.

2. Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed and reinstalled, and items to be removed and salvaged.

3. Detailed Salvage Inventory: a. Based on results of existing conditions survey, the Contractor shall:

1) Advise the Project Manager as to the quantities and conditions of all salvageable items scheduled to be removed by the Contractor for City's retention, and establish a detailed inventory listing of such items.

2) Coordinate with Project Manager to finalize arrangements and schedule for removal and delivery of salvageable items scheduled to be removed by the Contractor for City's retention.

b. City reserves right to delete any or all salvageable items from the list of items scheduled to be removed by the Contractor for City's retention. If Project Manager elects to delete any or all salvageable items from the list, Contractor shall be responsible for removal and disposal of such deleted items at no additional cost to City.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. General: 1. Comply with applicable regulatory requirements for demolition preparatory

operations, including but not limited to 29 CFR 1926.850. 2. Provide, erect, and maintain temporary barriers, partitions and other

temporary facilities and controls at locations indicated or as required for protection of personnel, general public, and property.

3. Provide, erect, and maintain temporary weatherproof closures for exterior openings. a. Design temporary exterior barriers to comply with wind load and large

missile impact requirements of the governing building code. Contractor shall be responsible for providing design by a Delegated (Specialty) Engineer licensed in the State of Florida.

4. Erect and maintain temporary dust-proof partitions as necessary to prevent spread of dust, odors, and noise from work areas to occupied portions of the


building, or as necessary to permit continued building occupancy. 5. Protect existing materials, furnishings, equipment, and construction that are

not to be demolished. a. Cover and protect from damage furniture, equipment and fixtures to

remain, as required to protect from soiling or damage when demolition work is performed in rooms or areas from which such items have not been removed.

B. Prevent movement of structure; provide bracing and shoring.

C. Utilities: 1. Notify affected utility companies before starting work and comply with their

requirements. 2. Mark location and termination of utilities. 3. Locate, identify, shut-off and disconnect utility services that are not indicated

to remain.

D. Hazardous / Dangerous Materials: Drain, purge, or otherwise collect, remove and dispose of hazardous or dangerous materials (e.g., chemicals, gases, flammable or explosive agents, etc.) encountered during the process of demolition operations. Use means and methods approved by Project Manager and authority having jurisdiction.

E. Pest Control: Employ a qualified, certified and licensed exterminator to treat the work site building areas and to control rodents and vermin prior to and during demolition and debris-removal operations.

3.03 DEMOLITION

A. Perform selective demolition work in a systematic manner. Use such methods as required to complete work indicated in drawings, in accordance with demolition schedule and governing regulations.

B. Perform demolition and removal work in an orderly and careful manner. Protect existing supporting structural members and other construction that is not to be demolished.

C. Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new construction and as indicated. 1. Proceed with demolition work in a systematic manner. a. Where demolition affects load bearing building elements, demolition work

should proceed from higher to lower levels except as otherwise indicated. Complete demolition operations above each floor or tier before disturbing support members on next lower level.

2. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square and true to dimensions required. a. Use cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or

adjoining construction. b. Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not

hammering or chopping, so as to minimize disturbance to adjacent surfaces.

c. Provide temporary cover for openings to remain. 3. Cut or drill from exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces, so as to


avoid marring existing finished surfaces. 4. Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials.

a. At concealed spaces (e.g., duct and pipe interiors), verify condition and contents of hidden space before starting flame-cutting operations.

b. Maintain adequate ventilation when using cutting torches. 5. Remove decayed, vermin-infested, or otherwise dangerous or unsuitable

materials, and promptly dispose of debris off-site. 6. Locate demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to

impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing. 7. Return elements of construction and surfaces that are to remain to condition

existing before commencement of demolition operations.

D. Locate demolition equipment throughout structure and promptly remove debris to avoid imposing excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, framing, etc.

E. Provide services for effective air and water pollution controls as required by authorities having jurisdiction.

F. Demolish concrete and masonry in small sections. Cut concrete and masonry at junctions with construction to remain using power driven masonry saw or hand tools; do not use power-driven impact tools.

G. Disconnect, remove or cap (as indicated), and identify designated utilities within demolition areas.

H. Demolish in an orderly and careful manner. Protect existing supporting structural members and other construction that is not to be demolished.

I. Remove demolished materials from site except where specifically noted otherwise. Do not burn or bury materials on site.

J. Remove materials as demolition progresses. Upon completion of demolition, leave areas in clean condition.

K. Finishes: 1. Existing to Remain: In areas where demolition and/or new work is indicated,

but where adjacent finishes are to remain, Contractor shall protect such adjacent finishes from damage and from soiling.

2. Cleaning, Repair, and Replacement: Where any existing wall, ceiling or floor finish is damaged or soiled as a result of demolition or construction operations, Contractor shall provide cleaning and/or repair of such finish as necessary to restore it to original condition; if such finish cannot be cleaned and/or repaired to original condition, Contractor shall replace such finish with new product(s) meeting specifications for original work.

L. Remove temporary facilities.

END OF SECTION


City of Miami Project No. B-30579 02300 - 1 of 9 EARTHWORK FOR BUILDINGS

SECTION 02300

SITEWORK FOR BUILDINGS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Excavating, filling, backfilling, and compacting of earth required for construction of: 1. Building foundations and slabs-on-grade. 2. Utilities within the footprint of building addition, plus a five (5) foot perimeter

extending beyond the outer lines thereof.


A. Section 00300 - Information Available to Bidders: 1. GEOTECHNICAL SUBSURFACE INVESTIGATION REPORT, including the

following: a. Soils information. b. Water level. c. Geotech engineer’s recommendations for foundations.

2. SOILS PERCOLATION TEST REPORT, including the following: a. Soils information. b. Water level.

B. Section 01400 - Quality Requirements.

C. Section 02223 - Selective Demolition for Remodeling: Demolition and removal of existing slab-on-grade and column foundations.

D. Section 02361 - Soil Treatment for Termites: Soil treatment for subterranean insects, below slabs-on-grade and at interior and exterior foundation perimeter.

E. Section 03300 - Cast-In-Place Concrete: Concrete foundations, concrete slabs on grade, and other cast-in-place concrete work to be constructed on compacted earth or fill; under-slab vapor barriers, to be installed beneath concrete slab-on-grade for buildings.

1.03 SUBMITTALS


B. Test Reports: 1. Modified Proctor Tests (ASTM D 1557): Submit copies of test report for each test

performed; refer to Structural Drawings for test requirements. 2. Field Density Tests (ASTM D 1556 or ASTM D 2922): Submit copies of test report

for each test performed; refer to Structural Drawings for test requirements.


A. Conform to applicable regulations relating to environmental requirements, disposal of debris, burning debris on site, use of herbicides, and generation of noise. 1. All fees to be paid by Contractor.

B. Existing Utilities:



1. Protect active utilities; refer to General Conditions and Division 1 sections for additional requirements.

2. Remove or plug/cap inactive or abandoned utilities encountered in excavation, as indicated on the drawings.

3. Coordinate Work of this Section with utility companies.

C. Condition of Structures: 1. City assumes no responsibility for actual condition of items or structures to be

demolished.

D. Salvage: 1. Items designated to be salvaged shall be kept safe and properly maintained on

site. 2. Items indicated to be removed but of salvable value to Contractor may be removed

from site as work progresses. a. Transport salvaged items from site as they are removed. b. Storage or sale of removed items on site will not be permitted.

E. Items noted as existing to remain shall be protected against damage, soiling, breakage, or other alteration during site clearing operations.

F. Promptly repair damage to adjacent facilities that is caused by work of this Contract, at no additional cost to City.

G. Trench Safety: 1. Comply with the requirements of the governing building code and the Florida

Trench Safety Act (FS 553.60 through 553.64). 2. Comply with 29 CFR 1926.

H. Provide dewatering and drainage as necessary to control groundwater in areas of excavation and compaction. 1. Refer to GEOTECHNICAL SUBSURFACE INVESTIGATION REPORT and SOILS

PERCOLATION TEST REPORT for information pertaining to water level.

I. Fill: 1. Provide sufficient quantities of fill to meet project schedule and requirements.

When necessary, store materials on site in advance of need, after obtaining approval by Project Manager.

2. When fill materials need to be stored on site, locate stockpiles where designated or as directed by Consultant. a. Separate differing materials with dividers or stockpile separately to prevent

intermixing. b. Prevent contamination. c. Protect stockpiles from erosion and deterioration of materials.

J. Bench Marks and Monuments: 1. Verify that survey bench marks and intended elevations for the Work are as

indicated. 2. Protect existing benchmarks, monuments and other reference points. If disturbed

or destroyed, replace as directed at no additional cost to City. 3. Employ an experienced and competent State of Florida licensed land surveyor, to

establish required bench marks and to determine all lines and grades.

1.05 TEMPORARY PROTECTIONS



A. Protect from damage existing utilities to remain. 1. Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain or necessary for continued operation

of occupied facilities and equipment; existing utilities to remain in service and to be protected against damage during demolition operations.

2. Do not interrupt existing utilities serving occupied or used facilities, except as authorized in writing by authorities having jurisdiction and Project Manager. Provide temporary services during interruptions of existing utilities, as acceptable to Project Manager and governing authorities.

B. Protect trees, plants, and other features designated to remain as final landscaping. 1. Protection of trees shall include protection of canopy and root system within 20 ft

radius (minimum) from center of tree, except as otherwise indicated. 2. Protect root systems of trees designated to remain. Do not store construction

materials, debris, or excavated material within tree drip line, which is the outer perimeter of tree's branches. Do not permit vehicles within tree drip line.

3. Protect tree root systems from damage due to noxious materials in solution caused by run-off or spillage during mixing and placement of construction materials or drainage from stored materials. Protect root systems from flooding, erosion, or excessive wetting resulting from dewatering operations.

4. Utilize a qualified tree surgeon to perform the following: a. Removal of tree branch(es) from tree(s) designated to remain, where required

to accommodate new construction. b. Recommend procedures to compensate for loss of roots and perform initial

pruning of branches and stimulation of root growth, where removed to accommodate new construction.

c. Extend pruning operations to restore natural shape of entire tree. d. Tree repair work for damages resulting from work of this project.

C. Protect streets, roads, adjacent property, active utilities, existing landscape materials, and other site improvements designated to remain from damage through the use of temporary fencing, barricades and/or guards. 1. Ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent

occupied or used facilities. 2. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, or other occupied or used facilities, without

permission from the Project Manager and applicable authorities having jurisdiction. 3. Provide traffic control devices, flagmen and other controls to ensure safe passage

of traffic and pedestrians.

D. On-site burning or the use of fires on site for any purpose (e.g., for burning of construction debris, waste materials, plants or other items) is strictly prohibited.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 FILL MATERIALS

A. General: Provide borrow soil materials when sufficient satisfactory soil materials are not available from on-site excavations, or where graded materials are indicated.

B. Classification and Grading of Fill Materials: Comply with recommendations of Subsurface Exploration Report, requirements indicated in the Structural Drawings, and as follows: 1. Satisfactory (Select) Fill: Acceptable for use as fill materials.



a. Fill material shall be free of organic matter and consist of granular soil containing less than 10 percent (dry weight) material passing the U.S. Standard No. 200 mesh sieve.

b. Fill material shall be free of rock or gravel larger than 1.0 inches in any dimension, debris, waste, vegetation, and other deleterious matter.

c. Fill material shall be properly worked by Contractor to obtain optimum moisture and compaction. Provide strict moisture control during compaction.

2. Unsatisfactory (Unsuitable) Fill: Not acceptable for use as fill materials. a. Unsatisfactory soils shall include, but are not limited to Satisfactory (Select)

Fill not maintained within 2 percent of optimum moisture content at time of compaction.

3. Lean Concrete: Refer to Structural Drawings.

2.02 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Tree Pruning Compound: Waterproof, antiseptic, elastic and free from kerosene, coal tar, creosote, and other substances harmful to plants.

B. Herbicide: Type approved by regulatory agency, as appropriate for application and suitable for conditions.

2.03 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. See Section 01400 and Structural Drawings for general requirements for testing and analysis of soil material.

B. Comply with applicable requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Where fill materials are specified by reference to a specific standard, test and analyze samples for compliance before delivery to site.

D. If tests indicate materials do not meet specified requirements, change material and retest after obtaining required approval from Consultant and Project Manager.

E. Provide materials of each type from same source throughout the Work.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION

A. Identify required lines, levels, contours, and datum locations.

B. Identify a waste area for placing removed materials.

C. Tag existing trees and plants designated to remain.

D. Locate, identify, and protect utilities that remain and protect from damage.

E. Drain, purge, or otherwise remove, collect, and dispose of chemicals, gases, explosives, acids, or any other dangerous materials before proceeding with the clearing operations.

F. Employ a certified licensed exterminator to perform required service for control of rodents and vermin before during, and after the clearing operations.

G. Perform clearing operations with the least intrusive impacts to the surrounding roads, streets, and adjacent occupied properties. No walkway or road closures are permitted,



unless authorized by Project Manager and authorities having jurisdiction. When and if permitted, provide alternate routes around such closures as required by governing regulations.

H. Conduct clearing operations to prevent injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings or facilities.

I. Protection: 1. Protect utilities designated to remain from damage. 2. Protect trees, plants, and features designated to remain as final landscaping. 3. Protect bench marks and existing structures from damage or displacement.

3.02 SITE PREPARATION - GENERAL

A. The portion of the building site where new building addition(s) is to be constructed shall be properly cleared and grubbed, and filled and compacted; comply with requirements indicated on the Structural Drawings, and with recommendations included in the GEOTECHNICAL SUBSURFACE INVESTIGATION REPORT and SOILS PERCOLATION TEST REPORT, and the following: 1. The footprints of new building addition(s) plus an area of 10 feet beyond the

perimeter of each building addition footprint shall be stripped and cleared of all surface vegetation, stumps, debris, organic topsoil and other deleterious materials, as encountered.

2. All stripped areas shall be proof-rolled with compaction equipment appropriate for site and soil conditions, in accordance with recommendations included in the GEOTECHNICAL SUBSURFACE INVESTIGATION REPORT, SOILS PERCOLATION TEST REPORT, and Structural Drawings.

3. The building site shall be filled to near the design ground floor underslab elevations prior to initiating the ground densification process. a. When placing fill materials using vibratory compaction methods, lift

thicknesses shall not exceed 12 inches prior to compaction; where hand-held compaction methods are used, loose lift thicknesses shall not exceed 6 inches.

b. Each lift shall be placed, compacted, and tested prior to placement of the next lift.

c. Native soils and fill material in the proposed building pad areas should be compacted to at least 95 percent of the maximum dry density determined from ASTM D 1557.

d. Fill materials shall consist only of Satisfactory (Select) Fill. 4. Field density tests shall be performed to at least 1.0 foot below the stripped, proof-

rolled, and compacted surface of natural soils; additional field density tests shall be performed for each 1.0 foot lift of fill placed. Any areas not in compliance with compaction requirements shall be reworked and retested prior to placement of the next lift of fill. a. Field density tests shall be performed for each 2,000 sq feet of building area,

or fraction thereof, per lift. b. Comply with recommendations of GEOTECHNICAL SUBSURFACE

INVESTIGATION REPORT and SOILS PERCOLATION TEST REPORT, and requirements indicated on the Structural Drawings.

B. The Contractor shall ensure a firm base on which heavy equipment can be operated without platform maintenance.



C. The Contractor shall provide access and maintenance thereof for the specialty contractor’s equipment, workforce and delivery of materials to the work site.

3.03 CLEARING

A. Clear areas required for access to site and execution of Work.

B. Remove paving, curbs, and rock base from areas designated.

C. Remove trees, shrubs, and stumps indicated. 1. Where tree removal permit(s) is/are required by regulatory requirements prior to

removal of tree, Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining such permit in accordance with such requirements.

D. Carefully and cleanly cut roots and branches of trees indicated to remain, where roots and branches obstruct new construction, with sharp pruning instruments. Do not break or chop roots or branches. Paint cuts over 1/2 inch in size with tree pruning compound.

E. Earthwork around Trees Indicated to Remain: 1. In areas where trees are to remain, remove all undergrowth, dead trees, stumps,

roots, vines, and other debris. 2. Excavation around Trees:

a. Excavate within drip line of trees only where indicated. b. Where trenching for utilities is required within tree drip line, tunnel around

roots by hand digging. Do not cut main lateral roots or tap roots; cut smaller roots only where such roots interfere with installation of new work. Cut roots with sharp pruning instruments; do not break or chop.

c. Where existing grade is above new finish grade shown around trees, carefully hand excavate within tree drip line to new finish grade. Cut roots exposed by excavation or provide permanent protections as recommended by tree surgeon.

d. Do not allow exposed roots to dry out before permanent backfill is placed; provide temporary earth cover, or pack with peat moss and wrap with burlap. Water and maintain in moist condition and temporarily support and protect from damage until permanently relocated and covered with earth. Prune branches to balance loss of root system caused by damage or cutting of root system.

3. Maintain existing grade within drip-line of trees, unless otherwise indicated. 4. Raising Grades around Trees:

a. Minor Filling: Where existing grade is 6 inches or less below elevation of finish grade shown, use a topsoil fill material. Place in layers and do not compact; hand grade to required finish elevations.

b. Moderate Filling: Where existing grade is more than 6 inches, but less than 12 inches, below finish grade elevation, place a layer of drainage fill on existing grade prior to placing topsoil. Carefully place against tree trunk approximately 2 inches above finish grade and extend not less than 18 inches from tree trunk on all sides. For balance of area within drip line perimeter, place drainage fill to elevation 6 inches below grade and complete fill with a layer of topsoil to finish grade elevation. Do not compact stone or gravel or topsoil layers; hand grade to required elevations.

5. Repair and Replacement of Trees: a. Repair trees damaged by construction operations. Make repairs promptly

after damage occurs to prevent progressive deterioration of damaged trees.



b. Remove and replace dead and damaged trees which are determined by the tree surgeon to be incapable of restoration to normal growth pattern.

c. Provide new trees of same size and species as those replaced, up to 6 inch caliper. For replacement of trees over 6 inches in caliper taken 12 inches above grade, provide new trees of 6 inch caliper, and of the same species as selected by the Project Manager.

F. Explosives: 1. Use of explosives will not be permitted. 2. Explosives shall not be brought to the site and the use of explosives without the

written consent of the Project Manager and the authorities having jurisdiction. Written consent does not constitute relief for the Contractor on responsibility for accident and injury to persons or for damage to property during blasting. Blasting operations must be in accordance and compliance with governing regulations.

G. Pollution Control: 1. Comply with governing regulations of US EPA and Florida DEP, and well as

applicable local regulatory requirements. 2. Use water mist, temporary enclosures, and other suitable methods to limit the

spread of dust and dirt. 3. The use of pollution control methods is to be limited to not creating adverse

impacts like flooding, when using water. 4. Debris removal and transport shall be done in a manner to prevent spillage on

adjacent areas. Debris from elevated areas shall be removed by use of chute, hoist or any device capable of conveying such debris to grade level.

5. Return adjacent areas and buildings to their condition(s) before the work of this Section commenced. Clean adjacent areas and buildings of dust, dirt or any debris caused by the work of this Section.

H. Removal: 1. Remove surface rock. 2. Remove portions of paving and curbs, fencing, and other items; as indicated.

Neatly saw cut edges at right angle to surface. 3. Promptly remove debris from site, and dispose of removed materials.

Accumulation of debris on site is prohibited. 4. Transport removed materials off the City's property and legally dispose of them in

accordance with the regulations of the authorities having jurisdiction. 5. Do not burn removed materials.

3.04 EXCAVATING

A. Coordinate work of this Section with requirements specified in Related Sections and as indicated on the Structural Drawings, and with recommendations of the GEOTECHNICAL SUBSURFACE INVESTIGATION REPORT and SOILS PERCOLATION TEST REPORT.

B. Excavate to accommodate new structures and construction operations in accordance with requirements indicated on the Structural Drawings. 1. The depth of foundations shall comply with applicable requirements of the

governing building code, including but not limited to FBC-B SECTION 1805, and with requirements indicated on the Structural Drawings.

C. Cut utility trenches wide enough to allow inspection of installed utilities.



F. Hand trim excavations. Remove loose matter.

G. Correct areas that are over-excavated and load-bearing surfaces that are disturbed.

H. Grade top perimeter of excavation to prevent surface water from draining into excavation. 1. The placement of buildings and structures on or adjacent to slopes steeper than

one unit vertical in three units horizontal (33.3-percent slope) shall conform to FBC-B SECTION 1805.3.

I. Remove excavated material that is unsuitable for re-use from site.

J. Remove excess excavated material from site, except where such material is to be re-used as fill.

K. Stockpile excavated material to be re-used in area designated on site, or as directed by Project Manager.

3.05 PREPARATION FOR FILLING AND COMPACTION

A. Soil preparation shall conform to requirements indicated on the Structural Drawings and recommendations of GEOTECHNICAL SUBSURFACE INVESTIGATION REPORT and SOILS PERCOLATION TEST REPORT.

B. Coordinate work of this Section with requirements specified in Related Sections.

C. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by earthwork operations.

D. Provide erosion-control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of soils and discharge of soil-bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways.

E. Cut out soft areas of subgrade not capable of compaction in place. Backfill with Satisfactory (Select) Fill.

F. Compact subgrade to density equal to or greater than requirements for subsequent fill material.

G. Until ready to fill, maintain excavations and prevent loose soil from falling into excavation.

3.06 FILLING AND COMPACTION

A. Placement of Fill and Compaction: Comply with recommendations of Subsurface Exploration Report, requirements indicated in the Structural Drawings, and as follows: 1. Place and compact materials in equal continuous layers not exceeding 8 inches

(200 mm) loose thickness, except as otherwise indicated. 2. Compaction Density: Each lift shall be compacted to a minimum of 95 percent of

the maximum dry density near the optimum moisture content as determined by ASTM D 1557, except as otherwise indicated.

B. Fill to contours and elevations indicated.

C. Employ a placement method that does not disturb or damage other work.

D. Systematically fill to allow maximum time for natural settlement. Do not fill over porous, wet, or spongy subgrade surfaces.



E. Slope grade away from building minimum 2 inches in 10 ft (50 mm in 3 m), unless noted otherwise. Make gradual grade changes. Blend slope into level areas.

F. Maintain optimum moisture content of fill materials to attain required compaction density.

3.07 GROUNDWATER AND MOISTURE CONTROL

A. Comply with the following: 1. Recommendations of GEOTECHNICAL SUBSURFACE INVESTIGATION

REPORT and SOILS PERCOLATION TEST REPORT. 2. Requirements indicated on the Structural Drawings. 3. Applicable regulatory requirements, including but not necessarily limited to

requirements for dewatering permits.

B. Do not place backfill or fill on surfaces that are muddy.

3.08 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. General: See Structural Drawings and Section 01400 for general requirements for field inspection and testing.

B. Tests: Comply with recommendations of GEOTECHNICAL SUBSURFACE INVESTIGATION REPORT and SOILS PERCOLATION TEST REPORT, and requirements indicated on the Structural Drawings.

3.09 PROTECTION

A. Prevent displacement of banks and keep loose soil from falling into excavation; maintain soil stability.

B. Protect bottom of excavations and soil adjacent to and beneath foundation from freezing.

3.10 CLEAN-UP

A. Remove unused stockpiled materials, leave area in a clean and neat condition. Grade stockpile area to prevent standing surface water.

END OF SECTION

RENOVATION OF HISTORIC FIRE STATION NO. 2 (Phase II-A) City of Miami Project No. B-30579 02361 - 1 of 7 SOIL TREATMENT FOR TERMITE CONTROL

SECTION 02361

SOIL TREATMENT FOR TERMITE CONTROL

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Chemical soil treatment for termite control.


A. Section 01780 - Closeout Submittals.

B. Section 02300 - Earthwork for Buildings.

C. Section 03300 - Cast-In-Place Concrete: Concrete slab-on-grade, elevator pit, foundations, and foundation walls; Under-slab vapor barrier/vapor retarder, to be installed beneath concrete slab-on-grade for buildings.

1.03 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Indicate toxicants to be used, composition by percentage, dilution schedule, intended application rate. 1. For each toxicant to be used, submit product information, including EPA

registered label, manufacturer's specifications, chemical analysis, and safety precautions. a. Indicate toxicants to be used, composition by percentage, dilution

schedule, intended application rate. b. Provide copies of Supplemental Labeling and MSDS for each product.

2. Provide pesticide information profile, including EPA Toxicity Classification and specific pesticide information relating to health and environmental effects.

C. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that toxicants meet specified requirements.

D. Warranty: Submit warranty and ensure that forms have been completed in City's name.


A. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing this type of work and: 1. Approved by manufacturer of treatment materials. 2. Licensed to provide pest control services in the State of Florida, in accordance

with requirements of Chapter 487, Florida Statutes; the pest control license shall be from the Florida Department of Agriculture and Consumer Services.

B. EPA Toxicity Class of Toxicant Chemicals: Toxicant chemicals used on this project shall be limited to chemicals that have been classified by EPA as Toxicity Class II and III, Toxicity Class III, or Toxicity Class IV. Do not use chemicals classified as Toxicity Class II or Toxicity Class I.

C. Record moisture content of soil before application, date and rate of application,


areas of application, and diary of toxicity meter readings and corresponding soil coverage.


A. Conform to all applicable Federal, State and Local laws, rules and regulations, and governing building code for requirements for application, application licensing, and authority to use toxicant chemicals, including but not limited to the following: 1. United States Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) regulations for

termiticides. 2. Federal Insecticide, Fungicide and Rodenticide Act (FIFRA); United States

Code, Title 7, Chapter 6, Sections 136 through 136y. 3. Chapter 482, Florida Statutes, and Chapter 5E-14, Florida Administrative

Code. 4. Certificate of Protective Treatment for Prevention of Termites: A weather-

resistant jobsite posting board shall be provided to receive duplicate Treatment Certificates as each required protective treatment is completed, providing a copy for the person the permit is issued to and another copy for the building permit files. The Treatment Certificate shall provide the product used, identity of the applicator, time and date of the treatment, site location, area treated, chemical used, percent concentration and number of gallons used, to establish a verifiable record of protective treatment.

5. Notice of Termite Protection: A permanent sign that identifies the termite treatment provider and need for re-inspection and treatment contract renewal shall be provided. The sign shall be posted in location to be determined by Consultant.

6. Inspections: Building components and building surroundings required to be protected from termite damage in accordance with governing building code shall not be covered or concealed until the release from the building official has been received.

7. Certificate of Compliance: Comply with the rules and laws as established by the Florida Department of Agriculture and Consumer Services, with respect to pre-construction soil treatment for protection against subterranean termites. a. The pest control company shall issue to the Building Department a

Certificate of Compliance that contains the following statement: "The building has received a complete treatment for the prevention of subterranean termites. Treatment is in accordance with rules and laws established by the Florida Department of Agriculture and Consumer Services."

8. Termiticide shall be listed by the Florida Department of Agriculture and Consumer Services (under authority of Chapter 487, Florida Statutes) as a Florida Registered Termiticide intended for use as a preventative treatment for termites for new construction.

9. Approval from applicable jurisdictions (including Miami Dade DERM) that termiticide application will not affect any water reservoir and water use systems within the vicinity of the project site.

B. Provide certificate of compliance from authority having jurisdiction indicating approval of toxicants.

1.07 SEQUENCING


A. Apply toxicant immediately prior to installation of: 1. Vapor Barrier, under concrete slab-on-grade within buildings. 2. Underslab Vapor Retarder, under concrete sidewalks and stair steps adjacent

to buildings.

1.08 PROTECTION

A. To avoid surface flow or overspray of toxicant from application site, do not apply soil poisons when soil or fill is excessively wet or after heavy rains.

B. Unless treated areas are to be immediately covered, take precautions to prevent disturbance of treatment by human or animal contact.

C. Comply with applicable laws, codes, ordinances of Federal, State, and local regulatory agencies having jurisdiction over use of soil poisons.

D. Provide warning signs and instruct workers to use protective measures for their safety.

1.09 WARRANTY

A. See Section 01780 for additional warranty requirements.

B. Upon completion of soil treatment and as a condition of substantial completion, furnish the Project Manager with a written warranty, from the applicator, which shall provide that: 1. Application was made at concentration, rates, and methods complying with

applicable regulatory requirements and these specifications. 2. Effectiveness of treatment is warranted for not less than 5 years without

additional cost to the City, by means of a 5-year Repair and Replacement Bond.

3. Upon evidence of subterranean termite activity, retreat area at no additional charge to the City. Additional treatment shall be sufficient to prevent termites from attacking building or its contents.

4. Upon occurrence of damage to building or to its contents within warranty period, retreat soil and repair or replace damage to building and its contents at no cost to the City.

5. Warranty Bond shall be drawn in favor of the City, successor, or assigns and shall be non-cancelable by all parties to the contract except the City.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. Manufacturers: 1. Arizona Chemical Group, Inc. 2. BASF Corporation: www.bsaf.com. 3. Bayer Corp (Bayer Environmental Science): www.nobugs.com. 4. Cheminova. 5. Control Solutions, Inc. 6. Ensystex III, Inc. 7. Ensystex IV, Inc. 7. Etigra, LLC.


8. FMC Pest Solutions (FMC Corporation): www.pestsolutions.fmc.com. 9. Gharda Chemicals Limited. 10. LG Chemical America, Inc. 11. Nu Farm. 12. Speckoz. 13. Syngenta Professional Products (Syngenta Crop Protection, Inc.):

www.syngentaprofessionalproducts.com. 14. United Phosphorus, Inc. 15. Univar USA, Inc. 16. Whitmire Micro-Gen

B. Products: 1. Florida Registered Soil Termiticides: Subject to current EPA Registration and

listing as a Florida Registered Termiticide, provide termite treatment using one of the following products: a. Active Ingredient - Diflubenzuron (EPA Toxicity Class III):

1) Prescription Treatment Brand Advance Compressed Termite Bait, manufactured by Whitmire Micro-Gen.

b. Active Ingredient - Imidacloprid (EPA Toxicity Class II and III): 1) Centerfire 75 WSP, manufactured by Bayer Environmental Science. 2) Dominion 75WSP Termiticide/Insecticide, manufactured by Control

Solutions, Inc. 3) Garant Pro 2F Insecticide, manufactured by Cheminova. 4) Garant Pro 75 WSP Insecticide, manufactured by Cheminova. 5) I MAXX Pro Insecticide IN WSP, manufactured by Univar USA, Inc. 6) Imida E-Pro 2 F Pre/Post Construction Insecticide, manufactured by

Etigra, LLC. 7) Imida E-Pro 75 WSP Pre/Post Construction Insecticide, manufactured

by Etigra, LLC. 8) Imidacloprid PCO Flowable, manufactured by Nu Farm. 9) Premise 0.5SC, manufactured by Bayer Environmental Science. 10) Premise 2, manufactured by Bayer Environmental Science. 11) Premise 75, manufactured by Bayer Environmental Science. 12) Premise Pre-Construction Insecticide, manufactured by Bayer

Environmental Science. 13) Prothor SC 2, manufactured by Ensystex IV, Inc. 14) Prothor WP, manufactured by Ensystex III, Inc. 15) Prothor WSP, manufactured by Ensystex III, Inc. 16) Speckoz Aggressor 75WSP Termiticide/Insecticide, manufactured by

Speckoz. c. Active Ingredient - Permethrin (EPA Toxicity Class II and III):

1) Dragnet SFR Termiticide/Insecticide, manufactured by FMC Corporation.

2) Martin’s Permethrin SFR Termiticide/Insecticide, manufactured by Control Solutions, Inc.

3) Permastar 380 Permethrin Termiticide/Insecticide, manufactured by LG Chemical America, Inc.

4) Permethrin Pro Termiticide-Turf-Ornamental, manufactured by LG Chemical America, Inc.


5) Prelude Termiticide/Insecticide, manufactured by Syngenta Crop Protection, Inc.

6) Reality Termiticide/Insecticide, manufactured by Gharda Chemicals Limited.

7) Speckoz Permethrin TC, manufactured by Speckoz. 8) Tengard SFR One-Shot Termiticide/Insecticide, manufactured by

United Phosphorus, Inc. 9) Times UP T/C, manufactured by Arizona Chemical Group, Inc.

d. Substitutions: See Section 01600 - Product Requirements. 2. Diluent: Recommended by toxicant manufacturer.

2.02 MIXES

A. Mix toxicant to manufacturer's instructions.

B. Termiticide shall be synthetically color-dyed to permit visual identification of treated soil.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. The initial chemical soil treatment shall be done after earthwork within the application area has been completed. 1. Verify that excavation, backfilling and compaction, and final grading have been

completed.

B. Verify that soil surfaces are sufficiently dry to absorb toxicant, and ready to receive treatment.

C. Concrete over-pour or mortar accumulated along the exterior foundation perimeter shall be removed prior to exterior chemical soil treatment, to enhance vertical penetration of the chemicals.

3.02 APPLICATION

A. Spray apply toxicant in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 1. Soil Conditions: Apply termiticide mixtures when moisture content soil is

sufficiently low to allow uniform distribution of chemical throughout specified areas.

2. Apply termiticide mixture after sub-grade has been made ready for placement of vapor barrier / vapor retarder, and as soon as practical before placement of concrete slab / paving. Piling, pile caps, grade beams, foundation walls, and below grade waterproofing shall have been completed.

3. Apply at least 12 hours before placement of concrete slabs and during normal working hours to be subject to inspection. Notify applicator at least 24 hours before application of termiticide mixtures will be completed.

B. Termite protection shall be provided in accordance with applicable requirements of the governing building code, and as follows: 1. Apply toxicant at the following locations:

a. Soil and earth that will be covered by concrete slab-on-grade. b. Foundation walls.


c. Vertical surfaces in areas such as around foundations, plumbing lines, backfilled soil against foundation walls, and other areas that may warrant more than just a horizontal barrier.

d. Other locations as required by applicable Federal, State and Local laws, rules and regulations, or governing building code.

2. Apply extra treatment to structure penetration surfaces such as pipes, conduits or ducts, and soil penetrations such as grounding rods or posts.

3. Re-treat disturbed treated soil with same toxicant as original treatment. 4. If inspection or testing identifies the presence of termites, re-treat soil and re-

test.

C. Application under Concrete Slabs on Fill: Comply with regulatory requirements and manufacturer's instructions. 1. Apply termiticide mixtures uniformly to all areas beneath concrete slabs-on-

grade, including beneath walkways and entrance platforms and beneath sidewalks within 5 feet of buildings.

2. A minimum of 1 gallon of termiticide mixtures shall be uniformly applied to each 10 square feet of area to be treated.

3. Ground areas beneath concrete slabs-on-grade and paving abutting building slabs shall be similarly treated for a distance not less than 3 feet from building.

D. Application along Foundation Walls, Pipes, and Conduits: Comply with regulatory requirements and manufacturer's instructions. 1. Treat critical areas along both sides of exterior and interior foundation walls,

columns, and around utility pipes, conduits, ducts, and other similar items extending through soil beneath, and next to new construction, to a depth of 1 foot in a strip 6 inches wide, at a rate of 4 gallons of termiticide mixture to each 10 linear feet.

2. Mix chemical with soil as it is placed against walls and utility lines. 3. Apply at least 1 gallon of termiticide mixture around each pipe.

E. Application to Masonry Foundation Walls: Comply with regulatory requirements and manufacturer's instructions. 1. Treat voids of unit masonry foundation walls, top of course occurring at or just

above grade level, with additional treatment of not less than 2 gallons of chemical for each 5 linear feet.

F. Vertical Barrier: Comply with regulatory requirements and manufacturer's instructions. 1. Apply vertical chemical barrier promptly after construction is completed,

including initial landscaping and irrigation/sprinkler installation. 2. Establish vertical barriers in areas such as around foundations, plumbing lines,

backfilled soil against foundation walls, and other areas that may warrant more than just a horizontal barrier.

G. Apply extra treatment at penetrations through concrete slab-on-grade (e.g., piping or duct penetration), and soil penetrations such as grounding rods or posts. 1. Where a protective sleeve is required around metallic piping penetrating a

concrete slab-on-grade, provide treatment of the annular space between the protective sleeve and the pipe in accordance with applicable requirements of the governing building code.


H. Any soil area disturbed after initial chemical soil treatment is applied shall be promptly re-treated by the pest control company (installer), including spaces boxed or formed. Re-treatment shall comply with all applicable health and safety standards and requirements. 1. Re-treat disturbed treated soil with same toxicant as original treatment.

I. If inspection or testing identifies the presence of termites, re-treat soil and re-test.

3.03 CLEAN UP

A. Improper disposal of pesticide, spray mixture, or rinsate is a violation of federal law. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for disposal of these materials and empty containers. Do not allow supplies of chemicals to remain on site unattended.

3.04 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK

A. Do not permit soil grading over treated work.

B. Chemically treated soil shall be protected with a vapor retarder or vapor barrier to protect against rainfall dilution. If rainfall occurs before vapor retarder / vapor barrier placement, re-treatment is required. Any work, including placement of reinforcing steel, done after chemical treatment until the concrete floor is poured, shall be done in such manner as to avoid penetrating or disturbing treated soil.

C. Space in concrete floors boxed out or formed for the subsequent installation of plumbing traps, drains or any other purpose shall be created by using plastic or metal permanently placed forms of sufficient depth to eliminate any planned soil disturbance after initial chemical soil treatment.

D. Condensate lines and roof downspouts shall discharge at least 1 foot (305 mm) away from the structure sidewall; where underground piping is not indicated, provide tail extension or splash block as appropriate for conditions.

END OF SECTION

RENOVATION OF HISTORIC FIRE STATION NO. 2 (Phase II-A) City of Miami Project No. B-30579 03100 - 1 of 5 CONCRETE FORMWORK

SECTION 03100

CONCRETE FORMWORK

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.02 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes, but is not limited to, the design, engineering, construction and removal of formwork required for cast-in-place concrete as shown on the drawings and specified herein.

B. Related Sections include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Division 3 Section “Cast-In-Place Concrete” for finishes. 2. Division 3 Section “Shotcrete”.

C. Work Installed and Furnished by Others: 1. Install built-in anchors, inserts, and bolts for connection of other materials;

sleeves, thimbles, and dovetail anchor slots, plates, frames, seats and all other embedded items including Owner furnished items.

2. Coating of forms and other surfaces as required by this Section.

1.03 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Submit, for record only, not for approval, data for each type of product and material indicated including others as requested by Architect. Substitutions for specified items or manufacturers are to be submitted in accordance with Division 1 and will be subject to approval, rejection or other appropriate action.

C. Formwork Shop Drawings: Prepare shop drawings in compliance with ACI 347R. If requested by the Architect, submit shop drawings showing general construction of forms for concrete permanently exposed to view; including jointing, special form joints or reveals, location and pattern of form tie placement, and other items that visually affect exposed concrete. Architect’s review is for general architectural applications and features only. Formwork design for safety, structural adequacy and efficiency is Contractor’s responsibility.

D. Shoring and reshoring shop drawings: Submit signed and sealed shop drawings prepared by a Delegated Engineer experienced in such work and licensed in the State of Florida. The drawings shall conform to ACI 347R and contain, as a minimum, the location, size and type of all shoring, reshoring, mud sills, blocking, temporary lateral bracing and other accessories necessary to safely support and brace the structure during construction. The drawings shall also show the sequence of installation, load relief and removal. Use a safety factor of 2 for


metal shores and 3 for wood shores. Submit drawings to the Architect, Engineer, Special Inspector and Building Official for record only. Shoring and reshoring design and construction is the sole responsibility of the Contractor and his Engineer. 1. Design structural members to support form facing materials without

deflection. Design camber into formwork as required to compensate for anticipated deflections due to weight and pressures of fresh concrete and construction loads.

2. Prior to each concrete pour, the Delegated Engineer who prepares the shoring and reshoring drawings or his authorized representative shall inspect the shoring and reshoring. He shall provide a field report of each inspection to the Contractor and Special Inspector prior to leaving the site. Upon completion of the project, he shall submit a signed and sealed statement to the Architect and Special Inspector that this work was performed in accordance with his plans and specifications.


A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed concrete work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.

B. Delegated Engineer Qualifications: A licensed engineer who is legally qualified to practice in the State of Florida and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for formwork and shoring and reshoring installations that are similar to those indicated for this Project in material, design, and extent.

C. Codes and Standards: Comply with the following, unless more stringent provisions are indicated: 1. Florida Building Code, 2007 Edition with 2009 Supplement 2. ACI 301, "Specification for Structural Concrete for Buildings.” 3. ACI-318, “Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete.” 4. ACI 117, "Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and

Materials." 5. ACI 347, “Recommended Practice for Concrete Formwork.” 6. ACI SP-4, “Formwork for Concrete.” 7. National Forest Products Association (NFPA), “National Design

Specifications for Stress Grade Lumber and its Fastenings.” 8. American Plywood Association (APA): “Plywood Design Specification”

(Form Y-510); “Concrete Forming: (Form V345) and “Voluntary Product Standard PS 1-95 for Construction and Industrial Plywood” (Form V995).

1.05 JOB CONDITIONS AND COORDINATION OF TRADES

A. General: It is the Contractor’s sole responsibility to coordinate with all trades for the setting of sleeves, anchor bolts, dovetail slots, inserts, frames, flashing, reglets, pipes, ducts and other embedded items and provide all openings required for installation of other work in accordance with the Contractor’s shop drawings and the Contract Documents.


B. Structural Integrity: Provide no sleeves or openings in structural members unless shown on the structural drawings or approved by the Architect.

C. Inspection: Architect may inspect formwork at any time and may reject formwork if forms do not conform to the lines, levels, and tolerances as required in this Section, the shop drawings or the Design Drawings. If formwork is rejected, the Contractor must repair or replace the rejected portion with no additional cost to the Owner.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 FORMWORK MATERIALS

A. Rough-Formed Finished Concrete: Plywood, lumber, metal, or another approved material. Provide lumber dressed on at least two edges and one side for tight fit.

B. Smooth-Formed Finished Concrete: Form-facing panels that will provide continuous, true, and smooth concrete surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints. 1. Plywood, metal, or other approved panel materials. 2. Exterior-grade plywood panels, minimum 5/8” thickness, suitable for

concrete forms, complying with VPS PS 1 (Form V995), and as follows: a. B-B (Concrete Form), Class 1, or better, mill oiled and edge sealed.

C. Stable Soil or Rock: In the event stable soil or rock is encountered and straight-line embankments can be maintained, concrete foundations may be placed into accurately excavated earth trenches, free from water, debris, or loose dirt. Excavations shall be minimum 2” wider and longer than specified.

D. Chamfer Strips: Wood, metal, PVC, or rubber strips, 3/4 by 3/4 inch.

E. Form-Release Agent: Commercially formulated form-release agent that will not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces. Formulate form-release agent with rust inhibitor for steel form-facing materials.

F. Form Ties: Factory-fabricated, removable or snap-off metal or glass-fiber-reinforced plastic form ties designed to resist lateral pressure of fresh concrete on forms and to prevent spalling of concrete on removal. 1. Furnish units that will leave no corrodible metal closer than 1 1/2 inches to

the plane of the exposed concrete surface. 2. Furnish ties that, when removed, will leave holes not larger than 1 1/4

inches in diameter in concrete surface.

G. Accessories: Provide necessary anchors, form ties, shores, construction joints, scaffolds, and bracing as required to install forms. Provide construction joints, control joints, expansion joints and waterstops where indicated on the drawings. 1. Form Joint Gasket: Closed cell rubber sponge. Take care that form joints

are sealed from leakage of cement paste and moisture. 2. Material to form drips, reveals, rustification strips or weep holes shall be

extruded plastic.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


3.01 FORMWORK

A. Design, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork, according to ACI 347, to support vertical, lateral, static, and dynamic loads, and construction loads that might be applied, until concrete structure can support such loads.

B. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of size, shape, alignment, elevation, and position indicated, within tolerance limits of ACI 117.

C. Limit concrete surface irregularities, designated by ACI 347R as abrupt or gradual, as follows: 1. Class A, 1/8 inch: Surfaces prominently exposed to public view. 2. Class B, 1/4 inch: Coarse-textured concrete intended to receive plaster. 3. Class C, 1/2 inch: Other permanently exposed surfaces. 4. Class D, 1 inch: Permanently concealed surfaces.

D. Construct forms tight enough to prevent loss of concrete mortar.

E. Fabricate forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete surfaces. Provide crush or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast concrete surfaces. Provide top forms for inclined surfaces steeper than 1.5 horizontal to 1 vertical. Kerf wood inserts for forming keyways, reglets, recesses, and the like, for easy removal. Do not use rust-stained steel form-facing material.

F. Set edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed strips for slabs to achieve required elevations and slopes in finished concrete surfaces. Provide and secure units to support screed strips; use strike-off templates or compacting-type screeds.

G. Provide temporary openings for cleanouts and inspection ports where interior area of formwork is inaccessible. Close openings with panels tightly fitted to forms and securely braced to prevent loss of concrete mortar. Locate temporary openings in forms at inconspicuous locations.

H. Chamfer exterior corners and edges of permanently exposed concrete.

I. Form openings, chases, offsets, sinkages, keyways, reglets, blocking, screeds, and bulkheads required in the Work. Determine sizes and locations from trades providing such items.

J. Set anchor rods to required tolerance.

K. Clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt, and other debris just before placing concrete.

L. Retighten forms and bracing before placing concrete, as required, to prevent mortar leaks and maintain proper alignment.

M. Coat contact surfaces of forms with form-release agent, according to manufacturer's written instructions, before placing reinforcement.

3.02 EARTH FORMS

A. Hand trim sides and bottom of earth forms. Remove loose soil and rocks and compact to specified density prior to placing reinforcing or concrete. Moisten


sides and bottom immediately prior to concrete placement. Comply with OSHA’s “Trench Safety Act”.

3.03 REMOVING AND REUSING FORMS

A. General: Formwork, for sides of beams, walls, columns, and similar parts of the Work, that does not support weight of concrete may be removed after cumulatively curing at not less than 50 degrees F for 24 hours after placing concrete provided concrete is hard enough to not be damaged by form-removal operations and provided curing and protection operations are maintained.

B. Leave formwork, for beam soffits, slabs, and other structural elements, that supports weight of concrete in place until concrete has achieved the strength and age listed in the Structural Notes. 1. Determine compressive strength of in-place concrete by testing

representative field- or laboratory-cured test specimens according to ACI 301.

2. Remove forms only if shores have been arranged to permit removal of forms without loosening or disturbing shores.

C. Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be reused in the Work. Split, frayed, delaminated, or otherwise damaged form-facing material will not be acceptable for exposed surfaces. The Architect’s approval is required for reusing forms for exposed surfaces. Apply new form-release agent.

D. Reuse forms to greatest extent possible without damaging structural integrity of concrete and without damaging aesthetics of exposed concrete. When forms are reused, clean surfaces, remove fins and laitance, and tighten to close joints. Align and secure joints to avoid offsets. Do not use patched forms for exposed concrete surfaces unless approved by Architect.

3.04 SHORES AND RESHORES

A. Comply with ACI 318, ACI 301, and recommendations in ACI 347R for design, installation, and removal of shoring and reshoring.

B. Plan sequence of removal of shores and reshores to avoid damage to concrete. Locate and provide adequate reshoring to support construction without excessive stress or deflection. Shores must be readily adjustable so that settlement during concrete placement may be taken up at once.

END OF SECTION

RENOVATION OF HISTORIC FIRE STATION NO. 2 (Phase II-A) City of Miami Project No. B-30579 03200 - 1 of 3 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT

SECTION 03200

CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.02 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes, but is not limited to, concrete reinforcement, and necessary accessories.

1.03 SUBMITTALS


B. Do not reproduce Structural Drawings for use as shop or placement drawings without prior approval of the Architect.

C. Product Data: Submit, for record only, not for approval, data for each type of product and material indicated including others as requested by Architect. Indicate manufacturing process used for steel reinforcing. Substitutions for specified items or manufacturers are to be submitted in accordance with Division 1 and will be subject to approval, rejection or other appropriate action.

D. Steel Reinforcement Shop Drawings: Complete details of fabrication, bending, and placement, prepared according to ACI 315, "Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement" and ACI SP-66 “Detailing Manual”. Include material, grade, bar schedules, stirrup spacing, bent bar diagrams, arrangement, and supports of concrete reinforcement.

E. Material Certificates: Signed by manufacturers and contractor certifying that the steel reinforcement and reinforcement accessories comply with requirements of the Contract Documents. Unidentifiable steel is prohibited.


A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed concrete work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.

Codes and Standards: Comply with the following, unless more stringent provisions are indicated: 1. Florida Building Code, 2007 Edition with 2009 Supplement. 2. ACI 301, "Specification for Structural Concrete for Buildings.” 3. ACI 117, "Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and

Materials." 4. ACI 315, “Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement.”


5. ACI-318, “Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete.” 6. “CRSI Manual of Standard Practice.”

1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver, store, and handle steel reinforcement to prevent bending and damage. 1. Deliver reinforcement to the job site bundled, tagged and marked. Use

durable metal or embossed plastic tags indicating bar size, lengths, and reference information corresponding to markings shown on placement drawings.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 STEEL REINFORCEMENT

A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615, Grade 60, deformed.

B. Plain-Steel Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A 185, fabricated from as-drawn steel wire into flat sheets. Rolls are not acceptable.

2.02 REINFORCEMENT ACCESSORIES

A. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire fabric in place. Manufacture bar supports according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete of greater compressive strength than concrete, and as follows: 1. For concrete surfaces where legs of wire bar supports contact forms, use

CRSI Class 1 plastic-protected or CRSI Class 2 stainless-steel bar supports.

2. For welded wire fabric in slabs on grade use precast slab bolsters, concrete brick or sand plate chairs spaced no farther than 3’-0” c/c.

B. Joint Dowel Bars: Plain-steel bars, ASTM A 615, Grade 60.

C. Mechanical Splicers for Reinforcing Steel: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Lenton threaded Couplers. 2. Dayton Bar Grip or Dayton Grip Twist. 3. Dywidag Extruded Coupler Splice. 4. Bar-Lock Coupler System.

D. Reinforcing Dowel Replacement: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Dayton Dowel Bar Replacement. 2. Richmond Dowel Bar Substitution. 3. Lenton Form Saver Plus. 4. Williams Rebar Flange Coupler

2.03 FABRICATING REINFORCEMENT

A. Fabricate steel reinforcement according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice."


B. Shop bend and fabricate reinforcing bars to conform with shapes and dimensions indicated on drawings. In case of errors, do not bend or straighten reinforcement without prior approval of Architect. Make all bends cold.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for placing reinforcement. 1. Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder. Repair damage and reseal vapor

retarder before placing concrete.

B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other foreign materials.

C. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement. Locate and support reinforcement with bar supports to maintain minimum concrete cover specified on the drawings. Tie bars and bar supports together with 16 gauge wire and set wire ties with ends directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces. Do not tack weld crossing reinforcing bars.

D. Splices: Locate only where indicated on the drawings or approved shop drawings except with prior approval of Architect. 1. For standard splices, lap ends, placing bars in contact, and tightly wire tie.

See drawings for lap lengths. 2. Do not weld splices.

E. Provide template for all column dowels.

F. Install welded wire fabric in longest practicable lengths on bar supports spaced to minimize sagging (3’-0”o.c. max.). Lap edges and ends of adjoining sheets at least one mesh spacing plus 2”. Offset laps of adjoining sheet widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction. Lace overlaps with 16 gauge wire.

G. Do not bend bars embedded in hardened or partially hardened concrete without approval from the Architect.

H. Do not weld reinforcing bars unless specifically shown. Where shown comply with AWS D1.4. Bars to be welded shall conform to ASTM A706.

END OF SECTION

RENOVATION OF HISTORIC FIRE STATION NO. 2 (Phase II-A) City of Miami Project No. B-30579 03300 - 1 of 19 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

SECTION 03300

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.02 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes, but is not necessarily limited to, concrete, concrete materials, mix design, placement procedures, curing and finishes.

B. Related Sections include, but are not necessarily limited to, the following: 1. Division 3 Section “Concrete Formwork”. 2. Division 3 Section “Shotcrete”.

1.03 DEFINITIONS

A. Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with one or more of blended hydraulic cement, fly ash and other pozzolans, ground granulated blast-furnace slag, and silica fume.

1.04 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Submit, for record only, not for approval, data for each type of product and material indicated including admixtures, patching compounds, waterstops, joint systems, curing compounds, and others as requested by Architect. Substitutions for specified items or manufacturers are to be submitted in accordance with Division 1 and will be subject to approval, rejection or other appropriate action.

C. Design Mixes: For each concrete mix. Include alternate mix designs when characteristics of materials, project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant adjustments. Substantiating data to be no older than one year from date of submittal for each mix design. 1. Indicate amounts of mix water to be withheld for later addition at Project

site.

D. Material Certificates: Signed by manufacturers and contractor certifying that each of the following items complies with requirements of the Contract Documents: 1. Cementitious materials and aggregates. 2. Admixtures. 3. Floor and slab treatments. 4. Waterstops. 5. Curing materials. 6. Bonding agents.


7. Adhesives. 8. Vapor retarders. 9. Repair materials.


A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed concrete Work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance. Submit written evidence of at least ten such projects.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in the successful manufacturing ready-mixed concrete products complying with ASTM C 94 requirements for production and delivery, facilities and equipment. 1. Manufacturer must be certified according to the National Ready Mixed

Concrete Association's Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete Production Facilities. Submit certification.

C. Source Limitations: For each placement, obtain each type or class of cementitious material of the same brand from the same manufacturer's plant, each aggregate from one source, and each admixture from the same manufacturer.

D. Codes and Standards: Comply with the following, unless more stringent provisions are indicated: 1. Florida Building Code, 2007 Edition with 2009 Supplement. 2. ACI 117, "Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and

Materials." 3. ACI 211.1 “Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Normal,

Heavyweight and Mass Concrete.” 4. ACI 301, "Specification for Structural Concrete for Buildings.” 5. ACI-304, “Recommended Practice for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting,

and Placing Concrete.” 6. ACI-305, “Hot Weather Concreting.” 7. ACI-308, “Recommended Practice for Curing Concrete.” 8. ACI-309, “Recommended Practice for Consolidation.” 9. ACI-311, “Guide for Concrete Inspection.” 10. ACI-318, “Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete.”

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 CONCRETE MATERIALS

A. Portland Cement: 1. General: ASTM C 150, Type I. 2. Slabs on Grade: Type I or Type II with a C3A content less than 8%.

B. Other Cementitious Materials: Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag: ASTM C 989, Grade 100 or 120.

C. Pozzolans: 1. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class C or F.


D. Blended Hydraulic Cement: ASTM C 595, Type I (PM), pozzolan-modified portland cement.

E. Blended Hydraulic Cement: ASTM C 595, Type I (SM), slag-modified portland cement.

F. Normal-Weight Aggregate: 1. Fine Aggregate: Natural quartz sand or manufactured sand from local

stone aggregates conforming to ASTM C33, produced from FDOT approved sources, with fineness modulus not less than 2.4, and having a proven service record.

2. Coarse Aggregate: Clean, washed, sound, crushed natural stone products produced from FDOT approved sources. Free from salt, clay, mud, loam or other foreign matter. Conform to ASTM C33; sizes No. 67 (3/4 inch) or No. 57 (1 inch) and No. 8 or No. 89 (3/8 inch). Use largest size practical for members being cast.

3. Class: Negligible weathering region, class per ASTM C33. 4. Nominal Maximum Aggregate Size: 3/4 inch.

G. Water: Potable and complying with ASTM C 94.

2.02 CONCRETE ADMIXTURES

A. General: Provide admixtures produced by acceptable manufacturers and used in compliance with the manufacturer’s printed directions. Use only admixtures which have been incorporated and tested in the accepted mixes, unless otherwise authorized in writing by the Architect. Do not use admixtures which increase the shrinkage properties of concrete. Submit substantiating data, if requested.

B. Air-entraining admixture: Conform to ASTM C260. Use air-entraining admixture in all concrete except in concrete having a design strength greater than 4000 psi.

C. Water-reducing admixture: Conform to ASTM C494, Type A, D or E free of chlorides, fluorides, or nitrates, except for those attributable to the water used in manufacturing. Use in all structural concrete.

D. High Range Water Reducing Admixture: Conform to ASTM C494, Type F or Type G and ASTM C1017. Formulate HRWR from sulfonated melamine formaldehyde condensates or sulfonated naphthalene formaldehyde condensate or carboxylated polyether. The admixture is to be added to the concrete mix after initial mixing has taken place. If added at the batch plant HRWR to have an effective life without redosing (third generation HRWR) of at least 2 Hours. If added at the jobsite, the addition shall be by certified technicians employed by the concrete supplier or an authorized representative of the admixture manufacturer. This admixture is in addition to and not a substitute for any other admixtures specified elsewhere.

E. Calcium Chloride: Do not use calcium chloride in concrete. Do not use any admixtures which contribute free chloride ions to the concrete mix.

2.03 WATERSTOPS

A. Self-Expanding Strip Waterstops: Manufactured rectangular or trapezoidal strip bentonite for adhesive bonding to concrete.


1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Volclay Waterstop-RX; Colloid Environmental Technologies Co. b. Hydrostop, Quest Construction Products Co.

2.04 VAPOR RETARDERS

A. Vapor Retarder: Polyethylene sheet, ASTM D 4397, not less than 10 mils thick.

2.05 FLOOR AND SLAB TREATMENTS

A. Penetrating Liquid Floor Treatment: Chemically reactive, waterborne solution of inorganic silicate or siliconate materials and proprietary components; odorless; colorless; that penetrates, hardens, and densifies concrete surfaces. Use floor treatment with low toxicity and emit low levels of Volatile Organic Compounds (VOC).

B. Penetrating Water Repellent: A forty percent (40%) by weight, solution of alkyl-trialkoxy silane in sixty percent (60%) (Wt./Wt.) anhydrous isopropanol. Use water repellent with low toxicity and emit low levels of Volatile Organic Compounds (VOC).

C. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Penetrating Liquid Floor Treatment:

a. Titan Hard; Burke Group, LLC (The). b. Intraseal; Conspec Marketing & Manufacturing Co., Inc. c. Euco Diamond Hard; Euclid Chemical Co. d. Seal Hard; L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.

2. Penetrating Water Repellent: a. Sil-Act ATS 42; Advance Chemical Technologies, Inc. b. Euco-Guard S40; Euclid Chemical. c. Chem-Trete BSM 40; Degussa. d. Conspec Silane 40; Conspec. e. Masterseal SL40; Master Builders (ChemRex).

2.06 CURING MATERIALS

A. Liquid Membrane Curing Compound: A dissipating resin type compound, conforming to ASTM C309, Type 1 or 2. The film must chemically break down in a 4 to 6 week period after application.

B. Liquid Membrane-Forming Cure and Seal Compound: VOC Compliant, conforming to ASTM C309, Type 1, Class B and ASTM C1315, Type 1, Class A or B. The compound shall be a clear styrene acrylate type, 25% solids content minimum, and have test data from an independent testing laboratory indicating to a maximum moisture loss of .040 grams per square cm. When applied at a coverage rate of 200 sq. ft. per gallon.

C. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing approximately 9 oz./sq. yd. dry.

D. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene sheet.


E. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Liquid Membrane Curing Compounds Dissipating Type:

a. Aqua Kure-Clear; Lambert Corp. b. Resin Cure-E; Nox-crete, Inc. c. Kurez D.R. V ox; Euclid Chemical Company d. Res X-Cure WB; Burke e. 1100 Clear; W.R. Meadows, Inc. f. Day Chem Rez Cure (J-11-W) ; Dayton Superior Corporation g. L&M Cure R ; L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.

2. Liquid Membrane-Forming Cure and Seal Compound: a. Kure 1315; Sonneborn Building Products b. Day-Chem Cure & Seal 1315; Dayton Superior Corporation c. Super Aqua-Cure VOX or Super Diamond Clear VOX; Euclid

Chemical Company d. Crystal Gard 0800; Lambert Corp. e. Cure & Seal 250E; Nox-crete, Inc. f. Spartan Cote 30%; Burke g. Dress & Seal 25; L&M Construction Chemicals h. CS 309-25 or VOCOMP-25; W.R. Meadows, Inc.

2.07 RELATED MATERIALS

A. Joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber, or ASTM D 1752, cork or self-expanding cork.

B. Bonding Agent: ASTM C 1059, Type II, non-redispersible, acrylic emulsion or styrene butadiene. Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the work include, but are not limited to the following: 1. Acrylbond; Lambert Corp. 2. J-40 Bonding Agent; Dayton Superior Corp. 3. Admix 101; Larsen Products 4. Acryl-60; Std. Drywall 5. AcrylSet; Master Builders 6. Sonocrete; Sonneborn-Contech 7. SBR Latex; Euclid Chemical Co. 8. Sika Latex; Sika Corp.

C. Epoxy-Bonding Adhesive: ASTM C 881, two-component, 100% solid, epoxy resin, capable of humid curing and bonding to damp surfaces, of class and grade to suit requirements. Use Types IV and V, load bearing, for bonding hardened or freshly mixed concrete to hardened concrete. Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the work include, but are not limited to the following: 1. Epiweld 58; Lambert Corp. 2. Epoxtite; A.C. Horn 3. Sikadur Hi-Mod; Sika Chemical Corp. 4. Euco Epoxy 452; Euclid Chemical Co. 5. Concresive LPL; Master Builders 6. Nitrobond Epoxy; Fosroc


D. Reglets: Fabricate reglets of not less than 0.0217-inch thick galvanized steel sheet. Temporarily fill or cover face opening of reglet to prevent intrusion of concrete or debris.

E. Dovetail Anchor Slots: Hot-dip galvanized steel sheet, not less than 0.0336 inch thick, with bent tab anchors. Temporarily fill or cover face opening of slots to prevent intrusion of concrete or debris.

2.08 CEMENT GROUT AND DRYPACK

A. Prepackaged Non-Shrink Non-Metallic Non-Gaseous Grout: ASTM C 1107, Grade B or C at a fluid consistency (flow cone) of 20 to 30 seconds. Grout shall be bleed free and attain 7500 psi compressive strength in 28 days at fluid consistency. Use for structural repairs. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the

following: a. Masterflow 928; Master Builders b. Crystex; L & M Construction Chemicals c. Five Star Fluid Grout 100; U.S. Grout d. Euco N-S; Euclid Chemical Co. e. Sikagrout; Sika Corp. f. Conbextra HF; Fosroc g. Vibropruf #20; Lambert Corp.

B. Cement Grout: Mix one part Portland cement, 2-1/2 parts fine aggregate, and enough water and liquid bonding agent in a 50/50 mix for required consistency depending on use. Consistency may range from mortar consistency to a mixture that will flow under its own weight. Use for leveling, preparing setting pads of beds, for filling non-structural voids, and similar uses. Do not use for grouting under bearing plates or structural members in place.

C. Drypack: Mix one part Portland cement, 2 parts fine aggregate, and enough water and liquid bonding agent in a 50/50 mix to hydrate cement and provide a mixture that can be molded with hands into a stable ball (a stiff mix). Do not mix more than can be used in 30 minutes. Use for patching tie holes and large surface defects in concrete.

2.09 SLAB REPAIR MATERIALS

A. Repair Underlayment: Cement-based, polymer-modified, self-leveling product that can be applied in thicknesses from 1/8 inch and that can be feathered at edges to match adjacent floor elevations. For use on slabs not receiving finishes. 1. Cement Binder: ASTM C 150, Portland cement or hydraulic or blended

hydraulic cement as defined in ASTM C 219. 2. Primer: Product of underlayment manufacturer recommended for

substrate, conditions, and application. 3. Aggregate: Well-graded, washed gravel, 1/8 to 1/4 inch or coarse sand as

recommended by underlayment manufacturer. 4. Compressive Strength: Not less than 4100 psi at 28 days when tested

according to ASTM C 109/C 109M.


B. Repair Topping: Traffic-bearing, cement-based, polymer-modified, self-leveling product that can be applied in thicknesses from 1/4 inch. For use on slabs not receiving finishes. 1. Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be

incorporated into the work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Levelayer III; Daytonn Superior b. Levelex HS ; L&M Construction c. Certi-Vex SLU TC ; Vexcon. d. Mastertop 112 Topping; Master Builders. e. Quikrete Self-Leveling Floor Resurfacer Fast-Set; Quikcrete.

2.010 CONCRETE MIXES

A. Concrete for all parts of the concrete work shall be homogenous, and when hardened, possess the required strength, durability, watertightness, appearance, resistance to deterioration and abrasion, and other qualities as specified or required.

B. Mix proportioning: Proportion concrete according to ACI 211.1. Trial mixes shall be designed by the testing laboratory approved by Architect or designed by the producer and witnessed and tested by the testing laboratory, in accordance with ACI 318 Chapter 5.3. Proportioning on the basis of field experience with complete statistical data, not more than one year old from date of submittal, to confirm mixes is acceptable.

C. Provide concrete which will develop ultimate compressive strength at 28 days equal to that noted on drawings and listed below.

D. Concrete Grades:

Mix No. Strength

Air

Yes/NoMax. Aggregate

Size W/C or W/C&P*

1 3000 N 1” 0.62

2 3000 Y 1” 0.60

3 3000 N 3/4” 0.62

4 3000 Y 3/4” 0.60

5 4000 Y 1” 0.54

6 4000 N 1” 0.54

7 4000 Y 3/8” 0.52


E. Concrete Use:

Element Mix No. 1. Footings 2 2. Grade Beams / Wall Footings 2 3. Slab on Grade 1 4. Columns and Poured Walls 5, 6, 7 5. Elevated Slabs and Beams 5, 6, 7

F. Design Slump: 1. General: 4 inches. 2. Concrete Containing High Range Water Reducer: 2 to 3 inches before

addition of HRWR, 9 inches after. 3. Slump Tolerance: Plus/minus 1 inch.

G. Chloride Ion Content for Corrosion Protection: Determine the chloride content of the component concrete materials, excluding admixtures, and provide this information to the Architect when submitting mix design. Design mixes will not be approved when the sum of chloride content of component materials indicates that the concrete mix derived from those materials will have a water soluble chloride ion content exceeding 0.1% for concrete exposed to the elements and 0.2% for concrete protected from the elements, when percent is determined by weight of cement. When the source of any component material for the concrete is changed or when the design mix is altered, a chloride content determination test shall be made immediately. Resubmit the altered design mix for approval by the Architect.

H. Cementitious Materials: Minimum Portland cement content of any concrete mix containing Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag is 270 lbs., for all other concrete mixes, minimum portland cement content is 423 lbs. 1. Provide concrete mixes having a fly ash content of 15% to 20%, by weight,

of cementitious material. 2. Provide concrete mixes having a Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag

content of 40% to 50 %, by weight, of cementitious material. 3. Provide concrete mixes having a Combined Fly Ash and Ground

Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag: 50 percent portland cement minimum, with fly ash or slag not exceeding 25 percent.

Limit percentage, by weight, of cementitious materials other than portland cement in concrete as follows: 1. Fly Ash: 20 percent. 2. Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag: 50 percent. 3. Combined Fly Ash and Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag: 50 percent

portland cement minimum, with fly ash or slag not exceeding 25 percent.

I. Air Content: Add air-entraining admixture at manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in concrete at point of placement having an air content of 3 to 5 percent, except 1 to 3 percent entrapped air for concrete to receive a hard trowel finish, (floor slabs), unless otherwise indicated.


J. Admixtures: Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Use water-reducing admixture or high-range water-reducing admixture

(superplasticizer) in all structural concrete. 2. Use water-reducing and retarding admixture when ambient temperature is

85 degrees F or higher and/or low humidity, or other adverse placement conditions exist.

3. Use high range water-reducing admixture in pumped concrete, walls 8” thick and less, at areas of reinforcing steel congestion, and as required for placement and workability, concrete required to be watertight, and concrete with a water-cementitious materials ratio below 0.40.

K. Adjustment to Concrete Mixes: Mix design adjustments may be requested by contractor when characteristics of materials, job conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant; at no additional cost to Owner and as accepted by Architect. Laboratory test data for revised mix design and strength results must be submitted to and accepted by Architect before using in work.

2.011 CONCRETE MIXING

A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to ASTM C 94.

B. Mixing and Delivery Time: When air temperature is between 95 and 100 degrees F, reduce mixing and delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 100 degrees F, reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes.

C. Provide batch ticket for each batch discharged and used in the Work, indicating Project identification name and number, date, mix type and number, batch time, mix time, quantity, and amount of water added. Record approximate location of final deposit in structure.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EMBEDDED ITEMS

A. Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining work that is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use Setting Drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded. 1. Install anchor bolts, accurately located, to elevations required. 2. Install reglets to receive top edge of foundation sheet waterproofing and to

receive through-wall flashings in outer face of concrete frame at exterior walls, where flashing is shown at lintels, shelf angles, and other conditions.

3. Install dovetail anchor slots in concrete structures as indicated. 4. Do not provide sleeves or openings in structural members unless shown on

the structural drawings or approved by the Architect.

3.02 VAPOR RETARDERS

A. Vapor Retarder: Place, protect, and repair vapor-retarder sheets according to manufacturer's written instructions. Use below interior floor slabs only.

3.03 JOINTS


A. General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete.

B. Construction Joints: Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at locations indicated or as approved by Architect. 1. Place joints perpendicular to main reinforcement. Continue reinforcement

across construction joints, unless otherwise indicated. Provide dowels as shown on drawings or as required by Architect. Do not continue reinforcement through sides of strip placements of slabs.

2. For members 5” thick or more, form keys from preformed galvanized steel, plastic keyway-section forms or bulkhead forms with keys, unless otherwise indicated. Embed keys at least 1-1/2 inches into concrete. Submit detail to Architect for review.

3. Locate joints for beams, slabs, joists, and girders in the middle third of spans. Offset joints in girders a minimum distance of twice the beam width from a beam-girder intersection.

4. Locate horizontal joints in walls and columns at underside of floors, slabs, beams, and girders and at the top of footings or floor slabs. Allow 4 hours (minimum) between when column or wall is cast and when concrete supported by column or wall is cast.

5. Space vertical joints in walls at 80’ o.c. U.O.N. on drawings. Place controls joints at 40’ o.c. between construction joints U.O.N. on drawings. If locations are not shown, locate joints beside piers integral with walls, near corners, and in concealed locations where possible.

6. Use a bonding agent at locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened or partially hardened concrete surfaces. In beams and girders use epoxy-bonding adhesive at locations when fresh concrete is placed against hardened or partially hardened concrete surfaces.

C. Contraction Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: Form weakened-plane contraction joints, sectioning concrete into areas as indicated on drawings. If requested, the contractor shall prepare and submit to the Architect a joint layout. Construct contraction joints as follows: 1. Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with

shatterproof abrasive or diamond-rimmed blades using the “Soff-Cut” early entry dry-cut saws. Cut 1/8 inch wide and 1 inch deep joints into concrete when cutting action will not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface and before concrete develops random contraction cracks. This is usually within 2 hours of final finish at each control joint but not more than 8 hours after completion of concrete pour.

2. Grooved Joints: Form contraction joints after initial floating by grooving and finishing each edge of joint to a radius of 1/8 inch. Repeat grooving of contraction joints after applying surface finishes. Eliminate groover tool marks on concrete surfaces.

D. Isolation Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: After removing formwork, install joint-filler strips at slab junctions with vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade beams, and other locations, as indicated.


1. Extend joint-filler strips full width and depth of joint, terminating flush with finished concrete surface, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Terminate full-width joint-filler strips not less than 1/2 inch or more than 1 inch below finished concrete surface where joint sealants, specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants," are indicated.

3. Install joint-filler strips in lengths as long as practicable. Where more than one length is required, lace or clip sections together.

E. Dowel Joints: Install dowel sleeves and dowels or dowel bar and support assemblies at joints where indicated. 1. Use dowel sleeves or lubricate or asphalt-coat one-half of dowel length to

prevent concrete bonding to one side of joint.

F. Coordinate construction and control joints with requirements of finish material joints.

3.04 WATERSTOPS

A. Self-Expanding Strip Waterstops: Install in construction joints at locations indicated, according to manufacturer's written instructions, bonding or mechanically fastening and firmly pressing into place. Install in longest lengths practicable.

3.05 CONCRETE PLACEMENT

A. Complete the following before placing concrete: 1. Excavate and compact subgrade, arrange for compaction testing, place

vapor barrier and remove excess water. 2. Secure all formwork. Verify that shoring and reshoring has been inspected

and accepted by Delegated Engineer. Moisten wood forms except where form coatings are used.

3. Accurately locate all steel reinforcement, conduits, outlet boxes, anchors, hangers, sleeves, bolts, expansion joint materials and other embedded items and secure against shifting during concrete placement or consolidation.

4. Cooperate with other trades and verify that their work is installed. 5. Notify testing agency to test concrete. 6. Ensure that all required inspections are performed.

B. Comply with ACI 301, ACI 304, ACI 308 and ACI 318.

C. Jobsite Tempering: Place concrete within 1-1/2 hours after introduction of water to mix. Submit time stamped batching tickets upon delivery of concrete to job site. 1. Do not add water to ready-mix concrete except as provided in ASTM C 94,

Paragraph 11.7. When so allowed, limit addition of water to maximum of one (1) gallon per cubic yard. Addition of water may only be authorized by Architect, the concrete producer’s quality control representative, a preapproved representative of Contractor, or the Special Inspector.

2. Concrete produced with high range water reducer may only be tempered with additional high range water reducer.

D. Deposit concrete continuously or in layers of such thickness that no new concrete will be placed on concrete that has hardened enough to cause seams


or planes of weakness. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as specified. Deposit concrete to avoid segregation. 1. Maximum height of concrete free fall is 4 feet. Columns up to 8 feet in

height may be poured in one lift. Concrete in columns and walls over 8 feet may be poured full height with the use of drop chutes or tremies or up to a maximum of 16 feet if HRWR admix concrete is used.

E. Deposit concrete in forms in horizontal layers no deeper than 24 inches and in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints. Place each layer while preceding layer is still plastic, to avoid cold joints. 1. Consolidate placed concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment. Use

equipment and procedures for consolidating concrete recommended by ACI 309R.

2. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators vertically at uniformly spaced locations no farther than the visible effectiveness of the vibrator. Place vibrators to rapidly penetrate placed layer and at least 6 inches into preceding layer. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have begun to lose plasticity. At each insertion, limit duration of vibration to time necessary to consolidate concrete and complete embedment of reinforcement and other embedded items without causing mix constituents to segregate.

3. Concrete in columns and walls shall be cast at least twenty four (24) hours before horizontal members they support are cast. Exception: Tie columns concrete and grout in masonry cells shall be cast at least four (4) hours before beams cast on top of masonry.

F. Deposit and consolidate concrete for slabs in a continuous operation, within limits of construction joints, until placement of a panel or section is complete. 1. Consolidate concrete during placement operations so concrete is

thoroughly worked around reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners.

2. Maintain reinforcement in position on chairs during concrete placement. 3. Screed slab surfaces with a straightedge and strike off to correct

elevations. 4. Slope surfaces uniformly to drains where required. 5. Begin initial floating using bull floats or darbies to form a uniform and open-

textured surface plane, free of humps or hollows, before excess moisture or bleedwater appears on the surface. Do not further disturb slab surfaces before starting finishing operations.

G. Pumping: Slumps in excess of six (6) inches at the pump will not be permitted except for concrete produced with HRWR. If placing by means of pump, a specifically designed concrete mix shall be submitted to the Architect for review. No pumps smaller than 4 inches will be permitted. Exception: A 3” pump may be used for 8” wide beams and columns cast on top of or between masonry walls or for filling masonry cells.

H. Hot-Weather Placement: Place concrete according to recommendations in ACI 305R and as follows, except concrete temperature shall not exceed 100 degrees F:


1. Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain concrete temperature below 100 degrees F at time of placement.

2. Cover steel reinforcement with water-soaked burlap so steel temperature will not exceed ambient air temperature immediately before embedding in concrete.

3. Fog-spray forms, steel reinforcement, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep subgrade moisture uniform without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas.

4. Use Type D water reducing admixtures when ambient temperature exceeds 90 degrees F or other adverse placing conditions exist.

I. Do not place concrete in exposed conditions when it is raining unless adequate protection is provided.

3.06 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES

A. Rough-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material with tie holes and defective areas repaired and patched. Remove fins and other projections exceeding 1/4” rubbed down or chipped off. Use for concrete surfaces not exposed to view in the finished work.

B. Smooth-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material, arranged in an orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. Repair and patch tie holes and defective areas. Remove fins and other projections exceeding 1/8 inch in height. 1. Apply to concrete surfaces exposed to public view or to be covered with a

coating or covering material applied directly to concrete, such as waterproofing, dampproofing, veneer plaster, painting, or staining.

2. Do not apply rubbed finish to smooth-formed finish.

C. Rubbed Finish: Apply the following to smooth-formed finished concrete: 1. Smooth-Rubbed Finish: Not later than one day after form removal, moisten

concrete surfaces and rub with carborundum brick or another abrasive until producing a uniform color and texture. Do not apply cement grout other than that created by the rubbing process.

2. Grout-Cleaned Finish: Wet concrete surfaces and apply grout of a consistency of thick paint to coat surfaces and fill small holes. Mix one part portland cement to one and one-half parts fine sand with a 1:1 mixture of bonding admixture and water. Add white portland cement in amounts determined by trial patches so color of dry grout will match adjacent surfaces. Scrub grout into voids and remove excess grout. When grout whitens, rub surface with clean burlap and keep surface damp by fog spray for at least 36 hours.

3. Cork-Floated Finish: Wet concrete surfaces and apply a stiff grout. Mix one part portland cement and one part fine sand with a 1:1 mixture of bonding agent and water. Add white portland cement in amounts determined by trial patches so color of dry grout will match adjacent surfaces. Compress grout into voids by grinding surface. In a swirling motion, finish surface with a cork float.

D. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces adjacent to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with


a texture matching adjacent formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent unformed surfaces, unless otherwise indicated.

3.07 FINISHING FLOORS AND SLABS

A. General: Comply with recommendations in ACI 302.1R for screeding, restraightening, and finishing operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces. Slope surfaces to drains.

B. Scratch Finish: While still plastic, texture concrete surface that has been screeded and bull-floated or darbied. Use stiff brushes, brooms, or rakes. 1. Apply scratch finish to surfaces indicated and to surfaces to receive

concrete floor topping or mortar setting beds for ceramic or quarry tile, portland cement terrazzo, and other bonded cementitious floor finishes.

C. Float Finish: Begin floating when surface water has disappeared and when concrete has stiffened sufficiently to permit operation of power driven floats. Consolidate surface with power-driven floats or by hand floating if area is small or inaccessible to power driven floats. Restraighten, cut down high spots, and fill low spots. Repeat float passes and restraightening until surface is left with a uniform, smooth, granular texture. 1. Apply float finish to surfaces indicated, to surfaces to receive trowel finish,

and to floor and slab surfaces to be covered with fluid-applied or sheet waterproofing, built-up or membrane roofing, or sand-bed terrazzo.

D. Trowel Finish: After applying float finish, apply first trowel finish and consolidate concrete by hand or power-driven trowel. Continue troweling passes and restraighten until surface is free of trowel marks and uniform in texture and appearance. Grind smooth any surface defects that would telegraph through applied coatings or floor coverings. 1. Apply a trowel finish to surfaces indicated and to floor and slab surfaces

exposed to view or to be covered with resilient flooring, carpet, ceramic or quarry tile set over a cleavage membrane, paint, or another thin film-finish coating system

E. Trowel and Fine-Broom Finish: Apply a partial trowel finish, stopping after second troweling, to surfaces indicated and to surfaces where ceramic or quarry tile is to be installed by either thickset or thin-set method. Immediately after second troweling, and when concrete is still plastic, slightly scarify surface with a fine broom.

F. Broom Finish: Apply a broom finish to exterior concrete platforms, steps, and ramps, and elsewhere as indicated. 1. Immediately after float finishing, slightly roughen trafficked surface by

brooming with fiber-bristle broom perpendicular to main traffic route. Coordinate required final finish with Architect before application.

G. Floor Flatness and Levelness: Finish surfaces to the following tolerances according to ASTM E 1155 for a randomly trafficked floor surface and measured within 72 hours and before supporting formwork or shoring is removed: 1. Scratch finish or Non-Critical Floors, such as Mechanical Rooms, Non-

Public Unfinished Areas, Parking Slabs: Specified overall values of


flatness, F(F) 20; and levelness, F(L) 15; with minimum local values of flatness, F(F) 15; and levelness, F(L) 10.

2. Float Finish: Specified overall values of flatness, F(F) 20; and levelness, F(L) 17; with minimum local values of flatness, F(F) 15; and levelness, F(L) 13.

3. Carpeted Slabs: Specified overall values of flatness, F(F) 25; and levelness, F(L) 20; with minimum local values of flatness, F(F) 17; and levelness, F(L) 15.

4. Thin or No Floor Covering: Specified overall values of flatness, F(F) 30; and levelness, F(L) 20; with minimum local values of flatness, F(F) 20; and levelness, F(L) 17; for suspended slabs.

5. Specified overall values of flatness, F(F) 40; and levelness, F(L) 30; with minimum local values of flatness, F(F) 25; and levelness, F(L) 22.

H. Floor Flatness and Levelness Acceptance: The Architect may authorize the testing agency to verify that the specified F(F) and F(L) numbers have been achieved for any slab pours except for unshored or sloped construction. Slabs that do not meet the specified F(F) or F(L) numbers shall be removed and replaced. Alternatively, the Contractor may propose repairs to the slab or a credit to the Project.

3.08 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS

A. Filling In: Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures, unless otherwise indicated, after work of other trades is in place. Mix, place, and cure concrete, as specified, to blend with in-place construction. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling indicated or required to complete Work.

B. Curbs: Provide monolithic finish to interior curbs by stripping forms while concrete is still green and by steel-troweling surfaces to a hard, dense finish with corners, intersections, and terminations slightly rounded.

C. Equipment Bases and Foundations: Provide machine and equipment bases and foundations as shown on Drawings. Set anchor bolts for machines and equipment at correct elevations, complying with diagrams or templates of manufacturer furnishing machines and equipment.

D. Base Plates and Foundations: Grout using specified non-shrink, non-metallic grout. Where applicable, grout at least 3 days prior to casting concrete on supported structure.

3.09 CONCRETE PROTECTION AND CURING

A. General: Comply with ACI 308 “Recommended Practice for Curing Concrete” and ACI 301. Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection and with recommendations in ACI 305R for hot-weather protection during curing.

B. Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces, including underside of beams, supported slabs, and other similar surfaces. If forms remain during curing period, moist cure after loosening forms. If removing forms before end of curing period, continue curing by one or a combination of the methods listed under C. Unformed Surfaces:


C. Unformed Surfaces: Begin curing immediately after finishing concrete. Cure unformed surfaces, including slabs, concrete floor toppings, and other surfaces, by one or a combination of the following methods: 1. Curing Compound: Apply to all concrete surfaces that are not permanently

exposed. Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Provide a second coat applied at 90 degrees to initial application within three hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period.

2. Curing and Sealing Compound: Apply to permanently exposed concrete surfaces. Apply uniformly in a continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Repeat process 24 hours later and apply a second coat. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period.

3. Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days with the following materials: a. Water. b. Continuous water-fog spray. c. Absorptive cover, water saturated, and kept continuously wet. Cover

concrete surfaces and edges with 12-inch lap over adjacent absorptive covers.

4. Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at least 12 inches, and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Cure for not less than seven days. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover material and waterproof tape. a. Moisture cure or use moisture-retaining covers to cure concrete

surfaces to receive floor coverings. b. Moisture cure or use moisture-retaining covers to cure concrete

surfaces to receive penetrating liquid floor treatments. c. Cure concrete surfaces to receive floor coverings with either a

moisture-retaining cover or a curing compound that the manufacturer recommends for use with floor coverings.

3.010 LIQUID FLOOR TREATMENTS

A. Penetrating Liquid Floor Treatment: Prepare, apply, and finish penetrating liquid floor treatment according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Remove curing compounds, sealers, oil, dirt, laitance, and other

contaminants and complete surface repairs. 2. Do not apply to concrete that is less than 14 days old. 3. Apply liquid until surface is saturated, scrubbing into surface until a gel

forms; rewet; and repeat brooming or scrubbing. Rinse with water; remove excess material until surface is dry. Apply a second coat in a similar manner if surface is rough or porous.

B. Sealing Coat: Uniformly apply a continuous sealing coat of curing and sealing compound to hardened concrete by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions.


C. Penetrating Water Repellant: Provide for all concrete surfaces permanently exposed to the weather.

3.011 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS

A. Defective Concrete: Repair and patch defective areas when approved by Architect. Remove and replace concrete that cannot be repaired and patched to Architect's approval.

B. Repairing Formed Surfaces: Surface defects include color and texture irregularities, cracks, spalls, air bubbles, honeycombs, rock pockets, fins and other projections on the surface, and stains and other discolorations that cannot be removed by cleaning. 1. Immediately after form removal, cut out honeycombs, rock pockets, and

voids more than 1/2 inch in any dimension to solid concrete but not less than 1 inch in depth. Make edges of cuts perpendicular to concrete surface. If reinforcing steel is exposed, remove concrete to provide a minimum of 3/4” clearance all around. Prior to patching allow the Architect and Threshold Inspector adequate time to review prepared areas. Clean, dampen with water, and brush-coat prepared surfaces with bonding agent or slurry coat. Fill and compact with dry pack grout or non-shrink non-metallic grout before bonding agent has dried. Fill form-tie voids with cement grout, dry pack grout or cone plugs secured in place with bonding agent.

2. Repair defects on surfaces exposed to view by blending white portland cement and standard portland cement so that, when dry, patching mortar will match surrounding color. Patch a test area at inconspicuous locations to verify mixture and color match before proceeding with patching. Compact mortar in place and strike off slightly higher than surrounding surface.

3. Repair defects on concealed formed surfaces that affect concrete's durability and structural performance as determined by Architect.

C. Repairing Unformed Surfaces: Test unformed surfaces, such as slabs, for finish and verify surface tolerances specified for each surface. Correct low and high areas. Test surfaces sloped to drain for trueness of slope and smoothness; use a sloped template. 1. Repair finished surfaces containing defects. Surface defects include

spalls, popouts, honeycombs, rock pockets, crazing and cracks in excess of 0.01 inch wide or that penetrate to reinforcement or completely through unreinforced sections regardless of width, and other objectionable conditions.

2. After concrete has cured at least 14 days, correct high areas by grinding. 3. Correct localized low areas during or immediately after completing surface

finishing operations by cutting out low areas and replacing with patching mortar. Finish repaired areas to blend into adjacent concrete.

4. Correct other low areas scheduled to receive floor coverings with a repair underlayment. Prepare, mix, and apply repair underlayment and primer according to manufacturer's written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level surface. Feather edges to match adjacent floor elevations.


5. Correct other low areas scheduled to remain exposed with a repair topping. Cut out low areas to ensure a minimum repair topping depth of 1/4 inch to match adjacent floor elevations. Prepare, mix, and apply repair topping and primer according to manufacturer's written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level surface.

6. Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes 1 inch or less in diameter, by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove defective areas with square cuts and expose steel reinforcement with at least 3/4 inch clearance all around. Dampen concrete surfaces in contact with patching concrete and apply bonding agent. Mix patching concrete of same materials and mix as original concrete except without coarse aggregate. Place, compact, and finish to blend with adjacent finished concrete. Cure in same manner as adjacent concrete.

7. Repair random cracks and single holes 1 inch or less in diameter with dry pack grout or non-shrink non-metallic grout. Groove top of cracks and cut out holes to sound concrete and clean off dust, dirt, and loose particles. Dampen cleaned concrete surfaces and apply bonding agent. Place patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. Compact patching mortar and finish to match adjacent concrete. Keep patched area continuously moist for at least 72 hours.

D. Perform structural repairs of concrete, not covered herein, only with Architect's and Structural Engineer’s approval, using repair procedures they recommend.

E. Other repair materials and installation not specified above may be used, subject to Architect's approval.


A. Testing Agency: Contractor will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to sample materials, perform tests, and submit test reports during concrete placement. Sampling and testing for quality control may include those specified in this Article.

B. Testing Services: Sample concrete after all water and admixtures have been added. Testing of composite samples of fresh concrete obtained according to ASTM C 172 shall be performed according to the following requirements: 1. Testing Frequency: Obtain at least one composite sample for each 50 cu.

yd. or fraction thereof of each concrete mix placed each day. 2. Slump: ASTM C 143; one test at point of placement for each composite

sample. Perform additional tests when concrete consistency appears to change.

3. Air Content: ASTM C 231, pressure method, for normal-weight concrete; ASTM C 173, volumetric method, for structural lightweight concrete; one test for each composite sample.

4. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064; one test hourly when air temperature is 40 degrees F and below and when 85 degrees F and above, and one test for each composite sample.

5. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C 31; cast and laboratory cure one set of four standard cylinder specimens for each composite sample. For pumped concrete, take sample at point of placement.


6. Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C 39; test one specimen at 7 days for information and three at 28 days for acceptance. If one of the first two 28 day tests fall below specified strength, test the remaining specimen at 56 days.

C. Strength of each concrete mix will be satisfactory if every average of any three consecutive compressive-strength tests (3 sets of 2 cylinders each) equals or exceeds specified compressive strength and no compressive-strength test (1 set of 2 cylinders) value falls below specified compressive strength by 10% or 500 psi, whichever is less.

D. Strength tests that are not satisfactory indicate questionable concrete. The testing agency and Contractor shall submit to the Architect a report of the questionable concrete plus the two test reports immediately prior to and after (5 reports total) for evaluation. 1. If the questionable concrete is not accepted by the Architect, the testing

agency shall take core tests per ACI 301 and ASTM C42 minimum diameter of cores -4 inches. Concrete will be considered structurally adequate if average of 3 cores is at least 85% f’c and no single core is less than 75% f’c.

2. Concrete not considered adequate by core testing shall be removed and replaced or load tested per ACI 318, Chapter 20.

E. Test results shall be reported in writing to Architect, concrete manufacturer, and Contractor within 48 hours of testing. Reports of compressive-strength tests shall contain Project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing and inspecting agency, location of concrete batch in Work, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mix proportions and materials, compressive breaking strength, and type of break for each test.

F. Additional Tests: Testing and inspecting agency shall make additional tests of concrete when test results indicate that slump, air entrainment, compressive strengths, or other requirements have not been met, as directed by Architect. Testing and inspecting agency may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C 42 or by other methods as directed by Architect.

G. The contractor will be required to pay all costs of additional testing or evaluation of questionable concrete.

END OF SECTION

RENOVATION OF HISTORIC FIRE STATION NO. 2 (Phase II-A) City of Miami Project No. B-30579 03350 - 1 of 8 POLISHED CONCRETE FINISHING

SECTION 03351

POLISHED CONCRETE FINISHING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: This Section specifies dyed and polished concrete.


A. Section 03300 - Cast-in-Place Concrete.

B. Section 07900 - Joint Sealants.

1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Performance Requirements: Provide polished flooring that has been selected, manufactured and installed to achieve the following: 1. Abrasion Resistance (ASTM C 779, Method A): High resistance, no more

than 0.008 inch (0.20 mm) wear in 30 minutes. 2. Reflectivity: Increase of 35 percent as determined by standard gloss meter. 3. Waterproof Properties (Rilem Test Method 11.4): 70 percent or greater

reduction in absorption. 4. Slip Resistance Requirements: Non-slip properties; “High Traction” Rating

when tested in accordance with NFSI/ANSI B101.1; NFSI Test Method 101-A Phase Two Level High Traction Material.

B. Design Requirements: 1. Hardened Concrete Properties:

a. Minimum Concrete Compressive Strength: 3500 psi (24 MPa). b. Normal Weight Concrete: No lightweight aggregate. c. Non-air entrained.

2. Placement Properties: a. Natural concrete slump of 4-1/2 inches to 5 inches (114 to 127 mm).

Admixtures may be used. b. Flatness Requirements (ASTM E 1155):

(1) Overall FF: 40. (2) Local FF: 20.

3. Hard-Steel Troweled (3 passes) Concrete: No burn marks. Finish to ACI 302.1R, Class 5 floor. a. Class 6 floors, special colored mineral aggregate hardener with

repeated hard steel trowel finish. 4. Curing Options:

a. Membrane forming curing compounds (ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B, all resin, dissipating cure). (1) Acrylic curing and sealing compounds not recommended.

b. Sheet membrane (ASTM C 171); polyethylene film not recommended. c. Damp Curing: Seven day cure.

1.04 SUBMITTALS



B. Product Data: Submit product data, including manufacturer’s SPEC-DATA product sheet, for specified products. 1. Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS). 2. Preparation and concrete grinding procedures. 3. Colored Concrete Surface, Dye Selection Guides.

C. Samples: 1. Concrete Dye / Stain:

a. Color Selection Samples: Submit manufacturer’s standard Color Chart including at least 24 distinct colors from which to select.

b. Verification Samples: Submit samples of finished concrete showing each of the stain colors selected. (1) The area of each color sample is to be at least 6 x 6 inches in size. (2) Sample surface is to be polished in accordance with finish

requirements for permanent work.

D. Shop Drawings: Indicate information on shop drawings as follows: 1. Typical layout including dimensions and floor grinding schedule. 2. Plan view of floor and joint pattern layout. 3. Areas to receive colored surface treatment. 4. Hardener, sealer, densifier in notes.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: 1. Finishing Components and Materials manufacturer shall provide field service

representation during construction, and shall approve the application and finishing method.

B. Floor Finisher Qualifications: 1. Company experienced in performing work of this section and specializing in

installation of work similar to that required for this project. 2. Qualified, trained and certified by the Finishing Components and Materials

manufacturer.

C. Mock-Ups: 1. Construct mock-ups in accordance with Section 01400 - Quality

Requirements. 2. Mock-Up Size: 100 SF sample panel at jobsite at location as directed under

conditions similar to those which will exist during actual placement. 3. Mock-up will be used to judge workmanship, concrete substrate preparation,

operation of equipment, material application, color selection and shine. 4. Allow 24 hours for inspection of mock-up before proceeding with work. 5. When accepted, mock-up will demonstrate minimum standard of quality

required for this work. Approved mock-up may remain as part of finished work. Remove mock-up and dispose of materials when no longer required and when directed by Consultant or Project Manager.

D. Pre-installation Meeting(s): Conduct a pre-installation meeting to verify project requirements, manufacturer’s installation instructions and manufacturer’s


warranty requirements. Review the following: 1. Environmental requirements. 2. Scheduling and phasing of work. 3. Coordinating with other work and personnel. 4. Protection of adjacent surfaces. 5. Surface preparation. 6. Repair of defects and defective work prior to installation. 7. Cleaning. 8. Installation of polished floor finishes. 9. Application of liquid hardener, densifier. 10. Protection of finished surfaces after installation.

E. Quality Assurance Submittals (Information Only): 1. Test Reports: Certified test reports showing compliance with specified

performance characteristics and physical properties as cited in 1.03A - Performance Requirements.

2. Certificates: a. Product certificates signed by manufacturer certifying materials comply

with specified performance characteristics and criteria and physical requirements.

b. Letter of certification from the National Floor Safety Institute confirming the system has been tested and passed phase Two Level of certification when tested by NFSI Test Method 101-A.

c. Current contractor’s certificate signed by manufacturer declaring contractor as an approved installer of polishing system.

3. Manufacturer’s Instructions: Manufacturer’s installation instructions.

F. Closeout Submittals: 1. Warranty: Submit warranty documents specified. 2. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit operation and maintenance data

for installed products in accordance with Section 01780 - Closeout Submittals. Include the following: a. Manufacturer’s instructions on maintenance renewal of applied

treatments. b. Protocols and product specifications for joint filing, crack repair and/or

surface repair.

1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE & HANDLING

A. General: Comply with 01600 - Product Requirements.

B. Ordering: Comply with manufacturer’s ordering instructions and lead time requirements to avoid construction delays.

C. Delivery: 1. Deliver materials in manufacturer’s original packaging with identification

labels and seals intact.

D. Storage and Protection: 1. Store materials protected from exposure to harmful weather conditions and

at temperature conditions recommended by manufacturer. 2. Protect concrete slab.

a. Protect from petroleum stains during construction.


b. Diaper hydraulic power equipment. c. Restrict vehicular parking. d. Restrict use of pipe cutting machinery. e. Restrict placement of reinforcing steel on slab. f. Restrict use of acids or acidic detergents on slab.

1.07 PROJECT AMBIENT CONDITIONS

A. Installation Location: Comply with manufacturer’s written recommendations.

1.08 SEQUENCING

A. Sequence with Other Work: Comply with manufacturer’s written recommendations for sequencing construction operations.

1.09 WARRANTY

A. Project Warranty: Refer to Contract Conditions for project warranty provisions.

B. Manufacturer’s Warranty: Submit, for City’s acceptance, manufacturer’s standard warranty document executed by authorized company official. Manufacturer’s warranty is in addition to, and does not limit, other rights City may have under Contract Documents.

C. Warranty: Commencing on date of Substantial Completion.

1.10 MAINTENANCE

A. Comply with manufacturer’s written instructions to maintain installed product.

1.11 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Provide maintenance materials in accordance with Section 01780 - Closeout Submittals.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. General: 1. Finishing Components and Materials manufacturer shall have minimum five

years experience in manufacturing products similar to or exceeding requirements of project.

B. Finishing Components and Materials: 1. Provide Finishing Components and Materials from a single manufacturer. 2. Basis of Design:

a. L & M Construction Chemicals, Inc. ;14851 Calhoun Rd., Omaha, NE 68152; Tel: 800-362-3331 or 402-453-6600; website: www.LMCC.com, www.fgs-permashine.com; e-mail: [email protected]..

3. Other Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with contract requirements, equivalent finishing systems by other manufacturers may be submitted for consideration in accordance with requirements for substitutions.

4. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01600.

2.02 FINISHING COMPONENTS AND MATERIALS


A. General: 1. Finishing Components and Materials shall be compatible with each other,

surface preparation materials, and substrates.

B. Hardener / Sealer / Densifier: Water based, odorless liquid, VOC compliant, environmentally safe chemical hardening solution leaving no surface film, designed for use on mechanically-ground and polished concrete surfaces. 1. Physical and Performance Requirements:

a. Abrasion Resistance (ASTM C 779): Reduction of wear greater than 50 percent.

b. Skid Resistance (NFSI 101-A): High Traction. c. Static Coefficient of Friction (SCOF), Wet: 0.6 to 1.0. d. VOC (grams/L): 0.0.

2. Shall be compatible with other Finishing Components and Materials to be used in this project.

3. Product: FGS Hardener Plus manufactured by L & M Construction Chemicals, Inc., or equal.

C. Joint Filler: Semi-rigid, 2-component, self-leveling, 100 percent solids, rapid curing, polyurea control joint and crack filler. 1. Physical and Performance Requirements:

a. Shore A Hardness (ASTM D 2240): 80, minimum. b. Tensile Strength (ASTM D 412): 1500 (10). c. Adhesion to Concrete (ASTM D 4541): 450 PSI. d. VOC: Negligible. e. Shrinkage: Negligible.


3. Product: Joint Tite 750 manufactured by L & M Construction Chemicals, Inc., or equal.

D. Oil Repellent Sealer: Ready to use, silane, siloxane and fluoropolymers blended water based solution sealer, quick drying, low-odor, oil and water repellent, VOC compliant and compatible with chemically hardened floors, designed to protect surfaces from oil and water penetration. 1. Physical and Performance Requirements:

a. VOC: Less than 250 grams/L. b. pH: 7-8.


3. Product: Petrotex manufactured by L & M Construction Chemicals, Inc., or equal.

E. Concrete Dyes: Fast-drying dye, packaged in premeasured units ready for mixing with VOC exempt solvent; formulated for application to polished cementitious surfaces. 1. Colors: Up to four colors to be selected by Consultant.

a. Manufacturer’s standard Color Chart shall include at least 24 distinct colors from which to select.



3. Product: Vivid Concrete Dyes manufactured by L & M Construction Chemicals, Inc., or equal.

F. Cleaning Solution: Mild, highly concentrated liquid concrete cleaner and conditioner containing wetting and emulsifying agents, designed for use on hardened concrete floors; biodegradable, environmentally safe. 1. Physical and Performance Requirements:

a. Shall maintain non-slip properties and appearance with regular use. b. Shall be USDA authorized. c. Shall be National Floor Safety Institute (NFSI) certified “High Traction.”


3. Product: FGS Concrete Conditioner manufactured by L & M Construction Chemicals, Inc., or equal.

2.03 FINISHES

A. MG-2 (Medium Gloss): 800 grit.

B. HG-1 (High Gloss): 1500 grit.

C. VHG-3 (Very High Gloss): 3000 grit.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL

A. Comply with manufacturer’s written data, including product technical bulletins, product catalog installation instructions, and Finishing Components and Materials manufacturer’s preparation and installation instructions.

B. Installation is to be performed by an installer that is certified by the Polished Concrete Finishing Materials manufacturer.

3.02 EXAMINATION

A. Site Verification of Conditions: 1. Verify that concrete substrate conditions, which have been previously

installed under other sections or contracts, are acceptable for product installation in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions prior to installation of concrete finishing materials.

B. Verify Concrete Slab Performance Requirements: 1. Coordinate work of this section with work specified in Section 03300. 2. Verify concrete is cured to the minimum 28-day compressive strength

specified in Section 03300 or shown on the drawings. 3. Verify concrete surfaces have received a hard steel-trowel finish (3 passes)

during placement.

3.03 PREPARATION

A. Substrate Testing: Prior to the application of any sealer or chemical stain, the substrate must be tested for Moisture Vapor Emission Rate (MVER). 1. Moisture Vapor Test: Perform a calcium chloride test in accordance with

ASTM F 1869. Do not proceed with application of sealer or chemical stain


until the MVER meets the sealer / chemical stain manufacturer’s recommended levels.

B. Removal of Curing Compounds and Coatings: All previously applied curing compounds, coatings, and sealers must be completely removed from the surface.

C. Surface Preparation shall be performed in accordance with International Concrete Repair Institute (ICRI) technical guidelines for surface preparation.

D. Ensure surfaces are clean and free of dirt and other foreign matter harmful to performance of concrete finishing materials.

E. Examine surface to determine soundness of concrete for polishing.

F. General Contractor to remove surface contamination.

3.04 FLOOR SURFACE POLISHING & TREATMENT

A. Provide polished concrete floor treatment in entirety of slab indicated by drawings. Provide consistent finish in all contiguous areas.

B. Apply floor finish prior to installation of fixtures and accessories.

C. Diamond polish concrete floor surfaces with power disc machine recommended by floor finish manufacturer. Sequence with coarse to fine grit using dry method. 1. Comply with manufacturer’s recommended polishing grits for each sequence

to achieve desired finish level. Level of sheen shall match that of approved mock-up.

2. Expose aggregate in concrete surface only as determined by approved mock-up.

3. All concrete surfaces shall be as uniform in appearance as possible.

D. Dyed and Polished Concrete: 1. Locate demarcation line between dyed surfaces and other finishes. 2. Polish concrete to final finish level. 3. Apply diluted dyes to polished concrete surface. 4. Allow dye to dry. 5. Remove residue with dry buffer; reapply as necessary for desired result.

E. Hardener and Densifier: Follow manufacturer’s recommendations for drying time between successive coats.

F. Remove defects and repolish defective areas.

G. Finish edges of floor finish adjoining other materials in a clean and sharp manner.

3.05 ADJUSTMENTS

A. Polish to higher gloss those areas not meeting specified gloss levels per mock-up.

B. Fill joints flush to surface.

3.06 FINAL CLEANING

A. Mechanically scrub treated floors for seven days with soft to medium pads with


approved cleaning solution.

B. Upon completion, Contractor must remove surplus and excess materials, rubbish, tools and equipment.

3.07 PROTECTION

A. Protect polished concrete surfaces from damage during construction. 1. Protect with natural colored cellulose fabric specifically designed to help

protect slab-on-grade or other flooring during the construction process. 2. Means and methods used for protection shall not alter the appearance (e.g.,

color, hue, chroma, value) of the finished polished concrete.

3.08 SCHEDULE

A. First Floor: 1. All interior floor areas except stair treads and landings:

a. Finish Level: HG-1 (High Gloss). b. Color: Color No. 1, to be selected by Consultant.

2. Stair No. 1 treads and intermediate landing: a. Finish Level: HG-1 (High Gloss). b. Color: Color No. 2, to be selected by Consultant.

3. Stair No. 2 treads and landings: a. Finish Level: HG-1 (High Gloss). b. Color: Color No. 3, to be selected by Consultant.

B. Second Floor: 1. All interior floor areas except stair treads and landings:

a. Finish Level: HG-1 (High Gloss). b. Color: Color No. 4, to be selected by Consultant.

2. Stair No. 1 treads and intermediate landing: a. Finish Level: HG-1 (High Gloss). b. Color: Color No. 2, to be selected by Consultant.

3. Stair No. 2 treads and landings: a. Finish Level: HG-1 (High Gloss). b. Color: Color No. 3, to be selected by Consultant.

END OF SECTION

RENOVATION OF HISTORIC FIRE STATION NO. 2 (Phase II-A) City of Miami Project No. B-30579 03371 - 1 of 8 SHOTCRETE

SECTION 03371

SHOTCRETE

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.02 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes shotcrete applied by the wet-mix process.

B. Related Sections include, but are not necessarily limited to, the following: 1. Division 3 Section “Concrete Formwork”. 2. Division 3 Section “Concrete Reinforcement”. 3. Division 3 section “Cast-In-Place Concrete”.

1.03 DEFINITIONS

A. Shotcrete: Mortar or concrete pneumatically projected onto a surface at high velocity.

B. Wet-Mix Shotcrete: Shotcrete with ingredients, including mixing water, mixed before introduction into delivery hose.

1.04 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: For manufactured materials and products including reinforcement and forming accessories, shotcrete materials, admixtures, and curing compounds.

C. Shop Drawings: For details of fabricating, bending, and placing reinforcement. Include support and anchor details, number and location of splices, and special reinforcement required for openings through shotcrete structures.

D. Design Mixes: For each shotcrete mix. Include test data for each mix design. Data to be not more than 1 year old from date of submittal.

E. Material Certificates: For each material item, signed by manufacturers.


A. Codes and Standards: Comply with the following, unless more stringent provisions are indicated: 1. Florida Building Code, 2007 Edition with 2009 Supplement. 2. ACI 117, "Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and

Materials." 3. ACI 211.1, “Practice for Selecting Proportions for normal, Heavyweight and

Mass Concrete.”


4. ACI 301, "Specification for Structural Concrete for Buildings.” 5. ACI-304, “Recommended Practice for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting,

and Placing Concrete.” 6. ACI-305, “Hot Weather Concreting.” 7. ACI-308, “Recommended Practice for Curing Concrete.” 8. ACI 315, “Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement.” 9. ACI-318, “Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete.” 10. ACI 506.2, “Specification for Shotcrete”. 11. CRSI’s “Manual of Standard Practice.”

B. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer employing nozzle operators who attain mean core grades not exceeding 2.5, according to ACI CP60 as referenced in ACI 506.2, on preconstruction tests.

C. Preconstruction Testing Service: Contractor will engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform preconstruction testing and inspections indicated below: 1. Produce test panels before shotcrete placement according to requirements

in ACI 506.2 and ASTM C 1140 for each design mix, shooting orientation, and nozzle operator. Produce test panels with dimensions of 36 by 36 inches minimum and of 4 inch thickness of shotcrete. From each test panel, testing agency will obtain six test specimens: one set of three specimens unreinforced and one set of three specimens reinforced. Agency will perform the following: a. Test each set of unreinforced specimens for compressive strength

according to ASTM C 42. b. Visually inspect each set of reinforced shotcrete cores taken from

test panels and determine mean core grades according to ACI CP 60, ACI 506.2.

D. Mockups: Before installing shotcrete, construct mockups for each finish required and for each design mix, shooting orientation, and nozzle operator to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standard for installation.

E. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination."


A. Hot-Weather Shotcreting: Mix, place, and protect shotcrete according to ACI 305R when hot-weather conditions and high temperatures would seriously impair quality and strength of shotcrete, and as follows: 1. Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain shotcrete temperature at time of

placement below 95 deg F for wet mix. 2. Decrease temperature of reinforcing steel and receiving surfaces below

100 deg F before shotcreting.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 FORM MATERIALS


A. Forms: Form-facing panels that will provide continuous, straight, smooth, concrete surfaces. Furnish panels in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints.

2.02 REINFORCING MATERIALS

A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, deformed.

B. Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, ties, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing steel in place according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" and as follows: 1. For concrete surfaces exposed to view where legs of wire bar supports

contact forms, use all-plastic, CRSI Class 1, plastic-protected or CRSI Class 2, stainless-steel bar supports.

C. Reinforcing Anchors: ASTM A 36/A 36M, unheaded rods or ASTM A 307, Grade A, hex-head bolts; carbon steel; and carbon-steel nuts. 1. Finish: Plain, uncoated.

2.03 SHOTCRETE MATERIALS

A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I. Use only one brand and type of cement for Project. 1. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class C or F. 2. Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag: ASTM C 989, Grade 100 or 120.

B. Blended Hydraulic Cement: ASTM C 595, Type I(PM), I(SM).

C. Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33, from a single source, and as follows: 1. Aggregate Gradation: ACI 506R, Gradation No. 2 with 100 percent

passing 1/2-inch. 2. Coarse-Aggregate Class: 1N.

D. Water: Potable, complying with ASTM C 94, free from deleterious materials that may affect color stability, setting, or strength of shotcrete.

E. Ground Wire: High-strength steel wire, 0.8 to 1 mm in diameter.

2.04 CHEMICAL ADMIXTURES

A. General: ASTM C 1141, Class A or B, but limited to the following admixture materials. Provide admixtures for wet-mix shotcrete that contains not more than 0.1 percent chloride ions. Certify compatibility of admixtures with each other and with other cementitious materials. 1. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type A. 2. Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type D. 3. High-Range, Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type F.

2.05 CURING MATERIALS

A. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing approximately 9 oz./sq. yd. dry.

B. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene sheet.

C. Water: Potable.


D. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B.

2.06 SHOTCRETE MIXES, GENERAL

A. Prepare design mixes for each type and strength of shotcrete. 1. Limit use of fly ash ground granulated blast-furnace slag to not exceed, in

combination, 20 percent of portland cement by weight.

B. Limit water-soluble chloride ions to maximum percentage by weight of cement or cementitious materials permitted by ACI 301.

C. Admixtures: When included in shotcrete design mixes, use admixtures and retarding admixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions.

D. Design-Mix Adjustments: Subject to compliance with requirements, shotcrete design-mix adjustments may be proposed when characteristics of materials, Project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant.

2.07 NORMAL-WEIGHT SHOTCRETE MIXES

A. Proportion wet mixes according to ACI 211.1 and ACI 301, using materials to be used on Project, to provide normal-weight shotcrete with the following properties: 1. Compressive Strength (28 Days): 4000 psi.

2.08 SHOTCRETE EQUIPMENT

A. Wet-Mix Delivery Equipment: Capable of discharging aggregate-cement-water mixture accurately, uniformly, and continuously, according to ASTM C94.

2.09 BATCHING AND MIXING

A. Wet-Mix Process: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver shotcrete according to ASTM C 94 and furnish batch ticket information. 1. Comply with ASTM C 685 when shotcrete ingredients are delivered dry and

proportioned and mixed on-site.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION

A. Concrete or Masonry: Before applying shotcrete, remove unsound or loose materials and contaminants that may inhibit shotcrete bonding. Chip or scarify areas to be repaired to extent necessary to provide sound substrate. Cut edges square and 1/2 inch deep at perimeter of work, tapering remaining shoulder at 1:1 slope into cavity to eliminate square shoulders. Dampen surfaces before shotcreting. 1. Abrasive blast or hydroblast existing surfaces that do not require chipping

to remove paint, oil, grease, or other contaminants and to provide roughened surface for proper shotcrete bonding.

B. Earth: Compact and trim to line and grade before placing shotcrete. Dampen surfaces before shotcreting.

C. Rock: Clean rock surfaces of loose materials, mud, and other foreign matter that might weaken shotcrete bonding.

3.02 FORMS


A. General: Design, erect, support, brace, and maintain forms, according to ACI 301, to support shotcrete and construction loads and to facilitate shotcreting. Construct forms so shotcrete members and structures are secured to prevent excessive vibration or deflection during shotcreting. 1. Fabricate forms to be readily removable without impact, shock, or damage

to shotcrete surfaces and adjacent materials. 2. Construct forms to required sizes, shapes, lines, and dimensions using

ground wires and depth gages to obtain accurate alignment, location, and grades in finished structures. Construct forms to prevent mortar leakage but permit escape of air and rebound during shotcreting. Provide for openings, offsets, blocking, screeds, anchorages, inserts, and other features required in the Work.

B. Form openings, chases, recesses, bulkheads, keyways, and screeds in formwork. Determine sizes and locations from trades providing such items. Accurately place and securely support items built into forms.


A. General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for fabricating, placing, and supporting reinforcement.

B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, and other materials that weaken shotcrete bonding.

C. Securely embed reinforcing anchors into existing substrates, located as required.

D. Accurately position, support, and rigidly secure reinforcement against displacement by formwork, construction, or shotcreting. Locate and support reinforcement by metal chairs, runners, bolsters, spacers, and hangers, as required.

E. Place reinforcement to obtain minimum coverages for shotcrete protection. Arrange, space, and securely tie bars and bar supports to hold reinforcement in position during shotcreting. Set wire ties with ends directed into shotcrete, not toward exposed shotcrete surfaces.

F. Install welded wire fabric in lengths as long as practicable. Lap adjoining pieces at least one full mesh and lace splices with wire. Offset laps of adjoining widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction.

3.04 JOINTS

A. Construction Joints: Locate and install construction joints tapered to a 1:1 slope where joint is not subject to compression loads and square where joint is perpendicular to main reinforcement. Continue reinforcement through construction joints, unless otherwise indicated.

3.05 ALIGNMENT CONTROL

A. Ground Wires: Install ground wires to establish thickness and planes of shotcrete surfaces. Install ground wires at corners and offsets not established by forms. Pull ground wires taut and position adjustment devices to permit additional tightening.

3.06 EMBEDDED ITEMS


A. Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining work that is attached to or supported by shotcrete. Use Setting Drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.

3.07 APPLICATION

A. Apply temporary protective coverings and protect adjacent surfaces against deposit of rebound and overspray or impact from nozzle stream.

B. Moisten wood forms immediately before placing shotcrete where form coatings are not used.

C. Apply shotcrete according to ACI 506.2.

D. Apply wet-mix shotcrete materials within 90 minutes after batching.

E. Deposit shotcrete continuously in multiple passes, to required thickness, without cold joints and laminations developing. Place shotcrete with nozzle held perpendicular to receiving surface. Begin shotcreting in corners and recesses. 1. Remove and dispose of rebound and overspray materials during

shotcreting to maintain clean surfaces and to prevent rebound entrapment.

F. Maintain reinforcement in position during shotcreting. Place shotcrete to completely encase reinforcement and other embedded items. Maintain steel reinforcement free of overspray and prevent build-up against front face during shotcreting.

G. Do not place subsequent lifts until previous lift of shotcrete is capable of supporting new shotcrete.

H. Do not permit shotcrete to sag, slough, or dislodge.

I. Remove hardened overspray, rebound, and laitance from shotcrete surfaces to receive additional layers of shotcrete; dampen surfaces before shotcreting.

J. Do not disturb shotcrete surfaces before beginning finishing operations.

K. Remove ground wires or other alignment control devices after shotcrete placement.

L. Installation Tolerances: Place shotcrete without exceeding installation tolerances permitted by ACI 117R, increased by a factor of 2.

3.08 SURFACE FINISHES

A. Finish Coat: After screeding to natural rod finish, apply shotcrete finish coat, 1/4 to 1 inch thick, using ACI 506R, No. 1 gradation, fine-screened sand modified with maximum aggregate size not exceeding No. 4 sieve and apply steel-trowel, smooth, hard finish.

3.09 CURING

A. Protect freshly placed shotcrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures.

B. Start initial curing as soon as free water has disappeared from shotcrete surface after placing and finishing.


C. Curing Exposed Surfaces: Cure shotcrete by the following methods: 1. Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for at least seven days

with water, continuous water-fog spray, water-saturated absorptive covers, or moisture-retaining covers. Lap and seal sides and ends of covers.

2. Curing Compound: Apply curing compound uniformly in continuous operation by power spray according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period. a. Apply curing compound to natural- or gun-finished shotcrete at rate of

1 gal./100 sq. ft..

D. Curing Formed Surfaces: Cure formed shotcrete surfaces by moist curing with forms in place for full curing period or until forms are removed. If forms are removed, continue curing by methods specified above, as applicable.

3.010 FORM REMOVAL

A. Forms not supporting weight of shotcrete may be removed after curing at not less than 50 deg F for 24 consecutive hours after gunning, provided shotcrete is hard enough not to be damaged by form-removal operations and provided curing and protecting operations are maintained. 1. Leave forms supporting weight of shotcrete in place until shotcrete has

attained design compressive strength. Determine compressive strength of in-place shotcrete by testing representative field-cured specimens of shotcrete.

2. Remove forms only if shores have been arranged to permit removal of forms without loosening or disturbing shores.

B. Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be reused in the Work. Split, frayed, delaminated, or otherwise damaged form-facing materials are unacceptable for exposed surfaces. Apply new form-coating compound as specified for new formwork.


A. Contractor will engage a qualified independent testing agency to sample materials, visually grade cores, perform tests, and submit reports during shotcreting.

B. Shotcrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064; 1 test hourly when air temperature is 40 deg F and below and when 95 deg F and above.

C. Test Panels: Make a test panel, reinforced as in structure, for each shotcrete mix and for each workday or for every 50 cu. yd. of shotcrete placed, whichever is less. Produce test panels with dimensions of 36 by 36 inches minimum and 4 inches in thickness. From each test panel, testing agency will obtain six test specimens: one set of three specimens unreinforced and one set of three specimens reinforced. 1. Test each set of unreinforced specimens for compressive strength

according to ASTM C 1140 and construction testing requirements in ACI 506.2.


2. Visually inspect each set of reinforced shotcrete cores taken from test panels and determine mean core grades according to ACI 506.2.

D. In-Place Shotcrete: Take a set of 3 unreinforced cores for each mix and for each workday or for every 50 cu. yd. of shotcrete placed, whichever is less. Test cores for compressive strength according to ACI 506.2 and ASTM C 42. Do not cut steel reinforcement.

E. Strength of shotcrete will be considered satisfactory when mean compressive strength of each set of 3 unreinforced cores equals or exceeds 85 percent of specified compressive strength, with no individual core less than 75 percent of specified compressive strength. 1. Mean compressive strength of each set of 3 unreinforced cubes shall equal

or exceed design compressive strength with no individual cube less than 88 percent of specified compressive strength.

3.012 REPAIRS

A. Remove and replace shotcrete that is delaminated or exhibits laminations, voids, or sand/rock pockets exceeding limits for specified core grade of shotcrete. 1. Remove unsound or loose materials and contaminants that may inhibit

bond of shotcrete repairs. Chip or scarify areas to be repaired to extent necessary to provide sound substrate. Cut edges square and 1/2 inch deep at perimeter of work, tapering remaining shoulder at 1:1 slope into cavity to eliminate square shoulders. Dampen surfaces and apply new shotcrete.

B. Repair core holes from in-place testing according to repair provisions in ACI 301 and match adjacent finish, texture, and color.

3.013 CLEANING

A. Remove and dispose of rebound and overspray materials from final shotcrete surfaces and areas not intended for shotcrete placement.

END OF SECTION

RENOVATION OF HISTORIC FIRE STATION NO. 2 (Phase II-A) City of Miami Project No. B-30579 04230 - 1 of 5 REINFORCED MASONRY

SECTION 04230

REINFORCED MASONRY

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.02 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes grouted reinforced masonry consisting of grout and reinforcing steel.

B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 3 Section "Concrete Reinforcement" for reinforcing steel. 2. Division 3 Section "Cast-In-Place Concrete" for concrete. 3. Division 4 Section "Unit Masonry Assemblies" for all other elements of

masonry construction.

1.03 DEFINITIONS

A. Reinforced Masonry: Masonry containing reinforcing steel in grouted cells.

1.04 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details Reinforcing Steel. Detail bending and placement of unit masonry reinforcing bars. Comply with ACI 315, "Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement." Show bar schedules, bent bar diagrams and other arrangements as required for fabrication and placement. Show elevations of reinforced walls.


A. Comply with the provisions of the following codes, specifications and standards, unless more stringent requirements are specified or shown on the Drawings. Reference is made to the edition in force at the time these specifications are issued. 1. Florida Building Code, 2007 Edition with 2009 Supplement. 2. ACI 530/ASCE 5 “Building Code Requirements for Concrete Masonry

Structures” 3. ACI 530.1/ASCE 6 “Specifications for the Design and Construction of Load

Bearing Concrete Masonry”


A. Do not apply uniform floor or roof loads for at least 12 hours and concentrated loads for at least 3 days after building masonry walls or columns.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


2.01 MATERIALS

A. General: Refer to Division 4 Section “Unit Masonry Assemblies” for masonry materials and accessories and grout materials not included in this section.

B. Concrete Masonry Units: Use special shapes where shown and as required for corners, jambs, sashes, control joints, lintels, bond beams and other special conditions.

2.02 GROUT MATERIALS

A. Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C 404 for fine grout.

2.03 REINFORCING STEEL

A. Uncoated Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615, Grade 60. Shop fabricate bent bars. Joint reinforcing and anchors: ASTM A 153 Class B2, with a coating thickness of 1.50 oz/sf in exterior walls, ASTM A 641 in interior walls. Reinforcing Bar Positioners: Wire units designed to fit into mortar bed joints spanning masonry unit cells with loops for holding reinforcing bars in center of cells. Units are formed from 0.142-inch steel wire, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. 1. Provide units with either two loops or four loops as needed for number of

bars indicated.

2.04 GROUT MIXES

A. Grout for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 476 with a minimum compressive strength of 2500 psi in 28 days. 1. Use fine grout with a slump of 8 to 10 inches.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. 1. Verify that foundations are within tolerances specified. 2. Verify that reinforcing dowels are properly placed. 3. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been

corrected.

3.02 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Refer to Division 4 Section “Unit Masonry Assemblies” for general installation requirements of unit masonry.

B. Cut masonry units with motor-driven saws to provide clean, sharp, unchipped edges. Cut units as required to provide a continuous pattern and to fit adjoining construction, including the first course of walls where required. Cut units which are not in multiples of 8”. Install cut units with cut surfaces and, where possible, cut edges concealed.

C. Allow wet masonry units to dry prior to placement.

3.03 CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES

A. Comply with tolerances in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.


3.04 LAYING MASONRY WALLS

A. Avoid using less-than-half-size units, particularly at corners, jambs, and, where possible, at other locations.

B. Bond Pattern: Lay masonry in one-half running bond with vertical joint in each course centered on units in courses above and below, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. Interlock each course at corners.

C. Place clean units while the mortar is soft and plastic. Remove and relay in fresh mortar any unit disturbed to the extent that initial bond is broken after initial positioning.

D. Stopping and Resuming Work: In each course, rack back one-half-unit length for one-half running bond; do not tooth.

E. Fill cores in hollow concrete masonry units with grout 24 inches under bearing plates, beams, lintels, posts, and similar items, unless otherwise indicated.

F. Design, provide and install bracing that will assure stability of masonry during construction. Include provisions to project against wind or other natural or construction forces that might collapse or otherwise damage a partially or completely built masonry wall in a partially completed structure.

3.05 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING

A. Lay hollow masonry units as follows: 1. With full mortar coverage on horizontal and vertical face shells. 2. Bed webs in mortar in starting course at base of wall and in all courses

where adjacent to cells to be filled with grout. 3. For starting course at base of wall where cells are not grouted, spread out

full mortar bed, including areas under cells.

3.06 MASONRY JOINT REINFORCEMENT

A. General: Provide continuous masonry joint reinforcement as indicated. Install entire length of longitudinal side rods in mortar with a minimum cover of 5/8 inch. Lap reinforcement 6 inches.

B. Provide continuity at corners and wall intersections by using prefabricated “L” and “T” sections. Cut and bend reinforcing units as directed by manufacturer for continuity at returns, offsets, column fireproofing, pipe enclosures, and other special conditions.

3.07 LINTELS

A. Provide masonry lintels where shown and where openings of more than 24 inches are shown. Reinforce and grout lintels as shown on the Drawings. 1. Provide precast lintels made from concrete matching concrete masonry

units in color, texture, and compressive strength and with reinforcing bars indicated or required to support loads indicated. Cure precast lintels by the same method used for concrete masonry units.

2. Provide prefabricated or built-in-place masonry lintels. Use specially formed bond beam units with reinforcing bars placed as indicated and filled with coarse grout. Cure precast lintels before handling and installing. Temporarily support built-in-place lintels until cured.


3. Provide either of above at Contractor's option or provide precast or formed-in-place concrete lintels complying with requirements in Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."

B. Provide minimum bearing of 8 inches at each jamb, unless otherwise indicated.

3.08 REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY INSTALLATION

A. Laying Masonry Walls: Construct masonry walls as follows: 1. Lay masonry units to top of grout pour prior to placing grout. Maximum

grout pour height is 24’ or top of bond beam, whichever is lower. 2. Construct wall such that vertical cells to be grouted are aligned and

unobstructed openings for grout are 3”x4” (minimum). Construct grout spaces free of mortar droppings, debris, loose aggregates, and any material deleterious to grout; or, clean the cells prior to grouting. Remove masonry protrusions extending 1/2” or more into cells to be grouted.

3. Do not lay masonry until grouted masonry below is cured. 4. In bond beams, use special units or modify regular units to allow placement

of horizontal bars. Place small mesh, expanded metal lath or wire screening in mortar joints under bond beam courses over cells of non-reinforced vertical cells.

B. Temporary Formwork and Shores: Construct formwork and shores to support reinforced masonry elements during construction. 1. Construct formwork to conform to shape, line, and dimensions shown.

Make it sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of mortar and grout. Brace, tie, and support forms to maintain position and shape during construction and curing of reinforced masonry.

2. Do not remove forms and shores until reinforced masonry members have hardened sufficiently to carry their own weight and other temporary loads that may be placed on them during construction.

C. Placing Reinforcement: Comply with requirements of ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 and as follows: 1. Place reinforcement and accessories as indicated. 2. Support and fasten reinforcement together to prevent displacement by

construction loads or by placement of grout. 3. Clean reinforcement by removing mud, oil, or other materials that will

reduce the bond at the time grout is placed. Reinforcement with tightly bound rust and/or mill scale is acceptable without cleaning provided the dimensions and weights, including heights of deformations, of the cleaned sample are not reduced.

4. Place all reinforcement prior to grouting. Tie vertical reinforcement to dowels at base of masonry with tie wire and thread masonry units over or around reinforcement. Support vertical reinforcement at 10’-0” o.c. Extend vertical bars the specified lap length above top of pour and support bar in proper position at top of grout pour. Where vertical bars are placed after laying masonry, place wire loops extending into cells as masonry is laid and loosen before mortar sets. After insertion of bar, pull loops and bar to proper position and tie free ends.

5. Do not bend reinforcement after it is embedded in grout.


6. Splice bars only where indicated. Provide 48 bar diameter lap splices, U.O.N. Place bars in contact and wire tie. Bars spliced by noncontact lap splices shall be spaced 6” apart (maximum).

7. Bar placement tolerance is ±1/2” perpendicular to wall and 2” along wall. The clear distance between parallel bars that are not contact lap spliced shall be not less than 1” in walls and 1 1/2” in columns and pilasters. Maintain 1/4” clear between bars and any face of masonry.

D. Cleanouts: Provide cleanout openings at each vertical bar at the base of walls in which one of the following applies: 1. Grout pour height exceeds 5’. 2. Vertical bars are not otherwise fastened to prevent displacement. In this

case, use cleanout to securely tie bar in position. 3. To remove dust, dirt, mortar droppings, loose pieces of masonry and other

foreign materials from cell and top of support in cells to be grouted.

Construct cleanout by cutting opening in face shell. Construct cleanouts with openings of sufficient size to permit removal of debris and tying of bars. Minimum size is 3”x3”. After cleaning and inspection, close cleanout opening and brace closure to resist grout pressure.

E. Grouting: Do not place grout until entire height of masonry to be grouted has attained sufficient strength to resist grout pressure. 1. Comply with requirements of ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602. 2. Place grout within 1 1/2 hours from introducing water in the mixture and

prior to initial set. 3. Confine grout to the areas indicated. 4. Place grout by pumping into grout spaces unless alternate methods are

acceptable to the Architect. 5. Place grout continuously in lintels and bond beams. Grout walls in lifts not

exceeding 5’ or the elevation of top of bond beam, whichever is lower. 6. If grout pour during one day exceeds 5’, grout in lifts 5’ each or less, with

not less than 30 minutes and not more than one hour between lifts. 7. Terminate grout 1 1/2” below bond beam course or where cell above is to

be grouted. 8. Place grout in bond beam course before filling vertical cores above bond

beam. 9. Consolidate grout with mechanical vibrators having a 3/4” diameter head.

Grout pours 12” high or less may be puddled in lieu of mechanical vibration.


A. Contractor will engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform field quality-control testing indicated below. 1. Payment for these services will be made by Contractor. 2. Retesting of materials failing to meet specified requirements shall be done

at Contractor's expense.

B. Four grout cubes will be sampled and tested for compressive strength per ASTM C 1019 for each 5000 ft.2 of wall surface.

END OF SECTION

RENOVATION OF HISTORIC FIRE STATION NO. 2 (Phase II-A) City of Miami Project No. B-30579 04810 - 1 of 9 UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES

SECTION 04810

UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Concrete block. 1. Load-bearing units. 2. Non-loadbearing units. 3. Special production units.

B. Mortar and grout.

C. Reinforcement.

D. Precast concrete items.

E. Accessories.


A. Section 03200 - Concrete Reinforcement: Reinforcing steel for grouted masonry.

B. Section 03300 - Cast-In-Place Concrete.

C. Section 04230 - Reinforced Masonry.

D. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers: Backing rod and sealant at control and expansion joints.

E. Section 09220 - Portland Cement Plaster.

1.03 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Provide data for masonry units, reinforcement and anchorage products, mortar, and masonry accessories.

C. Shop Drawings: 1. Provide complete detailed shop drawings (including schedules, plans,

elevations, cross sections, details, etc.) for all CMU wall assemblies. a. Indicate dimensions, layouts, reinforcement, control joints and

expansion joints, types and sizes of block, shapes, lintels, type of mortar, anchoring methods, anchors, embeds, fire-ratings, and adjacent construction.


A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable requirements of the governing building code, including but not limited to the following: 1. Workmanship: Masonry construction shall be in conformance with the

tolerances, quality and methods of construction as set forth in standards referenced in FBC-B CHAPTER 21; the PCA EB088, ANSI A41.1 and A41.2,


and AWS D1.4. 2. Mortar:

a. Mortar for use in masonry construction shall conform to ASTM C 270 and shall conform to the proportion specifications of FBC-B TABLE 2103.7(1) or the property specifications of FBC-B TABLE 2103.7(2).

b. The type of mortar based on consideration of the location of the unit masonry shall conform to requirements of FBC-B SECTION 2119.12.1.4. 1) Compression: Allowable working compressive stresses in masonry

walls shall not exceed the limits in pounds per square inch (MPa) of gross area in FBC-B SECTION 2120.1.1.

c. Placement of mortar and units shall comply with FBC-B, SECTIONS 2104.1.2.1 through 2104.1.2.5.

3. All solid unit masonry shall be laid in full beds with full end joints. All hollow unit masonry shall be laid with full mortar coverage of the face shells in both horizontal and vertical joints.

4. Masonry walls of hollow or solid units or plain concrete shall be constructed as specified in FBC-B SECTION 2121.

B. Comply with provisions of ACI 530/ASCE 5/TMS 402 and ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602, except where exceeded by requirements of the contract documents. 1. Masonry shall be constructed within the tolerances specified in ACI

530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.


A. Deliver, handle, and store masonry units by means that will prevent mechanical damage and contamination by other materials.

B. Handle and store pre-faced concrete block units in protective cartons or trays. Do not remove from protective packaging until ready for installation.

1.06 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Cold and Hot Weather Requirements: Comply with requirements ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 or FBC-B SECTIONS 2104.3 and 2104.4, whichever is most stringent.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS

A. Concrete Block: Comply with referenced standards and as follows: 1. General:

a. Special Shapes: Provide non-standard blocks configured for corners, lintels, headers, and other detailed conditions.

2. Load-Bearing Units: ASTM C 90; hollow; normal weight. a. Size/Shape: Standard units with nominal face dimensions of 16 x 8

inches (400 x 200 mm) and nominal depths as indicated on the drawings for specific locations.

3. Non-Loadbearing Units: ASTM C 129 or ASTM C 90; hollow; normal weight. a. Size/Shape: Standard units with nominal face dimensions of 16 x 8

inches (400 x 200 mm) and nominal depths as indicated on the


drawings for specific locations. 4. Column Block Units: ASTM C 129 or ASTM C 90; hollow; normal weight.

a. Size/Shape: Standard units with nominal face dimensions of 16 x 16 inches (400 x 400 mm) x 8 inches (200 mm) high.

B. Concrete Brick: ASTM C 55, normal weight. 1. For architectural and paver use, ASTM C 1634 (or ASTM C 55 Grade N),

non-cored (solid), normal weight. 2. For below grade use, ASTM C 1634 (or ASTM C 55 Grade N), normal

weight. 3. For other uses, ASTM C 55, normal weight. 4. Size: As indicated on drawings. 5. Special Shapes: Provide non-standard brick configured for corners, lintels,

headers, and other detailed conditions.

2.02 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS

A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I. 1. Not more than 0.60 percent alkali. 2. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S. 3. Aggregate:

a. Mortar Aggregate: ASTM C 144. b. Grout Aggregate: ASTM C 404.

B. Water: Clean and potable.

C. Admixtures: 1. Accelerating Admixture: In cold weather, a non-chloride based accelerating

admixture may be used subject to approval; accelerating admixture shall be non-corrosive, shall contain less than 0.2 percent chlorides, and shall conform to ASTM C 494, Type C. b. In general, air-entrainment, anti-freeze or chloride admixtures shall not

be used, except as approved by the Consultant. 2. Moisture-Resistant Admixture: Polymeric type formulated to reduce porosity

and water transmission. a. Construct panels of masonry units conforming to ASTM C 744 and

mortar which contain the water-repellant admixture. c. When tested in accordance with ASTM C 1072, such panels shall have

flexural strength not less than that specified or indicated. d. When tested in accordance with ASTM E 514, panels shall exhibit no

water visible on back of test panel and no leaks through the panel after 24 hours, and not more than 25 percent of wall area shall be damp after 72 hours.

2.03 PRECAST CONCRETE ITEMS

A. General: 1. Trim, lintels, copings, splashblocks and door sills shall be factory-made units

from a plant regularly engaged in producing precast concrete units. 2. Unless otherwise indicated, concrete shall be 4,000 PSI minimum,

conforming to Section 03300, using 1/2 inch to No. 4 nominal-size coarse aggregate, and minimum reinforcement shall be the reinforcement required for handling of the units.


3. Clearance of 3/4 inch shall be maintained between reinforcement and faces of units.

4. Unless precast-concrete items have been subjected during manufacture to saturated-steam pressure of at least 120 PSI for at least 5 hours, the items, after casting, shall be either damp-cured for 24 hours or steam-cured, and shall then be aged under cover for 28 days or longer.

5. Cast-concrete members weighing over 80 pounds shall have built-in loops of galvanized wire or other approved provisions for lifting and anchoring.

6. Units shall have beds and joints at right angles to the face, with sharp true arises and shall be cast with drip grooves on the underside where units overhang walls.

7. Exposed-to-view surfaces shall be free of surface voids, spalls, cracks, and chipped or broken edges.

8. Precast units exposed-to-view shall be of uniform appearance and color. 9. Unless otherwise specified, units shall have a smooth dense finish. Prior to

use, each item shall be wetted and inspected for crazing. 10. Items showing evidence of dusting, spalling, crazing, or having surfaces

treated with a protective coating will be rejected.

B. Lintels: 1. Precast lintels, unless otherwise shown, shall be of a thickness equal to the

wall and reinforced with two No. 4 bars for the full length. 2. Top of lintels shall be labeled "TOP" or otherwise identified and each lintel

shall be clearly marked to show location in the structure. 3. In reinforced masonry, lintels shall conform to ACI 318/318R for flexural and

shear strength and shall have at least 8 inches bearing at each end. 4. Concrete shall have a minimum 28 day compressive strength of 3,500 PSI

using 1/2 inch to No. 4 nominal-size coarse aggregate. 5. Reinforcement shall conform to ASTM A 615 Grade 60,000 PSI. 6. Limit lintel deflection due to dead plus live load to L/600 or 0.3 inches. 7. Provide top and bottom bars for lintels over 36 inches in length.

C. Sills and Copings: 1. Sills and copings shall be cast with washes. 2. Sills for windows having mullions shall be cast in sections with head joints at

mullions and a 1/4 inch allowance for mortar joints. 3. The ends of sills, except a 3/4 inch wide margin at exposed surfaces, shall

be roughened for bond.

D. Splash Blocks: 1. Splash blocks shall be as detailed. 2. Reinforcement shall be the manufacturer's standard.

2.04 METAL REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGE

A. General: 1. Metal reinforcement and accessories shall conform to FBC-B SECTION

2103.13, except that horizontal joint reinforcement shall conform to FBC-B SECTION 2121.1.6. a. Corrosion protection for carbon steel accessories used in interior and

exterior wall construction shall comply with FBC-B SECTION 2103.13.7.2 (i.e., hot-dipped galvanized).


2. Manufacturers: a. Dur-O-Wal: www.dur-o-wal.com. b. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc: www.h-b.com. c. Masonry Reinforcing Corporation of America: www.wirebond.com. d. Substitutions: See Section 01600 - Product Requirements.

B. Reinforcing Steel: Type specified in Section 03200; size as indicated on drawings; galvanized finish.

C. Joint Reinforcement: ASTM A 82 steel wire, hot dip galvanized after fabrication to ASTM A 153, Class B; 0.1875 inch (4.8 mm) side rods with 0.1875 inch (4.8 mm) cross rods; width as required to provide not more than 1 inch (25 mm) and not less than 1/2 inch (13 mm) of mortar coverage on each exposure. 1. Provide ladder type for reinforced masonry, and truss type for all other

conditions.

2.05 ACCESSORIES

A. Preformed Control Joints: Rubber material. Provide with corner and tee accessories, fused joints.

B. Joint Filler: Closed cell polyvinyl chloride; oversized 50 percent to joint width; self expanding; width as indicated on Drawings x by maximum lengths available.

C. Weeps: Polyethylene tubing.

D. Cleaning Solution: Non-acidic, not harmful to masonry work or adjacent materials.

2.06 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES

A. Mortar for Unit Masonry: Except as otherwise indicated, all mortars and the materials therein shall conform to ASTM C 270. 1. The gradation of aggregates for masonry mortar shall be such that the

fineness modulus is between 1.20 and 2.35 when determined in accordance with ASTM C 144.

2. Mortar shall be of Type M, S, N or O, and shall comply with specifications set forth in FBC-B SECTION 2119.12.

3. Mortar Type: Except as otherwise indicated, conform to FBC-B SECTION 2119.12.1.4.

B. Grout: Grout shall conform to FBC-B TABLE 2103.12 or to ASTM C 476. Use for reinforced masonry bond beams, reinforced masonry piers, and wherever grouting full is indicated or specified. 1. Mix: Portland cement, sand, gravel and water, proportioned as required to

provide a 28-day minimum compressive strength of 3000 PSI, except as otherwise indicated.

2. Use consistency required to fill completely volumes indicated for grouting. a. Fine grout for spaces with smallest horizontal dimension of 2 inches (50

mm) or less. b. Coarse grout for spaces with smallest horizontal dimension greater than

2 inches (50 mm).

PART 3 EXECUTION


3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive masonry.

B. Verify that related items provided under other sections are properly sized and located.

C. Verify that built-in items are in proper location, and ready for roughing into masonry work.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Direct and coordinate placement of metal anchors supplied for installation under other sections.

B. Provide temporary bracing during installation of masonry work. Maintain in place until building structure provides permanent bracing.

3.03 COURSING

A. Establish lines, levels, and coursing indicated. Protect from displacement.

B. Maintain masonry courses to uniform dimension. Form vertical and horizontal joints of uniform thickness.

C. Concrete Masonry Units: 1. Bond: Running. 2. Coursing: One unit and one mortar joint to equal 8 inches (200 mm). 3. Mortar Joints: Concave.

3.04 PLACING AND BONDING

A. Placement of mortar and units shall comply with FBC-B SECTIONS 2104.1.2.1 through 2104.1.2.5.

B. Solid Units: Lay solid masonry units in full bed of mortar, with full head joints, uniformly jointed with other work. 1. The ends of the units shall be completely buttered. 2. Head joints shall not be filled by slushing with mortar. Head joints shall be

constructed by shoving mortar tight against the adjoining unit. 3. Bed joints shall not be furrowed deep enough to produce voids.

C. Hollow Units: Lay hollow masonry units with face shell bedding on head and bed joints. 1. Hollow units shall be placed such that face shells of bed joints are fully

mortared. 2. Webs shall be fully mortared in all courses of piers, columns, pilasters, in the

starting course on foundations where adjacent cells or cavities are to be grouted, and where otherwise required.

3. Head joints shall be mortared a minimum distance from each face equal to the face shell thickness of the unit.

D. Unless otherwise required or indicated on the construction documents, head and bed joints shall be 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) thick, except that the thickness of the bed joint of the starting course placed over foundations shall not be less than 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) and not more than 3/4 inch (19.1 mm). 1. Open-end units with beveled ends shall be fully grouted. Head joints of


open-end units with beveled ends need not be mortared. The beveled ends shall form a grout key that permits grouts within 5/8 inch (15.9 mm) of the face of the unit. The units shall be tightly butted to prevent leakage of the grout.

E. Buttering corners of joints or excessive furrowing of mortar joints is not permitted.

F. Remove excess mortar and mortar smears as work progresses.

G. Interlock intersections and external corners.

H. Do not shift or tap masonry units after mortar has achieved initial set. Where adjustment must be made, remove mortar and replace.

I. Perform job site cutting of masonry units with proper tools to provide straight, clean, unchipped edges. Prevent broken masonry unit corners or edges.

J. Cut mortar joints flush where cement parging is required or bitumen dampproofing is applied.

3.05 REINFORCEMENT

A. Unless otherwise indicated on drawings or specified under specific wall type, install horizontal joint reinforcement 16 inches (400 mm) on center.

B. Place masonry joint reinforcement in first and second horizontal joints above and below openings. Extend minimum 16 inches (400 mm) each side of opening.

C. Place continuous joint reinforcement in first and second joint below top of walls.

D. Lap joint reinforcement ends minimum 6 inches (150 mm).

3.06 LINTELS

A. Openings in walls shall have lintels of reinforced concrete, in accordance with FBC-B SECTION 2121. 1. Where such lintel is precast or formed separately from a tie beam, it shall

bear not less than nominal 8 inches (203 mm) on the masonry, at each end.

3.07 GROUTED COMPONENTS

A. Reinforce columns and pilasters as indicated on Drawings.

B. Support and secure reinforcing bars from displacement. Maintain position within 1/2 inch (13 mm) of dimensioned position.

C. Place and consolidate grout fill without displacing reinforcing.

D. At bearing locations, fill masonry cores with grout for a minimum 12 inches (300 mm) either side of opening.

3.08 CONTROL JOINTS

A. Do not continue horizontal joint reinforcement through control joints.

B. Install preformed control joint device in continuous lengths. Seal butt and corner joints in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

C. Size control joint in accordance with Section 07900 for sealant performance.


3.09 BUILT-IN WORK

A. As work progresses, install built-in metal door frames, glazed frames, window frames, anchor bolts, and plates and other items to be built into the work and furnished under other sections.

B. Install built-in items plumb, level, and true to line.

C. Bed anchors of metal door frames in adjacent mortar joints. Fill frame voids solid with grout. 1. Fill adjacent masonry cores with grout minimum 12 inches (300 mm) from

framed openings.

D. Do not build into masonry construction organic materials that are subject to deterioration.

3.10 TOLERANCES

A. Masonry shall be constructed within the tolerances specified in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 or as follows, whichever is the most stringent: 1. Maximum Variation from Alignment of Columns: 1/4 inch (6 mm). 2. Maximum Variation from Unit to Adjacent Unit: 1/16 inch (1.6 mm). 3. Maximum Variation from Plane of Wall: 1/4 inch in 10 ft (6 mm/3 m) and 1/2

inch in 20 ft (13 mm/6 m) or more. 4. Maximum Variation from Plumb: 1/4 inch (6 mm) per story non-cumulative;

1/2 inch (13 mm) in two stories or more. 5. Maximum Variation from Level Coursing: 1/8 inch in 3 ft (3 mm/m) and 1/4

inch in 10 ft (6 mm/3 m); 1/2 inch in 30 ft (13 mm/9 m). 6. Maximum Variation of Joint Thickness: 1/8 inch in 3 ft (3 mm/m). 7. Maximum Variation from Cross Sectional Thickness of Walls: 1/4 inch (6

mm).

3.11 CUTTING AND FITTING

A. Cut and fit for chases, pipes, conduit, and sleeves. Coordinate with other sections of work to provide correct size, shape, and location.

B. Obtain approval prior to cutting or fitting masonry work not indicated or where appearance or strength of masonry work may be impaired.


A. An independent testing agency will perform field quality control tests, as specified in Section 01400.

B. Concrete Masonry Unit Tests: Test each variety of concrete unit masonry in accordance with ASTM C 140 for conformance to requirements of this specification.

C. Mortar Tests: Test each type of mortar in accordance with ASTM C 780, testing with same frequency as masonry samples.

3.13 CLEANING

A. Remove excess mortar and mortar droppings.

B. Replace defective mortar. Match adjacent work.


C. Clean soiled surfaces with cleaning solution.

D. Use non-metallic tools in cleaning operations.


A. Without damaging completed work, provide protective boards at exposed external corners that are subject to damage by construction activities.

END OF SECTION

RENOVATION OF HISTORIC FIRE STATION NO. 2 (Phase II-A) City of Miami Project No. B-30579 05120 - 1 of 8 STRUCTURAL STEEL

SECTION 05120

STRUCTURAL STEEL

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.02 SUMMARY

A. The work specified in this section includes all labor, materials, equipment, permits, and services necessary for the fabrication and erection of structural steel and related work, complete, in accordance with the Drawings and as specified herein, including the detailing of all connections.

B. Structural steel is that work defined in AISC “Code of Standard Practice” and as otherwise shown on Drawings.

1.03 RELATED SECTIONS SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE

A. Division 3 Section “Cast-In-Place Concrete” for Grouting Base Plates.

B. Division 3 Section “Concrete Formwork” for Placing Anchor Rods.

1.04 RESPONSIBILITIES

A. The Engineer of Record is responsible for the design of the steel framing and connections as presented in the Contract Documents. No changes to the requirements of the Contract Documents will be considered without complying with the applicable requirements for substitutions. This includes, but is not limited to, connection details, member sizes or steel grades.

B. The fabricator is responsible for the preparation of Shop and Erection Drawings pursuant to the requirements of the Contract Documents. Acceptance of the Shop and Erection Drawings by the Architect/Engineer does not relieve the fabricator of the responsibility for accuracy of detail dimensions on the shop drawings and the general fit-up of parts to be assembled in the field.

C. Environmental Objective Documentation: For each steel product specified a document signed by the manufacturer/fabricator stating compliance with the requirements of the environmental objectives.

D. The fabricator is responsible for the design and detailing of all substitutions, which shall be prepared by or under the direct supervision and control of a Delegated Engineer as defined in the Contract Documents.

E. The fabricator is responsible for the coordination of all surveyed field conditions and field measurements necessary for the detailing, fabrication and erection of their work. All field measurements shall be provided on the shop drawings prior to submittal.

1.05 SUBMITTALS



B. Fabricator’s certification that the chemical and physical properties of the following materials comply with the Project requirements: 1. Structural steel 2. Bolts, nuts and washers. 3. Direct-tension indicators. 4. Shear studs. 5. Welding electrodes.

C. Welder’s certification. Submit to Owner’s inspection agency.

D. The fabricator shall submit details and complete calculations that clearly identify proposed substitutions for Engineer’s review prior to preparation of detailed shop drawings. Proposed variations to details shown on the Contract Drawings will be considered and such variations must have preliminary acceptance prior to the preparation of detailed shop drawings. The details and calculations shall clearly show the capacity of the connections designed by the fabricator. The calculations shall show details of the assembled joint with all bolts and welds required. All design calculations, drawings and details shall be signed, sealed and dated by the Delegated Engineer.

E. Submit to the Architect for acceptance shop and erection drawings. See “Shop Drawings and Other Submittals” notes regarding the possible reproduction of Structural Drawings for use as shop or erection drawings. Drawings shall include complete details, dimensions, schedules and procedures for the fabrication, assembly, and sequence of erection. 1. Include details of cuts, connections, camber, holes, threaded fasteners and

other pertinent data. Indicate welds by standard AWS A2.4 symbols and show size, length, and type of each weld. Show shop welds on shop drawings and field welds on erection drawings.

2. Provide setting drawings, templates, and directions for installation of anchor rods, embeds and other anchorages to be installed by others.

3. Indicate surface preparation, such as primed, galvanized, etc., of each surface of each piece.

1.06 CODES AND STANDARDS

A. Florida Building Code, 2007 Edition with 2009 Supplement.

B. AISC “Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges”. 1. Paragraph 4.4. “Approval” is modified such that the Structural Engineer will

return submittals to the Architect within ten working days from time of receipt.

C. AISC “Specifications for Structural Steel Buildings”, including “Commentary” and Supplements thereto as issued.

D. AISC “Specifications for Structural Joints using ASTM A 325 or A490 Bolts” approved by the Research Council on Structural Connections of the Engineering Foundation.

E. AWS D1.1 “Structural Welding Code”.


F. ASTM A 6 “General Requirements for Delivery of Rolled Steel Plates, Shapes, Sheet Piling and Bars for Structural Use”.

G. S.S.P.C. Society for Protective Coatings.

H. Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA), as amended to date.


A. Qualifications for welding work: Qualify welding procedures and operators in accordance with AWS “Standard Qualification Procedure”.

B. The Fabricator shall provide a system of quality control, including shop welding inspections and testing, to ensure that the minimum standards specified herein are attained. Submit to Owner, Architect, Engineer and Contractor’s Testing and Inspection Agency complete details of the quality control program to be used and all testing and inspection reports. Visually inspect 100% of shop welds.

C. Cleaning and lubrication of ASTM F1852 twist-off-type tension-control bolt assemblies is not permitted.


A. Deliver materials to site at such intervals to insure uninterrupted progress of work

B. Deliver anchor rods and anchorage devices which are to be embedded in cast-in-place concrete or masonry in ample time to not delay work.

C. Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Keep steel members off ground, using plates, platforms, or other supports. Protect steel members and packaged materials from corrosion and deterioration.

D. Store fasteners components in sealed containers until ready to use. Reseal open containers to prevent contamination by moisture or other deleterious substances. Store closed containers in a protective shelter to protect fasteners from dirt and moisture. Only as many fastener components as are anticipated to be installed during the work shift shall be taken from protective storage. Fastener components that are not incorporated into the work shall be returned to protective storage at the end of the work shift. Fasteners from open containers and fasteners that accumulate rust or dirt shall not be used and shall be immediately and permanently removed from the project site.

E. Do not store materials on structure in a manner that might cause distortion or damage to members or supporting structures. Repair or replace damaged materials or structures as directed.

1.09 ENVIRONMENTAL OBJECTIVES

A. Manufacturer/Fabricator to supply documentation of level of compliance or non-compliance with the following requirements before consideration as an “Acceptable Manufacturer.”

All structural steel sections, steel plate, pipes, and HSS shall use steel made in an electric arc furnace (EAF).

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


2.01 MATERIALS

A. Structural steel rolled W and WT shapes: ASTM A 992, Fy=50 ksi.

B. Structural steel rolled M, S, C and MC shapes and Angles: ASTM A 36, Fy=36 ksi.

C. Structural steel plates and bars: ASTM A 36, Fy=36 ksi.

D. Cold-formed hollow structural sections (HSS): 1. Round sections: ASTM A500, Grade C, Fy=46 ksi. 2. Square and Rectangular sections: ASTM A500, Grade B, Fy=46 ksi.

E. Steel pipe: ASTM A53, Type E or S, Grade B, Fy=35 ksi.

F. Anchor Rods: ASTM F1554, Grade 55 with Supplementary Requirement S1, hooked.

G. Unfinished threaded fasteners: ASTM A 307, Grade A, regular low-carbon steel bolts and nuts. 1. Provide square head and nuts.

H. High-strength threaded fasteners: Heavy-hex structural bolts, heavy-hex nuts, and hardened washers, as follows: 1. Quenched and tempered medium-carbon steel bolts, nuts and washers,

complying with ASTM A325 or A490.

I. Direct tension indicator washers: ASTM F959.

J. Bolt Lubrication: All bolts shall be well lubricated at time of installation, dry, rusty bolts will not be allowed. Bolts or nuts shall be wax dipped by the bolt supplier or “Johnson’s Stick Wax 140” shall be used with all bolts in the shop or field. Cleaning and lubrication of ASTM F1852 twist-off type tension-control bolts is not permitted.

K. Electrodes for welding: Comply with AWS D1.1-98, Table 3.1.

L. Structural steel primer paint: SSPC – Paint 11 lead and chromate free, V.O.C. complaint, minimum solids 55% by volume. Use for steel not receiving special coatings or fireproofing. Refer to Architectural Drawings and Division 9. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the

following: a. Steel spec Heavy Duty Primer; Sherwin Williams. b. Tnemec – Series 10; Tnemec. c. Primatite; Devoe.

2. Provide shop primer and shop applied top coat paint in accordance with Division 9 Section “Special Coatings” where shown on the Architectural Drawings.

3. Steel permanently exposed to the elements that does not receive a coating, such as cooling tower supports, shall be hot dip galvanized.

M. Non-metallic shrinkage-resistant grout: Provide in accordance with Section 03300.

2.02 FABRICATION


A. Shop fabrication and assembly: Fabricate and assemble structural assemblies in shop to greatest extent possible. Fabricate items of structural steel in accordance with AISC Specifications and as indicated on final shop drawings. Provide camber in structural members where indicated.

B. Properly mark and match-mark materials for field assembly. Fabricate for delivery sequence that will expedite erection and minimize field handling of materials.

C. Where finishing is required, complete the assembly, including welding before start of finishing operations. Provide finish surfaces of members exposed in final structure free of markings, burrs, and other defects.

D. Splices in Structural Steel: Splicing of structural steel members in the shop or the field is prohibited without prior approval of the Architect.

E. Connections: 1. Weld shop connections, as indicated. 2. Bolt field connections, except where welded connections are indicated. 3. Provide high-strength, threaded fasteners except for temporary bracing to

facilitate erection or otherwise indicated. 4. Faying surfaces, including coatings, for slip-critical connections shall have

a minimum Class A slip coefficient.

F. High-strength bolted construction: Install high-strength threaded fasteners in accordance with AISC “Specifications for Structural Joints using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts” (RCSC June 30, 2004).

G. Welded construction: Comply with AWS D1.1 for procedures, appearance and quality of welds, and method used in correcting welding work.

H. Holes for other work: Provide holes required for securing other work to structural steel framing, and for passage of other work through steel framing members, as shown on final shop drawings.

I. Provide threaded nuts welded to framing, and other specialty items as indicated to receive other work.

J. Cut, drill, or punch holes perpendicular to metal surfaces. Do not flame cut holes, or enlarge holes by burning. Drill holes in bearing plates.

K. Provide weep hole in any confined steel surface capable of retaining water during erection or service. Seal weld as required to prevent migration of water into confined region.

2.03 SHOP PAINTING

A. Surface preparation: After inspection and before shipping, clean steel work to be painted. Remove loose rust, loose mill scale, and spatter, slag or flux deposits. Clean steel in accordance with SSPC: the Society for Protective Coatings. Use SSPC-SP 6, "Commercial Blast Cleaning".

B. Priming: Unless specified otherwise in Division 9 “Special Coatings” comply with the following: Immediately after surface preparation, apply VOC compliant structural steel primer paint in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and at a rate to provide dry film thickness of not less than 2.5 mils. Use painting


methods that result in full coverage of joints, corners, edges and exposed surfaces.

Shop prime structural steel, except do not prime: 1. Members or portions of members to be embedded in concrete or mortar.

Prime embedded steel that is partially exposed on exposed portions and initial 2” of embedded areas only.

2. Surfaces that are scheduled to receive sprayed-on fireproofing. 3. Members that are to be hot dip galvanized. 4. Surfaces within 2” of welds. 5. Mask off and do not prime a strip 2” wide on any surfaces to receive a row

of headed studs or puddle welds.

C. Hot dip galvanize members permanently exposed to the elements.

D. Do not print or emboss the name of the fabricator on exposed steel unless it is completely concealed by the finish painting.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 ERECTION

A. Check elevations of concrete and masonry bearing surfaces and locations of anchor bolts and similar devices, before erection work proceeds, and report discrepancies to Architect. Do not proceed with erection until corrections have been made, or until compensating adjustments to structural steel work have been agreed upon with Architect.

B. Temporary shoring and bracing: Provide temporary shoring and bracing members and connections of sufficient strength to bear imposed loads from steel self weight and erection procedures or any other loads created by other contractors on a temporary basis. Remove temporary members and connections when permanent members are in place and final connections are made. Provide temporary guidelines to achieve proper alignment of structures as erection proceeds.

C. Anchor rods and bolts: Furnish anchor rods, bolts and other connectors required for securing structural steel to foundations and other in-place work. 1. Furnish templates and other devices as necessary for pre-setting rods,

bolts and other anchors to accurate locations. 2. Refer to Division 3 of these specifications for anchor rod installation

requirements in concrete, and Division 4 for masonry installation.

D. Setting bases and bearing plates: Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials and clean bottom of base and bearing plate. 1. Set base or bearing plate wedge or other adjusting devices. 2. Tighten anchor rods after structural steel frame has been plumbed. Do not

remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of base or bearing plate prior to packing with grout.

3. Pack or pour non-shrink grout solidly between bearing surface and base or plate. Ensure that no voids remain. Finish exposed surfaces, protect grout and allow to cure.

4. For proprietary grout materials, comply with manufacturer’s instructions.


5. Base plates must be grouted a minimum of 72 hours prior to placing concrete slabs on supporting steel structure.

E. Field assembly: Set structural members accurately to lines and elevations indicated. Align and adjust various members forming a part of a complete frame or structure before permanently fastening. Clean bearing surfaces and other surfaces which will be in permanent contact before assembly. Perform necessary adjustments to compensate for discrepancies in elevations and alignment. Comply with AISC Code of Standard Practice except where more stringent requirements are contained herein. 1. Level and plumb individual members of structure within specified AISC

tolerances. 2. Establish required leveling and plumbing measurements on mean

operating temperature of structure. Make allowances for difference between temperature at time of erection and mean temperature at which structure will be when completed and in service.

F. Splice members only where indicated and accepted on shop drawings.

G. Erection bolts: On exposed welded construction, remove erection bolts, fill holes with plug welds and grind smooth at exposed surfaces.

H. Comply with AISC Specification for bearing, adequacy of temporary connections, alignment, and removal of paint on surfaces adjacent to field welds.

I. Do not enlarge unfair holes in members by burning or by use of drift pins. Ream holes that must be enlarged to admit bolts as permitted by Architect.

J. Tighten bearing-type bolts A-325N to the snug tight condition as follows: 1. Bolts shall be placed in all holes, with washers positioned as required and

nuts threaded to complete the assembly. 2. Compact the joint to the snug-tight condition. 3. The snug-tightened condition is the tightness that is attained with a few

impacts of an impact wrench or the full effort of an ironworker using an ordinary spud wrench.

K. Provide hardened washers conforming to ASTM F436 and place under the part being turned.

L. Do not reuse or retighten bolts which have been fully tightened. Use only non-galvanized nuts and bolts that are clean, rust-free, and well lubricated. Bolts and nuts shall be wax dipped by the bolt supplier or lubricated with Johnson’s Stick Wax 140. Cleaning and lubrication of ASTM F1852 twist-off-type tension-control bolts is not permitted.

M. Store fastener components in sealed containers until ready for use. Reseal open containers to prevent contamination by moisture or other deleterious substances. Store closed containers from dirt and moisture in a protective shelter. Take from protective storage only as many fastener components as are anticipated to be installed during the work shift. Fastener components that are not incorporated into the work shall be returned to protective storage at the end of the work shift. Fasteners from open containers and fasteners that accumulate rust or dirt shall not be used and shall be immediately and permanently removed from the project site.


N. Gas cutting: Do not use gas-cutting torches in field for correcting fabrication errors in primary structural framing. When permitted, finish gas-cut sections equal to a sheared appearance by grinding or reaming. Do not use gas cutting to fabricate bolt holes.

O. Touch-up painting: Immediately after erection, slag field welds and clean bolted connections and abraded areas of shop paint. Apply paint to exposed areas using original shop primer or cold galvanizing compound. For exposed steel having special coatings system, reapply both primer and top coat per Division 9 Section, “Special Coatings”. For galvanized steel, apply Zinc Clad Cold Galvanizing by Sherwin-Williams or Cold Galvanizing by ZRC Chemical by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 3 mils.

3.02 QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing agency shall conduct and interpret tests and state in each report whether test specimens comply with requirements, and specifically state any deviations there from.

B. Correct deficiencies in structural steel work which inspections or laboratory test reports have indicated to be not in compliance with requirements. Perform additional tests, at Contractor’s expense, as may be necessary to reconfirm any noncompliance of original work, and as may be necessary to show compliance of corrected work.

C. Field Inspection and Tests: Inspect and Test during the erection of structural steel assemblies as directed by the Engineer of Record, but not less than the following 1. Verify field welding procedures and obtain welder certificates. 2. Check joint preparation and fit up, backing strips, and runout plates. 3. Check preheating to assure proper temperature, uniformity, and

thoroughness through the full material thickness. 4. Review welding sequence. 5. Perform visual inspection of all welds for compliance with Contract

Documents. 6. Check 100% of bolted connections according to inspection procedures

outlined in the “Specification for Structural Joints using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts” and as required elsewhere in these specifications.

7. Mark for repair any area not meeting Specification requirements. Correction of rejected welds shall be made in accordance with Paragraph 3.7, “Corrections”, AWS D1.1.

8. Re-examine all repair areas and interpret, record, and report the results of examinations of repair welds.

END OF SECTION

RENOVATION OF HISTORIC FIRE STATION NO. 2 (Phase II-A) City of Miami Project No. B-30579 05510 - 1 of 7 METAL STAIRS

SECTION 05510

METAL STAIRS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Stairs with concrete treads.

B. Structural steel stair framing and supports.

C. Handrails and guards.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 03300 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: 1. Concrete fill in stair pans and landings; mesh reinforcement for landings. 2. Placement of metal anchors in concrete.

B. Section 04230 - Reinforced Masonry: Placement of metal fabrications in masonry.

C. Section 04810 - Unit Masonry Assemblies: Placement of metal fabrications in masonry.

D. Section 05120 - Structural Steel.

E. Section 09900 - Paints and Coatings: Paint finish.


A. Provide stairs and railings complying with the most stringent requirements of local, State, and federal regulations; where requirements of the contract documents exceed those of regulations, comply with the contract documents.

B. Stairs shall withstand the following structural loads without exceeding the allowable design working stress of materials, including anchors and connections. Apply each load to produce the maximum stress in each component: 1. Treads and Platforms of Metal Stairs: Capable of withstanding a uniform

load of 100 PSF (4.8 kN/m2) and concentrated load of 300 lbf (1.33 kN) applied on an area of 4 square inches (2581 square mm). Concentrated and uniform loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.

2. Stair Framing: Capable of withstanding stresses resulting from loads specified, in addition to stresses resulting from railing system loads.

3. Deflection of Treads, Platforms and Framing Members: L/240, maximum.

C. Handrails, guardrails and railings shall comply with applicable requirements of the governing building code, including but not limited to FBC-B SECTIONS 1001, 1009, 1010, 1012, 1607, and 1618, and FBC-B CHAPTER 11, and the following criteria: 1. Handrails shall have a circular cross section with an outside diameter of at

least 1.25 inches (32 mm) and not greater than 2 inches (51 mm). 2. Handrails shall not rotate within their fittings. 3. Handrail assemblies and guards shall be able to resist a load of 50 plf (0.73

kN/m) applied in any direction at the top, and to transfer this load through the


supports to the structure. a. Handrail assemblies and guards shall be able to resist a single

concentrated load of 200 pounds (0.89 kN), applied in any direction at any point along the top, and have attachment devices and supporting structure to transfer this loading to appropriate structural elements of the building.

b. Intermediate rails (all those except the handrail), balusters and panel fillers shall be able to withstand a horizontally applied normal load of 50 pounds (0.22 kN) on an area equal to 1 square foot (0.093m2), including openings and space between rails.

4. Stairs shall have handrails on each side. a. Handrails shall be adequate in strength and attachment in accordance

with FBC-B SECTION 1607.7. b. Handrail height, measured above stair tread nosings, or finish surface of

ramp slope shall be uniform, not less than 34 inches (864 mm) and not more than 38 inches (965 mm).

c. Handrails shall return to a wall, guard or the walking surface, or shall be continuous to the handrail of an adjacent stair flight.

5. Handrails shall be provided along both sides of each ramp run with a rise greater than 6 inches (152 mm). a. Handrails for ramps, where required by FBC-B SECTION 1010.8, shall

comply with FBC-B SECTION 1009.11. b. If handrails are not continuous, they shall extend at least 18 inches (305

mm) beyond the top and bottom of the ramp segment and shall be parallel with the floor or ground surface.

c. Ends of handrails shall be either rounded or returned smoothly to floor, wall or post.

d. Top of the handrail gripping surface shall be not less than 34 inches (864 mm) nor more than 38 inches (965 mm) above the ramp surface.

6. Guards shall be provided along open-sided walking surfaces, stairways, ramps and landings that are located more than 30 inches (762 mm) above the floor or grade below, and other locations indicated on drawings. a. Guards shall be adequate in strength and attachment in accordance with

FBC-B SECTION 1607.7. b. Guards shall form a protective barrier not less than 42 inches (1067 mm)

high, measured vertically above the leading edge of the tread, adjacent walking surface.

c. Open guards shall have balusters or ornamental patterns such that a 4-inch-diameter (102 mm) sphere cannot pass through any opening up to a height of 34 inches (864 mm). From a height of 34 inches (864 mm) to 42 inches (1067 mm) above the adjacent walking surfaces, a sphere 8 inches (203 mm) in diameter shall not pass.

1.04 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: Indicate profiles, sizes, connection attachments, reinforcing, anchorage, size and type of fasteners, and accessories. 1. Indicate welded connections using standard AWS A2.4 welding symbols.


Indicate net weld lengths. 2. Include the design engineer's stamp or seal on each sheet of shop drawings. 3. Furnish setting diagrams for anchorage installation as required.

C. Delegated Design Data: As required by authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Include calculations stamped by a structural engineer registered in the

jurisdiction in which the project is located

D. Welders' Certificates.


A. Structural Designer Qualifications: Professional Structural Engineer experienced in design of this work and licensed in the State of Florida, or personnel under direct supervision of such an engineer.

B. Installer Qualifications: Acceptable to manufacturer.

C. Welder Qualifications: Show certification of welders employed on the Work, verifying AWS qualification within the previous 12 months.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Single Source Responsibility: Provide components and materials specified in this section from a single manufacturer.

B. Metal Stair Manufacturer/Fabricator: 1. Alfab, Inc.: 220 Boll Weevil Circle East; P. O. Box 311327; Enterprise, AL

36331; Tel. 334-347-9516. 2. American Stair, Inc.: 642 Forestwood Drive; Romeoville, IL 60446; Tel.

800-872-7824. 3. Sharon Stairs: 1481 Exeter Rd; Akron, Ohio 44306; Tel. 330-777-5377 or

800-792-0129. 4. Substitutions: See Section 01600 - Product Requirements.

2.02 MATERIALS

A. Steel Sections: ASTM A 36.

B. Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500 or ASTM A 501 structural tubing, round and shapes as indicated.

C. Steel Plates: ASTM A 6 or ASTM A 283.

D. Pipe: ASTM A 53, Grade B Schedule 40, black finish.

E. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653, Structural Steel (SS) Grade 33/230 with G40/Z120 coating.

F. Concrete Fill: Portland cement Type I, 3000 PSI (20 MPa) 28 day strength, 2 to 3 inch (50 to 75 mm) slump.

G. Concrete Reinforcement: Mesh type as detailed, galvanized.

H. Fasteners and Supports: Sized by the manufacturer to meet structural design


criteria. If hanger rod connections are applicable to any of the landing connections, they shall be a minimum of 5/8 inch (15.9 mm) diameter steel rod, with actual size based on stair load.

H. Steel Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 32, Type 1, galvanized to ASTM A 153 where connecting galvanized components.

I. Welding Materials: AWS D1.1; type required for materials being welded.

J. Touch-Up Primer for Galvanized Surfaces: SSPC-Paint 20, Type I - Inorganic, complying with VOC limitations of authorities having jurisdiction.

2.03 METAL STAIRS - GENERAL

A. Metal Stairs: Provide stairs of the design specified, complete with landing platforms, vertical and horizontal supports, railings, and guards, fabricated accurately for anchorage to each other and to building structure. 1. Regulatory Requirements: Provide stairs and railings complying with the

most stringent requirements of local, state, and federal regulations; where requirements of the contract documents exceed those of regulations, comply with the contract documents.

2. Structural Design: Provide complete stair and railing assemblies complying with the following: a. Stair Capacity: Uniform live load of 100 PSF (4.7 kPa) and a

concentrated load of 300 pounds (14.4 kg) with deflection of stringer or landing framing not to exceed 1/360 of span.

b. Railing Assemblies: Comply with ASTM E 985. 3. Dimensions: As indicated on drawings. 4. Shop assemble components; disassemble into largest practical sections

suitable for transport and access to site. 5. No sharp or rough areas on exposed travel surfaces and surfaces accessible

to touch. 6. Separate dissimilar metals using paint or permanent tape.

B. Metal Jointing and Finish Quality Levels: 1. Architectural: All joints as inconspicuous as possible, whether welded or

mechanical. a. Welded Joints: Continuously welded and ground smooth and flush. b. Mechanical Joints: Butted tight, flush, and hairline; concealed

fastenings only. c. Exposed Edges and Corners: Eased to small uniform radius. d. Metal Surfaces to be Painted: Sanded or ground smooth, suitable for

highest quality gloss finish.

C. Fasteners: Same material or compatible with materials being fastened; type consistent with design and specified quality level.

D. Anchors and Related Components: Same material and finish as item to be anchored, except where specifically indicated otherwise; provide all anchors and fasteners required.

2.04 METAL STAIRS WITH CONCRETE TREADS

A. Jointing and Finish Quality Level: Architectural, as defined above.


B. Risers: Closed.

C. Treads: Metal pan with field-installed concrete fill. 1. Concrete Depth: 1-1/2 inches (38 mm), minimum. 2. Tread Pan Material: Steel sheet. 3. Tread Pan Thickness: As required by design; 14 gage, 0.075 inch (1.9 mm)

minimum. 4. Pan Anchorage to Stringers: Continuously welded, from top or bottom. 5. Concrete Reinforcement: Welded wire mesh. 6. Concrete Finish: For resilient floor covering.

D. Risers: Same material and thickness as tread pans. 1. Riser/Nosing Profile: Sloped riser with rounded nosing of minimum radius. 2. Nosing Depth: Not more than 1 inch (25 mm) overhang. 3. Nosing Return: Flush with top of concrete fill, not more than 1/2 inch (12 mm)

wide.

E. Stringers: Rolled steel channels. 1. Stringer Depth: As indicated on drawings. 2. End Closure: Sheet steel of same thickness as risers welded across ends.

F. Mid Landings: Similar construction, using minimum of 12 gage (2.7 mm) hot-rolled mild steel sheets, formed for a minimum 2-1/2 inches (64 mm) concrete fill, with 11 gage channel supports and bracing welded to perimeter frame at 12 inches (305 mm) on center. Reinforce as required to achieve design load capacity; welded wire mesh reinforcement.

G. Finish: Galvanized after fabrication, except sheet components to be galvanized before fabrication.

H. Under Side of Stair: Exposed to view, to be finished same as specified for other exposed to view surfaces.

2.05 HANDRAILS AND GUARDS

A. Manufacturer’s standard welded steel tube railing system complying with the following requirements: 1. Rails: 1-1/2 inches (38.1 mm) diameter × 13 gage (2.3 mm) minimum round

steel tube, continuous multi-strand type, equally spaced with not more than 3-15/16 inches (100 mm) clearance between strands and with a minimum extension per governing building code at top and bottom risers. a. Wrap rail continuously past space between flights to form guardrail as

required by the governing building code. b. Terminate rail ends with radiused returns, newel posts or safety

terminations approved by local code. c. Provide not less than 1-1/2 inches (38.1 mm) clearing between rail and

wall. 2. Rail Posts: 1-1/2 inches (38.1 mm) square × 11 gage (3 mm) tubing.

a. Rail posts to fasten to side of plate stringers per manufacturer’s shop drawings.

b. Manufacturer to pre-weld erection aid to rail post for proper height to aid stair erector.

c. Erection aid (setting block) to be removed and weld-ground smooth after


installation. 3. Fabrication:

a. Use preformed or prefabricated bends. b. Butt weld tee and cross intersections in tubing. Cope and weld

intersections in pipe. Miter elbows. c. Mechanically fasten internal sleeves and fittings. d. Provide minimum 12 gage (2.7 mm) welded steel plate closures or

hemispherical closure fittings on all exposed rail ends. 4. Finish: Galvanized after fabrication.

2.06 SHOP FINISHING

A. Clean surfaces of rust, scale, grease, and foreign matter prior to finishing.

B. Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize to minimum requirements of ASTM A 123. 1. Touch up abraded areas after fabrication using specified touch-up primer for

galvanized surfaces.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive work.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. When field welding is required, clean and strip primed steel items to bare metal.

B. Supply items required to be cast into concrete and embedded in masonry with setting templates.

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Install components plumb and level, accurately fitted, free from distortion or defects.

B. Provide anchors, plates, angles, hangers, and other components required for connecting stairs to structure.

C. Allow for erection loads, and for sufficient temporary bracing to maintain true alignment until completion of erection and installation of permanent attachments.

D. Provide welded field joints where specifically indicated on shop drawings. Perform field welding in accordance with AWS D1.1.

E. Other field joints may be either welded or bolted provided the result complies with the limitations specified for jointing quality levels.

F. Obtain approval prior to site cutting or creating adjustments not scheduled.

G. After erection, prime welds, abrasions, and surfaces not shop primed or galvanized, except surfaces to be in contact with concrete.

3.04 TOLERANCES

A. Maximum Variation from Plumb: 1/4 inch (6 mm) per story, non-cumulative.

B. Maximum Offset from True Alignment: 1/4 inch (6 mm).


3.05 SCHEDULE

A. Stair No. 1: Concrete-filled pan treads and landings; galvanized finish. Handrails and railing systems to be provided as part of future project.

B. Stair No. 2: Concrete-filled pan treads and landings; galvanized finish. Pipe handrails and railing systems.

END OF SECTION

RENOVATION OF HISTORIC FIRE STATION NO. 2 (Phase II-A) City of Miami Project No. B-30579 05515 - 1 of 4 LADDERS

SECTION 05515

LADDERS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Aluminum access ladders.


A. Section 03300 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Placement of metal fabrications in concrete.

B. Section 04810 - Unit Masonry Assemblies: Placement of metal fabrications in masonry.

C. Section 04820 - Reinforced Unit Masonry Assemblies: Placement of metal fabrications in masonry.

D. Section 07720 - Roof Accessories: Alignment of ladder with roof hatch.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: 1. Detail fabrication and erection of each ladder indicated. 2. Include plans, elevations, sections, and details of metal fabrications and their

connections. 3. Indicate profiles, sizes, connection attachments, reinforcing, anchorage, size

and type of fasteners, and accessories. a. Provide reaction loads for each hanger and bracket.

4. Indicate welded connections using standard AWS A2.4 welding symbols. Indicate net weld lengths.

5. Provide templates for anchors and bolts specified for installation under other Sections.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing aluminum metal ladders similar to those indicated for this Project. 1. Record of successful in-service performance. 2. Sufficient production capacity to produce required units. 3. Professional engineering competent in design and structural analysis to

fabricate ladders in compliance with industry standards and local codes.

B. Installer Qualifications: Competent and experienced firm capable of selecting fasteners and installing ladders to attain designed operational and structural performance.

C. Product Qualification: Product design shall comply with OSHA 1910.27 minimum standards for ladders.


A. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation.



A. Field Measurements: Verify dimensions by field measurement before fabrication.

1.07 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer has responsibility for an extended Corrective Period for work of this Section for a period of 5 years from date of Substantial Completion against all the conditions indicated below, and when notified in writing from City, manufacturer shall promptly and without inconvenience and cost to City correct said deficiencies. 1. Defects in materials and workmanship. 2. Deterioration of material and surface performance below minimum OSHA

standards as certified by independent third party testing laboratory. Ordinary wear and tear, unusual abuse or neglect excepted.

3. Within the warranty period, the manufacturer shall, at its option, repair, replace, or refund the purchase price of defective ladder.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Alaco Ladder Company; 5167 G Street; Chino, California 91710; Tel: 888-310-7040 or 909-591-7561.

B. O'Keeffe's, Inc.; 325 Newhall St.; San Francisco, CA 94124; Tel: 888-653-3333 or 415-824-4900; Web: http://www.okeeffes.com.

C. Precision Ladders, LLC (formerly, Precision Stair Corp.); P.O. Box 2279; Morristown, TN 37816; Tel. 423-586-2265.

D. Substitutions: Requests for substitutions will be considered in accordance with provisions of Section 01600.

2.02 MATERIALS - ALUMINUM

A. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B 221, 6063 alloy, T6 temper.

B. Sheet Aluminum: ASTM B 209, 5005 alloy, H34 temper.

C. Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: Stainless steel.

D. Welding Materials: AWS D1.2; type required for materials being welded.

2.03 FABRICATION

A. General: 1. Fit and shop assemble items in largest practical sections, for delivery to site. 2. Fabricate items with joints tightly fitted and secured. 3. Continuously seal joined members by continuous welds. 4. Grind exposed joints flush and smooth with adjacent finish surface. Make

exposed joints butt tight, flush, and hairline. Ease exposed edges to small uniform radius.

5. Exposed Mechanical Fastenings: Flush countersunk screws or bolts; unobtrusively located; consistent with design of component, except where specifically noted otherwise.

6. Supply components required for anchorage of fabrications. Fabricate


anchors and related components of same material and finish as fabrication, except where specifically noted otherwise.

B. Rungs: Not less than 1-1/4 inches (32 mm) in section and 18-3/8 inches (467mm) long, formed from tubular aluminum extrusions. Squared and deeply serrated on all sides. 1. Rungs shall withstand a 1,500 pound (454 kg) load without deformation or

failure.

C. Channel Side Rails: Not less than 1/8 inch (3 mm) wall thickness by 3 inches (76 mm) wide.

D. Ladder Safety Post: Retractable hand hold and tie off.

2.04 FINISH - ALUMINUM

A. Class I Natural Anodized Finish: AAMA 611 AA-M12C22A41 Clear anodic coating not less than 0.7 mils (0.018 mm) thick.

B. Apply one coat of bituminous paint to concealed aluminum surfaces in contact with cementitious or dissimilar materials.

2.05 FABRICATION TOLERANCES

A. Squareness: 1/8 inch (3 mm) maximum difference in diagonal measurements.

B. Maximum Offset Between Faces: 1/16 inch (1.5 mm).

C. Maximum Misalignment of Adjacent Members: 1/16 inch (1.5 mm).

D. Maximum Bow: 1/8 inch (3 mm) in 48 inches (1.2 m).

E. Maximum Deviation from Plane: 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) in 48 inches (1.2 m).

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION


B. Verify all measurements and take all field measurements necessary before fabrication.

C. Coordinate anchorages. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and anchorage structural loads for fastener resistance.

D. Do not begin installation until supporting structure is complete and ladder installation will not interfere with supporting structure work.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Supply setting templates to the appropriate entities for steel items required to be cast into concrete or embedded in masonry.

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. General: 1. Install items at locations indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's

instructions, and in proper relationship with adjacent construction.


2. Exposed fastenings shall be compatible materials, shall generally match in color and finish, and harmonize with the material to which fastenings are applied.

3. Include materials and parts necessary to complete each item, even though such work is not definitely shown or specified.

4. Poor matching of holes for fasteners shall be cause for rejection. Conceal fastenings where practicable.

5. Thickness of metal and details of assembly and supports shall provide strength and stiffness.

6. Install items plumb and level, accurately fitted, free from distortion or defects. 7. Provide for erection loads, and for sufficient temporary bracing to maintain

true alignment until completion of erection and installation of permanent attachments.

8. Obtain approval prior to site cutting or making adjustments not scheduled.

3.04 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed products until completion of project.

B. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion.

3.05 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES

A. Maximum Variation from Plumb: 1/4 inch (6 mm) per story, non-cumulative.


C. Maximum Out-of-Position: 1/4 inch (6 mm).

END OF SECTION

RENOVATION OF HISTORIC FIRE STATION NO. 2 (Phase II-A) City of Miami Project No. B-30579 05525 - 1 of 4 GUARDRAILS

SECTION 05525

GUARDRAILS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Guardrail assemblies.


A. Section 03300 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Placement of anchors in concrete.

B. Section 04810 - Unit Masonry Assemblies: Placement of anchors in masonry.

C. Section 07620 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim.

D. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers.


A. Provide guardrail assemblies complying with the most stringent requirements of local, State, and federal regulations; where requirements of the contract documents exceed those of regulations, comply with the contract documents.

B. Guardrail assemblies shall comply with applicable requirements of the governing building code, including but not limited to FBC-B SECTIONS 1001, 1009, 1010, 1012, 1607, and 1618, and FBC-B CHAPTER 11, and the following criteria: 1. Guardrail assemblies shall be able to resist a load of 50 plf (0.73 kN/m)

applied in any direction at the top, and to transfer this load through the supports to the structure. a. Top rails shall be able to resist a single concentrated load of 200 pounds

(0.89 kN), applied in any direction at any point along the top, and have attachment devices and supporting structure to transfer this loading to appropriate structural elements of the building.

b. Intermediate rails, balusters and panel fillers shall be able to withstand a horizontally applied normal load of 50 pounds (0.22 kN) on an area equal to 1 square foot (0.093m2), including openings and space between rails.

2. Provide continuous guardrail assembly along open-sided walking surfaces of plaza deck area(s) that are located more than 30 inches (762 mm) above the floor or grade below, and other locations indicated on drawings. a. Guardrail assemblies shall be adequate in strength and attachment in

accordance with FBC-B SECTION 1607.7. b. Guardrail assemblies shall form a protective barrier not less than 42

inches (1067 mm) high, measured vertically above the leading edge of the tread, adjacent walking surface.

c. Guardrail assemblies shall have balusters or ornamental patterns such that a 4-inch-diameter (102 mm) sphere cannot pass through any opening up to a height of 34 inches (864 mm). From a height of 34 inches (864 mm) to 42 inches (1067 mm) above the adjacent walking surfaces, a sphere 8 inches (203 mm) in diameter shall not pass.


1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. For submittal procedures, refer to Section 2 - General Terms and Conditions and Section 3 - Supplemental Terms and Conditions

B. Shop Drawings: Indicate profiles, sizes, connection attachments, anchorage, size and type of fasteners, and accessories. 1. Indicate welded connections using standard AWS A2.4 welding symbols.

Indicate net weld lengths. 2. Include the design engineer's stamp or seal on each sheet of shop drawings.

C. Samples: 1. Samples: Submit two samples, 3 x 3 inches in size, illustrating color and

finish. 2. Submit two, 12 inch long samples of handrail. Submit two samples of elbow,

Tee, wall bracket, escutcheon, and end stop.


A. Delegated Design Data: As required by authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Delegated Engineer (Structural) Qualifications: Professional Structural Engineer experienced in design of this work and licensed in the State of Florida, or personnel under direct supervision of such an engineer.

C. Welder Qualifications: Show certification of welders employed on the Work, verifying AWS qualification within the previous 12 months.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. C. R. Laurence Co., Inc: www.crlaurence.com.

B. Poma Corp: www.pomacorp.com.

C. Sterling Dula Architectural Products: www.sterlingdula.com.

D. The Wagner Companies: www.wagnercompanies.com.

E. Substitutions: See Section 01600 - Product Requirements.

2.02 RAILINGS - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Design, fabricate, and test guardrail assemblies in accordance with the most stringent requirements of ASTM E 985 and applicable local code.

B. Design guardrail assemblies and attachments to resist lateral force of 75 lbs (333 N) at any point without damage or permanent set. Test in accordance with ASTM E 935.

C. Allow for expansion and contraction of members and building movement without damage to connections or members.

D. Dimensions: See drawings for configurations and heights. 1. Top Rails: 2 inches (50 mm) diameter, round. 2. Intermediate / Bottom Rails: 1-1/4 by 1 inch (32 by 25 mm) rectangular.


3. Posts: 2 inches (50 mm) round. 4. Balusters: 1/2 inch (12 mm) round solid bar.

E. Provide anchors and other components as required to attach to structure, made of same materials as railing components unless otherwise indicated; where exposed fasteners are unavoidable provide flush countersunk fasteners.

F. Provide slip-on non-weld mechanical fittings to join lengths, seal open ends, and conceal exposed mounting bolts and nuts, including but not limited to elbows, T-shapes, splice connectors, flanges, escutcheons, and wall brackets.

2.03 ALUMINUM MATERIALS

A. Aluminum Pipe: Schedule 40; ASTM B 429, ASTM B 241, or ASTM B 483.

B. Aluminum Tube: Minimum wall thickness of 0.127 inch (3.2 mm); ASTM B 429, ASTM B 241, or ASTM B 483.

C. Non-Weld Mechanical Fittings: Slip-on cast aluminum, for Schedule 40 pipe, with flush setscrews for tightening by standard hex wrench, no bolts or screw fasteners.

D. Welding Fittings: No exposed fasteners; machined aluminum.

E. Straight Splice Connectors: Concealed spigot; cast aluminum.

F. Exposed Fasteners: No exposed bolts or screws.

2.04 FABRICATION

A. Accurately form components to suit specific project conditions and for proper connection to building structure.

B. Fit and shop assemble components in largest practical sizes for delivery to site.

C. Fabricate components with joints tightly fitted and secured. Provide spigots and sleeves to accommodate site assembly and installation.

D. Welded Joints: 1. Exterior Components: Continuously seal joined pieces by continuous welds.

Drill condensate drainage holes at bottom of members at locations that will not encourage water intrusion.

2. Interior Components: Continuously seal joined pieces by continuous welds. 3. Grind exposed joints flush and smooth with adjacent finish surface. Make


2.05 ALUMINUM FINISHES

A. Superior Performance Organic Coating System: AAMA 2605 multiple coat, thermally cured polyvinylidene fluoride system. 1. Color: To be selected by Consultant from manufacturer’s complete range of

colors.

B. Touch-Up Materials: As recommended by coating manufacturer for field application.


PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION


3.02 PREPARATION

A. Clean and strip aluminum where site welding is required.

B. Supply items required to be cast into concrete or embedded in masonry with setting templates, for installation as work of other sections.

C. Apply one coat of bituminous paint to concealed aluminum surfaces that will be in contact with cementitious or dissimilar materials.

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Install components plumb and level, accurately fitted, free from distortion or defects, with tight joints.

C. Anchor railings securely to structure.

3.04 TOLERANCES

A. Maximum Variation from Plumb: 1/4 inch (6 mm) per floor level, non-cumulative.


C. Maximum Out-of-Position: 1/4 inch (6 mm).

END OF SECTION

RENOVATION OF HISTORIC FIRE STATION NO. 2 (Phase II-A) City of Miami Project No. B-30579 05710 - 1 of 4 ORNAMENTAL METAL FABRICATIONS

SECTION 05710

ORNAMENTAL METAL FABRICATIONS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Simulated wrought iron fabrications (e.g., security bar grillage).


A. Section 03300 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Placement of metal fabrications in concrete.

B. Section 04810 - Unit Masonry Assemblies: Placement of metal fabrications in masonry.

C. Section 09900 - Paints and Coatings.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: 1. Indicate profiles, sizes, connection attachments, reinforcing, anchorage, size

and type of fasteners, and accessories. a. Indicate welded connections using standard AWS A2.4 welding symbols.

Indicate net weld lengths. 2. Indicate wall opening dimensions, and fastener locations and clearances. 3. Include erection drawings, elevations, and details where applicable.


A. Welder Qualifications: 1. Qualify welders in accordance with AWS D1.1. 2. Use procedures, materials, and equipment of the type required for the work.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. Steel Bars: ASTM A 108, Grade 1018 low carbon (mild) steel. 1. Shapes: Flat, square, and round.

B. Plates: ASTM A 283.

C. Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325, Type 1, galvanized to ASTM A 153 where connecting galvanized components.

D. Expansion Anchors, Sleeve Anchors, and Adhesive Anchors: 1. Provide 3/8 in. diameter expansion anchors. Minimum embedment shall be 2

in. Design values listed shall be as tested according to ASTM E 488. a. Minimum pullout value shall be 4000 lbs. b. Minimum shear value shall be 6500 lbs.

E. Welding Materials: AWS D1.1; type required for materials being welded.


2.02 FINISHES

A. Galvanizing: ASTM A 123, ASTM A 153, ASTM A 653 or ASTM A 924, Z275 G90, as applicable. 1. Hot-dip galvanize items specified to be zinc-coated, after fabrication where

practicable. 2. Galvanize anchor bolts, fasteners, washers, and parts or devices necessary

for proper installation, unless indicated otherwise.

B. Repair of Zinc-Coated Surfaces: 1. Repair damaged surfaces with galvanizing repair method and paint

conforming to ASTM A 780 or by application of stick or thick paste material specifically designed for repair of galvanizing, as approved by Consultant.

2. Clean areas to be repaired and remove slag from welds.

C. Finish Painting: Refer to Section 09900.

2.03 FABRICATION

A. General: 1. Fit and shop assemble items in largest practical sections, for delivery to site. 2. Fabricate items with joints tightly fitted and secured. 3. Continuously seal joined members by continuous welds. 4. Grind exposed joints flush and smooth with adjacent finish surface. Make


5. Exposed Mechanical Fastenings: Flush countersunk screws or bolts; unobtrusively located; consistent with design of component, except where specifically noted otherwise.

6. Supply components required for anchorage of fabrications. Fabricate anchors and related components of same material and finish as fabrication, except where specifically noted otherwise.

B. Welding: 1. Perform welding, welding inspection, and corrective welding, in accordance

with AWS D1.1. 2. Use continuous welds on all exposed connections. Grind visible welds smooth

in the finished installation.

D. Fabrication Tolerances: 1. Squareness: 1/8 inch (3 mm) maximum difference in diagonal

measurements. 2. Maximum Misalignment of Adjacent Members: 1/16 inch (1.5 mm). 3. Maximum Deviation from Plane: 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) in 48 inches (1.2 m).

2.04 SIMULATED WROUGHT IRON SECURITY BAR GRILLAGE

A. Fabricate from ASTM A 108, Grade 1018 steel bars, in shapes and configurations indicated on the Drawings. 1. Prior to fabrication, the surfaces of steel bars shall be distressed (roughened)

to simulate the appearance of wrought iron. Techniques for distressing steel include but are not limited to applying a hammered texture to all surfaces and knocking-off corners and edges.

2. Connections between joined members (e.g., intersecting bars) to be sealed


with continuous welds.

B. Finish: 1. After fabrication, hot dip galvanize to ASTM A 123 requirements. 2. Refer to Section 09900 for finish painting.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION


B. Verify all measurements and take all field measurements necessary before fabrication.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Clean and strip primed steel items to bare metal where site welding is required.

B. Supply setting templates to the appropriate entities for steel items required to be cast into concrete or embedded in masonry.

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. General: 1. Install items at locations indicated, according to manufacturer's instructions. 2. Exposed fastenings shall be compatible materials, shall generally match in

color and finish, and harmonize with the material to which fastenings are applied.

3. Include materials and parts necessary to complete each item, even though such work is not definitely shown or specified.

4. Poor matching of holes for fasteners shall be cause for rejection. 5. Thickness of metal and details of assembly and supports shall provide

strength and stiffness. 6. Form joints exposed to the weather shall be formed to exclude water. Items

listed below require additional procedures. 7. Install items plumb and level, accurately fitted, free from distortion or defects. 8. Provide for erection loads, and for sufficient temporary bracing to maintain

true alignment until completion of erection and installation of permanent attachments.

9. Site cutting, making adjustments not scheduled, and field welding are not allowed.

B. Workmanship: 1. Provide ornamental metalwork that is well formed to shape and size, with

sharp lines and angles and true curves. 2. Drilling and punching shall produce clean true lines and surfaces. 3. Provide continuous welding along the entire area of contact except where tack

welding is permitted. 4. Do not tack weld exposed connections of work in place and ground smooth. 5. Provide a distressed finish on exposed surfaces of work in place, to simulate

appearance of wrought iron. 6. Mill joints where tight fits are required. Corner joints shall be coped or mitered,

well formed, and in true alignment.


7. Accurately set work to established lines and elevations and securely fastened in place. Install in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions and approved drawings, cuts, and details.

C. Anchorage, Fastenings, and Connections: 1. Provide anchorage where necessary for fastening miscellaneous metal items

securely in place. 2. Include for anchorage not otherwise specified or indicated, expansion anchors

when approved for concrete and masonry. a. Do not use wood plugs in any material.

3. Make exposed fastenings of compatible materials, generally matching in color and finish, to which fastenings are applied.

3.04 INSTALLATION - SECURITY BAR GRILLAGE

A. Securely anchor security bar grille assemblies to masonry with expansion anchors of size(s) indicated on Drawings, or other type of fastenings if the ends of such fastenings are welded to the adjoining metal grilles or otherwise made tamperproof in a satisfactory manner.

B. Tolerances: 1. Maximum Variation from Plumb: 1/4 inch (6 mm) per story, non-cumulative. 2. Maximum Offset from True Alignment: 1/4 inch (6 mm). 3. Maximum Out-of-Position: 1/4 inch (6 mm).

END OF SECTION

RENOVATION OF HISTORIC FIRE STATION NO. 2 (Phase II-A) City of Miami Project No. B-30579 06100 - 1 of 9 ROUGH CARPENTRY

SECTION 06100

ROUGH CARPENTRY

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Structural dimension lumber framing.

B. Non-structural dimension lumber framing.

C. Rough opening framing for doors, windows, and roof openings.

D. Sheathing.

E. Preservative treated wood materials.

F. Miscellaneous framing and sheathing.

G. Concealed wood blocking, nailers, and supports.

H. Miscellaneous wood nailers, furring, and grounds.


A. Section 03100 - Concrete Formwork: Placement of steel support fabrications.

B. Section 05120 - Structural Steel: 1. Structural steel framing members, including but not limited to steel columns. 2. Structural steel channels. 3. Steel bearing plates, bent plates, ledger angles, shear studs, and related

load-bearing steel components. 4. Bolts, threaded rods, anchors and fasteners. 5. Grouting under base plates.

C. Section 06130 - Heavy Timber Construction.

E. Section 06150 - Wood Decking.

F. Section 07620 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Sill flashings.

1.03 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: 1. Submit data on proprietary connection devices. 2. Provide technical data on wood preservative materials and application

instructions.

C. Shop Drawings: 1. Indicate framing connection details, fasteners, connections and dimensions. 2. Indicate roof deck framing system, loads and cambers, bearing details, and

framed openings. 3. Indicate dimensions, wood species and grades, component profiles, drilled

holes, fasteners, connectors, details, and sequence of erection.


D. Samples: For rough carpentry members that will be exposed to view, submit two samples, 6 x 12 inch in size illustrating wood grain, color, and general appearance.

E. Manufacturer's Certificate: 1. Certify that wood products supplied for rough carpentry meet or exceed

specified requirements. 2. Submit certificates attesting that products meet the grade requirements

specified in lieu of grade markings where appearance is important and grade marks will deface material.


A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable requirements of governing building code, including but not limited to the following: 1. Materials, design, construction and quality of wood members and their

fasteners shall conform to applicable requirements of FBC-B CHAPTER 23. 2. Connections for wood members shall be designed and constructed in

accordance with the appropriate methodology in FBC-B SECTION 2301.2. The number and size of nails connecting wood members shall not be less than that set forth in FBC-B TABLE 2304.9.1.

B. Lumber: 1. Grade: Comply with PS 20 and approved grading rules and inspection

agencies. 2. Grade Mark: Lumber used for load-supporting purposes, including machine

stress-rated or machine evaluated lumber, shall be identified by the grade mark of a lumber grading or inspection agency that has been approved by an accreditation body that complies with PS 20 or equivalent. Grading practices and identification shall comply with rules published by an agency approved in accordance with the procedures of PS 20 or equivalent procedures, except as otherwise indicated.

3. Nominal Size: The commercial size designation of width and depth, in standard sawn lumber grades; somewhat larger than the standard net size of dressed lumber, in accordance with PS 20 for sawn lumber.

C. Exposed-to-View Rough Carpentry: 1. Grade Mark: In lieu of a grade mark on the material, submit manufacturer's

certificate that products meet or exceed specified requirements, in lieu of grade stamping. a. Comply with applicable requirements of FBC-B SECTION 2303.1.1.

D. Preservative-Treated Wood: Provide lumber and plywood marked or stamped by an ALSC-accredited testing agency, certifying level and type of treatment in accordance with AWPA standards.

E. Manufacturer's Certificates of Compliance: 1. Certify that wood products supplied for rough carpentry meet or exceed

specified requirements. 2. Include data for wood-preservative and fire-retardant treatment from

chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements.



A. Deliver materials to the site in an undamaged condition.

B. Cover wood products to protect against moisture. Support stacked products to prevent deformation and to allow air circulation.

C. Stack plywood and other board products so as to prevent warping.

D. Locate stacks on well drained areas, supported at least 6 inches above grade and cover with well ventilated sheds having firmly constructed over hanging roof with sufficient end wall to protect lumber from driving rain.

E. Remove defective and damaged materials and provide new materials.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL

A. Structural wood construction shall conform to requirements indicated on Structural Drawings.

B. Use stress-rated timber for all wood structural members with a bending stress less than 1200 PSI or a modulus of elasticity less than 1,400,000 PSI when used at 19 percent maximum moisture content.

C. Dimension Lumber: Comply with PS 20 and requirements of specified grading agencies. 1. If no species is specified, provide any species graded by the agency

specified; if no grading agency is specified, provide lumber graded by any grading agency meeting the specified requirements.

2. Grading Agency: Any grading agency whose rules are approved by the Board of Review, American Lumber Standard Committee (www.alsc.org) and who provides grading service for the species and grade specified; provide lumber stamped with grade mark unless otherwise indicated.

2.02 LUMBER

A. General: 1. Comply with PS 20 and requirements of specified grading agencies. 2. Grading Agency:

a. Southern Pine: Southern Pine Inspection Bureau, Inc. (SPIB). b. Douglas Fir (DF): Western Wood Products Association (WWPA).

3. Sizes: Nominal sizes as indicated on drawings, unless otherwise indicated. 4. Surfacing: S4S, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Dimension Lumber for Concealed Applications: 1. Species: Southern Pine, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Sizes / Surfacing: Nominal sizes as indicated on drawings, S4S. 3. Moisture Content: S-dry or MC19. 4. Grade:

a. Joist, Rafter and Small Beam Framing (2 x 6 inches through 4 x 16 inches): No. 1 or Better.

b. Miscellaneous Blocking, Furring, and Nailers: 1) Lumber: No. 2 or Standard.


2) Boards: Standard or No. 3.

C. Dimension Lumber and Boards for Exposed Applications: 1. Species: Douglas Fir (DF), unless otherwise indicated. 2. Sizes: Nominal sizes as indicated on drawings, S4S. 3. Moisture Content: MC12. 4. Grade:

a. Structural Light Framing (used where high-strength design values are required in light framing sizes, such as in engineered wood trusses): Select Structural.

b. Structural Joists and Planks (e.g., floor and ceiling joists, rafters, headers, small beams, trusses and general framing applications): Select Structural.

c. Miscellaneous Other Lumber and Boards (Appearance Grade): B and Better Select.

D. Structural T&G Board Decking (Roof Decking): Refer to Section 06150.

2.02 CONSTRUCTION PANELS

A. Plywood - General: 1. Comply with PS 1. 2. Panels shall bear the mark of a recognized association or independent

inspection agency that maintains continuing control over quality of plywood which identifies compliance by veneer grade, group number, span rating where applicable, and glue type.

B. Plywood Roof Sheathing: APA-rated Exterior plywood panels; panel grade C-D or better. 1. Roof sheathing shall conform to applicable requirements of FBC-B TABLE

2304.7(5). Wood structural panel roof sheathing shall be: a. 5-ply, 5-layer, unless otherwise noted. b. Bonded by exterior glue.

2. Span Rating: 40/20. 3. Thickness: As indicated on Structural Drawings; not less than 5/8 inch.

C. Other Applications: 1. Concealed Plywood: PS 1, C-C Plugged, exterior grade. 2. Plywood Concealed from View but Located within Exterior Enclosure: PS 1,

C-C Plugged or better, exterior grade. 3. Plywood Exposed to View but Not Exposed to Weather: PS 1, A-D, or

better. 4. Other Locations: PS 1, C-D Plugged or better, exterior grade.

2.06 ROUGH HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES

A. Fasteners and Anchors: 1. Metal: Fasteners/anchors shall be fabricated of galvanized steel, except as

otherwise indicated. a. Stainless Steel: At locations where used with stainless steel

connectors, or where in contact with preservative-treated wood, fasteners/anchors shall be fabricated of Type 305 stainless steel.

2. Nails: Comply with requirements of governing building code, including but


not limited to FBC-B SECTION 1517.5; size and type best suited for purpose unless noted otherwise. a. ASTM F 1667:

1) Common: Type I, Style 10. 2) Concrete: Type I, Style 11. 3) Barbed: Type I, Style 26. 4) Underlayment: Type I, Style 25. 5) Masonry: Type I, Style 27. 6) Use special nails designed for use with framing and timber

connectors (e.g., ties, strap anchors, joists hangers) and similar items, per connector manufacturer’s recommendations.

7) Nails not less than 1-1/4 inches long, 8d and deformed or annular ring shank.

b. Sheathing Nails: 1) Plywood panels shall be nailed to supports with minimum 10d ring

shank nails, per Structural Drawings. 2) Nails shall comply with FBC-B SECTION 2322.

3. Screws: a. For Fastening Wood to Wood: ANSI B18.6.1, or ASTM C 1002. b. For Fastening Wood to Steel:

1) For steel framing less than 0.0329 inch (0.835 mm) thick, attach wood in accordance with ASTM C 1002.

2) For steel framing from 0.033 to 0.112 inch (0.84 to 2.84 mm) thick, attach wood in accordance with ASTM C 954.

4. Drywall Screws: Bugle head, hardened steel, power driven type, length three times thickness of sheathing.

5. Anchor Bolts: a. ASME B18.2.1 and ANSI B18.2.2 galvanized, 1/2 inch unless shown

otherwise. b. Extend at least 8 inches into masonry or concrete, with ends bent 2

inches. 6. Expansion Bolts / Anchors and Miscellaneous Bolts:

a. CID A-A-55615; expansion shield and lag bolt type for anchorage to solid masonry or concrete. 1) Use 1/2-inch diameter bolt, unless otherwise indicated. 2) Embedment into masonry or concrete at least 2-1/2 inches, unless

otherwise indicated. b. Refer to Structural Drawings for additional information; see also, Section

05500. 7. Washers: ASTM F 844, except as otherwise indicated.

a. Washers Used With Galvanized Steel Bolts: Galvanized steel. b. Washers Used With Stainless Steel Bolts: Stainless steel.

B. Timber Connectors: Unless otherwise specified, timber connectors shall be in accordance with TPI 1, APA EWS T300E or AITC OT-01.

C. Die-Stamped Connectors: Hot dipped galvanized steel, sized to suit framing conditions. 1. Anchors: Expansion shield and lag bolt type for anchorage to solid masonry

or concrete. 2. For contact with preservative treated wood in exposed locations, provide


minimum G185 (Z550) galvanizing per ASTM A 653.

D. Joist Hangers: Hot dipped galvanized steel, sized to fit the supported member, of sufficient strength to develop the full strength of the supported member in accordance with governing building code, and furnished complete with any special nails required. 1. For contact with preservative treated wood in exposed locations, provide

minimum G185 (Z550) galvanizing per ASTM A 653.

E. Clip Angles: Steel, 3/16 inch thick, size as indicated; or zinc-coated steel or iron commercial clips designed for connecting wood members.

F. Tie Straps: For joists supported by the lower flange of steel beams, provide 1/8 by 1-1/2 inch steel strap, 2 feet long, except as indicated otherwise.

G. Metal Bridging: Where not indicated or specified otherwise, No. 16 U.S. Standard gage, cadmium-plated or zinc-coated.

2.07 ACCESSORIES

A. Building Paper: FS UU-B-790, Type I, Grade D, Style 1.

B. Termite Shield: Galvanized sheet steel.

2.08 FACTORY WOOD TREATMENT

A. Treated Lumber and Plywood: Comply with requirements of AWPA U1 - Use Category System for wood treatments determined by use categories, expected service conditions, and specific applications. 1. Preservative-Treated Wood: Provide lumber and plywood marked or

stamped by an ALSC-accredited testing agency, certifying level and type of treatment in accordance with AWPA standards.

A. Preservative Treatment: 1. General:

a. Kiln dry lumber/plywood after treatment to maximum moisture content of 19 percent.

b. Treat lumber/plywood in contact with masonry, concrete, or plaster. c. Treat wood sills, sole plates, furring, and sleepers that are less than 18

inches from ground; nailers, edge strips, blocking, crickets, curbs, cant, vent strips and other members used in connection with roofing and flashing materials.

d. Treat wood nailers, edge strips, blocking, crickets, curbs, cant, vent strips and other members used in connection with roofing and flashing materials.

e. Treat lumber/plywood in other locations as indicated. 2. Preservative Pressure Treatment of Lumber: AWPA Use Category UC3B,

Commodity Specification A (AWPA C2) using waterborne preservative to 0.25 lb/cu ft (4.0 kg/cu m) retention.

3. Preservative Pressure Treatment of Plywood: AWPA Use Category UC2 and UC3B, Commodity Specification F (AWPA C9) using waterborne preservative to 0.25 lb/cu ft (4.0 kg/cu m) retention.

PART 3 EXECUTION


3.01 PREPARATION

A. Coordinate installation of rough carpentry members specified in other sections.

3.02 INSTALLATION - GENERAL

A. Fit framing lumber and other rough carpentry, set accurately to the required lines and levels, and secure in place in a rigid manner.

B. Set joists, rafters, and purlins with their crown edge up.

C. Frame members for the passage of pipes, conduits, and ducts.

D. Provide adequate support as appropriate to the application, climate, and modulus of elasticity of the product.

E. Do not cut or bore structural members for the passage of ducts or pipes without approval.

F. Reinforce all members damaged by such cutting or boring by means of specially formed and approved sheet metal or bar steel shapes, or remove and provide new, as approved.

3.03 FRAMING INSTALLATION

A. Set structural members level, plumb, and true to line. Discard pieces with defects that would lower required strength or result in unacceptable appearance of exposed members.

B. Make provisions for temporary construction loads, and provide temporary bracing sufficient to maintain structure in true alignment and safe condition until completion of erection and installation of permanent bracing.

C. Install structural members full length without splices unless otherwise specifically detailed.

D. Comply with member sizes, spacing, and configurations indicated, and fastener size and spacing indicated, but not less than required by applicable codes and AFPA (WFCM).

E. Install horizontal spanning members with crown edge up and not less than 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) of bearing at each end.

F. Construct double joist headers at floor and ceiling openings and under wall stud partitions that are parallel to floor joists; use metal joist hangers unless otherwise detailed.

G. Provide bridging at joists in excess of 8 feet (2.3 m) span at mid-span. Fit solid bridging at ends of members.

H. Frame wall openings with two or more studs at each jamb; support headers on cripple studs.

3.04 FASTENERS

A. Nails: 1. Use 8d or larger nails for nailing through 1-inch thick lumber, and for toe

nailing 2 inch thick lumber. 2. Use 16d or larger nails for nailing through 2-inch thick lumber.


3. Nailing Schedule; Using Common Nails: a. Bridging to joist, toe-nail each end two-8d. b. Ledger strip to beam or girder three-16d under each joint.

B. Bolts: 1. Fit bolt heads and nuts bearing on wood with washers. 2. At concrete and solid masonry, use expansion bolts.

C. Do not anchor to wood plugs or nailing blocks in masonry or concrete. Use metal plugs, inserts or similar fastening.

D. Screws: 1. Where shown, or option to nails. 2. ASTM C 1002; sized to provide penetration into anchorage member per

governing building code or 1 inch, whichever is greater. 3. Spaced same as nails.

3.04 BLOCKING, NAILERS, AND SUPPORTS

A. Install furring, blocking, nailers, and grounds where shown. 1. Use longest lengths practicable. 2. Where a ceiling is to be attached to wood stripping which is nailed to the

underside of the bottom chord of trusses with two-8d common nails at each intersection, stripping shall be not less than 1 x 3 inches spaced not more than 24 inches apart.

B. Provide framing and blocking members as indicated or as required to support finishes, fixtures, specialty items, and trim. 1. Specifically, provide the following non-structural framing and blocking:

a. Wall brackets. b. Handrails.

2. Layers of Blocking or Plates: a. Stagger end joints between upper and lower pieces. b. Nail at ends and not over 24 inches between ends. c. Stagger nails from side to side of wood member over 5 inches in width.

C. In framed assemblies that have concealed spaces, provide solid wood fireblocking as required by applicable local code, to close concealed draft openings between floors and between top story and roof/attic space; other material acceptable to code authorities may be used in lieu of solid wood blocking.

D. In metal stud walls, provide continuous blocking around door and window openings for anchorage of frames, securely attached to stud framing.

E. In walls, provide blocking attached to studs as backing and support for wall-mounted items, unless item can be securely fastened to two or more studs or other method of support is explicitly indicated.

F. Where ceiling-mounting is indicated, provide blocking and supplementary supports above ceiling, unless other method of support is explicitly indicated.

3.05 ROUGH BUCKS

A. Install rough wood bucks at opening in masonry or concrete where wood frames


or trim occur, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Brace and maintain bucks plumb and true until masonry has been built

around them or concrete cast in place. a. Cut rough bucks from 2 inch thick stock, of same width as partitions in

which they occur and of width shown in exterior walls. b. Extend bucks full height of openings and across head of openings;

fasten securely with anchors specified.

3.06 ROOF DECKING AND ROOF-RELATED CARPENTRY

A. Wood Decking: Refer to Section 06150.

B. Coordinate installation of roofing carpentry with deck construction, framing of roof openings, and roofing assembly installation.

C. Provide wood curb at all roof openings except where prefabricated curbs are specified and where specifically indicated otherwise. Form corners by alternating lapping side members.

3.07 SITE APPLIED WOOD TREATMENT

A. Apply preservative treatment compatible with factory applied treatment at site-sawn cuts, complying with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Allow preservative to dry prior to erecting members.

3.08 TOLERANCES

A. Framing Members: 1/4 inch (6 mm) from true position, maximum.

B. Surface Flatness of Floor: 1/8 inch in 10 feet (1 mm/m) maximum, and 1/4 inch in 30 feet (7 mm in 10 m) maximum.

C. Variation from Plane (Other than Floors): 1/4 inch in 10 feet (2 mm/m) maximum, and 1/4 inch in 30 feet (7 mm in 10 m) maximum.

3.09 CLEANING

A. Do not leave any wood, shavings, sawdust, etc. on the ground or buried in fill.

B. Prevent sawdust and wood shavings from entering the storm drainage system.

END OF SECTION

RENOVATION OF HISTORIC FIRE STATION NO. 2 (Phase II-A) City of Miami Project No. B-30579 06130 - 1 of 5 HEAVY TIMBER CONSTRUCTION

SECTION 06130

HEAVY TIMBER CONSTRUCTION

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.02 SUMMARY

A. Section includes framing using timbers.

B. Related Sections: 1. Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry" for dimension lumber items

associated with heavy timber construction. 2. Division 06 Section "Wood Decking" for wood roof decking.

1.03 DEFINITIONS

A. Timbers: Lumber of 5 inches nominal (114 mm actual) or greater in least dimension.

B. Inspection agencies, and the abbreviations used to reference them, include the following: 1. NeLMA - Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers Association. 2. NHLA - National Hardwood Lumber Association. 3. NLGA - National Lumber Grades Authority. 4. SPIB - Southern Pine Inspection Bureau. 5. WCLIB - West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau. 6. WWPA - Western Wood Products Association.

1.04 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: For preservative-treated wood products. 1. For preservative-treated wood products, include chemical treatment

manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, installing, and finishing treated material.

2. For timber connectors, include installation instructions.

C. Shop Drawings: For heavy timber construction. Show layout, dimensions of each member, and details of connections.

D. Samples: roof rafter and truss member by 24 inches (600 mm) long, showing the range of variation to be expected in appearance, including surface texture, of wood products.

E. Material Certificates:


1. For heavy timber construction specified to comply with minimum allowable unit stresses. Indicate species and grade selected for each use and design values approved by ALSC's Board of Review.

2. For preservative-treated wood products. Indicate type of preservative used and net amount of preservative retained. For products receiving a waterborne treatment, include statement that moisture content of treated materials was reduced to levels specified before shipment to Project site.

F. Certificates of Inspection: Issued by lumber grading agency for exposed timber not marked with grade stamp.


A. Timber Standard: Comply with AITC 108, "Standard for Heavy Timber Construction."

B. Forest Certification: Provide wood products obtained from forests certified by an FSC-accredited certification body to comply with FSC STD-01-001, "FSC Principles and Criteria for Forest Stewardship."


A. Schedule delivery of heavy timber construction to avoid extended on-site storage and to avoid delaying the Work.

B. Store materials under cover and protected from weather and contact with damp or wet surfaces. Provide for air circulation within and around stacks and under temporary coverings.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 TIMBER

A. General: Comply with DOC PS 20 and with grading rules of lumber grading agencies certified by ALSC's Board of Review as applicable. 1. Factory mark each item of timber with grade stamp of grading agency. 2. For exposed timber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, apply

grade stamps to surfaces that will not be exposed to view, or omit grade stamps and provide certificates of grade compliance issued by grading agency.

B. Timber Species and Grade: Douglas fir-larch or southern pine No. 1, NLGA, WCLIB, WWPA or SPIB. Timber shall comply with the material properties specified in the structural drawings.

C. Moisture Content: Provide timber with 19 percent maximum moisture content at time of dressing.

D. Dressing: Provide dressed timber (S4S) unless otherwise indicated.

E. End Sealer: Manufacturer's standard, transparent, colorless wood sealer that is effective in retarding the transmission of moisture at cross-grain cuts and is compatible with indicated finish.

F. Penetrating Sealer: Manufacturer's standard, transparent, penetrating wood sealer that is compatible with indicated finish.


2.02 PRESERVATIVE TREATMENT

A. Pressure treat timber with waterborne preservative according to AWPA C15 requirements for "sawn building poles and posts as structural members." 1. Timber that is not in contact with the ground and is continuously protected

from liquid water may be treated with inorganic boron (SBX) according to AWPA C31 instead of AWPA C15.

2. Treatment with CCA shall include post-treatment fixation process.

B. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Do not use chemicals containing arsenic or chromium.

C. Use process that includes water-repellent treatment.

D. Use process that does not include water repellents or other substances that might interfere with application of indicated finishes.

E. After treatment, redry timber to 19 percent maximum moisture content.

F. Mark treated timber with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by ALSC's Board of Review. 1. For exposed items indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark

each piece on surface that will not be exposed or omit marking and provide certificates of treatment compliance issued by inspection agency.

G. Application: Treat all heavy timber construction unless otherwise indicated. 1. Sills and similar members in contact with masonry or concrete. 2. Timber framing members less than 18 inches (460 mm) above grade.

2.03 TIMBER CONNECTORS

A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate from the following materials: 1. Structural-steel shapes, plates, and flat bars complying with

ASTM A 36/A 36M.

B. Provide bolts, 3/4 inch (19 mm) unless otherwise indicated, complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568M, Property Class 4.6); provide nuts complying with ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M); and, where indicated, provide flat washers.

C. Finish steel assemblies and fasteners with rust-inhibitive primer, 2-mil (0.05-mm) dry film thickness.

2.04 FABRICATION

A. Camber: Fabricate horizontal members and inclined members with a slope of less than 1:1, with natural convex bow (crown) up, to provide camber.

B. Shop fabricate members by cutting and restoring exposed surfaces to match specified surfacing. Finish exposed surfaces to remove planing or surfacing marks, and to provide a finish equivalent to that produced by machine sanding with No. 120 grit sandpaper.

C. Predrill for fasteners and assembly of units.

D. Where preservative-treated members are indicated, fabricate (cut, drill, surface, and sand) before treatment to greatest extent possible. Where fabrication must


be done after treatment, apply a field-treatment preservative to comply with AWPA M4. 1. Use inorganic boron (SBX) treatment for members not in contact with the

ground and continuously protected from liquid water. 2. Use copper naphthenate treatment for members in contact with the ground

or not continuously protected from liquid water.

E. Coat crosscuts with end sealer.

F. Seal Coat: After fabricating and surfacing each unit, apply a saturation coat of penetrating sealer on surfaces of each unit except for treated wood where the treatment included a water repellent.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. General: Erect heavy timber construction true and plumb. Provide temporary bracing to maintain lines and levels until permanent supporting members are in place. 1. Install heavy timber construction to comply with Shop Drawings. 2. Install horizontal and sloping members with crown edge up and provide not

less than 4 inches (102 mm) of bearing on supports. Provide continuous members unless otherwise indicated; tie together over supports if not continuous.

3. Handle and temporarily support heavy timber construction to prevent surface damage, compression, and other effects that might interfere with indicated finish.

B. Framing Built into Masonry: Provide 1/2-inch (13-mm) clearance at tops, sides, and ends of members built into masonry, bevel cut ends 3 inches (76 mm); do not embed more than 4 inches (102 mm) unless otherwise indicated.

C. Cutting: Avoid extra cutting after fabrication. Where field fitting is unavoidable, comply with requirements for shop fabrication.

D. Fit members by cutting and restoring exposed surfaces to match specified surfacing. Predrill for fasteners and assembly of units. 1. Finish exposed surfaces to remove planing or surfacing marks, and to

provide a finish equivalent to that produced by machine sanding with No. 120 grit sandpaper.

2. Coat crosscuts with end sealer. 3. Where preservative-treated members must be cut during erection, apply a

field-treatment preservative to comply with AWPA M4. a. Use inorganic boron (SBX) treatment for members not in contact with

the ground and continuously protected from liquid water. b. Use copper naphthenate treatment for members in contact with the

ground or not continuously protected from liquid water.

E. Install timber connectors as indicated. 1. Unless otherwise indicated, install bolts with same orientation within each

connection and in similar connections.


2. Install bolts with orientation as indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect.

3.02 ADJUSTING

A. Repair damaged surfaces and finishes after completing erection. Replace damaged heavy timber construction if repairs are not approved by Architect.

END OF SECTION

RENOVATION OF HISTORIC FIRE STATION NO. 2 (Phase II-A) City of Miami Project No. B-30579 06150 - 1 of 3 WOOD DECKING

SECTION 06150

WOOD DECKING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.02 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Solid-sawn wood roof decking.

B. Related Sections: 1. Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry" for dimension lumber items

associated with wood decking.

1.03 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. 1. For glued-laminated wood decking, include installation instructions and

data on lumber, adhesives, and fabrication. 2. For preservative-treated wood products, include chemical treatment

manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, installing, and finishing treated material.

C. Samples: 24 inches (600 mm) long, showing the range of variation to be expected in appearance of wood decking.


A. Standard for Solid-Sawn Wood Decking: Comply with AITC 112.

B. Forest Certification: Provide wood decking produced from wood obtained from forests certified by an FSC-accredited certification body to comply with FSC STD-01-001, "FSC Principles and Criteria for Forest Stewardship."


A. Schedule delivery of wood decking to avoid extended on-site storage and to avoid delaying the Work.

B. Store materials under cover and protected from weather and contact with damp or wet surfaces. Provide for air circulation within and around stacks and under temporary coverings. Stack wood decking with surfaces that are to be exposed in the final Work protected from exposure to sunlight.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 WOOD DECKING, GENERAL

A. General: Comply with DOC PS 20 and with applicable grading rules of inspection agencies certified by ALSC's Board of Review.

B. Moisture Content: Provide wood decking with 19 percent maximum moisture content at time of dressing.

2.02 SOLID-SAWN WOOD DECKING

A. Decking Species: Douglas fir-larch or Southern pine.

B. Decking Nominal Size: 2x6.

C. Decking Grade: Select Decking.

D. Grade Stamps: Factory mark each item with grade stamp of grading agency. Apply grade stamp to surfaces that will not be exposed to view.

E. Face Surface: Smooth.

F. Edge Pattern: Vee grooved.

G. Preservative Treatment: Pressure treat solid-sawn wood decking according to AWPA C31 with inorganic boron (SBX) and redry wood to 19 percent maximum moisture content.

2.03 ACCESSORY MATERIALS

A. Fasteners for Solid-Sawn Decking: Provide fastener size and type complying with decking standard for thickness of deck used.

B. Fasteners for Glued-Laminated Decking: Provide fastener size and type complying with requirements in "Installation" Article for installing laminated decking.

C. Nails: Common; complying with ASTM F 1667, Type I, Style 10.

D. Spikes: Round; complying with ASTM F 1667, Type III, Style 3.

E. Fastener Material: Hot-dip galvanized steel.

F. Bolts for Anchoring Decking to Walls: Carbon steel; complying with ASTM A 307 (ASTM F 568M) with ASTM A 563/A 563M hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers.

G. Sealant: Latex sealant compatible with substrates. 1. Use sealant that has a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated

according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

H. Penetrating Sealer: Clear sanding sealer complying with Division 09 Section "Staining and Transparent Finishing" and compatible with topcoats specified for use over it.

2.04 FABRICATION

A. Shop Fabrication: Where preservative-treated decking is indicated, complete cutting, trimming, surfacing, and sanding before treating.


B. Predrill decking for lateral spiking to adjacent units to comply with referenced decking standard.

C. Seal Coat: After fabricating and surfacing decking, apply a saturation coat of penetrating sealer in fabrication shop.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine walls and support framing in areas to receive wood decking for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of wood decking.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install solid-sawn wood decking to comply with referenced decking standard. 1. Locate end joints for combination simple and two-span continuous lay-up]

[controlled random lay-up.

B. Anchor wood roof decking, where supported on walls, with bolts as indicated.

C. Where preservative-treated decking must be cut during erection, apply a field-treatment preservative to comply with AWPA M4. 1. For solid-sawn decking, use inorganic boron (SBX). 2. For laminated decking, use copper naphthenate.

D. Apply joint sealant to seal roof decking at exterior walls at the following locations: 1. Between decking and supports located at exterior walls. 2. Between decking and exterior walls that butt against underside of decking. 3. Between tongues and grooves of decking over exterior walls and supports

at exterior walls.

3.03 ADJUSTING

A. Repair damaged surfaces and finishes after completing erection. Replace damaged decking if repairs are not approved by Architect.

3.04 PROTECTION

A. Provide temporary waterproof covering as the Work progresses to protect roof decking until roofing is applied.

END OF SECTION

RENOVATION OF HISTORIC FIRE STATION NO. 2 (Phase II-A) City of Miami Project No. B-30579 07212 - 1 of 5 BUILDING INSULATION

SECTION 07212

BUILDING INSULATION

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation / Foam Nail Base Insulation, installed as part of insulated roof deck construction.



B. Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry.

C. Section 06150 - Wood Decking.

D. Section 07321 - Clay Tile Roofing.

E. Section 07550 - Modified Bituminous Membrane Roofing.

1.03 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: 1. Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation / Foam Nail Base Insulation:

a. Indicate board dimensions and installation layout for each layer. b. Indicate mechanical fastener type, size and depth of penetration into

wood deck, and fastening pattern. c. Indicate joint or termination detail conditions, and conditions of interface

with other materials. d. Nailers and Blocking: Indicate overall configurations and thicknesses,

details at complex intersections, jointing methods and locations, and fastening details.

C. Product Data: 1. Submit properly identified manufacturer's product data for each type of

insulation, fasteners, and accessories to be used. a. Include product characteristics, performance criteria, and product

limitations. 2. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Include information on special

environmental conditions required for installation and installation techniques. 3. Product Approval:

a. Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation / Foam Nail Base Insulation: Submit copies of current Product Approval Notice of Acceptance (NOA); include the following: 1) Copies of supporting evidence referenced in the NOA. 2) Certification that topside is in compliance with requirements of

applicable requirements of the governing building code, including but not limited to FBC-B CHAPTER 23.

4. Evaluation Reports: Submit International Code Council (ICC) Evaluation


Service reports including trade name, application, and thermal protection requirements of insulation used.


A. General: 1. Insulating materials, including facings such as vapor retarders and vapor-

permeable membranes, similar coverings, and all layers of single and multi-layer reflective foil insulations, shall comply with applicable requirements of the governing building code, including but not limited to FBC-B SECTIONS 719 and 2603.

2. Foam Nail Base Insulation: APA-rated plywood topside shall comply with applicable requirements of governing building code, including but not limited to FBC-B CHAPTER 23.

3. Surface Burning Characteristics (ASTM E 84): a. Thermal Batt Insulation and Reflective Insulation:

1) Flame Spread: 25 or less. 2) Smoke Development: 450 or less.

B. Foam Nail Base Insulation and Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation products shall contain no hydrochlorofluorocarbons (HCFC).


A. Delivery: Deliver materials to site in manufacturer's original, unopened containers and packaging, with labels clearly identifying material name and manufacturer.

B. Storage: Store materials in a clean, dry area indoors in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

C. Handling: Protect materials during handling and installation to prevent damage.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 FOAM NAIL BASE INSULATION

A. Manufacturer / Product: 1. Basis of Design: Atlas Roofing Corporation: www.atlasroofing.com.

a. Product: Atlas ACFoam Nail Base Insulation (Miami-Dade Product Approval NOA No. 08-0111.01), or equal.

2. Other Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with contract requirements, equivalent products by one of the following manufacturers may used: a. Dow Chemical Co: www.dow.com. b. GAF Materials Corporation: www.gaf.com.

3. Substitutions: See Section 01600.

B. Description: Polyisocyanurate insulation (ASTM C 1289; Type V), laminated to plywood sheathing, approved for use as an insulated nail base for roofing system. 1. Shall consist of a bottom layer of polyisocyanurate board bonded to a top

layer of APA-rated CDX plywood. a. Only factory laminated panels shall be accepted.

2. Polyisocyanurate board shall be faced with a layer of black glass-fiber reinforced felt.


3. Insulation shall contain no hydrochlorofluorocarbons (HCFC).

C. Panel Dimensions: 1. Panel Edges: Square. 2. Panel Size: 4 x 8 feet. 3. Panel Thickness:

a. Plywood: 19/32 inch. b. Polysiocyanurate Board: 4.0 inches.

D. Physical Properties and Performance Requirements: 1. Long Term Thermal Resistance (ASTM C 1289): R-20, minimum (insulation

only). 2. Compressive Strength, 10 Percent Deformation (ASTM D 1621): 20 psi,

minimum. 3. Water Absorption:

a. ASTM C 209: Less than 1 percent. b. ASTM D 2842: Less than 3.5 percent.

4. Moisture Vapor Transmission (ASTM E 96): Less than 1.5 perm. 5. Density (ASTM D 1622): 2.0 pcf, nominal. 6. FM 4450 / FM 4470 Approval: Product shall be approved for Class 1

insulated wood roof deck construction for 1-90 Windstorm Classifications. 7. Flammability (ASTM E 84): Shall meet applicable requirements of governing

building code, for flame spread and smoke development for plastic foam insulation. a. Flame Spread: 25 - 50. b. Smoke Developed: 50 - 170.

8. Tensile Strength (ASTM D 1623): Greater than 730 psf.

2.02 POLYISOCYANURATE BOARD INSULATION

A. Manufacturer: Same as Foam Nail Base Insulation manufacturer. 1. Product: Atlas ACFoam II HCFC-Free "Green" Polyiso rigid board insulation

(Miami-Dade Product Approval NOA No. 03-0103.01), or equal. 2. Substitutions: See Section 01600 - Product Requirements.

B. Description: Rigid cellular foam, complying with ASTM C 1289; Type II, Class 1, cellulose felt or glass fiber mat both faces; Grade 2 or 3. 1. Insulation shall contain no hydrochlorofluorocarbons (HCFC).

C. Panel Dimensions: 1. Panel Size: Same as Foam Nail Base Insulation panel size. 2. Panel Thickness: 1 inch.

D. Physical Properties and Performance Requirements: 1. Long Term Thermal Resistance (ASTM C 1289): R-6.0, minimum (based on

specified panel thickness). 2. Compressive Strength, 10 Percent Deformation (ASTM D 1621): 20 psi

(Grade 2), minimum. 3. Water Absorption:

a. ASTM C 209: Less than 1 percent. b. ASTM D 2842: Less than 3.5 percent.

4. Moisture Vapor Transmission (ASTM E 96): Less than 1.5 perm. 5. Density (ASTM D 1622): 2.0 pcf, nominal.


6. FM 4450 / FM 4470 Approval: Product shall be approved for Class 1 insulated wood roof deck construction for 1-90 Windstorm Classifications.

7. Flammability (ASTM E 84): Shall meet applicable requirements of governing building code, for flame spread and smoke development for plastic foam insulation. a. Flame Spread: 25 - 50. b. Smoke Developed: 50 - 170.

8. Tensile Strength (ASTM D 1623): Greater than 730 psf.

2.03 ACCESSORIES

A. Nail Base Fasteners: Type recommended by Foam Nail Base Insulation manufacturer, in accordance with requirements of Product Approval NOA. 1. Product: Atlas Nail Base Fasteners, or equal. 2. Material: Carbon steel with epoxy coating, or stainless steel. 3. Size: As recommended by Foam Nail Base Insulation manufacturer, in

accordance with requirements of Product Approval NOA. 4. Length: 7 inches, except as otherwise indicated. Fasteners shall be long

enough to penetrate at least 1 inch into 2x T&G wood roof deck.

B. Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation Fasteners: Refer to Nail Base Fasteners.

C. Adhesive: Type recommended by insulation manufacturer for application.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSPECTION

A. Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this section will be installed. 1. Verify that adjacent materials are dry and ready to receive insulation.

B. Roof Deck: 1. Examine roof deck for suitability to receive Sheet Vapor Retarder,

Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation, and Foam Nail Base Insulation. Verify that substrate is dry, clean and free of foreign material that will damage insulation or impede installation.

2. Verify that roof drains, scuppers, roof curbs, nailers, equipment supports, vents and other roof accessories are secured properly and installed in conformance with Contract Drawings and submittals.

3. Verify that deck is structurally sound to support installers, materials and equipment without damaging or deforming work.

C. Do not proceed with the work of this Section until conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work have been corrected in an acceptable manner.


A. Install the accepted insulation according to the manufacturer's printed instructions for the specific product. 1. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for particular conditions of

installation in each case.


B. Electrical Wiring: Do not install insulation in a manner that would sandwich electrical wiring between two layers of insulation.

3.03 INSTALLATION - POLYISOCYANURATE BOARD INSULATION / FOAM NAIL BASE INSULATION

A. Install Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation and Foam Nail Base Insulation as required to achieve minimum thermal resistance rating of R-31 throughout entire area of T&G roof deck, except as otherwise indicated.

B. Install sheet vapor retarder over entire area of roof deck.

C. Install specified Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation using approved mechanical fasteners, in accordance with manufacturer´s latest written instructions and as required by governing codes and Product Approval. 1. Install with end joints staggered; avoid having insulation joints coinciding with

joints in deck.

D. Install specified Foam Nail Base Insulation using approved mechanical fasteners, in accordance with manufacturer´s latest written instructions and as required by governing codes and Product Approval. 1. Stagger joints between Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation layer and Foam

Nail Base Insulation layer. 2. Number of Fasteners and Fastening Pattern: Comply with manufacturer’s

recommended installation instructions, approved shop drawings, and Product Approval, based on applicable wind load criteria specified in the governing building code.

3.04 PROTECTION

A. Protect insulation from damage and from becoming wet before, during and after installation.

B. Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation / Foam Nail Base Insulation: 1. Do not leave installed insulation exposed to weather. Cover and waterproof

with completed roof system immediately after installation. a. Temporarily seal exposed insulation edges at the end of each day. b. Remove and replace installed insulation that has become wet or

damaged with new insulation. 2. Protect installed insulation and roof cover from traffic by use of protective

covering materials during and after installation.

END OF SECTION

RENOVATION OF HISTORIC FIRE STATION NO. 2 (Phase II-A) City of Miami Project No. B-30579 07321 - 1 of 9 CLAY TILE ROOFING

SECTION 07321

CLAY TILE ROOFING

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Clay roof tiles.

B. Underlayment.

C. Fasteners and accessories.



B. Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry.

C. Section 06150 - Wood Decking.

D. Section 07212 - Building Insulation: Polyisocyanurate board insulation / foam nail base insulation, installed as part of insulated roof deck construction.

E. Section 07550 - Modified Bituminous Membrane Roofing.

F. Section 07620 - Sheet Metal Flashings and Trim.

G. Section 07631 - Gutters and Downspouts.

1.03 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on tile and underlayment, indicating material characteristics, installation instructions, and limitations and precautions. 1. Include copies of current Product Approval documents.

C. Shop Drawings: For metal flashings and counterflashings, indicate overall configurations and thicknesses, details at complex intersections, jointing methods and locations, and fastening details.

D. Samples: 1. Selection Samples: Submit color chips representing manufacturer's full

range of available tile colors and finishes. 2. Verification Samples: Set of tiles representing actual product in color, finish,

and style.

E. Manufacturer’s Certificates: Certify that tiles supplied for the project meet or exceed specified requirements.


A. Regulatory and Testing Requirements: 1. Comply with applicable requirements of governing building code, including

but not limited to FBC-B SECTION 1523.


2. Tile and tile systems shall be tested in compliance with the provisions set forth in FBC-B SECTION 1523. Tile shall have a Product Approval for a complete tile system, which shall include the tile, underlayment and all tile related accessories required to provide a waterproof system. a. Tile installation shall be in accordance with FBC-TPHVHZ RAS 118,

RAS 119 and RAS 120, as applicable. b. Roof tile mortar shall either be a pre-mixed unit having a Product

Approval and tested in compliance with FBC-TPHVHZ TAS 123 or a job-site mix approved by the building official and in compliance with FBC-TPHVHZ RAS 113.

c. Roof tile fasteners shall be tested and comply with the requirements set forth in FBC-B SECTION 1523.

d. Tile application designs shall comply with the following limitations in order to withstand the wind loads prescribed in this section, as well as all wind load requirements set forth in FBC-B CHAPTER 16 (High-Velocity Hurricane Zones).

e. Tile systems shall extend beyond the drip edge (not including the rake) not less than 3/4 inch (19 mm) but not more than 2 inches (51 mm).

f. Spanish “S” tile shall be closed at the eaves with a prefabricated closure or mortar filler to close the eaves and elevate the butt ends of the first course, as detailed in the tile system Product Approval. 1) Apply a minimum 3/8-inch (9.5 mm) diameter weephole, spaced not

more than 12 inches (305 mm) apart, located flush with the underlayment of all tile systems, except tile systems using thick-butt tile.

g. Tile systems shall be shingle lapped interlocking and installed with the headlap as specified in the tile system Product Approval. In no case shall the minimum headlap be less than 2 inches (51 mm) for mortar or adhesive set tile, or less than 3 inches (76 mm) for mechanically set tile, unless restricted by product design.

3. Roof tiles shall be tested in compliance with FBC-TPHVHZ TAS 100. Physical properties testing for clay roof tiles shall be in compliance with ASTM C 1167. Roof tiles shall resist a minimum wind uplift resistance as determined by FBC-B CHAPTER 16 (High-Velocity Hurricane Zones) and FBC-TPHVHZ RAS 127. Roof tile systems requirements are as follows: a. Underlayments shall be tested in compliance with FBC-TPHVHZ TAS

103 and FBC-TPHVHZ TAS 104, unless otherwise specifically listed in the applicable FBC-TPHVHZ RAS.

b. Mortar or adhesive set tile systems shall be tested for static uplift resistance in compliance with FBC-TPHVHZ TAS 101, the results of which shall be listed in the system manufacturer’s Product Approval.

c. Mechanically attached set tile systems shall be tested for static uplift resistance in compliance with FBC-TPHVHZ TAS 102 or FBC-TPHVHZ TAS 102(A), the results of which shall be listed in the system manufacturer’s NOA.

4. Roof tiles shall be tested to determine their resistance to overturning due to wind in accordance with FBC-TPHVHZ TAS 108 and FBC-B CHAPTER 15.

5. Field Test: For mortar or adhesive set tile applications, a static field test shall be performed in accordance with FBC-TPHVHZ RAS 106. Submit testing report and results to Consultant.


B. Workmanship: 1. All roofing work shall be performed by a qualified contractor licensed to

perform roofing, in compliance with the tolerances, quality and methods of construction established in the governing building code or set forth in the standards adopted by the high-velocity hurricane zone requirements included therein.

2. Roofing assemblies detailed in the Product Approval shall be installed in strict compliance with the method of application set forth in such Product Approval or, if not part of the product approval, in compliance with manufacturer’s published application instructions, or as approved by the building official.

C. Mock-Up: Provide a mock-up for evaluation of tile installation workmanship, including typical eave, rake, valley, and ridge detail. 1. Minimum mock-up size: 4 x 4 ft (1220 x 1220 mm). 2. Locate where directed by Consultant. 3. Do not proceed with remaining work until workmanship has been approved

by Consultant. 4. Refinish mock-up area as required to produce acceptable work. 5. Approved mock-up may be retained as part of the Work.


A. Deliver and store materials in manufacturer's unopened packaging, with labels intact, until ready for installation.

B. Store and dispose of solvent-based materials, and materials used with solvent-based materials, in accordance with requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction.

1.06 WARRANTY

A. General: 1. All roofing warranties shall address all of the requirements in the City’s

Standard Warranty Form. 2. All roofing warranties shall be enforceable under the laws of the State of

Florida and not under the laws of any other state, regardless of the place of business of the roofing system manufacturer of installer.

3. Roofing warranties shall not include arbitration clauses, unless authorized in writing by City.

B. Manufacturer’s Warranty: Furnish written manufacturer's warranty for the entire roof membrane system, without monetary limitation (NDL), in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of membrane roofing system that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Manufacturer shall agree to repair or replace defective materials and

workmanship at no dollar limit (NDL) and at no cost to City during warranty period.

2. Manufacturer shall agree to allow City to repair the roof should damage occur due to acts of God or vandalism, without voiding or adversely affecting the warranty.

3. Warranty shall include a high velocity wind rider expanding coverage to include damages due to wind speed up to the velocity required by the


governing building code (i.e., 146 MPH), in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of roofing system that fail in materials or workmanship within the specified warranty period.

4. Warranty Period: Twenty (20) years, commencing on the effective date of Substantial Completion. a. Warranty period to be ten (10) years, plus ten (10) additional years at

City’s option.

C. Special Warranty: In addition to manufacturer’s warranty, furnish a special warranty covering the entire roof installation against defects in workmanship. 1. Warranty Period: Three (3) years, commencing on the effective date of

Substantial Completion.


A. See Section 01600, for additional provisions.

B. Supply 5 percent of tile actually installed for City's use in maintenance of project, including appropriate quantities for each color, size, and shape of tile installed.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Clay Roofing Tiles: 1. Design is based on Santa Fe Spanish "S”: Clay Roof Tiles manufactured by

Santa Fe Tile Corporation (8825 NW 95 Street, Medley, FL 33178); Miami-Dade County Product Approval NOA No. 05-0921.02.


B. Underlayment: 1. Membrane Materials: Base sheet, ply sheet, and membrane (cap sheet):

a. Subject to compliance with contract requirements, provide materials manufactured by one of the following: (1) Firestone Building Products Co: www.firestonebpco.com. (2) GAF Materials Corporation: www.gaf.com. (3) Siplast: www.siplast.com. (4) Soprema: www.soprema.us.

b. Membrane materials and installation shall be compatible with modified bituminous membrane roofing system specified in Section 07550.

2. Bituminous Materials: Subject to compliance with contract requirements, provide materials recommended by membrane materials manufacturer and referenced in the applicable Product Approval.

3. Surfacing Materials: Subject to compliance with contract requirements, provide materials recommended by membrane materials manufacturer and referenced in the applicable Product Approval.

4. Fasteners: Subject to compliance with contract requirements, provide adhesive materials recommended by membrane materials manufacturer and referenced in the applicable Product Approval.

2.02 ROOF TILES

A. Clay Roof Tiles:


1. Comply with applicable requirements of governing building code, including but not limited to requirements for testing and current Product Approval. a. Labeling: Each unit shall bear a permanent label with manufacturer's

name or logo, city, state and following statement: "Miami-Dade County Product Approved", unless otherwise indicated.

2. Comply with requirements for ASTM C 1167, Grade 1 tile; with nail holes made before firing.

3. Profile: One-piece S-shaped barrel tile. 4. Tile Size: As indicated in Product Approval. 5. Finish: Unglazed, natural fired. 6. Color: To be selected by Consultant.

B. Special Shapes and Fittings: Supply special shapes and fittings of same material and finish as adjacent tile, factory-formed before firing, as indicated on drawings or as required for specific project conditions, including but not limited to hip caps, ridge caps, rake edges, eave edges, and termination caps.

2.03 SHEET MATERIALS

A. Anchor/Base Sheet: One of the following: 1. ASTM D 226; Asphalt-saturated organic felt, unperforated; Type II ("No. 30"). 2. ASTM D 2626; Asphalt-saturated and -coated organic felt; plain.

B. Roofing Felt: ASTM D 2178; Asphalt-saturated glass fiber felt; heavy duty.

C. Mineral Surface Cap Sheet: ASTM D 3909; Asphalt-saturated glass fiber roll roofing; white colored mineral granules.

2.04 METAL FLASHING MATERIALS

A. At the juncture of the roof vertical surfaces, flashing and counterflashing shall be provided in accordance with the manufacturer’s installation instructions or the recommendations of the FRSA/TRI 07320.

B. Provide sheet metal roof flashings as indicated and as required for watertight roofing system, including eave edge, gable edge, ridge vent, and open valley flashing. 1. Conform to requirements of FBC-TPHVHZ RAS 120. 2. Form flashings to profiles indicated, or as required to shed water and protect

building from water damage. 3. Form sections square, flat, and accurate to profile, in maximum possible

lengths, free from distortion or other defects detrimental to function or appearance.

4. Hem exposed edges of flashings minimum 1/4 inch (6 mm) on underside. 5. Coat concealed surfaces of flashings with bituminous paint.

C. Sheet Metal Material: 1. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666 Type 304, soft temper, minimum 0.019 inch

(0.48 mm) thick; smooth No. 4 finish.

D. Bituminous Paint: Asphaltic mastic, ASTM D 4479, Type I.

2.05 FASTENERS

A. Underlayment Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized steel roofing nails, 11 gage (2.9


mm) thick, sharp pointed with barbed shanks, minimum 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) diameter head, and of length sufficient to penetrate 3/4 inch (19 mm) into substrate or completely through it. 1. Roofing nails and tin-caps shall be tested for corrosion resistance in

compliance with FBC-TPHVHZ TAS 114, Appendix E, Section 2 (ASTM G 85).

B. Tile Fasteners: Stainless steel ring shank nails, 10 gage (3.3 mm) thick, with minimum 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) diameter head, of sufficient length to penetrate 3/4 inch (19 mm) into solid substrate or completely through plywood sheathing. 1. Perimeter fastening areas include three tile courses but not less than 36

inches (914 mm) from either side of hips or ridges and edges of eaves and gable rakes.

2. Roof tile fasteners shall be tested and comply with the requirements set forth in FBC-B SECTION 1523.

C. Asphaltic Adhesive: 1. Asphalt Plastic Roofing Cement: Asphalt plastic roof cement conforming to

ASTM D 4586, Type II, non-asbestos, heavy body mastic comprising asphalt and other mineral ingredients.

2. Cold Process Modified Bitument Roofing Mastic: Cold process modified bitumen type conforming to ASTM D 3019, Type III.

3. Asphalt: ASTM D 312, Type IV.

D. Adhesive/Sealant: Structural bonding adhesive conforming to ASTM D 3498.

E. Roof Tile Adhesive: 1. Description: Two-component polyurethane adhesive meeting FBC-TPHVHZ

TAS 101. 2. Physical and Performance Requirements:

a. Density (ASTM D 1622): 1.6 PCF. b. Compressive Strength (ASTM D 1621):

1) Parallel to Rise: 18 PSI. 2) Perpendicular to Rise: 12 PSI.

c. Tensile Strength (ASTM D 1623): 28 PSI, parallel to rise. d. Water Absorption (ASTM D 2127): 0.08 PSF. e. Moisture Vapor Transmission (ASTM E 96): 3.1 Perm / inch. f. Dimensional Stability (ASTM D 2126):

1) Volume Change at -40 degrees F, 2 weeks: +0.07 percent. 2) Volume Change at +158 degrees F, 100 percent RH, 2 weeks:

+6.0 percent. g. Closed Cell Content (ASTM D 2856): 86 percent.

3. Product: Polyfoam PolyPro AH-160 Roof Tile Adhesive (M-D County Product Approval NOA No. 06-0201.02).

2.07 ACCESSORIES

A. Attachment Members: 1. Material: Wood, pressure preservative treated; as specified in Section

06100. 2. Nailers: Nominal 2 inch (50 mm) thick members, height as required for

specific conditions.


3. Cant Strips: Beveled strips sized as indicated, nominal 48 inches (1220 mm) long and spaced nominal 1/2 inch (12.5 mm) apart at ends for drainage.

B. Eave Closures: Manufacturer’s standard prefabricated metal components conforming to Product Approval NOA.

C. Mortar: ASTM C 270 for Type M mortar (2.25 to 2.5:1, sand to cement ratio). 1. Materials:

a. Cement: ASTM C 91, Type M. b. Sand: ASTM C 144, uniformly graded and free from organic materials. c. Lightweight Aggregate/Cement Mortar: ASTM C 332; must be premixed

and bagged. d. Water: Clean, fresh, potable and free of mineral or organic matter which

can affect plaster. 2. Mix: Roof tile mortar shall be either of the following:

a. Premixed unit having a current Product Approval and tested in compliance with FBC-TPHVHZ TAS 123.

b. Job site mix approved by the Building Official and in compliance with FBC-TPHVHZ RAS 113.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine structural roof deck for compliance with specified requirements. Verify that roof penetrations and roof openings are correctly installed in proper locations.

B. Do not begin installation of tile roofing until substrates have been properly prepared. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Consultant of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Prepare roof deck surfaces using methods recommended by tile manufacturer for achieving best results under project conditions.

B. Seal roof deck joints wider than 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) with deck tape.

C. Install eave edge and gable edge flashings tight with fascia, in accordance with SMACNA (ASMM) recommendations. Lap joints minimum 2 inches (50 mm) and seal with plastic cement.

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Install clay tile roofing system in accordance with the following: 1. Methods set forth in FBC-TPHVHZ RAS 111. 2. Product Approval Notice of Acceptance. 3. Recommendations of tile manufacturer. 4. Recommendations of NRCA MS104.

B. Underlayment: 1. Install underlayment in accordance with requirements of Product Approval,

FBC-TPHVHZ RAS 120, and underlayment material manufacturer's published literature.


2. Anchor/base sheet (ASTM D 226, Type II or ASTM D 2626) shall be mechanically attached to the wood deck with approved fasteners spaced in 12 in. grid staggered in two rows in the field, and 6 in. on center at the laps. a. Extend anchor/base sheet minimum of 4 in. up vertical surfaces. b. Anchor/base sheet end laps shall be a minimum of 6 in., and head laps

shall be a minimum of 4 in. c. Anchor/base sheet shall be a minimum of two plies in the valleys.

3. Over installed anchor/base sheet, apply one layer of roofing felt to the anchor/base sheet in full 25 lb/sq ft (+/- 15 percent) mopping of asphalt. a. Asphalt shall be applied uniformly so that felts do not touch felts. b. End laps shall be a minimum of 6 in.; head laps shall be a minimum of 3

in., and back nailed 12 in. on center with approved nails through tincaps. 4. Over installed roofing felt ply, apply one layer of mineral surfaced cap sheet

in full 25 lb/sq ft (+/- 15 percent) mopping of asphalt. a. Asphalt shall be applied uniformly so that felts do not touch felts. b. End laps shall be a minimum of 6 in.; head laps shall be a minimum of 3

in., and back nailed 12 in. on center with approved nails through tincaps.

C. Valley Protection Membrane: Install full width anchor/base sheet centered at valleys, in accordance with manufacturer’s installation instructions for project substrate. Weather lap joints a minimum of 12 inches (305 mm).

D. Metal Valley Flashings: 1. Open Valleys: Install minimum 24 inch (610 mm) wide flashing over valley

protection membrane, centered over valley and crimped to guide water; fasten to deck with cleats. Overlap end joints minimum 8 inches (200 mm), blind nailing upper end of each sheet; do not solder joints. a. Lap underlayment over edges of flashing a minimum of 4 inches (100

mm).

E. Sheet Metal Flashing: Install flashing at other locations as indicated and as required by project conditions. 1. Install flashing at all locations where clay roof tiles intersect other roofs,

walls, parapets, chimneys, ventilators, and similar projections. 2. Install drip edge flashing at eaves prior to installing underlayment. 3. Install drip edge flashing on downslope roof edges after installation of

underlayment.

F. Attachment Members: 1. Cants: Install cant strips at eaves on top of underlayment, spaced for

drainage. 2. Nailers: Install nailers at ridge and hips, directly over underlayment. Protect

with additional layer of underlayment before installing ridge and hip tiles and accessories.

3. Rake Edge Nailers: Install nailers at gable ends, configured as indicated to support tile and provide weather protection to roof components.

G. Clay Tile: 1. Install first row of tile at eaves with minimum projection of 1 inch (25 mm). 2. Lay tile square with building lines and parallel with roof slope. Install filler,

closure, and mitered pieces as required. 3. Unless otherwise indicated or recommended by tile manufacturer, install tile


with minimum of 3 inch (75 mm) headlaps. 4. Miter tile at valleys to form straight edge using masonry saw. 5. Nail tiles by driving nails to point where nail heads just clear surface of tile,

so tiles hang on nails. Do not overdrive nails, putting pressure on underlying tile, and do not underdrive nails, putting strain on overlying tile.

6. Cut and fit tiles neatly around vents, pipes, and other projections. 7. Set ridge and hip tile in full bed of asphalt roof cement. Strike flush with face

of tile. 8. Install accessories in accordance with manufacturer’s details and

recommendations.

3.04 ADJUSTING, CLEANING, AND PROTECTION

A. Minimize traffic over finished roof surface. Where walking on roof is absolutely necessary, wear soft-soled shoes and walk on butt of tiles to avoid breakage.

B. Remove and replace damaged or broken tile before Date of Substantial Completion.

C. Remove excess and broken tile and roof installation debris from project site.

END OF SECTION

RENOVATION OF HISTORIC FIRE STATION NO. 2 (Phase II-A) City of Miami Project No. B-30579 07410 - 1 of 7 EXTERIOR WALL PANEL SYSTEM

SECTION 07410

EXTERIOR WALL PANEL SYSTEM

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Structural exterior wall panel system, comprised of the following: 1. Cold-formed steel stud framing. 2. Cement board exterior wall sheathing. 3. Synthetic plaster exterior wall finish.


A. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers.

1.03 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

A. Coordinate with work of other sections that is to be installed in or adjacent to the metal framing system, including but not limited to structural anchors, cladding anchors, utilities, insulation, and firestopping.

1.04 DESIGN & PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Wall Panel Structural Performance: Provide structural exterior wall panel system capable of withstanding specified design loads within limits and under conditions indicated. Minimum component sizes and gauges are to conform to shop drawings and requirements of the Product Approval NOA. 1. Design Loads: As indicated on drawings or required by governing building

code, whichever is greatest. 2. Deflection Limits: Design framing systems to withstand design loads without

deflections greater than the following: a. Exterior Wall Framing: Deflection shall be not greater than L/240, except

as otherwise indicated. 3. Product Approval Ratings: Based on testing in accordance with

FBC-TPHVHZ TAS 201, TAS 202, TAS 203, and ASTM E 72, structural exterior wall panel system shall meet or exceed the following: a. Maximum Design Pressure (MDP): Wall panel system shall be rated for

lateral wind load of not less than +/- 64.3 PSF. b. Missile Impact Rating: Wall panel system shall be rated for Large

Missile Impact.

B. Wall Panel Finish Performance Requirements: System shall meet or exceed the following performance standards when tested in accordance with the following methods: 1. Accelerated Weathering (ASTM G 23 (testing period of 2000 hours) or ASTM

G 53 (testing period of 3000 hours)): No cracking, flaking, or adverse effects. 2. Wind-driven Rain (FS TT-C-555B): No visible leaks or dampness throughout

to the rear face and less than 90 gram increase. 3. Salt Spray Resistance (ASTM B 117, Salt Spray (Fog) Testing): Testing

period of 300 hours; no adverse effects. 4. Mildew Resistance (MIL Standard 810B, Method 508): No mildew growth


supported after 28 days. 5. Abrasion Resistance (ASTM D 968, Method A): No cracking, checking, or

loss of film integrity after 500 liters of sand. 6. Surface Burning Characteristics (UL 723, ASTM E 84): Test specimen

consists of base coat, reinforcing mesh and finish coat; flame spread less than 25 and smoke developed less than 450.

1.05 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: 1. Provide data on standard framing members; describe materials and finish,

product criteria, limitations. 2. Provide manufacturer's data on factory-made framing connectors, showing

compliance with requirements.

C. Shop Drawings: Indicate component details, bearing, anchorage, loading, welds, and type and location of fasteners, and accessories or items required of related work. 1. Indicate stud layout. 2. Describe method for securing studs to tracks and for bolted framing

connections.

D. Samples: Submit 2 x 2 inch size samples of synthetic plaster wall finish, illustrating finish coat color and texture range.

E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures, conditions requiring special attention.


A. Designer Qualifications: Design framing system under direct supervision of a Professional Structural Engineer experienced in design of this Work and licensed in the State of Florida.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the types of products specified in this section, and with minimum five years of documented experience.

C. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum five years of documented experience.

D. Each panel shall bear a permanent label with the manufacturer's name or logo, city, state and a statement that reads, "Miami-Dade County Product Control Approved," unless otherwise noted in the Product Approval NOA.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. General: 1. Manufacturers of products used in work of this section shall be as specified in

the applciable Product Approval NOA.


B. Wall Panels: 1. Basis of Design: Wellbuilt International; 8600 NW South River Drive, Suite

207; Miami, FL 33166; Tel. 305-884-8020. a. Product: Sure-Board Wall Panel System; Miami-Dade Product Approval

NOA No. 08-1126.08.

C. Wall Panel Components: As specified in the Wall Panel Product Approval NOA. 1. Metal Framing, Connectors, Fasteners and Accessories: Per Wall Panel

Manufacturer's recommendation. 2. Wall Sheathing:

a. Basis of Design: National Gypsum Company; 2001 Rexford Road; Charlotte, NC 28211; Tel. 704-365-7300.

3. Acrylic Plaster Finish System: a. Basis of Design: BASF Wall Systems, a Division of BASF Construction

Chemicals, LLC; 3550 St. Johns Bluff Road; South Jacksonville, FL 32224; Tel. 800-221-9255 or 904-996-6000.

4. Concrete Anchors: a. Elco Fastening Systems, LLC. b. Powers Fasteners, Inc. c. Hilti, Inc.

D. Substitutions: See Section 01600 - Product Requirements.

2.02 METAL FRAMING SYSTEM

A. Provide primary and secondary framing members, bridging, bracing, plates, gussets, clips, fittings, reinforcement, and fastenings as required to provide a complete panel framing system.

B. Design Criteria: Provide complete framing system with the following characteristics: 1. Design: Calculate structural characteristics of cold-formed steel framing

members according to applicable requirements of the governing building code and AISI SG02-1.

2. Structural Performance: Design, engineer, fabricate, and erect to withstand specified design loads for project conditions within required limits.

3. Design Loads: In accordance with applicable codes. 4. Live load deflection meeting the following, unless otherwise indicated:

a. Exterior Walls: Maximum horizontal deflection under wind load of 1/240 of span.

5. Able to tolerate movement of components without damage, failure of joint seals, undue stress on fasteners, or other detrimental effects when subject to seasonal or cyclic day/night temperature ranges.

6. Able to accommodate construction tolerances, deflection of building structural members, and clearances of intended openings.

C. Shop fabricate framing system to the greatest extent possible.

D. Deliver to site in largest practical sections.

2.03 FRAMING MATERIALS

A. Studs and Track: ASTM C 955; studs formed to channel, C-shaped with unpunched web; U-shaped track in matching nominal width and compatible height.


1. Gage and Dimensions: a. Track: 0.035 inch thick steel stud track with minimum 6 inch deep web x

minimum 2 inch wide legs. b. Stud: 0.044 inch thick steel stud with minimum 6 inch deep web x

minimum 1.625 inch wide legs; each leg to have 0.050 inch return. 2. Galvanized in accordance with ASTM A 653 G90/Z275 coating.

B. Sheets and Straps: ASTM A 653 steel sheet, with G90/Z275 hot dipped galvanized coating. 1. Base Metal: Structural Steel (SS), Grade 50/340, Class 1. 2. Gage and Dimensions:

a. Metal Straps: 0.034 inch thick flat steel strap; 6 x 48 inches. b. Steel Sheets: 0.027 inch thick flat steel sheet; 48 x 108 inches.

C. Framing Connectors: Factory-made formed steel sheet, ASTM A 653 SS Grade 50, with G60/Z180 hot dipped galvanized coating and factory punched holes. 1. Structural Performance: Maintain load and movement capacity required by

applicable code, when evaluated in accordance with AISI North American Specification for the Design of Cold Formed Steel Structural Members; minimum 16 gage, 0.06 inch (1.5 mm) thickness.

2. Provide non-movement connections for tie-down to foundation, floor-to-floor tie-down, roof-to-wall tie-down, joist hangers, gusset plates, and stiffeners.

D. Other Framing Components: 1. Square Steel Washer: 1/4 inch thick ASTM A 36 or ASTM A 514 steel plate,

with G60/Z180 hot dipped galvanized coating and factory punched holes; 3 x 3 inches.

2. Steel Strut Angle: ASTM A 36 steel angle, with G60/Z180 hot dipped galvanized coating and factory punched holes; 4 x 4 inches x 1/4 inch thick.

2.04 WALL SHEATHING

A. Cement Board: Cementitious tile backer board made from Portland cement, aggregate and reinforced with fiberglass resin. The bottom Unexposed) side facing shall have a smooth finish with a fiberglass mesh embedded in the cement slurry, and the top (exposed) side facing shall have a rough finish with a fiberglass mesh mechanically embedded into core. 1. Thickness: 1/2 inch. 2. Weight (ASTM C 473): 3.0 PSF. 3. Performance Characteristics:

a. Flexural Strength (ASTM C 947): 750. b. Flame Spread / Smoke Developed (ASTM E 84): 5 / 0. c. Shear Bond Strength, 7 days:

1) Dry-set Portland Cement Mortar (ANSI A118.1): 204 PSI. 2) Latex-set Portland Cement Mortar (ANSI A118.4): 241 PSI. 3) Organic Adhesive, Type 1 (ANSI A136.1): 159 PSI.

4. Product: Permabase Cement Board, manufactured by National Gypsum Company.

2.05 SYNTHETIC PLASTER FINISH SYSTEM

A. Description: High-impact resistant, water-managed wall system incorporating a cement-board core, reinforced base coat and 100 percent acrylic polymer exterior


finish.

B. Materials: 1. Base Coat: Dry-mix base coat containing Portland cement.

a. Product: Acrodry Base Coat manufactured by BASF Wall Systems. 2. Portland Cement: Conform to ASTM C 150, Type I, II, or I/II, grey or white;

fresh and free of lumps. 3. Water: Clean and potable without foreign matter. 4. Reinforcing Mesh: 9-1/4 inch wide, balanced, open weave glass fiber

reinforcing mesh; MIL-Y-1140G; twisted multi-end strands treated for compatibility with synthetic plaster finish system components a. Product: As recommended by synthetic plaster finish manufacturer.

5. Finish Coat: 100 percent acrylic resin finish; air-cured, compatible with base coat; finish color factory-mixed; color and finish texture as selected. a. Product: Acrotex manufactured by BASF Wall Systems.

C. Plaster Accessories: Starter track, 'L' bead, 'J' bead, angled termination bead, casing beads, corner beads, expansion joints and weep screed shall comply with ASTM D 1784 or ASTM C 1063 for vinyl. Type as recommended by synthetic plaster finish system manufacturer.

2.06 FASTENERS

A. Self-Drilling, Self-Tapping Screws, Bolts, Nuts and Washers: 1. Hot dip galvanized per ASTM A 153. 2. Screws shall be corrosion resistant as per DIN 50018 with flat head and raised

sides to prevent excessive penetration, with minimum Fy = 80 ksi.

B. Anchorage Devices: Power actuated, Drilled expansion bolts, and Screws with sleeves. 1. Products: Anchors for attaching framing to concrete structure (e.g., floor,

foundation) shall be as follows: a. 1/4 inch diameter anchors: Use Crete-Flex anchors, as manufactured

by Elco Fastening Systems, LLC; 1-3/4 inch minimum embedment into f'c = 3350 PSI poured concrete.

b. 1/2 inch diameter anchors: Use Powers Power-Stud + SD2 anchors, as manufactured by Powers Fasteners, Inc.; 5 inches minimum embedment into f'c = 3350 PSI poured concrete.

c. 1/2 inch diameter anchors: Use Kwik Bolt expansion anchors, as manufactured by Hilti, Inc.; 5 inches minimum embedment into f'c = 3350 PSI poured concrete.

d. Anchors shall be installed following all of the recommendations and specifications of the anchor's manufacturer.

C. Sheathing Panel Adhesive: 1. Product: Sure-Board System acrylic emulsion.

D. Welding: In conformance with AWS D1.1.

2.07 ACCESSORIES

A. Bracing, Furring, Bridging: Formed sheet steel, thickness determined for conditions encountered; finish to match framing components.


B. Touch-Up Primer for Galvanized Surfaces: SSPC-Paint 20, Type I - Inorganic, complying with VOC limitations of authorities having jurisdiction.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that building framing components are ready to receive work.

B. Verify field measurements and adjust installation as required.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Stud Framing: 1. Install components in accordance with requirements of the Product Approval

NOA, shop drawings, manufacturers' instructions and ASTM C 1007 requirements.

2. Align floor and ceiling tracks; locate to wall layout. Secure in place with fasteners at spacings indicated on the Product Approval NOA and shop drawings. Coordinate installation of sealant with floor and ceiling tracks.

3. Place studs at maximum 16 inches (400 mm) on center; not more than 1/4 inches (6 mm) from abutting walls and at each side of openings. Connect studs to tracks using fastener method indicated in the Product Approval NOA and shop drawings.

4. Install studs full length in one piece. Splicing of studs is not permitted. 5. Install studs, brace, and reinforce to develop full strength and achieve design

requirements. 6. Provide deflection allowance in stud track, directly below horizontal building

framing at non-load bearing framing. 7. Touch-up field welds and damaged galvanized surfaces with primer.

B. Sheets and Straps: 1. On the interior side of stud framing, install a single metal strap across full width

of each panel at mid-height; fasten with screws at each stud, per Product Approval NOA.

2. On the exterior side of stud framing, install a single steel sheet weather barrier over entire area of each panel; coordinate fastening with installation of wall sheathing, per Product Approval NOA.

C. Wall Sheathing: 1. Wall Sheathing: Secure with long dimension parallel to wall studs, with ends

over firm bearing, as specified in Product Approval and shown in shop drawings. a. Attach wall sheathing to steel sheet with sheathing panel adhesive, and

fasten to studs with screws.

D. Synthetic Plaster Finish System: 1. Mixing:

a. Mix in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. b. No additives are permitted unless specified in product mixing instructions.

Close containers when not in use. c. Prepare in a container that is clean and free of foreign substances. d. Mix with a clean, rust-free paddle and drill until thoroughly blended.


e. Do not use a container which has contained or been cleaned with a petroleum-based product.

f. Clean tools with soap and water immediately after use. 2. Application:

a. Apply materials in accordance with manufacturer's application specifications.

b. Accessories: Attach starter track per manufacturer's instructions and manufacturer's Typical Details.

c. Install cement board over steel sheet weather barrier in accordance to the manufacturer’s instructions and project requirements.

d. Install trim accessories per manufacturer’s recommendations. e. Base Coat and Reinforcing Mesh:

1) Apply base coat to entire surface of cement-board with a stainless steel trowel to embed the reinforcing mesh at panel-to-panel joints.

2) Immediately place reinforcing mesh against wet base coat and embed the reinforcing mesh into the base coat by troweling from the center to the edges.

3) Lap reinforcing mesh 2-1/2 inches minimum at edges. 4) Ensure reinforcing mesh is continuous at corners, void of wrinkles

and embedded in base coat so that no reinforcing mesh color is visible.

5) If required, apply a second layer of base coat to achieve total nominal base coat/reinforcing mesh thickness of 1/16 inch.

6) Allow base coat with embedded reinforcing mesh to dry hard (normally 8 to 10 hours).

f. Finish Coat: 1) Apply finish directly to the base coat/reinforcing mesh with a clean,

stainless steel trowel. 2) Apply and level finish during the same operation to minimum

obtainable thickness consistent with uniform coverage. 3) Maintain a wet edge on finish by applying and texturing continually

over the wall surface. 4) Work finish to corners, joints or other natural breaks and do not allow

material to set up within an uninterrupted wall area.

END OF SECTION

RENOVATION OF HISTORIC FIRE STATION NO. 2 (Phase II-A) City of Miami Project No. B-30579 07550 - 1 of 14 MOD BITUMEN MEMBRANE ROOFING

SECTION 07550

MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Self-adhering modified bitumen roofing system.

B. Roof insulation.

C. Membrane flashings.


A. Section 03300 - Cast-In-Place Concrete: Structural concrete roof deck.

B. Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry: Plywood roof deck.

C. Section 06150 - Wood Decking: Heavy timber wood roof deck.

D. Section 07321 - Clay Tile Roofing.

E. Section 07620 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim.

F. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers.

1.03 PERFORMANCE & TESTING REQUIREMENTS

A. Roofing systems shall meet or exceed applicable requirements of the governing building code, including but not limited to High Velocity Hurricane Zone requirements.

B. Miami-Dade County Product Approval: All roof assemblies, roof coverings and roof systems shall have Product Approval, and shall meet the applicable minimum requirements of the governing building code. 1. Roof assemblies, roof coverings and roof systems shall have Product

Approval, and shall meet the following minimum requirements. a. Roofing assemblies shall be tested in compliance with FM 4470 and/or

4471 (for metal roofing), as modified for the purposes of the governing building code and set forth in FBC-TPHVHZ TAS 114. Only those components listed within the roofing assembly Product Approval NOA shall be approved for use with the roof covering.

b. Fastening devices and fastening assemblies used for anchor sheet or roof coverings shall be tested in compliance with FBC-B SECTION 1523.

c. Roofing assemblies shall be tested by a testing laboratory, certified by the certification agency in accordance with FBC-TPHVHZ TAS 301, to confirm compliance with the fire classification and other sections of the governing building code.

d. Roofing membranes and components shall be tested in compliance with the physical property test requirements detailed in FBC-TPHVHZ TAS 110.

2. Roof assemblies, roof coverings and roof systems shall be installed in strict compliance with the method of application set forth in the applicable Product


Approval.

C. Wind Resistance: 1. Roof decks and roof coverings shall be installed to withstand wind load

design pressures indicated on the Drawings. 2. Roof systems shall be tested in accordance with FM 4450, FM 4470, UL 580

or UL 1897, as appropriate for conditions. 3. Roofing system shall be tested in compliance with FBC-TPHVHZ TAS 110

and FBC-TPHVHZ TAS 114 in its entirety, and shall resist a minimum of 90 PSF tested wind uplift pressure resistance.

4. Roofing system shall be Factory Mutual Approved for 1-90, based on uplift pressures obtained from FM Data Sheets 1-7 or 1-28s. a. Building Height: Less than 18 ft. b. Pressure Coefficients: 1.7 at perimeters, and 2.6 at corners.

D. Physical Properties: Roof coverings shall demonstrate physical integrity over the working life of the roof based upon 2,000 hours of exposure to accelerated weathering tests conducted in accordance with ASTM G 152, ASTM G 153, ASTM G 155 or ASTM G 154. 1. Roof coverings that are subject to cyclical flexural response due to wind

loads shall not demonstrate any significant loss of tensile strength for unreinforced membranes or breaking strength for reinforced membranes when tested as herein required.

E. Impact Resistance: Roof coverings shall resist impact damage based on the results of tests conducted in accordance with ASTM D 3746 or FM 4470.

F. Roof Covering Fire Resistance: Fire resistant roofing assemblies and coverings shall be provided on all structures, as follows: 1. Fire resistant roofing assemblies and coverings shall be tested and classified

(e.g., Class A; Class B) in accordance with ASTM E 108 or UL 790. 2. Minimum Fire Classification of roofing assemblies and coverings shall be

Class A, except as follows: a. Where the distance separation measured horizontally from the closest

point of the building edge to the nearest point to an adjoining structure is more than 20 feet and the occupant load for the building is less than 300 persons, the minimum Fire Classification of roofing assemblies and coverings may be Class B.

G. Edge Metal and Flashings (to be coordinated with Section 07620): Edge metal and flashings and their installation shall be in compliance with the requirements set forth in FBC-TPHVHZ RAS 111 or SPRI ES-1. 1. Wind Resistance Tests: The following minimum securement criteria apply to

edging systems. Roof edge systems shall pass SPRI Test Method RE-1, RE-2 or RE-3, as appropriate for the application. a. Membrane Attachment: Edge devices designed to act as membrane

terminations shall pass SPRI Test Method RE-1 (attached to SPRI ES-1). 1) The design of perimeter attachment, when terminating the roofing

system, shall provide a minimum holding power of 100 PLF, which force shall be measured in direction of 45 degrees back onto the roof as tested according to SPRI Test Method RE-1.


2) Specifically for mechanically attached membrane roofing systems, the perimeter attachment loadings shall be calculated based on the force required to hold the roof system's perimeter sheet in place for the design wind speed.

3) The fastener spacing shall be adjusted and the edge detail shall have sufficient strength to meet and resist these loads.

b. Edge Flashing: Edge flashings and other edge devices for which the exposed vertical component area exceeds the exposed horizontal component area shall pass SPRI Test Method RE-2 (attached to SPRI ES-1). 1) The vertical face of edge flashing shall be tested according to SPRI

Test Method RE-2. 2) Test results shall meet or exceed horizontal and vertical design

wind pressures as calculated according to SPRI Test Method RE-2.

H. Testing: 1. General:

a. Modified bitumen roof assemblies shall be tested in compliance with the requirements set forth in FBC-TPHVHZ TAS 114.

b. Fasteners for attachment of anchor or base sheets to various substrates and metal stress plates, whether separate or integral to a particular fastener, shall be tested for withdrawal resistance in compliance with FBC-TPHVHZ TAS 117(A).

c. All testing and calculations shall be conducted by a certified testing agency and all test reports, including calculations, shall be signed and sealed by a professional engineer or registered roof consultant.

2. Contractor shall test roofing system and demonstrate it to be free of leaks. a. Test Method: Non-destructive moisture test using a Troxler Gauge

(Nuclear), Thermography (IR), or Capacitance Meter. b. In any areas where non-destructive testing indicates excessive moisture,

the roofing system applicator shall: 1) Obtain the roofing manufacturer’s permission to perform core tests

to determine the actual moisture content in the roof. 2) Take core tests of the roof membrane and insulation within 30 days

of its application. 3) Require cores to be tested by a certified laboratory for moisture

content using a Dry Density or Gravimetric test. 4) Determine the actual moisture content by interpolating the the non-

destructive readings with the laboratory test results. 5) Repair all cored areas. 6) Obtain inspection by the roofing system manufacturer’s authorized

representative after all repairs are made to cored areas and any other areas that have required repairs to achieve leak-proof conditions.

2. Field Uplift Testing: Contractor agrees to satisfy field uplift test of completed roofing installation in accordance with FM DS 1-52. a. Testing shall be witnessed by Project Manager and Consultant, and

results shall be recorded on FM Global Form x2688 (Application for Roofing Systems). 1) Submittals: Copies of the form shall be submitted to Project


Manager and Consultant. b. Acceptance of roofing systems shall be contingent upon favorable

interpretation of the test results by one of the following: 1) If the building is to be insured by FM Global: FM Global. 2) If the building is not to be insured by FM Global: Project Manager

and Consultant.

1.04 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's catalog data for membranes (base sheet; cap sheet; plies), bitumen materials, base flashing materials, surfacing, and fasteners. 1. Provide copies of Product Approval; where options are available, indicate

proposed selections. 2. Provide a letter from the roofing manufacturer stating that all accessories

and other system components to be used in the work of this section are compatible with and approved for use with the roofing membranes.

C. Shop Drawings: 1. Indicate joint or termination detail conditions, conditions of interface with

other materials, mechanical fastener layout, and roof flashing details at curbs, scuppers, drains, penetrations, parapets and edge conditions.

2. Provide engineering calculations showing methods used to meet specified Regulatory and Performance Requirements.

3. Provide plans showing uplift test locations. 4. Coordinate with shop drawing submittals for Related Sections.

D. Installer's qualification data, including but not limited to membrane manufacturer's approval.

E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures, perimeter conditions requiring special attention, and compliance with applicable NRCA ML104, FM DS 1-28 and DS 1-29, and Product Approval NOA.

F. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure forms have been completed in City's name and registered with manufacturer.


A. Terminology: For definitions of terms, refer to FBC-B CHAPTER 2 and Section 1513, and ASTM D 1079. 1. Definitions from the FBC-B shall take precedence.

B. Installer Qualifications: 1. All roofing work shall be performed by a qualified contractor licensed to

perform roofing, in compliance with the tolerances, quality and methods of construction established in FBC-B SECTION 1512 or set forth in the standards adopted by the high-velocity hurricane zone (HVHZ) requirements specified in the governing building code.

2. Installer shall have a minimum of five (5) years of experience installing the specified type of roofing system, and shall be approved by roofing


manufacturer. a. Submit a letter from the roofing manufacturer approving the applicator as

an approved installer within ten (10) days after Notice To Proceed on the project.

C. Materials: Roofing products used in this project shall be demonstrated to have a minimum of 5 years of satisfactory service in South Florida (south of Palm Beach).

D. Certificates of Compliance: 1. Contractor shall submit a notarized Certificate of Compliance certifying that

the construction, installation, and performance characteristics of the roofing system conforms to all applicable codes, ordinances, regulations and standards having jurisdiction over this project.

1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION

A. Deliver products in manufacturer's original containers, dry, undamaged, with seals and labels intact.

B. Store products in weather-protected environment, clear of ground and moisture. 1. All roof system materials that are susceptible to retaining moisture or that

may be damaged by moisture must be stored in a dry location. 2. When moisture-sensitive materials are stored outside, they must be placed

on pallets or platforms that are raised off the ground or roof deck. a. Materials that are sensitive to moisture shall be covered with water-

resistant "breathable" coverings (e.g., water-resistant canvas tarpaulins); properly secure coverings in place.

b. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for material storage and handling.

3. Bituminous roof goods should be stored on end to prevent rolls from becoming deformed or damaged. a. When storing roofing materials on a roof surface, do not overload the

deck or structural assembly. 4. Bitumen may be stored unprotected from weather on the ground. However,

moisture and dirt shall be removed from bitumen before it is heated. 5. Lids must be secured on cans of stored material. 6. Solvents, adhesives, foam components and sealants must be stored at

proper temperatures.


A. Coordinate the work with installation of associated flashings and counterflashings installed by other sections as the work of this section proceeds.

B. Do not apply roofing membrane when environmental conditions are outside the ranges recommended by manufacturer.

C. Do not apply roofing membrane during unsuitable weather.

D. Do not apply roofing membrane to damp deck surface or when precipitation is expected or occurring.

E. Do not expose materials vulnerable to water or sun damage in quantities greater than can be weatherproofed the same day.


1.08 WARRANTY

A. General: 1. All roofing warranties shall address all of the requirements in the City’s

Standard Warranty Form. 2. All roofing warranties shall be enforceable under the laws of the State of

Florida and not under the laws of any other state, regardless of the place of business of the roofing system manufacturer of installer.

3. Roofing warranties shall not include arbitration clauses, unless authorized in writing by City.

B. Manufacturer’s Warranty: Furnish written manufacturer's warranty for the entire roof membrane system, without monetary limitation (NDL), in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of membrane roofing system that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Manufacturer shall agree to repair or replace defective materials and

workmanship at no dollar limit (NDL) and at no cost to City during warranty period.

2. Manufacturer shall agree to allow City to repair the roof should damage occur due to acts of God or vandalism, without voiding or adversely affecting the warranty.

3. Warranty shall include a high velocity wind rider expanding coverage to include damages due to wind speed up to the velocity required by the governing building code (i.e., 146 MPH), in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of roofing system that fail in materials or workmanship within the specified warranty period.

4. Warranty Period: Twenty (20) years, commencing on the effective date of Substantial Completion. a. Warranty period to be ten (10) years, plus ten (10) additional years at

City’s option.

C. Special Warranty: In addition to manufacturer’s warranty, furnish a special warranty covering the entire roof installation against defects in workmanship. 1. Warranty Period: Three (3) years, commencing on the effective date of

Substantial Completion.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. General - System Basis of Design: 1. Modified Bitumen Membrane Roofing over Concrete Deck: GAF Liberty SBS

Self-Adhering Modified Roofing System over Concrete Deck conforming to Miami-Dade County Product Approval No. 08-0303.09, System Type A5.

2. Modified Bitumen Membrane Roofing over Wood Deck: GAF Liberty SBS Self-Adhering Modified Roofing System over Wood Deck conforming to Miami-Dade County Product Approval No. 09-0323.18, System Type C2.

3. Subject to compliance with contract requirements, equivalent systems by listed membrane materials manufacturers may be used.

B. Components: 1. Membrane Materials: Base sheet, ply sheet, and membrane (cap sheet):


a. Subject to compliance with contract requirements, provide materials manufactured by one of the following: (1) Firestone Building Products Co: www.firestonebpco.com. (2) GAF Materials Corporation: www.gaf.com. (3) Siplast: www.siplast.com. (4) Soprema: www.soprema.us.

2. Bituminous Materials: Subject to compliance with contract requirements, provide materials recommended by membrane materials manufacturer and referenced in the applicable Product Approval.

3. Surfacing Materials: Subject to compliance with contract requirements, provide materials recommended by membrane materials manufacturer and referenced in the applicable Product Approval.

4. Fasteners: Subject to compliance with contract requirements, provide adhesive materials recommended by membrane materials manufacturer and referenced in the applicable Product Approval.

5. Insulation: Subject to compliance with contract requirements, provide the following: a. Base Layer: Polyisocyanurate foam insulation materials recommended

by membrane materials manufacturer and referenced in the applicable Product Approval.

b. Top Layer: Fire-resistant, moisture-resistant, dimensionally-stable roof board recommended by membrane manufacturer and referenced in the applicable Product Approval.

2.02 MEMBRANE AND SHEET MATERIALS

A. Roofing Membrane: 1. General:

a. Membrane and sheet materials shall be: 1) Approved for use in Factory Mutual tested roofing assemblies. 2) Designed for use in climatic zone where the project is located.

2. Base Sheet Ply: ASTM D 5147; self-adhering, SBS-modified, fiberglass reinforced membrane for use in homogeneous multi-layer modified bitumen roof membrane system. a. Product: GAF Liberty SBS Self-Adhering Base/Ply Sheet, or equal.

3. Intermediate Membrane Ply(s): a. Concrete Deck: ASTM D 6164; non-woven polyester mat coated with

polymer-modified asphalt, smooth surfaced. 1) Product: GAF Rubberoid SBS Heat-Weld Smooth, Rubberoid Heat-

Weld 25, or equal. b. Wood Deck: ASTM D 5147; self-adhering, SBS-modified, fiberglass

reinforced membrane for use in homogeneous multi-layer modified bitumen roof membrane system. 1) GAF Liberty SBS Self-Adhering Base/Ply Sheet, or equal.

4. Cap Membrane Ply: ASTM D 6164; non-woven polyester mat coated with fire-retardant polymer-modified asphalt and surfaced with mineral granules. a. Product: GAF Rubberoid SBS Heat-Weld 170FR, Rubberoid SBS Heat-

Weld Plus FR, or equal.

B. Flexible Flashing Membrane: 1. First Membrane Flashing Ply: Same as Roofing Intermediate Membrane Ply.


2. Cap Membrane Flashing Ply: Same as Roofing Cap Membrane Ply.

2.03 BITUMINOUS MATERIALS

A. Primer: ASTM D 41, asphalt type.

B. Bitumen: Asphalt, ASTM D 312 Type IV.

C. Roof Cement: ASTM D 4586, Type II; asbestos-free.

2.04 INSULATION

A. Base Layer: Tapered polyisocyanurate foam insulation, with current Product Approval. 1. Shall be designed for use over structural concrete roof deck and under

modified bitumen membrane roofing system, to provide slope to drain and to provide thermally efficient insulation.

2. Thickness: As indicated on Drawings; minimum 1.5 inches thick, tapered 1/4 inch per foot (2 percent slope).

3. Product: GAF EnergyGuard Tapered Polyiso, or equal.

B. Top Layer: 1. General: ASTM C 1278 fiber-reinforced gypsum panel roof board

recommended by membrane manufacturer and referenced in the applicable Product Approval. a. Surface Burning Characteristics (ASTM E 84; UL-Classified and tested

in accordance with FM 4450 and FM 4470): 1) Flame Spread: 5. 2) Smoke Developed Rating: 0.

b. Water Absorption (ASTM C 473): 10 percent, maximum. c. Surface Water Absorption (ASTM C 473): 1.6 grams, nominal. d. Mold Resistance (ASTM D 3273): 10.

2. Concrete Deck: a. Panel Thickness: 1/4 inch, minimum. b. Permeance (ASTM E 96): 30 perms, maximum. c. Compressive Strength: 1250 PSI, nominal. d. Surface Water Absorption (ASTM C 473): 1.6 grams, nominal. e. Product: Georgia-Pacific Securock, or equal.

2. Wood Deck: a. Panel Thickness: 1/2 inch, minimum. b. Permeance (ASTM E 96): 2 perms, maximum. c. Compressive Strength: 500-900 PSI, nominal. d. Surface Water Absorption (ASTM C 473): 1 grams, maximum. e. Product: Georgia-Pacific DensDeck DuraGuard, or equal.

2.05 METAL FLASHINGS

A. General: 1. Metal flashings, counterflashings and terminations shall be of the material

indicated on Drawings; if not indicated, metal shall be stainless steel. a. Metal thickness shall conform to requirements of FBC-B SECTION

1517.6 and FBC-TPHVHZ RAS 111. 2. Provide all clips, cleats, straps, anchors and similar items necessary to

properly complete the work.


3. Provide accessories that are compatible with sheet metal materials used and which are of sufficient size and gage to perform as intended.

B. Materials and Components: 1. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666, Type 304, soft temper; smooth No. 4 finish. 2. Fasteners: Stainless steel, with soft neoprene washers. 3. Underlayment: ASTM D 2178, glass fiber roofing felt. 4. Primer: Zinc chromate type 5. Protective Backing Paint: Zinc molybdate alkyd. 6. Sealant: Type specified in Section 07900. 7. Plastic Cement: ASTM D 4586, Type I. 8. Reglets: Recessed or Surface mounted type (as indicated on Drawings),

stainless steel; face and ends covered with plastic tape. 9. Solder: ASTM B 32; Sn50 (50/50) type.

B. Fabrication: 1. Shop fabricate work to the greatest extent possible.

a. Fabricate work to match approved shop drawings and to provide the best possible watertight, weatherproof performance with expansion provisions in running work.

b. Minimize oil-canning, buckling, tool marks and other defects. 2. Form sections true to shape, accurate in size, square, and free from

distortion or defects. 3. Fabricate cleats of same material as sheet, full width (continuous),

interlocking with sheet. 4. Form pieces in longest possible lengths. 5. Fabricate work with uniform, watertight joints.

a. Make seams as inconspicuous as possible. 6. Hem exposed edges on underside 1/2 inch; miter and seam corners. 7. Form material with flat lock seams, except where otherwise indicated.

a. At moving joints, use sealed lapped, bayonet-type or interlocking hooked seams.

8. Fabricate corners from one piece with minimum 18 inch long legs; seam for rigidity, seal with sealant.

9. Fabricate vertical faces with bottom edge formed outward 1/4 inch and hemmed to form drip.

10. Fabricate flashings to allow toe to extend 2 inches over roofing. a. Return and brake edges.

11. Isolate dissimilar materials with isolation coating recommended by the manufacturer or other permanent separation acceptable to the Consultant.

2.06 ACCESSORIES

A. Adhesive: Two-component low rise polyurethane foam adhesive for use in attaching insulation to approved substrates or to subsequent layers of insulation. 1. Product:

a. Olympic OlyBond Adhesive Fastener, or equal. b. Olympic OlyBond 500, or equal

B. Perimeter Edge Wood Blocking: Preservative-treated (pressure-treated) Southern yellow pine, conforming to the requirements of the applicable AWPA Standard U1 and M4 for the species, product, preservative and end use.


1. Preservatives shall be listed in Section 4 of AWPA U1. 2. Blocking shall be only salt pressure treated in accordance with the AWPA C-

2 or C-9, per FBC-TPHVHZ Section 3.4.5. 3. Moisture Content: 19 percent or less.

C. Fasteners/Anchors: 1. Fasteners used for wood blocking attachment to structural concrete shall

have a minimum nominal diameter of 0.250 inch; therefore, a threaded concrete anchor or insulation fastener with a nominal 1/4-inch diameter shall be acceptable. a. Powder actuated (PAT) fastening (Pins and Loads) shall not be an

acceptable method of attachment. 2. Fasteners used for attachment of wood blocking shall meet the corrosion

resistance requirements set forth in FBC-TPHVHZ TAS 114 Appendix 'E', for insulation and membrane fasteners (DIN 50018).

3. Fasteners which have published withdrawal resistance values, generated from laboratory testing, shall have a margin of safety of 4:1 (per FBC-TPHVHZ RAS 111 Table 1) applied to average laboratory test results. a. Use of published withdrawal resistance values to determine a fastener

value for a particular application shall be contingent upon the similarity of substrate materials which generated the published values in comparison to the substrate material of the actual application.

4. Alternatively, the Fastener Value may be the result of in situ (on-site) testing, in compliance with FBC-TPHVHZ TAS 105, resulting in a minimum characteristic resistance force which shall be used as the Fastener Value.

D. Sealants: As recommended by membrane manufacturer.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that surfaces and site conditions are ready to receive work.

B. Verify deck is supported and secure.

C. Verify deck is clean and smooth, flat, free of depressions, waves, or projections, properly sloped and suitable for installation of roof system.

D. Verify deck surfaces are dry.

E. Verify that roof openings, curbs, and penetrations through roof are solidly set, and cant strips, nailing strips, and reglets are in place.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Confirm dry deck by moisture meter with 12 percent moisture maximum.

B. Concrete Deck: 1. Verify flatness of concrete decking. Fill surface honeycomb and variations

with latex filler.

C. Wood Deck: 1. Verify flatness and tightness of joints of wood decking. Fill knot holes with

latex filler.


2. Seal joints of plywood with tape.

3.03 PERIMETER EDGE WOOD BLOCKING

A. General Requirements: 1. Attachment to Structural Deck: Wood blocking shall be attached to resist

wind forces, and other loads, as required by FBC-B Chapter 16 (High-Velocity Hurricane Zones).

2. The maximum unsupported overhang of the wood blocking shall not exceed 2 in. If the maximum overhang is employed, the minimum wood blocking dimensions shall be not less than a nominal 2 x 8 inches, and two rows of fasteners shall be installed in a staggered manner.

3. A fastener shall be placed within 3 inches of the end of each section of wood blocking, and a 1/4-inch gap shall be left between each section of wood blocking.

4. All fastener/anchor heads shall be countersunk or fastener/anchor heads shall be driven flush with the top surface of the wood blocking.

5. If the wood blocking thickness is greater than that of the insulation a tapered edge shall be installed to create a sloped transition between the insulation and the wood blocking.

7. When the width of the wood blocking is greater than 6-inch anchors shall be staggered in two rows across the wood blocking width.

B. Fastener/Anchor Spacing: The attachment criteria for wood blocking shall be 250 PLF for perimeter areas and 300 PLF for corner areas. 1. In any event, wood blocking fastener spacing shall not exceed 18 inches on

center.

3.04 FLASHINGS

A. Flashings shall be installed in such a manner as to prevent moisture entering the wall. 1. All roof flashing and terminations shall be fabricated and installed resist the

windload requirements of FBC-B CHAPTER 16 (High-Velocity Hurricane Zone), and shall be in compliance with the provisions set forth in FBC-TPHVHZ RAS 111.

2. Flashings conforming with the provisions of FBC-TPHVHZ RAS 111 shall be installed at wall and roof intersections; gutters; wherever there is a change in roof slope or direction; around roof openings; and at other locations indicated on the Drawings or where required by the governing building code.

3. Membrane Flashing: All membrane flashing shall be installed according to the roof assembly manufacturer’s published literature and in accordance with the provisions set forth in FBC-TPHVHZ RAS 111.

4. Metal Flashing and Termination: Metal flashings and termination shall be fabricated and installed in accordance with FBC-TPHVHZ RAS 111. a. Metal flashing shall be installed after the roofing felts have been laid and

turned up the vertical surfaces, in compliance with the roofing assembly Product Approval. Such felts shall be embedded in hot bitumen or an approved adhesive.

b. Metal surfaces shall be primed with an ASTM D 41 or ASTM D 43 primer, as appropriate and allowed to dry prior to receiving hot bitumen or cold adhesive.


5. Roof Penetration Flashing: a. All pipes shall be flashed with approved methods detailed in the roofing

system assembly Product Approval. Flanges shall be a minimum of 4 inches.

b. Other roof penetrations shall be suitably flashed with curbs, collars, etc. in compliance with FBC-TPHVHZ RAS 111 or an approved method, in compliance with the roofing system assembly Product Approval.

c. No roof penetration shall be located in roof valleys.

B. Install starter and edge strips, and cleats before starting installation.

C. Back paint concealed metal surfaces with protective backing paint to a minimum dry film thickness of 15 mils.

D. Secure flashings in place using concealed fasteners. Use exposed fasteners only where permitted.

E. Apply plastic cement compound between metal flashings and felt flashings.

F. Fit flashings tight in place. Make corners square, surfaces true and straight in planes, and lines accurate to profiles.

G. Joints: Seal metal joints watertight.

3.04 INSULATION

A. All layers of insulation shall be adhered to the deck as follows: 1. Concrete Deck: Insulation shall be adhered to the deck with specified

adhesive, applied in strict compliance with the foam adhesive manufacturer's Product Approval and FBC-TPHVHZ RAS 117.

2. Wood Deck: Insulation shall be mechanically attached to the deck using the mechanical fasteners in density specified in the Product Approval. a. Perimeter and Corner Areas: Where allowed by applicable Product

Approval, fastener densities shall be increased for insulation as calculated in compliance with FBC-TPHVHZ RAS 117.

B. Install only as much insulation as can be roofed each working day.

C. Joints: 1. Insulation panels shall be installed with minimum joint dimensions and shall

be tightly butted. Maximum joint widths shall be 3/8 in. 2. All insulation joints shall be staggered.

D. Insulation pieces that are cut from larger panels and are smaller than one square foot shall not be acceptable.

3.05 MEMBRANE APPLICATION

A. General: 1. Apply membrane in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and Product

Approval. a. All mechanically attached roofing components shall be attached to

substrate in compliance with the requirements set forth in the roofing assembly Product Approval, applicable minimum requirements specified in the governing building code, and recommendations of FM DS 1-29 and NRCA ML104.


b. Fasteners used for attaching base sheet to deck shall be spaced as indicated on shop drawings, but in no instance shall spacing be less than 24 inches on center in either direction.

2. Apply membrane; lap and seal edges and ends permanently waterproof. 3. Apply smooth, free from air pockets, wrinkles, fish-mouths, or tears. 4. At end of day's operation, install waterproof cut-off. Remove cut-off before

resuming roofing.

B. Roofing Membrane: 1. Base Sheet Ply: Install base sheet to roof deck in accordance with Product

Approval requirements and membrane manufacturer's instructions. a. Install the base sheet dry and in parallel courses. Base sheet membrane

to be self-adhered to roof deck in accordance with FM approvals and Product Approval requirements.

b. Side lap fastener row to be encapsulated in heat-fused lap; center fastener row to be stripped-in with 8-inch wide strip of heat-fused membrane.

2. Intermediate Membrane Ply: Ply sheet membrane is to be heat-welded to base sheet in accordance with Product Approval requirements and membrane manufacturer's instructions.

3. Cap Membrane Ply: Membrane is to be heat-welded to ply sheet in accordance with Product Approval requirements and membrane manufacturer's instructions.

C. Flexible Flashing at Intersections with Vertical Surfaces: Provide 2-ply flexible flashing (ply sheet and cap membrane) torch-applied, except as otherwise indicated. 1. Extend flexible flashing over cant strips and up onto vertical surfaces to

height indicated on drawings; in no instance shall height be less than 8 inches (200 mm) above roofing surface.

2. Apply flexible flashing over roofing membrane, except as otherwise indicated.

3. At locations where flexible flashing is shown to extend up onto vertical surfaces to height less than full height of such vertical surface, insert flexible base flashing into reglets and secure as indicated on Drawings.

4. At locations where flexible flashing is shown to extend up onto vertical surfaces to full height of such vertical surface (e.g., parapet wall), continue over top of vertical surface and secure as indicated on Drawings.

5. When asphaltic systems are bonded to metal, all metal shall be fully primed with ASTM D 41 primer.

6. Metal terminations shall be secured in compliance with the provisions herein and in compliance with Chapter 16 of the Florida Building Code, Building.

7. Termination Bars: a. Termination bars shall be fabricated from stainless steel, and shall

conform to requirements of FBC-TPHVHZ RAS 111. 1) Holes in the termination bar shall be slotted or oversized to allow for

dimensional changes in the metal. 2) All termination bars shall be tested for corrosion resistance in

compliance with Appendix E of FBC-TPHVHZ TAS 114. b. Minimum attachment requirements for termination bars shall include the

following:


1) All termination bar fasteners or anchors shall have a minimum 1/4 in. diameter. Anchors shall provide a minimum characteristic resistance force of 180 lbf, tested in compliance with FBC-TPHVHZ TAS 105 or an average withdrawal resistance of 180 lbf resulting from laboratory testing after a 2:1 margin of safety is applied, and shall be installed through slotted or oversized holes at a spacing not greater than 8 in. o.c. except as required in FBC-B SECTION 9.2. At the discretion of the building official, a field withdrawal resistance test in compliance with FBC-TPHVHZ TAS 105 may be required to confirm performance.

2) All termination bar fasteners or anchors shall be fabricated from stainless steel.

3) A stainless steel bonded sealing washer shall be installed under the head of each fastener or anchor.

4) A continuous bead of approved sealant shall be applied under or at the top edge of the termination bar to prevent water entry.

5) Nylon or plastic anchors shall not be acceptable. 8. Around roof penetrations, mop in and seal flanges and flashings with flexible

flashing. Make joints watertight. 9. Install roofing expansion joints where indicated. Make joints watertight. 10. Coordinate installation of roof drains and sumps and related flashings. Make

joints watertight.

3.06 CLEANING

A. Remove bituminous markings from finished surfaces.

B. In areas where finished surfaces are soiled by bitumen or other source of soiling caused by work of this section, consult manufacturer of surfaces for cleaning advice and conform to their documented instructions.

C. Repair or replace defaced or damaged finishes caused by work of this section.


A. Protect installed roofing and flashings from construction operations.

B. Where traffic must continue over finished roof membrane, protect surfaces using durable materials.

END OF SECTION

RENOVATION OF HISTORIC FIRE STATION NO. 2 (Phase II-A) City of Miami Project No. B-30579 07555 - 1 of 14 PLAZA DECK ROOFING

SECTION 07555

PLAZA DECK ROOFING

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Modified bituminous roofing membrane, conventional application.

B. Base flashings.

C. Precast concrete paver system, including pavers, pedestals, and related components required for a complete installation.


A. Section 03300 - Cast-In-Place Concrete: Structural concrete roof deck.

B. Section 07620 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Counterflashings; reglets.

C. Division 15 - Mechanical: Roof drains.

1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Modified bitumen roofing system over concrete deck, with precast concrete pavers on pedestals and a high wind anchoring system. 1. Pavers are to be installed dead level. The finished floor elevation of plaza

deck is to be at 1/2 inch below finished floor elevation of adjacent interior space(s).

2. Drainage at plaza deck area(s) is to be accomplished by allowing water to pass through gaps between pavers, to sloped roofing/waterproofing surface and roof drain(s) at structural deck beneath.

3. Pavers are to be anchored to resist uplift by high winds. a. Maximum Design Pressure (MDP) Rating: -170 PSF.

1.04 PERFORMANCE & TESTING REQUIREMENTS

A. Plaza deck roofing system shall meet or exceed applicable requirements of the governing building code, including but not limited to High Velocity Hurricane Zone requirements.

B. Miami-Dade County Product Approval: All roof assemblies, roof coverings and roof systems shall have Product Approval, and shall meet the applicable minimum requirements of the governing building code. 1. Roof assemblies, roof coverings and roof systems shall have Product

Approval, and shall meet the following minimum requirements. a. Roofing assemblies shall be tested in compliance with FM 4470, as

modified for the purposes of the governing building code and set forth in FBC-TPHVHZ TAS 114. Only those components listed within the roofing assembly Product Approval NOA shall be approved for use with the roof covering.

b. Fastening devices and fastening assemblies used for anchor sheet or roof coverings shall be tested in compliance with FBC-B SECTION 1523.

c. Roofing assemblies shall be tested by a testing laboratory, certified by the


certification agency in accordance with FBC-TPHVHZ TAS 301, to confirm compliance with the fire classification and other sections of the governing building code.

d. Roofing membranes and components shall be tested in compliance with the physical property test requirements detailed in FBC-TPHVHZ TAS 110.

2. Roof assemblies, roof coverings and roof systems shall be installed in strict compliance with the method of application set forth in the applicable Product Approval.

C. Wind Resistance: 1. Roof decks and roof coverings shall be installed to withstand wind load design

pressures indicated on the Drawings. 2. Roof systems shall be tested in accordance with FM 4450, FM 4470, UL 580

or UL 1897, as appropriate for conditions. 3. Roofing system shall be tested in compliance with FBC-TPHVHZ TAS 110

and FBC-TPHVHZ TAS 114 in its entirety, and shall resist a minimum of 90 PSF tested wind uplift pressure resistance.

4. Roofing system shall be Factory Mutual Approved for 1-90, based on uplift pressures obtained from FM Data Sheets 1-7 or 1-28s. a. Building Roof Height: Less than 18 ft. b. Pressure Coefficients: 1.7 at perimeters, and 2.6 at corners.

D. Physical Properties: Roof coverings shall demonstrate physical integrity over the working life of the roof based upon 2,000 hours of exposure to accelerated weathering tests conducted in accordance with ASTM G 152, ASTM G 153, ASTM G 155 or ASTM G 154. 1. Roof coverings that are subject to cyclical flexural response due to wind loads

shall not demonstrate any significant loss of tensile strength for unreinforced membranes or breaking strength for reinforced membranes when tested as herein required.

E. Impact Resistance: Roof coverings shall resist impact damage based on the results of tests conducted in accordance with ASTM D 3746 or FM 4470.

F. Roof Covering Fire Resistance: Fire resistant roofing assemblies and coverings shall be provided on all structures, as follows: 1. Fire resistant roofing assemblies and coverings shall be tested and classified

(e.g., Class A; Class B) in accordance with ASTM E 108 or UL 790. 2. Minimum Fire Classification of roofing assemblies and coverings shall be

Class A, except as follows: a. Where the distance separation measured horizontally from the closest

point of the building edge to the nearest point to an adjoining structure is more than 20 feet and the occupant load for the building is less than 300 persons, the minimum Fire Classification of roofing assemblies and coverings may be Class B.

G. Edge Metal and Flashings (to be coordinated with Section 07620): Edge metal and flashings and their installation shall be in compliance with the requirements set forth in FBC-TPHVHZ RAS 111 or SPRI ES-1. 1. Wind Resistance Tests: The following minimum securement criteria apply to

edging systems. Roof edge systems shall pass SPRI Test Method RE-1,


RE-2 or RE-3, as appropriate for the application. a. Membrane Attachment: Edge devices designed to act as membrane


system, shall provide a minimum holding power of 100 PLF, which force shall be measured in direction of 45 degrees back onto the roof as tested according to SPRI Test Method RE-1.

2) Specifically for mechanically attached membrane roofing systems, the perimeter attachment loadings shall be calculated based on the force required to hold the roof system's perimeter sheet in place for the design wind speed.



Test Method RE-2. 2) Test results shall meet or exceed horizontal and vertical design wind

pressures as calculated according to SPRI Test Method RE-2.

H. Testing: 1. General:

a. Modified bitumen roof assemblies shall be tested in compliance with the requirements set forth in FBC-TPHVHZ TAS 114.

b. Fasteners for attachment of anchor or base sheets to various substrates and metal stress plates, whether separate or integral to a particular fastener, shall be tested for withdrawal resistance in compliance with FBC-TPHVHZ TAS 117(A).

c. All testing and calculations shall be conducted by a certified testing agency and all test reports, including calculations, shall be signed and sealed by a professional engineer or registered roof consultant.

2. Contractor shall test roofing system and demonstrate it to be free of leaks. a. Test Method: Non-destructive moisture test using a Troxler Gauge

(Nuclear), Thermography (IR), or Capacitance Meter. b. In any areas where non-destructive testing indicates excessive moisture,

the roofing system applicator shall: 1) Obtain the roofing manufacturer’s permission to perform core tests to

determine the actual moisture content in the roof. 2) Take core tests of the roof membrane and insulation within 30 days of

its application. 3) Require cores to be tested by a certified laboratory for moisture

content using a Dry Density or Gravimetric test. 4) Determine the actual moisture content by interpolating the the

non-destructive readings with the laboratory test results. 5) Repair all cored areas. 6) Obtain inspection by the roofing system manufacturer’s authorized

representative after all repairs are made to cored areas and any other areas that have required repairs to achieve leak-proof conditions.


2. Field Uplift Testing: Contractor agrees to satisfy field uplift test of completed roofing installation in accordance with FM DS 1-52. a. Testing shall be witnessed by Project Manager and Consultant, and

results shall be recorded on FM Global Form x2688 (Application for Roofing Systems). 1) Submittals: Copies of the form shall be submitted to Project

Manager and Consultant. b. Acceptance of roofing systems shall be contingent upon favorable

interpretation of the test results by one of the following: 1) If the building is to be insured by FM Global: FM Global. 2) If the building is not to be insured by FM Global: Project Manager

and Consultant.

1.05 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's catalog data for the following: 1. Roofing/waterproofing system, including membrane materials, bitumen

materials, and base flashing materials. 2. Precast concrete paver system, including the following:

a. Precast concrete pavers. b. Pedestal components, including slope compensators, shimming and

leveling devices, pedestals, screw jacks, anchor bases, plates and bolts, adhesive, and other components necessary for a complete installation.

3. Submit copies of current Product Approval showing compliance with requirements of contract documents and governing building code.

C. Shop Drawings: 1. Indicate roof flashing and joint or termination detail conditions and conditions

of interface with other materials. 2. Indicate field-verified dimensions for all surfaces to receive plaza deck

systems; coordinate with precast paver layout. a. Indicate compliance with specified reference standards for materials and

installation specifications. b. Where installation method includes options or alternatives, indicate

selected options and alternatives. 3. Indicate precast paver layout, perimeter conditions, junctions with dissimilar

materials, interface with thresholds at doors, and attachment details. a. Indicate interface between materials specified in this section and

materials specified elsewhere, including but not limited to sheet metal flashing, promenade roof drains, railing assemblies, and door thresholds.

D. Samples of Pavers: Submit two.

E. Manufacturer's qualification data.

F. Installer's qualification data.

G. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures and perimeter conditions requiring special attention.


H. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure forms have been completed in City's name and registered with manufacturer.


A. Perform work in accordance with NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual, manufacturer's instructions, and requirements of the applicable Product Approval NOA.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company(ies) specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum five years of documented experience. 1. Where roofing system manufacturer and precast paver manufacturer are

separate companies, they shall have a mutual agreement with each other approving the use of specific precast pavers on pedestals over modified bituminous membrane roofing.

2. Primary waterproofing and roofing products shall be supplied by a single manufacturer (sole source).

C. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing exterior plaza deck and precast paver installation with minimum 5 years experience and approved by manufacturer.


A. Deliver products in manufacturer's original containers, dry, undamaged, with seals and labels intact.

B. Store products in weather protected environment, clear of ground and moisture; ballast materials may be stored outdoors.

1.08 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Do not apply roofing membrane when environmental conditions are outside the ranges recommended by manufacturer.

B. Do not apply roofing membrane during unsuitable weather.

C. Do not apply roofing membrane when ambient temperature is below 40 degrees F (5 degrees C).

D. Do not expose materials vulnerable to water or sun damage in quantities greater than can be weatherproofed the same day.

E. Torch Safety: 1. Crew members handling torches shall be trained by an Authorized Certified

Torch Applicator (CERTA) Trainer, be certified according to CERTA torch safety guidelines as published by NRCA, and follow safety practices as required by the Contractor's insurance carrier.

2. Contractor shall designate one person on each crew to perform a daily fire watch. The designated crew member shall watch for fires or smoldering materials on all areas during roofing construction activity, and for the minimum period required by CERTA guidelines after roofing material application has been suspended for the day.

1.09 WARRANTY


A. See Section 01780 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.

B. Manufacturer's Labor and Materials Membrane Warranty: Manufacturer shall warrant that the products and components installed will be free from manufacturing defects, and will not break down or deteriorate under normal usage for a period of twenty (20) years from the date of purchase when installed in accordance with these specifications and industry standard guidelines. 1. In the event of a breach of this warranty: The remedy for such breach shall

be replacement of the portion of the installation that is proven to be defective, and the manufacturer shall pay for replacement of its own products and replacement of finishing materials as well as for labor for the replacement installation.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Basis of Design: Siplast Teranap Plaza Deck Waterproofing with Hanover concrete pavers set over Hanover pedestals and clipped at 4 corners, per Miami-Dade Product Approval NOA No. 08-0731.02 (Deck Type 3, System Type F(11)). 1. Roofing/Waterproofing System Manufacturer: Siplast; 1111 Highway 67

South; Arkadelphia, AR 71923; www.siplast.com. 2. Paver System Manufacturer: Hanover Architectural Products; 5000 Hanover

Road; Hanover, PA 17331; Tel. 800-426-4242 or 717-637-0500; www.hanoverpavers.com.

B. Other Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with Contract Requirements, equivalent products by other manufacturers may be submitted for consideration in accordance with provisions for Substitutions.

C. Substitutions: See Section 01600 - Product Requirements. 1. Any proposed substitution must include roofing/waterproofing and pedestal

supported paver systems comprising a complete plaza deck assembly with a current Miami-Dade Product Approval.

2.02 ROOFING

A. General Description: A plaza deck waterproofing membrane assembly consisting of 2 plies of a prefabricated, reinforced, homogeneous styrene-butadiene-styrene (SBS) block copolymer modified asphalt membrane, applied over a prepared substrate. The assembly shall possess waterproofing capability, such that a phased application, with only the modified bitumen base in place, can be achieved for prolonged periods of time without detriment to the watertight integrity of the entire waterproofing system. The modified bitumen finish ply shall be fully adhered to the modified bitumen base ply.

B. Roofing Assembly Requirements: 1. External Fire Exposure Classification: ASTM E 108 Class A, UL listed. 2. Miami-Dade Product Approval NOA No. 08-0731.02 (Deck Type 3, System

Type F(11)).

C. Ballast / Surfacing: Precast concrete pavers on pedestals over applicable roof


area.

2.03 MEMBRANE AND SHEET MATERIALS

A. Modified Bitumen Base and Stripping Ply (Base Sheet): High performance torch grade modified bitumen base ply designed for use in homogeneous multi-layer modified bitumen plaza deck; top surface to be covered with a silica parting agent, and the back surface to be coated with a high performance modified asphalt adhesive layer specifically formulated for torch applications. 1. Physical and Mechanical Requirements (ASTM D 5147):

a. Thickness: 1) Average: 114 mils. 2) Minimum: 110 mils.

b. Peak Load: 1) Average at 73 degrees F: 30 lbf / inch. 2) Average at 0 degrees F: 75 lbf / inch.

c. Elongation at Peak Load 1) Average at 73 degrees F: 3 percent. 2) Average at 0 degrees F: 3 percent.

d. Ultimate Elongation at 5 percent Peak Load, 73 degrees F: 50 percent. e. Tear Strength: 40 lbf, average. f. Water Absorption: 1 percent, maximum. g. Dimensional Stability: 0.1 percent, maximum. h. Low Temperature Flexibility: -13 degrees F, maximum. i. High Temperature Stability: 250 degrees F, minimum. j. Coating Thickness, Back Surface: 40 mils, minimum. k. Weight: 76 lbs / sq, minimum.

2. Product: Siplast Terabase 'TG', torch-applied.

B. Modified Bitumen Finish Ply (Membrane): High performance modified bitumen waterproofing ply designed for use in homogeneous multi-layer modified bitumen plaza deck waterproofing membrane systems; top and bottom surfaces to be covered with a silica parting agent. 1. Physical and Mechanical Requirements (ASTM D 5147):

a. Thickness: 1) Average: 157 mils. 2) Minimum: 154 mils.

b. Peak Load: 1) Average at 73 degrees F: 60 lbf / inch. 2) Average at 0 degrees F: 115 lbf / inch.

c. Elongation at Peak Load 1) Average at 73 degrees F: 65 percent. 2) Average at 0 degrees F: 40 percent.

d. Ultimate Elongation at 5 percent Peak Load, 73 degrees F: 100 percent. e. Tear Strength: 100 lbf, average. f. Water Absorption: 1 percent, maximum. g. Dimensional Stability: 0.5 percent, maximum. h. Low Temperature Flexibility: -13 degrees F, maximum. i. High Temperature Stability: 250 degrees F, minimum. j. Weight: 107 lbs / sq, minimum.

2. Product: Siplast Teranap '1M' Sand, torch-applied.


C. Flexible Flashing Assembly: ASTM D 6298 flashing membrane assembly consisting of a prefabricated, reinforced, SBS block copolymer modified asphalt membrane with a continuous, channel-embossed metal foil surfacing. 1. General:

a. If the flashing membrane will not be left exposed to UV rays, then Modified Bitumen Finish Ply (Membrane) may be used.

b. If the flashing system is to be left exposed, then use Metal-Clad Modified Bitumen Sheet.

2. Cant Backing Sheet and Flashing Reinforcing Ply: High performance, self-adhesive, modified bitumen base ply designed for use in homogeneous multi-layer modified bitumen roof membrane systems; top surface to be covered with a silica parting agent, and the back surface to be coated with a self-adhesive bitumen layer specifically formulated for optimum adhesion in low-slope membrane applications. a. Physical and Mechanical Requirements (ASTM D 5147):

1) Thickness: (a) Average: 102 mils. (b) Minimum: 98 mils.

2) Peak Load: (a) Average at 73 degrees F: 30 lbf / inch. (b) Average at 0 degrees F: 75 lbf / inch.

3) Elongation at Peak Load (a) Average at 73 degrees F: 3 percent. (b) Average at 0 degrees F: 3 percent.

4) Ultimate Elongation at 5 percent Peak Load, 73 degrees F: 50 percent.

5) Tear Strength: 40 lbf, average. 6) Water Absorption: 1 percent, maximum. 7) Dimensional Stability: 0.1 percent, maximum. 8) Low Temperature Flexibility: -13 degrees F, maximum. 9) High Temperature Stability: 250 degrees F, minimum. 10) Weight: 72 lbs / 100 SF, minimum.

b. Product: Siplast Paradiene 20 SA. 3. Metal-Clad Modified Bitumen Flashing Sheet: High performance, foil clad,

modified bitumen finish ply designed for use in multi-layer modified bitumen roof systems. a. Physical and Mechanical Requirements (ASTM D 5147):

1) Thickness: (a) Average: 150 mils. (b) Minimum: 146 mils.

2) Peak Load: (a) Average at 73 degrees F: 85 lbf / inch. (b) Average at 0 degrees F: 180 lbf / inch.

3) Elongation at Peak Load (a) Average at 73 degrees F: 5 percent. (b) Average at 0 degrees F: 4 percent.

4) Ultimate Elongation at 5 percent Peak Load, 73 degrees F: 45 percent.

5) Tear Strength: 120 lbf, average. 6) Water Absorption: 1 percent, maximum.


7) Dimensional Stability: 0.2 percent, maximum. 8) Low Temperature Flexibility: 0 degrees F, maximum. 9) High Temperature Stability: 225 degrees F, minimum. 10) Weight: 92 lbs / 100 SF, minimum.

b. Product: Siplast Veral Aluminum.

2.04 BITUMINOUS MATERIALS

A. Primer: High flash, quick drying, asphalt solvent blend, designed for use as a primary coating for metal and masonry surfaces prior to application of roofing and flashing systems. 1. Shall meet or exceed requirements for FS SSA-701B and ASTM D 41 Type I

asphalt primer used in roofing. 2. Product: Siplast PA-1125.

B. Low VOC Primer: Asphalt solvent blend, designed as a primary coating for metal and masonry surfaces prior to application of roofing and flashing systems. 1. Shall meet or exceed requirements for ASTM D 41 Type II asphalt primer used

in roofing. 2. Maximum VOC content shall not exceed 350 g/L. 3. Product: Siplast PA-917 LS Primer.

C. Elastomeric Sealant: Moisture-curing, non-slump, elastomeric sealant designed for roofing applications, dynamic joint movement, and adhering dissimilar materials; shall be approved by the roofing membrane manufacturer for use in conjunction with the roofing membrane materials. 1. Shall meet or exceed the performance requirements of FS TT-S-00230C Type

II Class A. 2. Product: Siplast PS-304 Elastomeric Sealant.

2.05 PAVER SYSTEM

A. Description: An integrated system of pavers and paver support components specifically designed for use as a level plaza deck assembly over a modified bituminous membrane roofing/waterproofing system.

B. Pavers: Heavyweight, hydraulically pressed, concrete units, designed for use as plaza deck pavers. 1. Physical and Mechanical Requirements:

a. Unit Dimensions: 1) Length x Width: 24 x 24 inches. 2) Thickness: 2 inches.

b. Weight (per SF of coverage): 25 lbs. c. Compressive Strength: 8500 PSI. d. Flexural Strength: 1100 PSI. e. Density: 155 PCF. f. Maximum Absorption: Less than 5 percent. g. Heat Island Effect (LEED SS Credit 7.2) Requirements:

1) Solar Reflectance (ASTM C 1549 or ASTM E 903): 0.65, minimum. 2) Infrared Emittance (ASTM C 1371 or ASTM E 408): 0.90, minimum. 3) Solar Reflectance Index (ASTM E 1980): 78, minimum.

2. Product: Hanover Glacier White Pavers.


C. Paver Supports: Provide plaza deck paver support system by paver manufacturer, including the following components: 1. Leveling Compensators: A tapered circular paver support base made of high

density plastic and specifically designed to compensate for the roof slope, so as to allow for a level surface for paver installations. a. Twist-to-adjust design shall allow for easy and precise adjustment.

2. Low Elevation Support Pedestals: A 3/8 inch fixed height support pedestal designed for low elevation (up to 2 inches) support requirements; shall be made from EPDM rubber, and incorporate spacer tabs and leveling shims to make installation easy.

3. High Elevation Support Pedestals: An elevated pedestal system designed specifically for supporting pavers at heights between 2 and 24 inches. a. Base is to be available in 2, 3 and 4 inch heights. b. Top plate is to be available in 2, 3 and 4 inch heights, and shall be

supplied with pads that are an integral part of the top (to quiet and secure the paver to the pedestal).

c. Coupler is to be used for additional paver support height in increments of 2-1/2 to 4 inches, and includes a circular flange with multiple holes (or eyelets) to enable the installer to securely fasten braces.

4. Leveling Plates/Shims: Leveling shims to provide installation stability in areas where finer, individual leveling is necessary; to be made of high density, impact resistant polypropylene, and available in 1/16 inch and 1/8 inch thicknesses.

5. High Wind Anchoring System: A three-piece (top plate, base and bolt) pedestal system designed to work integrally with the paver, to prevent horizontal and vertical movement of the roof paver, and to create a monolithic system. a. The pedestal is to have a square top that allows its bolt to pass through to

a base beneath, while fitting into a recessed grooved portion of the paver. The paver shall be specifically shaped to solidly secure itself into the pedestal base.

b. The pedestal system shall be made of high density polyethylene, and shall maintain a 1/8 inch joint for the roof system.

c. Dimensions: The pedestal top plate is to be 6 inches square; the bolt is to be 3/4 inch in diameter, with its length determined by the paver thickness; the base is to be 7-1/2 inches in diameter.

d. Product: Hanover Guardian System.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that surfaces and site conditions are ready to receive work.

B. Verify deck is supported and secure.

C. Verify deck is clean and smooth, flat, free of depressions, waves, or projections, properly sloped and suitable for installation of roof system.

D. Verify deck surfaces are dry.

E. Verify that roof openings and penetrations through roof are solidly set, and reglets


and drain pipes are in place.

F. Concrete Surfaces: Prior to installation of roofing/waterproofing: 1. Concrete shall be cured for a minimum of 28 days at 70 degrees F.

3.02 PREPARATION - GENERAL

A. Protect surrounding work from damage.

B. Seal substrate surface cracks with filler. Level existing substrate surfaces to acceptable flatness tolerances.

C. Vacuum clean surfaces and damp clean, removing all loose aggregate, soil and foreign material substances.

3.03 CONCRETE DECK PREPARATION

A. Fill surface honeycomb and variations with latex filler.

B. Confirm dry deck by moisture meter with 12 percent moisture maximum.

3.04 ROOFING/WATERPROOFING APPLICATION

A. General: 1. Apply membrane in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and

requirements of the Product Approval NOA.. 2. Apply membrane; lap and seal edges and ends permanently waterproof. 3. Apply smooth, free from air pockets, wrinkles, fish-mouths, or tears. Ensure

full bond of membrane to substrate. 4. At end of day's operation, install waterproof cut-off. Remove cut-off before

resuming roofing. 5. At intersections with vertical surfaces:

a. Extend membrane over cant strips and up a minimum of 8 inches (200 mm) onto vertical surfaces.

b. Apply flexible flashing over membrane. c. Insert base flashing into reglets and secure.

6. Around roof penetrations, mop in and seal flanges and flashings with flexible flashing.

7. Coordinate installation of roof drains and related flashings.

B. Priming: Prime metal, concrete and masonry surfaces with a uniform coating of the specified asphalt primer.

C. Membrane Application: 1. Apply all layers of membrane free of wrinkles, creases or fishmouths. Exert

sufficient pressure on the roll during application to ensure prevention of air pockets. a. Apply all layers of membrane perpendicular to the slope of the deck. b. Fully bond the base ply to prepared substrate, utilizing minimum 3 inch

wide side and end laps. Apply each sheet directly behind the torch applicator. Cut a dog ear angle at the end laps on overlapping selvage edges. Using a clean trowel, apply top pressure to top seal T-laps immediately following sheet application. Stagger end laps a minimum of 3 feet.

c. Fully bond the finish ply to the base ply, utilizing a minimum 4-inch wide


side and end laps. Apply each sheet directly behind the torch applicator. Cut a dog ear angle at the end laps on overlapping selvage edges. Prepare the surface area of the finish ply end lap by burning off the protective surface film using a torch prior to installation of the overlapping ply. Using a clean trowel, apply top pressure to top seal T-laps immediately following sheet application. Stagger end laps a minimum of 3 feet.

D. Flashing Application: 1. Masonry:

a. Flash masonry parapet walls and curbs using the reinforcing sheet and Metal-Clad Modified Bitumen Flashing Sheet flashing membrane.

b. After the base ply has been applied to terminate at the vertical wall surface, fully adhere the torch applied reinforcing sheet, utilizing minimum 3 inch wide side laps and extend minimum 4 inches onto the base ply surface and minimum 4 inches up the parapet wall.

c. After the finish ply has been applied, prepare the surface area of the finish ply that is to receive flashing coverage by burning off the protective surface using a torch.

d. Torch apply the flashing into place using 3 foot lengths (cut from the end of the roll) and using the factory selvage edge for laps, extending a minimum of 2 inches beyond the reinforcing ply onto the prepared surface of the finished ply.

e. Exert pressure on the flashing sheet during application to ensure complete contact with the wall/field membrane surfaces, preventing air pockets.

f. Check and seal all loose laps and edges. Nail the top edge of the flashing on 9 inch centers.

E. Water Cut-Off: 1. At the end of the day's work, or when precipitation is imminent, construct a

water cut-off at all open edges. 2. Cut-offs can be built using plastic cement or pieces of field membrane

constructed to withstand protracted periods of service. 3. Cut-offs must be completely removed prior to the resumption or roofing

installation.

3.05 INSTALLATION - PEDESTALS AND PAVERS

A. Install paver support system components and pavers in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and requirements of the Product Approval NOA. 1. Install leveling compensators to adjust for roof deck slope, support pedestals

to provide proper deck height, and leveling plates/shims to provide for level adjustment of deck height.

2. Install High Wind Anchoring System, and attach to fully adhered roofing/waterproofing system. System shall be capable of withstanding wind uplift forces in accordance with Product Approval NOA and performance requirements specified in this section.

B. Use elastomeric sealant as specified in the Product Approval NOA, and in accordance with manufacturer's application instructions and recommendations.


C. Install pavers in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions. 1. When securing pavers to paver supports and High Wind Anchoring System,

do not over-tighten bolts.


A. Require site attendance of roofing material manufacturers daily during installation of the Work.

B. Flood Testing: Prior to installation of paver system, the roofing/waterproofing system shall be flood tested, to ensure that it is watertight. Flood testing shall follow procedures of ASTM D 5957 and recommendations of membrane manufacturer. 1. Allow membrane to cure fully before flood testing. 2. Prior to flood testing, ensure that the load bearing capacity of the structure to

be flood tested is capable of supporting the water used to conduct the flood test. a. If required, temporary containment assemblies should be constructed

using nominal 2 x 4 inches (50 x 100 mm) wood members, 6 mil (minimum) polyethylene sheeting (sacrificial membrane), sandbags or other suitable ballast, duct tape adhesives or sealants (as required).

b. Containment systems assemblies must be made to be non-destructive, non-penetrating of the waterproofing system, and easy to remove.

3. Flood testing is to be performed prior to installation of any materials on top of the waterproofing membrane or material.

4. Prior to commencement of flood testing, inspect the waterproofing membrane for any voids, pinholes or other imperfections. Repair any observed problems in accordance with membrane manufacturer's installation instructions. Plug all drains within the area to be tested with suitable plugs, as stated previously. Fill the area around the plug and drain to check for leaks around the plug and drain installation before proceeding with the full test.

5. Flood the area being tested with potable water to a minimum depth of 1 inch (25mm), but not deeper than 4 inches (100mm) at the low point of the test area. The mean water depth should not exceed 2-1/2 inches (65mm). a. Water added to the area to be tested must be at a pressure that will not

damage the membrane and will not flow onto any lapped edges. b. In case of any leaks, Contractor shall have a contingency plan in effect to

deal with the water. c. If the flood test is being performed in an exterior environment, the testing

should not be performed if rain is anticipated to occur during the test period.

6. For accurate measurement of water loss due to environmental conditions (evaporation, wind, etc.), place a watertight, flat-bottom, vertical-sided shallow pan to the approximate depth of water in an adjacent area which will be subjected to all of the same environmental conditions as the test area. At pre-determined points, in both the area being tested and the shallow pan, measure the water at the beginning and end of the test. Calculate any changes in water depth in the area being tested and the shallow pan. If the difference in depth in the area being tested is substantially greater than the shallow pan, then membrane leakage is probable.


7. Flood testing is to be conducted within a time range of 24 to 72 hours, with the time for testing to begin when the water has reached its maximum test depth. It is important that flood testing be constantly monitored, so plan accordingly. If unexpected rain or water addition takes place during the test period, the test should be discontinued prior to the water flowing above the containment edges. The addition of any water after testing has commenced will also render the flood test as inaccurate and should be stopped. Monitor any spaces below the area being tested for signs of water infiltration at 1 to 2 hour intervals until completion of flood test. If any leakage occurs during the flood test, the water should be immediately drained, the leak source found and repairs made as recommended by membrane manufacturer.

8. If repairs are made to the waterproofing system, it will be necessary to conduct another flood test to ensure that complete waterproof integrity is achieved. A flood test is considered to be complete if no leaks are determined to exist during the test period, and, the membrane and any flashing are considered to be intact.

C. Prior to final inspection, verify that all drains, scuppers, etc. are functioning properly. Drains shall have adequate strainers.

3.07 CLEANING

A. Remove bituminous markings from finished surfaces.

B. In areas where finished surfaces are soiled by bitumen or other source of soiling caused by work of this section, consult manufacturer of surfaces for cleaning advice and conform to their documented instructions.

C. Repair or replace defaced or damaged finishes caused by work of this section.

3.08 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed roofing and flashings from construction operations.

B. Where traffic must continue over finished roof membrane, protect surfaces using durable materials.

END OF SECTION

RENOVATION OF HISTORIC FIRE STATION NO. 2 (Phase II-A) City of Miami Project No. B-30579 07620 - 1 of 9 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM

SECTION 07620

SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Fabricated sheet metal items, including flashings and counterflashings.

B. Reglets and accessories.


A. Section 03300 - Cast-In-Place Concrete.

B. Section 04810 - Masonry Unit Assemblies.

C. Section 05525 - Guardrails.

D. Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry: Wood nailers and blocking; sheathing.

E. Section 07321 - Clay Tile Roofing.

F. Section 07550 - Modified Bituminuous Membrane Roofing.

G. Section 07555 - Plaza Deck Roofing.

H. Section 07631 - Gutters and Downspouts.

I. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers.

1.03 DESIGN AND PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Minimum Criteria for Attachment of Perimeter and Termination Roof Flashing: 1. Blocking and sheet metal roof flashing assemblies shall be attached to resist

wind forces, and other loads, as required by FBC-B CHAPTER 16 (High-Velocity Hurricane Zones). a. Design Criteria:

1) Basic Wind Speed: 146 MPH. 2) Importance Factor: 1.00. 3) Exposure Category: C.

2. Metal edge securement for low slope membrane roof systems shall conform to requirements of SPRI ES-1.

3. Wind Resistance Tests: The following minimum securement criteria apply to edging systems. Roof edge systems shall pass SPRI Test Method RE-1, RE-2 or RE-3, as appropriate for the application. a. Membrane Attachment: Edge devices designed to act as membrane


system, shall provide a minimum holding power of 100 pounds/foot, which force shall be measured in direction of 45 degrees back onto the roof as tested according to SPRI Test Method RE-1.

2) Specifically for mechanically attached membrane roofing systems,


the perimeter attachment loadings shall be calculated based on the force required to hold the roof system's perimeter sheet in place for the design wind speed.



Test Method RE-2. 2) Test results shall meet or exceed horizontal and vertical design

wind pressures as calculated according to SPRI Test Method RE-2. 5. Fasteners/Anchors:

a. General: 1) Powder-actuated fasteners shall not be used. 2) Fasteners/anchors which have published withdrawal resistance

values generated from laboratory testing, shall have a margin of safety applied to average laboratory test results as noted in Table 1 of FBC-TPHVHZ RAS 111.

1.04 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: 1. Provide manufacturer's data on prefabricated components, including the

following: a. Clamp-type umbrella pipe/conduit flashing.

C. Shop Drawings: Submit complete shop drawings for all roof flashing assemblies. 1. Indicate material, jointing pattern, jointing details, fastening methods,

flashings, terminations, and installation details. 2. Indicate profile and configuration, thickness of metal, dimensions, anchor

details, fastening methods, terminations, and installation details. 3. Indicate related work of other trades, including but not limited to cast-in-place

concrete, concrete masonry, roofing, and roof penetrating components.

D. Engineering Calculations: Submit engineering calculations showing that ARBS and roof flashing assemblies meet or exceed specified performance criteria and applicable requirements of the governing building code. 1. Coordinate engineering calculations with shop drawings. 2. Engineering calculations shall be prepared by a Florida-registered

professional engineer.

E. Test Reports: Submit copies of test reports showing compliance with specified Design and Performance Requirements.


A. Perform work in accordance with SMACNA (ASMM) requirements and standard details, except as otherwise indicated.


B. Fabricator and Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in sheet metal work with not less than five years of documented experience.


A. Deliver, store and handle materials and products in strict compliance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations and industry standards. Protect from damage.

B. Sequence deliveries to avoid delays, but minimize on-site storage.

C. Stack material to prevent twisting, bending, and abrasion, and to provide ventilation. Slope metal sheets to ensure drainage.

D. Prevent contact with materials that could cause discoloration or staining.

1.07 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING

A. Perform work of this section in coordination with other sections to provide the highest quality work which best fulfills the intent requirements of this work.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 SHEET MATERIALS

A. Metal flashings, counterflashings and terminations shall be of the material indicated on Drawings; if not indicated, metal shall be stainless steel. 1. Metal thickness shall conform to requirements of FBC-B SECTION 1517.6

and FBC-TPHVHZ RAS 111.

B. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666 Type 304, soft temper; smooth No. 4 finish.

2.02 ROOF FLASHING

A. General: 1. Material: Stainless steel sheet. 2. Minimum Metal Thickness (Edge Metal and Coping):

a. Maximum Vertical (Flange) Face Dimension Less than 8 inches: 22 gage (0.795 mm) (0.0313 in).

b. Maximum Vertical (Flange) Face Dimension Less than 10 inches: 20 gage (0.952 mm) (0.0375 in).

c. Maximum Vertical (Flange) Face Dimension Less than 12 inches: 18 gage (1.270 mm) (0.0500 in).

3. Fabrication: a. Form sections true to shape, accurate in size, square, and free from

distortion or defects. b. Form pieces in longest possible lengths. c. Hem exposed edges on underside 1/2 inch (13 mm); miter and seam

corners. d. Form material with flat lock seams, except where otherwise indicated.

At moving joints, use sealed lapped, bayonet-type or interlocking hooked seams.

e. Fabricate corners from one piece with minimum 18 inch (450 mm) long legs; seam for rigidity, seal with sealant.


f. Fabricate vertical faces with bottom edge formed outward 1/4 inch (6 mm) and hemmed to form drip.

g. Fabricate flashings to allow toe to extend 2 inches (50 mm) over roofing. Return and brake edges.

h. Side Joints: 1) 22 gage thick: Lock seam. 2) 20 gage thick and heavier: Lapped, welded.

i. End Joints: Butt joint with cover plate; 2 beads of sealant at each side of butt joint.

B. Drip Edge Flashing: Profiles as shown on Drawings, and as follows: 1. The vertical face shall be a minimum of 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) and shall

extend down not less than 1 inch (25.4 mm) below the sheathing or other member immediately contiguous thereto. In all cases, the deck flange shall be not less than 2 inches (51 mm) in width. Drip edge shall be sized, designed and installed in compliance with FBC-TPHVHZ RAS 111.

2. Drip edge shall be fabricated and installed so that the bottom (the kick of the metal) of the drip edge shall have a minimum of 1/2-inch (12.7 mm) clearance from the structure.

3. Eaves drip shall be installed in compliance with FBC-TPHVHZ RAS 111. 4. Drip edge shall be installed after all roofing felts have been applied, or in

compliance with the application method set forth in the roofing assembly Product Approval. All asphalt or approved cold adhesive bonding areas shall be coated with ASTM D 41 or ASTM D 43, as required, and allowed to dry prior to application.

5. Drip edges shall be joined by lapping a minimum of 4 inches (102 mm) and the entire interior of the joints shall be coated with approved flashing cement. Cover and splice plates shall be of the same material as the drip edge, and shall be sized, fabricated and installed in compliance with FBC-TPHVHZ RAS 111.

6. Conform to details specified in Schedule, except as otherwise indicated on Drawings.

C. Coping: Profiles as shown on Drawings, and as follows: 1. Slope top of copings 1 inch per foot down to interior face. 2. Conform to details specified in Schedule, except as otherwise indicated on

Drawings.

2.03 ACCESSORIES

A. Provide all clips, cleats, straps, anchors and similar items necessary to properly complete the work. Provide accessories that are compatible with sheet metal materials used and which are of sufficient size and gage to perform as intended.

B. Underlayment: ASTM D 2178, glass fiber roofing felt.

C. Clamp-Type Umbrella Pipe/Conduit Flashing: Except as otherwise indicated, provide a stainless steel clamp type umbrella pipe/conduit flashing at each pipe/conduit penetration through roofing, when more clearance is necessary between pipe penetration and stack flashing or when venting between pipe penetration and stack flashing is required. 1. Manufacturer: SBC Industries, Inc.; Product: Clamp-Type Umbrella.


D. Pipe: 1. PVC Pipe: ASTM D 1785; Schedule 80.

a. Fittings: ASTM D 2665, PVC. b. Joints: ASTM D 2846, solvent weld with ASTM F 493 solvent cement.

2. Ductile Iron Pipe: AWWA C151/A21.51. a. Fittings: Ductile or gray iron, standard thickness. b. Joints: AWWA C111/A21.11, rubber gasket with 3/4 inch (19 mm)

diameter rods.

E. Bracing, Plates, Gussets, Clips: Formed sheet steel; thickness determined for conditions encountered. 1. Material:

a. ARBS: Galvanized steel sheet. b. Flashing: Stainless steel sheet.

F. Fasteners: 1. General: Stainless steel, with soft neoprene washers. 2. Anchorage Devices - Concrete Screw Anchors: Cold-formed fasteners with

twin-lead threads and a nail point tip. a. Manufactured from UNS G 10220 (formerly AISI 1022) steel or UNS S

41000 (formerly AISI 410SS) stainless steel; heat-treated; with alternating low-high thread form.

b. Size / Length / Embedment: As required to achieve specified Load Capacity criteria; comply with specified Design and Performance Requirements, and with applicable requirements of governing building code.

c. Head: 1) Carbon Steel Screw Anchors: Slotted hex washer head or Scots

stainless steel head, as appropriate for application. 2) Stainless Steel Screw Anchors: Slotted hex washer head.

d. Load Capacity: Allowable tension and shear loads for each screw anchor installed in normal weight concrete (3000 PSI compressive strength) shall be as follows: 1) Tension: 400 lb, minimum. 2) Shear: 400 lb, minimum.

3. Anchorage Devices (except Concrete Screw Anchors): Drilled expansion bolts.

4. Self-Drilling, Self-Tapping Screws, Bolts, Nuts and Washers: a. General:

1) Provide neoprene sealant washers and stainless steel washers under screw heads.

b. For Attaching Sheet Metal Flashing to Metal Substrate: No.10 (minimum) pan head stainless steel sheet metal screws.

5. Welding: In conformance with AWS D1.1 and AWS D1.3.

G. Paint: 1. Primer:

a. Stainless Steel Surfaces: Zinc chromate type. b. Galvanized Steel Surfaces: Zinc chromate type, or galvanized iron

primer.


c. Aluminum Surfaces: Zinc chromate type. 2. Shop and Touch-Up Primer: SSPC-Paint 15, complying with VOC limitations

of authorities having jurisdiction. 3. Touch-Up Primer for Galvanized Surfaces: SSPC-Paint 20, Type I -

Inorganic, complying with VOC limitations of authorities having jurisdiction. 4. Protective Backing Paint: Zinc molybdate alkyd. 5. Field Painting: Refer to Section 09900.

H. Protective Backing Paint: Zinc molybdate alkyd.

I. Sealant: Type specified in Section 07900; if not indicated, use single part urethane. 1. Backer Rod: Open cell foam, ASTM 1564; size as indicated.

J. Plastic Cement: ASTM D 4586, Type I.

K. Reglets: Recessed or Surface mounted type (as indicated on Drawings), stainless steel; face and ends covered with plastic tape.

L. Solder: ASTM B 32; Sn50 (50/50) type.

M. Mineral Fiber Batt Insulation: ASTM C 665; preformed batt; friction fit, conforming to the following: 1. Material: Rock or slag fiber, not glass fiber. 2. Flame Spread Index: 25 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E

84. 3. Smoke Developed Index: 450 or less, when tested in accordance with

ASTM E 84. 4. Combustibility: Non-combustible, when tested in accordance with ASTM E

136. 5. Formaldehyde Content: Zero. 6. Facing: Unfaced.

2.04 FABRICATION

A. Shop fabricate work to the greatest extent possible. Fabricate work to match approved shop drawings and to provide the best possible watertight, weatherproof performance with expansion provisions in running work. Minimize oil-canning, buckling, tool marks and other defects.

B. Form sections true to shape, accurate in size, square, and free from distortion or defects.

C. Fabricate cleats of same material as sheet, full width (continuous), interlocking with sheet.

D. Form pieces in longest possible lengths.

E. Fabricate work with uniform, watertight joints. Make seams as inconspicuous as possible.

F. Hem exposed edges on underside 1/2 inch; miter and seam corners.

G. Form material with flat lock seams, except where otherwise indicated. At moving joints, use sealed lapped, bayonet-type or interlocking hooked seams.


H. Fabricate corners from one piece with minimum 18 inch long legs; seam for rigidity, seal with sealant.

I. Fabricate vertical faces with bottom edge formed outward 1/4 inch (6 mm) and hemmed to form drip.

J. Fabricate flashings to allow toe to extend 2 inches over roofing. Return and brake edges.

K. Isolate dissimilar materials with isolation coating recommended by the manufacturer or other permanent separation acceptable to the Consultant.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify roof openings, curbs, pipes, sleeves, ducts, and vents through roof are solidly set, reglets in place, and nailing strips located.

B. Verify roofing termination and base flashings are in place, sealed, and secure.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Install starter and edge strips, and cleats before starting installation.

B. Install surface mounted reglets true to lines and levels. Seal top of reglets with sealant.

C. Back paint concealed metal surfaces with protective backing paint to a minimum dry film thickness of15 mil.

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. General: 1. Flashings shall be installed in such a manner as to prevent moisture entering

the wall through the joints in the coping, through moisture permeable materials, at intersections with the roof plane or at parapet wall penetrations. a. All roof flashing and terminations shall be fabricated and installed resist

the windload requirements of FBC-B CHAPTER 16 (High-Velocity Hurricane Zone), and shall be in compliance with the provisions set forth in FBC-TPHVHZ RAS 111.

b. Flashings conforming with the provisions of FBC-TPHVHZ RAS 111 shall be installed at wall and roof intersections; gutters; wherever there is a change in roof slope or direction; around roof openings; and at other locations indicated on the Drawings or where required by the governing building code.

c. Membrane Flashing: All membrane flashing shall be installed according to the roof assembly manufacturer’s published literature and in accordance with the provisions set forth in FBC-TPHVHZ RAS 111.

d. Metal Flashing and Termination: Metal flashings and termination shall be fabricated and installed in accordance with FBC-TPHVHZ RAS 111. 1) Metal flashing shall be installed after the roofing felts have been laid

and turned up the vertical surfaces, in compliance with the roofing assembly Product Approval. Such felts shall be embedded in hot


bitumen or an approved adhesive. 2) Metal surfaces shall be primed with an ASTM D 41 or ASTM D 43

primer, as appropriate and allowed to dry prior to receiving hot bitumen or cold adhesive.

e. Metal Counterflashing: Metal counterflashing shall be fabricated and installed in accordance with FBC-TPHVHZ RAS 111. 1) Metal counterflashing shall be built into walls, set in reglets or

applied as stucco type and shall be turned down over base flashing not less than 3 inches (76 mm).

2) Metal counterflashing shall be side lapped a minimum of 4 inches (102 mm).

3) Metal counterflashing, where set in reglets or surface-mounted, shall be waterproofed, in accordance with applicable application standards.

4) Where metal counterflashing is used as the means of sealing (such as a vented system) it shall be set in an approved sealant, sealed with an approved adhesive on the top flange and all joints shall be sealed with an approved sealant and lapped a minimum of 4 inches (102 mm).

f. Roof Penetration Flashing: 1) All pipes shall be flashed with approved methods detailed in the

roofing system assembly Product Approval. Flanges shall be a minimum of 4 inches (102 mm).

2) Other roof penetrations shall be suitably flashed with curbs, collars, etc. in compliance with FBC-TPHVHZ RAS 111 or an approved method, in compliance with the roofing system assembly Product Approval.

3) No roof penetration shall be located in roof valleys.

B. Insert flashings into reglets to form tight fit. Secure in place with plastic wedges. Seal flashings into reglets with sealant.

C. Secure flashings in place using concealed fasteners. Use exposed fasteners only where permitted.

D. Apply plastic cement compound between metal flashings and felt flashings.

E. Fit flashings tight in place. Make corners square, surfaces true and straight in planes, and lines accurate to profiles.

F. Joints: 1. Metals, except Copper: Seal metal joints watertight. 2. Copper: Solder metal joints for full metal surface contact. After soldering,

wash metal clean with neutralizing solution and rinse with water.


A. See Section 01400 - Quality Requirements, for field inspection requirements.

B. Inspection will involve surveillance of work during installation to ascertain compliance with specified requirements.

3.05 SCHEDULE


A. Gutters and Downspouts: Refer to Section 07631.

B. Drip Edge / Fascia: Conform to the following details, except as otherwise indicated on Drawings: 1. Formed Drip Edge / Fascia - Design Data: SMACNA (ASMM) Figure 2-1 and

NRCA ML104 Detail MB-3/3S. 2. Drip Edge and Cap Fascia Design: SMACNA (ASMM) Table 2-1, except that

continuous cleat is required for all conditions. 3. Formed Drip Edge / Fascia - Joint Systems: SMACNA (ASMM) Figure 2-5A,

except that cover plate shall be minimum 8 inches in width and shall be embedded in minimum two continuous beads of joint sealer at both sides of gap.

C. Roof Flashing: Conform to the following details, except as otherwise indicated on Drawings: 1. Surface Mount Counterflashing for Concrete Walls: NRCA ML104 Detail

MB-4/4S. a. Use only at walls higher than 4 feet; for walls less than 4 ft, extend

membrane flashing to full height. 2. Roof Penetration Flashing - Pipes:

a. Sheet Metal Enclosure for Piping through Roof Deck: SMACNA (ASMM) Figures 4-14 and NRCA ML104 Detail MB-16/16S.

b. Isolated Stack (Hot or Cold): SMACNA (ASMM) Figure 4-15 and NRCA ML104 Detail MB-17A/17AS.

3. Rooftop Equipment Elevation: SMACNA (ASMM) Table 4-1, NRCA ML104 Detail MB-10 or FBC-B SECTION 1509.7, which ever requires the greatest minimum clearance.

4. Equipment Support Flashing: a. Equipment Support Stand with Rain Collar - Concrete Deck: SMACNA

(ASMM) Figure 4-17A and NRCA ML104 Detail MB-11/11Ss. b. Equipment Support Stand with Rain Collar - Steel Deck: SMACNA

(ASMM) Figure 4-17B and NRCA ML104 Detail MB-11/11S. c. Pitch pans are not allowed.

END OF SECTION

RENOVATION OF HISTORIC FIRE STATION NO. 2 (Phase II-A) City of Miami Project No. B-30579 07631 - 1 of 5 GUTTERS AND DOWNSPOUTS

SECTION 07631

GUTTERS AND DOWNSPOUTS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Provide copper-clad stainless steel for the following applications: 1. Sheet metal roofing including standing seam, flat seam and batten seam

types. 2. Rain drainage including gutters, downspouts, scuppers and conductors.

B. Precast concrete splash pads.



B. Section 07620 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim.


A. Conform to SMACNA (ASMM) and FBC-P SECTION 1106 for sizing components for rainfall intensity determined as follows: 1. The size of the gutters and rainwater conductors (downspouts) shall be

based on the 100-year hourly rainfall rate indicated in FBC-P FIGURE 1106.1 or on other rainfall rates determined from approved local weather data.

B. Minimum Criteria for Gutters and Rainwater Conductors (Downspouts): 1. Gutters and rainwater conductors (downspouts) shall be attached to resist

wind forces and other loads, as required by FBC-B CHAPTERS 15 and 16 (High-Velocity Hurricane Zones). a. Design Criteria:

1) Basic Wind Speed: 146 MPH. 2) Importance Factor: 1.00. 3) Exposure Category: C.

2. Gutters shall be in compliance with requirements of SPRI ES-1. 3. Gutters, downspouts, and hold down components shall be secured to resist

the load of gravity when full with rainwater in addition to the design wind loads of FBC-B CHAPTER 16 (High-Velocity Hurricane Zones).

4. Gutters and downspouts, shall be sized in compliance with FBC-P CHAPTER 11.

C. Gutters, downspouts, and hold down components shall be constructed in accordance with the SMACNA (ASMM) in addition to the following requirements: 1. Gutter joints shall be lapped 4 in. sealed with two rows of approved sealant,

and riveted with two rows of closed end rivets offset 1 in. o.c. 2. Maximum gutter lengths shall not exceed 50-ft. Gutter ends shall not be

butted tight to a wall or other obstruction, which may prevent thermal expansion of metal.

3. The size of semicircular gutters shall be based on the maximum projected roof area in accordance with FBC-P TABLE 1106.6.


4. Roof downspouts shall discharge at least 1 foot (305 mm) away from the structure sidewall.

1.04 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data, installation instructions, and recommendations for each product specified 1. Include data on prefabricated components.

C. Shop Drawings: Provide large scale shop drawings for fabrication, installation and erection of all parts of the work. Provide large scale plans, elevations, and details of profiles, joints, seams, anchorages, connections and accessory items. 1. Indicate locations; profile and configuration; jointing methods, pattern and

details; materials and thickness of metal; dimensions; anchor details; fastening methods; and installation details.

2. Indicate galvanic isolation from dissimilar materials, if applicable. 3. Indicate related work of other trades, including but not limited to cast-in-place

concrete, concrete masonry, lightweight insulating concrete, roofing, and roof penetrating components (e.g., pipe, conduit).

4. Fastener and Anchor Schedule: a. Concrete Screw Anchors: Furnish the following information:

1) Concrete compressive strength and dimensions. 2) For each condition, indicate tension and shear loads, anchor

diameter and minimum embedment. Coordinate with engineering calculations.

3) Indicate anchor spacing and edge distances, and anchor capacity.

D. Engineering Calculations: Submit engineering calculations showing that gutter and rainwater conductor assemblies meet or exceed specified performance criteria and applicable requirements of the governing building code. 1. Coordinate engineering calculations with shop drawings. 2. Engineering calculations shall be prepared by a Florida-registered

professional engineer.

E. Samples: 1. Material Samples: Submit two 6 by 6 inch flat samples of copper-clad

stainless steel. 2. Fabricated Samples: Submit full size sample of typical seam, corner and

termination as acceptable to the Consultant, for approval of fabrication details and workmanship.

F. Warranty: Submit manufacturer's standard 25 year warranty.


A. Fabricator: Minimum 5 years experience with projects of similar complexity.

B. Installer: Minimum 3 years experience with projects of similar complexity. At Consultant's request, submit names and locations of recent projects.

C. Industry Standards for Materials and Fabrication Details: Comply with recommendations of the SMACNA (ASMM).



A. Deliver, store and handle materials and products in strict compliance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations and industry standards. Protect from damage.

B. Sequence deliveries to avoid delays, but minimize on-site storage.

C. Stack material to prevent twisting, bending, or abrasion, and to provide ventilation. Slope to drain.

D. Prevent contact with materials that could cause discoloration, staining, or damage.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Basis of Design: Engineered Materials Solutions; 39 Perry Avenue; Attleboro, MA 02703; Tel. 508-342-2235; Fax. 508-342-2538; Website: www.copperplus.com; www.cladit.com.

B. Other Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with contract requirements, equivalent products by other manufacturers may be used. 1. Southeastern Metals (SEMCO); 11801 Industry Drive; Jacksonville, FL

32218.

C. Substitutions: See Section 01600.

2.02 MATERIALS

A. Copper-Clad Stainless Steel: 10 percent thickness of copper metallurgically bonded on each side to an 80 percent core of Type 430 stainless steel, fully annealed. No adhesives or brazing alloys shall be required to achieve a permanent bond. 1. Cross Section: Copper, stainless steel, copper. 2. Standard Thicknesses: As recommended by manufacturer from the

following standard thicknesses and weights: a. 0.027 inch thick.

1) Stainless Steel Core: 25 gage (0.020 inch); 0.840 pounds per square foot.

b. 0.030 inch thick. 1) Stainless Steel Core: 24 gage (0.025 inch); 1.050 pounds per

square foot. c. 0.040 inch thick.


d. 0.050 inch thick. 1) Stainless Steel Core: 20 gage (0.040 inch); 1.680 pounds per

square foot. e. 0.060 inch thick.


3. Mechanically Fastened Joints: Copper, stainless steel, brass or bronze


fasteners. 4. Soldered Joints: Soft soldered using 50-50 or higher tin content solder, mild

fluxes. 5. Shapes: Coils, rolls or sheets up to 24 inches wide, as applicable. 6. Product: Provide CopperPlus by Engineered Materials Solutions, or equal.

B. Accessories: Provide all clips, cleats, straps, anchors and similar items necessary to properly complete the work. Provide accessories that are compatible with sheet metal materials used and which are of sufficient size and gage to perform as intended.

2.03 FABRICATION

A. Shop fabricate work to the greatest extent possible. Fabricate work to match approved shop drawings and to provide the best possible watertight, weatherproof performance with expansion provisions in running work. Minimize oil-canning, buckling, tool marks and other defects.

B. Fabricate work with uniform, watertight joints. Make seams as inconspicuous as possible.

C. Isolate dissimilar materials with isolation coating recommended by the manufacturer or other permanent separation acceptable to the Consultant.

2.04 COMPONENTS

A. Gutters: Profile as indicated.

B. Downspouts: Profile as indicated.

C. Anchors and Supports: Profiled to suit gutters and downspouts. 1. Anchoring Devices: In accordance with SMACNA requirements. 2. Gutter Supports: Brackets, as indicated on Drawings. 3. Downspout Supports: Brackets, as indicated on Drawings

D. Fasteners: Stainless steel, with soft neoprene washers.

2.05 ACCESSORIES

A. Splash Pads: Precast concrete type, sizes and profiles indicated; minimum 3000 psi at 28 days, with minimum 5 percent air entrainment.

2.06 FABRICATION

A. Form gutters and downspouts of profiles and sizes indicated.

B. Fabricate with required connection pieces.

C. Form sections square, true, and accurate in size, in maximum possible lengths, free of distortion or defects detrimental to appearance or performance. Allow for expansion at joints.

D. Hem exposed edges of metal.

E. Fabricate gutter and downspout accessories; seal watertight.

PART 3 EXECUTION


3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify existing conditions before starting work.

B. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Paint concealed metal surfaces and surfaces in contact with dissimilar metals with protective backing paint to a minimum dry film thickness of 15 mil.

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Install gutters, downspouts, and accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Slope gutters to downspouts, as indicated on Drawings.

END OF SECTION

RENOVATION OF HISTORIC FIRE STATION NO. 2 (Phase II-A) City of Miami Project No. B-30579 07720 - 1 of 5 ROOF ACCESSORIES

SECTION 07720

ROOF ACCESSORIES

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Roof hatches.

B. Roof hatch safety guardrail system.



B. Section 07550 - Modified Bituminous Membrane Roofing.

C. Section 07620 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Roof accessory items fabricated from sheet metal.

D. Section 08710 - Door Hardware: Padlock.


A. General: Design, materials, construction and quality of roof hatch assemblies shall comply with design criteria specified in the Contract Documents and applicable requirements of the governing building code, including but not limited to FBC-B CHAPTERS 15 and 16 (including HVHZ provisions), and ASCE 7. 1. Refer to FBC-B SECTION 1620 for wind loads, except that minimum Basic

Wind Speed shall be as specified in this Section and as indicated on the Structural Drawings.

B. Design Loads: Roof hatch components and assemblies shall comply with requirements of governing building code, criteria indicated on the Structural Drawings, and as follows: 1. Exterior roof hatch assemblies shall be designed and constructed to be of

sufficient strength to support the estimated or actual imposed dead, live, wind, and any other loads, both during construction and after completion of the structure, without exceeding the allowable materials stresses specified by the governing building code.

2. Wind Load (Maximum Design Pressure): a. Design Criteria:

1) Basic Wind Speed (3-second gust): 146 miles per hour. 2) Building Classification (FBC-B TABLE 1604.5 and ASCE 7 Table

1-1): Category II. 3) Wind Importance Factor (FBC-B TABLE 1604.5): 1.00. 4) Wind Exposure Category (FBC-B SECTIONS 1609.4 and 1602.3): C.

b. Maximum Design Pressure Ratings of steel door components and assemblies shall be not less than the following criteria, whichever is most stringent: 1) Design pressure requirements indicated on the Structural Drawings;

refer to Wind Pressure Diagrams on the Structural Drawings. 2) Maximum Design Pressure Ratings shall be not less than 70 PSF


positive / 70 PSF negative. c. Impact Rating: Large and Small Missile Impact.

C. Testing - Product Approval: Comply with applicable requirements of the governing building code, including but not limited to the following: 1. Roof hatch assemblies shall be tested in accordance with quality control test

methods intended to confirm compliance with the large missile impact and wind load requirements of FBC-B CHAPTERS 15 and 16 (including HVHZ requirements), FBC-B SECTIONS 1626 and 1714.5, and FBC-TPHVHZ TAS 202. a. Air Infiltration Test, per FBC-TPHVHZ TAS 202. b. Uniform Static Air Pressure Test, per FBC-TPHVHZ TAS 202. c. Water Resistance Test, per FBC-TPHVHZ TAS 201. d. Large Missile Impact Test, per FBC-TPHVHZ TAS 201. e. Cyclic Wind Pressure Test, per FBC-TPHVHZ TAS 203.

1.04 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product/system to be used. 1. Preparation instructions and recommendations. 2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. 3. Installation methods. 4. Maintenance requirements. 5. Engineering and Testing Reports:

a. Roof Hatch: Submit copies of Miami-Dade County Product Approval NOA, showing compliance with DESIGN & PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS.

b. Roof Hatch Safety Guardrail System: Submit copies of engineering and testing reports showing compliance with 29 CFR 1910 Sections 1910.23 and 1910.27.

C. Shop Drawings: Provide complete shop drawings showing Roof Hatch and Roof Hatch Safety Guardrail System assemblies indicated in the drawings. 1. Indicate the following:

a. Hatch, frame, guardrail, and hardware assemblies, including operating components.

b. Materials and details of design and construction; and hardware locations, and reinforcement type and locations.

c. Interface with roof deck construction, including roofing, flashing and interior finishes; anchorage and fastening methods; and methods of assembling sections, and finish requirements.

2. Provide project-specific design and engineering calculations, establishing conformance with applicable requirements of the governing building code and specified DESIGN & PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS and applicable OSHA requirements. Submit shop drawings and engineering calculations, signed and sealed by a qualified Florida registered professional engineer.


A. Certifications:


1. Submit manufacturer’s certification for each roof hatch assembly constructed in accordance with Miami-Dade County product approval single listing, demonstrating compliance with specified Design & Performance Requirements.

2. Certificate of Compliance: Provide manufacturer's certification that products comply with referenced standards.

3. Roof hatch safety guardrail system manufacturer must supply a letter from the roofing manufacturer that the system to be installed will not void the roof warranty.


A. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation.

B. Store products under cover and elevated above grade.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 ROOF HATCH

A. Manufacturers: 1. Basis of Design: The Bilco Company; P.O. Box 1203; New Haven, CT

06505. a. Product: Series NB Steel Roof Hatch (Miami-Dade County Product

Approval NOA No. 08-1219.01). 2. Other Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with contract requirements,

equivalent products by one of the following manufacturers: a. Acudor Products Inc. b. Dur-Red Products. c. Milcor Inc.

3. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01600.

B. Roof Hatches: Factory-assembled steel frame and cover, complete with operating and release hardware. 1. Style: Single leaf with flat metal cover unless otherwise indicated. 2. Mounting: Provide frames and curbs suitable for mounting conditions

indicated on the drawings. 3. Size(s):

a. Length: 54 inches. b. Width: 30 inches.

C. Frames/Curbs: One-piece curb and frame with integral cap flashing to receive roof flashings; extended bottom flange to suit mounting. 1. Material: Galvanized steel, 14 gage, 0.0747 inch (1.90 mm) thick. 2. Finish: Factory prime paint. 3. Insulation: 1 inch (25 mm) rigid glass fiber, located on outside face of curb. 4. Curb Height: 12 inches (305 mm) from finished surface of roof, minimum.

D. Metal Covers: Flush, insulated, hollow metal construction. 1. Material: Galvanized steel; outer cover 14 gage, 0.0747 inch (1.90 mm)

thick, liner 22 gage, 0.03 inch (0.76 mm) thick. 2. Finish: Factory prime paint. 3. Insulation: 1 inch (25 mm) rigid glass fiber.


4. Gasket: EPDM, continuous around cover perimeter.

E. Hardware: Steel, zinc coated and chromate sealed, unless otherwise indicated or required by manufacturer. 1. Lifting Mechanisms: Compression or torsion spring operator with shock

absorbers that automatically opens upon release of latch; capable of lifting covers despite 10 PSF load. a. Quantity: 4.

2. Hinges: Heavy-duty pintle type. a. Quantity: 3.

3. Hold Open Arm: Manufacturer’s standard, with vinyl-coated handle for manual release.

4. Latch: Upon closing, engage latch automatically and reset manual release. 5. Manual Release: Turn lever handle on lock mechanism. 6. Lock Mechanism: Hansen 2-point lock, per Product Approval; also, provide

padlock hasp on interior. a. Padlock: Refer to Section 08710.

F. Fasteners used for attachment to structure shall meet the following allowable minimum load values (using fastener manufacturer’s recommended safety factors): 1. Pullout: 185 lbs. 2. Shear: 90 lbs.

G. Labels: Provide labels required by governing building code.

2.02 ROOF HATCH SAFETY GUARDRAIL SYSTEM

A. Manufacturers: 1. Basis of Design: RoofTop Accessories; P.O. Box 1671; Tomball, TX 77377;

Tel. 866-636-5506. a. Product: RoofTop Accessories Model 3862, or equal; coordinate model

selection with Roof Hatch, to ensure proper fit and configuration. 2. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01600.

B. System Description: A complete guard rail system designed for installation around roof hatch assembly and meeting OSHA requirements (29 CFR 1910 Sections 23 and 27), with a clamping frame around curb base, posts, top rails, mid-rails, and chain or gate.

C. Materials: 1. Pipe: 1-5/8 inch OD ASTM A 53 Grade B seamed steel. 2. Finish: All metal parts to be hot dip galvanized. 3. Chain: Zinc plated 3/16 inch ASTM proof coil with hoop and rings as

required. 4. Accessories: Zinc plated threaded rods, caps, nuts, bolts and washers. 5. Railing Camps: RoofTop Accessories manufactured models RTA 02, 03, 31,

32, 34 and 40G, or as required. 7. Compression Gasket: 3/4 inch Dow Chemical Co. Styrofoam.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION


A. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared.

B. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Consultant of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation. 1. Verify that substrate is smooth and clean to extent needed to receive work.

B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions.

C. Roof Hatch Safety Guardrail System: 1. Paint and or repair all mechanical hatch parts and flashings as needed or

required. 2. Make any roof related repairs or replacement to base flashing before installing

new guard-rail system, use only materials recommended by the roofing manufacturer.

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, in manner that maintains roofing weather integrity.

B. Roof Hatch Safety Guardrail System: 1. Field customize to fit existing condition. 2. Set curb framing gasket around roof opening, tighten to fit opening. 3. Add the four comer posts into receiver and bolt to frame. 4. Install cross rails into preset clamps and adjust with wrench. 5. Add chain or gate as specified by manufacturer.

3.04 CLEANING

A. Clean installed work to like-new condition.

3.05 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed products until completion of project.

B. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION

RENOVATION OF HISTORIC FIRE STATION NO. 2 (Phase II-A) City of Miami Project No. B-30579 07840 - 1 of 8 FIRESTOPPING

SECTION 07840

FIRESTOPPING

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Firestopping materials.

B. Firestopping of all penetrations and interruptions to fire rated assemblies, whether indicated on drawings or not.



B. Section 04810 - Unit Masonry Assemblies.

C. Section 09220 - Portland Cement Plaster.

1.03 SYSTEM DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

A. Fire-rated Construction: Maintain barrier and structural floor fire resistance ratings including resistance to cold smoke at all penetrations, connections with other surfaces or types of construction, at separations required to permit building movement and sound or vibration absorption, and at other construction gaps.

B. Smoke Barrier Construction: Maintain barrier and structural floor resistance to cold smoke at all penetrations, connections with other surfaces and types of construction and at all separations required to permit building and sound or vibration absorption, and at other construction gaps.

C. Penetrations: Materials and methods of construction used to protect through penetrations and membrane penetrations of horizontal assemblies and fire-resistance-rated wall assemblies shall conform to FBC-B SECTION 712 and NFPA 101 (FL) SECTION 8.3.5.

D. Fire-Resistant Joint Systems: Joints installed in or between fire-resistance-rated walls, floor or floor/ceiling assemblies and roofs or roof/ceiling assemblies shall be protected by an approved fire-resistant joint system designed to resist the passage of fire for a time period not less than the required fire-resistance rating of the wall, floor or roof in or between which it is installed. Fire-resistant joint systems shall be tested in accordance with FBC-B SECTION 713.3 and NFPA 101 (FL) SECTION 8.4.5.

1.04 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: Shop drawings shall show typical installation details for methods of installation and type of firestop materials used. 1. Schedule of Firestopping: List each type of penetration, fire rating of the

penetrated assembly, and firestopping test or design number. 2. Engineering Judgment:


a. Manufacturer's Engineering Judgment identification number and drawing details, when no UL system is available for an application.

b. Engineer Judgment must include both project name and the name of the contractor who will install firestop system as described in drawing.

C. Product Data: Provide data on product characteristics, performance ratings, and limitations.

D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures, surface preparation, and perimeter conditions requiring special attention.


A. Fire Testing: Provide firestopping assemblies of designs which provide the specified fire ratings when tested in accordance with methods indicated, ASTM E 814, and ASTM E 119. 1. Listing in the current-year classification or certification books of UL will be

considered as constituting an acceptable test report. 2. Submission of actual test reports is required for assemblies for which none

of the above substantiation exists.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section, and listed in UL (FRD).

C. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section, and trained and approved by the firestopping products manufacturer. 1. Installer is to have been provided the necessary training to install

manufacturer's products per specified requirements. a. A supplier's willingness to sell its firestopping products to the Contractor

or to an installer engaged by the Contractor does not in itself confer qualification on the buyer.

2. Installer shall be approved by FM 4991, Approval of Firestop Contractors. 3. Installer shall be a member of Firestop Contractors International Association.

D. Single-Source: To ensure proper planning and coordination of firestop work, all firestopping required for entire Project shall be installed by a single installer.

E. Proposed firestop materials and methods shall conform to applicable governing codes having jurisdiction.

F. Firestop systems do not re-establish the structural integrity of load bearing partitions/assemblies, or support live loads and traffic. Installer shall consult the Consultant (Architect and structural engineer) prior to penetrating any load bearing assembly.

G. For those firestop applications that exist but for which no UL tested system is available through a manufacturer, an engineering judgment derived from similar UL system designs or other tests shall be prepared by Contractor and submitted to Consultant and to authority having jurisdiction for review and approval prior to installation. Engineer judgment submittal drawings must follow requirements set forth by the IFC (GEFSEJ), and as required by the authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Where an engineering judgment is proposed, the Contractor shall provide an

independent review and analysis by a qualified third party testing agency acceptable to Consultant and Project Manager, and such independent


review and analysis (of proposed engineering judgment design) shall include a recommendation for use of the proposed engineering judgment design for the application proposed by the Contractor.

H. Firestopping materials shall not contain lead, PCBs, ethylene glycol, or lead.

I. Products containing solvents or requiring hazardous waste disposal are not allowed.

J. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements.


A. Comply with firestopping manufacturer's recommendations for temperature and conditions during and after installation. Maintain minimum temperature before, during, and for 3 days after installation of materials.

B. Provide ventilation in areas where solvent-cured materials are being installed.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL

A. Provide firestopping composed of components that are compatible with each other, the substrates forming openings, and the items, if any, penetrating the firestopping under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by the firestopping manufacturer based on testing and field experience.

B. Provide components for each firestopping system that are needed to install fill material. Use only components specified by the firestopping manufacturer and approved by the qualified testing agency for the designated fire-resistance-rated systems.

C. Firestopping materials are either "cast-in-place" (integral with concrete placement) or "post installed". Provide cast-in-place firestop devices prior to concrete placement.

D. Fire Resistance Ratings: 1. See drawings for required assemblies, systems and ratings. 2. Use only firestop products and assemblies that are appropriate for

application, and that have been tested in accordance with the requirements of UL 1479, ASTM E 814, or UL 2079, for specific fire-rated construction conditions conforming to construction assembly type, penetrating item type(s), annular space requirements, and fire-rating involved for each separate instance.

2.02 FIRESTOPPING ASSEMBLIES

A. Firestopping: Any material meeting requirements.

B. Primers, Sleeves, Forms, Insulation, Packing, Stuffing, and Accessories: Type required for tested assembly design.

PART 3 EXECUTION


3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verification of Conditions: Verify openings are ready to receive the work of this section. 1. Examine areas and conditions under which work is to be performed and

identify conditions detrimental to proper or timely completion. 2. Verify penetrations are properly sized and in suitable condition for

application of materials. 3. Surfaces to which firestop materials will be applied shall be free of dirt,

grease, oil, laitance, release agents, water repellents, and any other substances that may affect proper adhesion.

4. Provide masking and temporary covering to prevent soiling of adjacent surfaces by firestopping materials.

5. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for temperature and humidity conditions before, during and after installation of firestopping.

6. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.02 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate location and proper selection of cast-in-place firestop devices with trade responsible for the work. Ensure device is installed before placement of concrete.

B. Responsible trade to provide adequate spacing of field run pipes to allow for installation of cast-in-place firestop devices without interferences.

3.03 PREPARATION

A. Clean substrate surfaces of dirt, dust, grease, oil, loose material, or other matter which may affect bond of firestopping material.

B. Remove incompatible materials which may affect bond.

C. Install backing materials to arrest liquid material leakage.

3.04 APPLICATION

A. General: At each location where firestopping is required by the governing building code: 1. Apply fire safing insulation, fire and smoke barrier caulk, and fire barrier

wrap/strips according to manufacturer's published installation details, directions, UL classified fire test data, and as specified.

2. Use only firestop products and assemblies that have been tested in accordance with the requirements of UL 1479, ASTM E 814, or UL 2079, for specific fire-rated construction conditions conforming to construction assembly type, penetrating item type(s), annular space requirements, and fire-rating involved for each separate instance.

3. Fire Resistance Rating: a. Provide a firestop system with a "F" Rating as determined by UL 1479 or

ASTM E 814, which is equal to the time rating of construction being penetrated. In addition, penetrations in fire-rated horizontal assemblies shall have a “T” rating of at least 1 hour, but not less than the rating of the horizontal assembly, except as allowed in NFPA 101 (FL) SECTION 8.3.5.1.4(1) or (2).


b. Provide a firestop system with an Assembly Rating as determined by UL 2079, which is equal to the time rating of construction being penetrated.

4. Install materials in manner described in fire test report and in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, completely closing openings. a. Seal all holes or voids made by penetrations to ensure an air and water

resistant seal. b. Consult with Consultant (Architect and mechanical engineer) and

damper manufacturer prior to installation of UL firestop systems that might hamper the performance of fire/smoke dampers as it pertains to ductwork.

c. Protect materials from damage on surfaces subjected to traffic. 5. Do not cover installed firestopping until inspected by authority having

jurisdiction. 6. Regulatory Requirements: Install firestop materials in accordance with

applicable requirements of the governing building code and UL (FRD). a. Install labeling required by governing building code.

B. Membrane Penetrations: 1. Penetrations of membranes that are part of a fire-resistance-rated horizontal

assembly shall comply with FBC-B SECTION 712 and the following: a. Fire-resistance-rated Assemblies: Penetrations shall be installed as

tested in an approved fire-resistance-rated assembly. b. Through-penetration Firestop System: Through penetrations shall be

protected by an approved through-penetration firestop system installed and tested in accordance with ASTM E 814 or UL 1479, with a minimum positive pressure differential of 0.01 inch (2.49 Pa) of water.

2. Where floor/ceiling assemblies are required to have a minimum 1-hour fire-resistance rating, recessed fixtures shall be installed such that the required fire resistance will not be reduced.

C. Gaps at Floor and Roof Edges Abutting Exterior Walls: 1. Install specified fire safing insulation continuously at each floor level above

first floor and at roof between back of precast concrete wall panels, concrete beams, and columns of depth in accordance with manufacturer's directions, as necessary to achieve required fire resistance rating.

2. Install fire stop insulation across exterior faces of columns at each floor level above first floor including roof before erection of precast concrete wall panels. Secure insulation in place across columns with suitable waterproof adhesive with flame spread rating of 25 or less and with impaling clips at each side of columns.

3. Secure fire safing insulation to exterior faces of slab edges and beams with suitable impaling clips spaced 24 inches on center, and adhesive with flame spread rating of 25 or less.

4. Provide fire safing insulation of required thickness as required to compress insulation in joints.

5. Where gap is less than approximately 2 inches, bend clips slightly upward. Where gap is less than approximately 1 inch, apply adhesive to sides of joint and tightly pack safing insulation into joint.

6. Recess top surface of fire safing insulation to receive fire and smoke barrier caulk as necessary to provide required fire resistance rating, in accordance with manufacturer's directions manufacturer's directions.


7. Apply specified fire and smoke barrier caulk of required uniform depth over horizontal surfaces of fire safing insulation at each floor level above first floor and roof. Smooth surface of caulk at exposed areas.

8. Floor and Roof Expansion Joints: a. Provide 10-gage galvanized steel hat shaped wire support hangers at 8

inches o.c. with bottom of wire near bottom of slab or beam. b. Install specified fire safing insulation tightly packed in each suspended

floor expansion joint and roof expansion joint with insulation resting on hardware cloth support and of depth in accordance with manufacturer's directions, as necessary to provide required fire resistance rating.

c. Apply fire and smoke barrier caulk of required uniform depth over horizontal surfaces of fire safing insulation packed in suspended floor expansion joints. Fire and smoke barrier caulk is not required in roof expansion joints.

9. Gaps at Tops of Non-Load Bearing Concrete Fire Walls: a. Coordinate installation of solid concrete block or solid brick top course to

provide solid back up for fire safing insulation. b. Pack space between top of masonry and underside of overhead

structure with specified fire safing insulation. Recess insulation on each side of wall to receive fire and smoke barrier caulk in accordance with caulk manufacturer's directions, as necessary to provide required fire resistance rating.

c. Apply specified fire and smoke barrier caulk or putty of required uniform thickness on each side of walls in accordance with manufacturer's directions, as necessary to provide required fire resistance rating.

10. Floor and Fire Wall Penetrations - Metal Pipes, Conduits, and HVAC Duct Perimeters: a. Where gaps between metal pipes, conduits, and duct openings are 1/4-

inch or less, seal gaps with specified fire and smoke barrier caulk. b. Where gaps between metal pipes, conduits and ducts are more than

1/4-inch: 1) Pack space between opening and pipe, conduit and duct with

specified fire safing insulation and of depth of insulation according to fire safing manufacturer's directions, as necessary to provide required fire resistance rating.

2) Apply specified fire and smoke barrier caulk of required uniform depth over fire safing insulation support, as necessary to provide required fire resistance rating. Smooth surface of caulk at exposed areas.

3) In place of specified fire and smoke barrier caulk, provide fire and smoke barrier wrap/strips, wire tied in place and covered with of specified fire and smoke barrier caulk according to manufacturer's directions.

11. Floor and Fire Wall Penetrations - Plastic Pipe and Conduit Perimeters and Insulated Metal Pipe Perimeters: a. Where gaps between plastic pipes and plastic conduits and floor and

wall openings are 1/4-inch or less and where insulated metal pipes occur, provide sheet metal fire barrier restricting collar wrap/strip with fire and smoke barrier caulk on both sides of wall and at bottom of floor only according to manufacturer's directions, as necessary to provide


required fire resistance rating. 1) Provide number of wrap/strips around pipes and conduits according

to wrap/strip manufacturer's tables. 2) Enclose wrap/strips with sheet metal restricting collars bolted to

each side of wall for fire wall penetrations and to underside of floor for floor penetrations. Bend support tabs back to pipe or insulation and secure collar with metal hose clamp.

3) Seal all seams and edges at wall and floor with 1/4-inch bead of specified fire and smoke barrier caulk.

4) Where gaps between plastic pipes and plastic conduits and floor openings are more than 1/4-inch: (a) Pack space between floor opening and pipe or conduit with

specified fire safing insulation and of depth of insulation to provide required fire resistance rating. Recess insulation 2-1/4 inches below floor to receive fire barrier wrap/strips according to wrap/strip manufacturer's directions, as necessary to provide required fire resistance rating.

(b) Support fire safing insulation with "Z" shaped galvanized sheet metal clips at 3 locations around pipes and conduits.

(c) Provide number of specified fire barrier wrap/ trips around pipes and conduits according to wrap/strip manufacturer's tables. Wire wrap/strips in place and slide down into opening to proper depth.

(d) Cover surface and seams of wrap/strip around pipe or conduit with uniform 1/4-inch depth of specified fire and smoke barrier caulk.

5) Plastic pipe and insulated cable penetrations to fire walls: (a) Provide galvanized steel pipe sleeves equivalent to EMT, sized

to allow annular space of not less than 3/4-inch around pipe or cable. Project pipe sleeve 3 inches on each side of wall. Tightly fit pipe sleeves to wall. Grout sleeves into masonry and fill openings in gypsum board with fire caulk.

(b) Fill space around pipe and cable to within 2-1/4 inches of end of pipe sleeve with fire safing insulation.

(c) Provide number of specified fire barrier wrap/ trips around pipes and cable on each side of wall according to wrap/strip manufacturer's table, as necessary to provide required fire resistance rating. Wire wrap/strips in place and slide into pipe sleeve, recessing 1/4-inch.

(d) Cover surface of wrap/strip around pipe and cable with uniform 1/4-inch depth of specified fire and smoke barrier caulk.

12. Floor and Fire Wall Penetrations - Bus Ducts: a. Where cable trays and bus ducts penetrate floors and fire walls, provide

necessary fiber packing and other materials required by manufacturers installation details and appropriate for conditions encountered, as necessary to provide required fire resistance rating.

b. Where "packing material" is shown on the manufacturer's details, only specified fire stop mineral wool shall be used. Depth of "packing material" shall be of minimum 1-inch depth.

13. Floor and Fire Wall Penetrations - Cable Trays:


a. Where cable trays penetrate floors and fire walls, provide fire prevention pillow system placed into opening in a staggered brick style and other materials required by the manufacturer.


A. Examine sealed penetration areas to ensure proper installation before concealing or enclosing areas. 1. Keep areas of work accessible until inspection by applicable code

authorities. 2. Perform under this section patching and repairing of firestopping caused by

cutting or penetrating of existing firestop systems already installed by other trades.

3.06 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Clean adjacent surfaces of firestopping materials.

B. Protect adjacent surfaces from damage by material installation.

END OF SECTION

RENOVATION OF HISTORIC FIRE STATION NO. 2 (Phase II-A) City of Miami Project No. B-30579 07900 - 1 of 5 JOINT SEALERS

SECTION 07900

JOINT SEALERS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Sealants and joint backing.



B. Section 01780 - Close-out Submittals.

C. Section 07840 - Firestopping: Firestopping sealants.

D. Section 08110 - Steel Doors and Frames.

E. Section 08520 - Aluminum Windows.

F. Section 09220 - Portland Cement Plaster.

1.03 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Provide data indicating sealant chemical characteristics, performance criteria, substrate preparation, limitations, and color availability.

C. Samples: Submit two samples, each 12 inches long, illustrating sealant colors for selection.

D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures, surface preparation, and perimeter conditions requiring special attention.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience.

B. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum five years experience and approved by manufacturer.


A. Maintain temperature and humidity recommended by the sealant manufacturer during and after installation.

1.06 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate the work with all sections referencing this section.

1.07 WARRANTY

A. See Section 01780 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.


B. Correct defective work within a five-year period after Date of Substantial Completion.

C. Warranty: Include coverage for installed sealants and accessories which fail to achieve airtight seal and watertight seal, exhibit loss of adhesion or cohesion, or do not cure.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Silicone Sealants: 1. Bostik, Inc: www.bostik-us.com. 2. Momentive Performance Materials, Inc. (formerly GE Silicones):

www.momentive.com. 3. Pecora Corporation: www.pecora.com. 4. BASF Construction Chemicals, Inc: www.chemrex.com. 5. Substitutions: See Section 01600 - Product Requirements.

B. Polyurethane Sealants and Acrylic Emulsion Latex Sealants: 1. Bostik, Inc: www.bostik-us.com. 2. Pecora Corporation: www.pecora.com. 3. BASF Construction Chemicals, Inc: www.chemrex.com. 4. Substitutions: See Section 01600 - Product Requirements.

C. Polysulfide Sealants and Butyl Sealants: 1. Pecora Corporation: www.pecora.com. 2. BASF Construction Chemicals, Inc: www.chemrex.com. 3. Substitutions: See Section 01600 - Product Requirements.

D. Acrylic Sealants: 1. Tremco, Inc: www.tremcosealants.com. 2. Substitutions: See Section 01600 - Product Requirements.

2.02 NON-PREFORMED SEALANTS

A. Type E-1 - General Purpose Exterior Sealant: Polyurethane or Polysulfide; ASTM C 920, Grade NS, Class 25 (minimum), Uses M, G, and A; single, or multi- component. 1. Color: Standard colors matching finished surfaces. 2. Product: DynaTrol II general purpose fire-rated polyurethane sealant

manufactured by Pecora, or equal. 3. Applications: Use for:

a. Control, expansion, and soft joints in masonry. b. Joints between concrete and other materials. c. Joints between metal frames and other materials. d. Other exterior joints for which no other sealant is indicated.

B. Type E-2 - Exterior Metal Lap Joint Sealant: Butyl or polyisobutylene, nondrying, non-skinning, non-curing. 1. Product: BC-158 one-part butyl rubber sealant manufactured by Pecora, or

equal. 2. Applications: Use for:


a. Concealed sealant bead in sheet metal work. b. Concealed sealant bead in siding overlaps.

C. Type E-3 - Concrete Paving Joint Sealant: Polyurethane, self-leveling; ASTM C 920, Class 25 (minimum), Uses T, I, M and A; single or multi- component. 1. Color: Gray. 2. Product: Urexpan NR-200 self-leveling traffic-grade polyurethane sealant


a. Joints in sidewalks and vehicular paving.

D. Type I-1 - General Purpose Interior Sealant: Acrylic emulsion latex; ASTM C 834, Type OP, Grade NF single component, paintable. 1. Color: Standard colors matching finished surfaces. 2. Product: AC-20 +Silicone acrylic-latex sealant manufactured by Pecora, or

equal. 3. Applications: Use for:

a. Interior wall and ceiling control joints. b. Joints between door and window frames and wall surfaces. c. Other interior joints for which no other type of sealant is indicated.

E. Type I-2 - Bathtub/Tile Sealant: White silicone; ASTM C 920, Uses I, M and A; single component, mildew resistant. 1. Product: Pecora 898 sanitary mildew-resistant silicone sealant


a. Joints between plumbing fixtures and floor and wall surfaces. b. Joints between kitchen and bath countertops and wall surfaces.

F. Type I-3 - Acoustical Sealant: Butyl or acrylic sealant; ASTM C 920, Grade NS, Class 12-1/2, Uses M and A; single component, solvent release curing, non-skinning. 1. Product: AC-20 FTR fire-rated acrylic-latex sealant manufactured by

Pecora, or equal. 2. Applications:

a. Use for preventing flanking sound transmission through partitions and other similar locations in non-moving joints in the following locations: 1) Sealant beads between top stud runner and structure, and between

bottom stud track and floor. 2) Sealant beads between end stud and abutting construction. 3) Sealant beads between outlet boxes and gypsum board.

b. Use for concealed locations only

G. Type I-4 - Interior Floor Joint Sealant: Polyurethane, self-leveling; ASTM C 920, Grade P, Class 25, Uses T, M and A; single or multi- component. 1. Approved by manufacturer for wide joints up to 1-1/2 inches. 2. Color: Colors as selected. 3. Product: DynaTred non-sag traffic-grade polyurethane sealant


a. Expansion joints in floors. b. Sealing of joints, penetrations and cracks in slabs.


2.03 ACCESSORIES

A. Primer: Non-staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application.

B. Joint Cleaner: Non-corrosive and non-staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer; compatible with joint forming materials.

C. Joint Backing: Round foam rod compatible with sealant; ASTM D 1667, closed cell PVC; oversized 30 to 50 percent larger than joint width.

D. Bond Breaker: Pressure sensitive tape recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that substrate surfaces and joint openings are ready to receive work.

B. Verify that joint backing and release tapes are compatible with sealant.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Remove loose materials and foreign matter which might impair adhesion of sealant.

B. Clean and prime joints in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

C. Perform preparation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and ASTM C 1193.

D. Protect elements surrounding the work of this section from damage or disfigurement.

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Perform work in accordance with sealant manufacturer's requirements for preparation of surfaces and material installation instructions.

B. Perform installation in accordance with ASTM C 1193.

C. Perform acoustical sealant application work in accordance with ASTM C 919.

D. Measure joint dimensions and size joint backers to achieve width-to-depth ratio, neck dimension, and surface bond area as recommended by manufacturer, except where specific dimensions are indicated.

E. Install bond breaker where joint backing is not used.

F. Install sealant free of air pockets, foreign embedded matter, ridges, and sags.

G. Apply sealant within recommended application temperature ranges. Consult manufacturer when sealant cannot be applied within these temperature ranges.

H. Tool joints concave.

3.04 CLEANING

A. Clean adjacent soiled surfaces.



A. Protect sealants until cured.

3.06 SCHEDULE

A. Exterior: 1. Exterior Joints for Which No Other Sealant Type is Indicated: Type E-1;

colors as selected. 2. Control, Expansion, and Soft Joints in Masonry, and Between Masonry and

Adjacent Work: Type E-1. 3. Lap Joints in Exterior Sheet Metal Work: Type E-2. 4. Joints between Exterior Metal Frames and Adjacent Work (except masonry):

Type E-1. 6. Under Exterior Door Thresholds: Type E-1.

B. Interior: 1. Interior Joints for Which No Other Sealant is Indicated: Type I-1; colors as

selected. 2. Control and Expansion Joints in Interior Concrete Slabs and Floors: Type I-

4.

END OF SECTION

RENOVATION OF HISTORIC FIRE STATION NO. 2 (Phase II-A) City of Miami Project No. B-30579 08110 - 1 of 7 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES

SECTION 08110

STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Steel doors and frames.

B. Accessories, including glazing, louvers, and matching panels.



B. Section 04810 - Unit Masonry Assemblies.

C. Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry.

D. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers.

E. Section 08710 - Door Hardware.


A. General: Design, materials, construction and quality of exterior steel door assemblies shall comply with design criteria specified in the Contract Documents and applicable requirements of the governing building code, including but not limited to FBC-B CHAPTERS 15 and 16 (including HVHZ provisions), and ASCE 7. 1. Refer to FBC-B SECTION 1620 for wind loads, except that minimum Basic

Wind Speed shall be as specified in this Section and as indicated on the Structural Drawings.

B. Design Loads: Exterior steel door components and assemblies shall comply with requirements of governing building code, criteria indicated on the Structural Drawings, and as follows: 1. Exterior steel door assemblies shall be designed and constructed to be of

sufficient strength to support the estimated or actual imposed dead, live, wind, and any other loads, both during construction and after completion of the structure, without exceeding the allowable materials stresses specified by the governing building code.


1) Basic Wind Speed (3-second gust): 146 miles per hour. 2) Building Classification (FBC-B TABLE 1604.5 and ASCE 7 Table 1-

1): Category II. 3) Wind Importance Factor (FBC-B TABLE 1604.5): 1.00. 4) Wind Exposure Category (FBC-B SECTIONS 1609.4 and 1602.3):

C. b. Maximum Design Pressure Ratings of steel door components and

assemblies shall be not less than the following criteria, whichever is most stringent: 1) Design pressure requirements indicated on the Structural Drawings;

refer to Wind Pressure Diagrams on the Structural Drawings.


2) Maximum Design Pressure Ratings shall be not less than 90 PSF positive / 70 PSF negative.

C. Testing - Product Approval: Comply with applicable requirements of the governing building code, including but not limited to the following: 1. Exterior steel door assemblies shall be tested in accordance with quality

control test methods intended to confirm compliance with the large missile impact and wind load requirements of FBC-B CHAPTERS 15 and 16 (including HVHZ requirements), FBC-B SECTIONS 1626 and 1714.5, and FBC-TPHVHZ TAS 202.

2. Exterior steel door assemblies shall be tested in accordance with the requirements of FBC-B SECTION 2411.3.2.1, TAS 202 and provisions from ANSI/AAMA/MWWDA 101/IS 2, and the forced entry prevention requirements of the AAMA 1302.5 and AAMA 1303.5.

1.04 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard details and catalog data demonstrating compliance with referenced standards. 1. Include manufacturer’s recommended installation instructions. 2. Product Approval (Exterior Doors): Submit copies of current Miami-Dade

County Product Control Notice of Acceptance (NOA) indicating conformance with applicable requirements of the governing building code, including but not limited to design pressures and large and small missile impact tests. a. Include copies of evidence submitted with Product Approval, including

but not limited to drawings, test reports, calculations, and material certifications.

b. Indicate options selected for this project.

C. Shop Drawings: Provide complete shop drawings showing all steel door and frame assemblies indicated in the drawings. 1. Indicate the following:

a. Door, frame, and hardware schedule, in accordance with SDI 111. b. Door frame types and profiles; materials and details of design and

construction; and hardware locations, and reinforcement type and locations.

c. Interface with wall construction, including furring, framing, and interior wall finishes; anchorage and fastening methods; and methods of assembling sections, and finish requirements.

2. Glazed Openings, Lights and Transoms: Indicate glass and glazing materials, and removable and non-removable glazing stops.

3. Fire-Rated Openings: Indicate applicable fire-rating and label. 4. Exterior Openings: Provide project-specific design and engineering

calculations, establishing conformance with applicable requirements of FLORIDA BUILDING CODE (FBC) and specified Design & Performance Requirements. Submit shop drawings and engineering calculations, signed and sealed by a qualified Florida registered professional engineer.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Provide all products from a single manufacturer


who is a member of the Steel Door Institute.

B. Fire-rated Assemblies: 1. Where fire-rated door assemblies are indicated or required, provide fire-rated

door and frame assemblies complying with NFPA 80, and tested, listed and labeled according to UBC 43-2 and ISO-3008 by a nationally recognized independent testing and inspection agency.

2. The label shall comply with requirements of NFPA 80, and shall be permanently affixed to the door or frame.

C. Certifications: 1. Exterior Door Certification: For exterior door assemblies, submit

manufacturer’s certification for each door and frame assembly constructed in accordance with Miami-Dade County product approval single listing with specified door, door frame, and hardware, demonstrating compliance with specified Design & Performance Requirements.

2. Label Construction Certification: For door assemblies required to be fire-rated and exceeding sizes of tested assemblies, submit manufacturer's certification for each door and frame assembly constructed to conform to design, materials, and construction equivalent to requirements for labeled construction.

3. Certificate of Compliance: Provide manufacturer's certification that products comply with referenced standards.

D. Manufacture products only after receipt of approved hardware schedule and templates.


A. Deliver steel doors and frames cartoned or crated to provide protection during transit and job storage. Provide additional sealed plastic wrapping for factory-finished doors.

B. Inspect steel doors and frames upon delivery for damage. Minor damage may be repaired if refinished items are equal in all respects to new work and acceptable to Consultant. Remove and replace damaged items as directed.

C. Store doors and frames at building site under cover. Place units on minimum 4-inch high wood blocking. Avoid use of non-vented plastic or canvas shelters that could create a humidity chamber. If cardboard wrapper on door becomes wet, remove carton immediately. Provide 1/4-inch spaces between stacked doors to promote air circulation.

D. Deliver all doors and frames to the jobsite in a timely manner to not delay progress of other trades.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Single or Pair Flush Outswing Doors: 1. Basis of Design Manufacturer: Firedoor Division of Amweld International,

LLC (formerly Ark II Manufacturing, LLC): Tel. 888-775-2397. a. Product: Series 8080 HMD-F Outswing Commercial Steel Door - LMI

(NOA 06-0512.04).


2. Other Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with the contract requirements, equivalent product manufactured by other listed manufacturers may be substituted as equal. a. Steelcraft Manufacturing Company: 9017 Blue Ash Road; Cincinnati, OH

45242. b. Ingersoll-Rand.

B. Single Inswing Doors: 1. Basis of Design Manufacturer: Firedoor Division of Amweld International,

LLC (formerly Ark II Manufacturing, LLC): Tel. 888-775-2397. a. Product: Series 3070-F Inswing Commercial Steel Door -

2. Other Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with the contract requirements, equivalent product manufactured by other listed manufacturers may be substituted as equal. a. Steelcraft Manufacturing Company: 9017 Blue Ash Road; Cincinnati, OH

45242. b. Ingersoll-Rand.

2.02 MATERIALS

A. Steel Sheet for Doors and Frames: 1. Cold rolled steel: ASTM A 1008, Designation CS. 2. Hot rolled steel: Pickled and oiled, ASTM A 1011, Designation CS Type B. 3. Galvanizing: All components hot-dipped zinc-iron alloy-coated

(galvannealed), ASTM A 653, with A60/ZF180 coating (minimum).

B. Steel Sheet for Anchors and Accessories: Electrolytically deposited zinc coated steel; ASTM A 591, coating 40Z (12G), minimum.

C. Finish Materials: 1. Primer: Rust-inhibiting, complying with ANSI A250.10, door manufacturer's

standard. Coordinate with paint to be used for field finishing; refer to Section 09900.

2. Bituminous Coating: Asphalt emulsion or other high-build, water-resistant, resilient coating.

D. Grout for Frames: 3000 PSI concrete conforming to requirements of the Product Approval NOA; refer to Section 03300 for additional information. 1. Portland cement grout of maximum 4-inch slump for hand troweling; thinner

pumpable grout is prohibited.

E. Silencers: Resilient rubber, fitted into drilled hole; 3 on strike side of single door, 3 on center mullion of pairs, and 2 on head of pairs without center mullions.

F. Glazing: As specified in Section 08800, factory installed.

2.03 DOORS AND FRAMES

A. General Requirements: 1. Combined Requirements: If a particular door and frame unit is indicated to

comply with more than one type of requirement, comply with all the specified requirements for each type; for instance, an exterior door that is also indicated as being sound-rated must comply with the requirements specified for exterior doors and for sound-rated doors; where two requirements conflict, comply with the most stringent.


2. Grade: a. Interior: ANSI A250.8 Level 2, Model 2 (heavy-duty, seamless design,

with minimum 16 gage frame. b. Exterior: Level 3, Model 2 (seamless design), with minimum 16 gage

frame. 1. Accessibility: Comply with ANSI/ICC A117.1 and Florida Accessibility Code

for Building Construction (FBC-B CHAPTER 11). 2. Door Top Closures: Flush with top of faces and edges, at all exterior doors

and as indicated. 5. Door Edge Profile: Beveled on both edges. 6. Door Texture: Smooth faces. 7. Glazed Lights: Non-removable stops on non-secure side, or as directed by

Consultant; sizes and configurations as indicated on drawings. 8. Hardware Preparation: In accordance with DHI A115 Series, with

reinforcement welded in place, in addition to other requirements specified in door grade standard, and as follows: a. Exterior door assemblies: In accordance with Miami-Dade Product

Control Notice of Acceptance (NOA). 9. Galvanizing: All components hot-dipped zinc-iron alloy-coated

(galvannealed), ASTM A 653, with A60/ZF180 coating (minimum). 10. Finish: All components to be factory-primed, ready for field finishing. 11. Comply with ANSI A250.8.

B. Fire-Rated Openings: Comply with NFPA 80; UL listed. 1. Affix permanent labels attesting to fire resistance. 2. At stairway enclosures, provide units listed for 450 degree F (232 degree C)

maximum temperature rise rating for 30 minutes of exposure. 3. Provide manufacturer's certificate that oversized openings have been

constructed in accordance with all other applicable requirements for labeled door construction.

C. Exterior Openings: 1. STC Rating: 35, calculated in accordance with ASTM E 413, tested in

accordance with ASTM E 336 or ASTM E 1408. 2. Provide insulated construction with U-value of at least 0.48 (2.72) when

tested in accordance with SDI 113. 3. Weatherstripping: In accordance with Miami-Dade Product Control Notice of

Acceptance (NOA); see also, Section 08710. 9. Any and all products shall be permanently labeled with manufacturer’s name,

city, state, and the following: a. “Miami-Dade County Product Control Approved”.

4. Finish: Factory primed; refer to Section 09900 for field finishing requirements.

D. Interior Openings: 1. STC Rating: 35, calculated in accordance with ASTM E 413, tested in

accordance with ASTM E 336 or ASTM E 1408. 2. Steel stiffened grid core and stile and rail units are exempt from thermal

rating requirements.

E. Frames: Provide welded unit type frames. 1. Lights and Transoms: Provide tubular mullions and transom bars with heads

and jambs.


F. Glazed Lights: Provide glazing stops and beads. 1. Non-removable Stops: Integral with door face. 2. Removable Stops: Formed sheet steel, mitered corners; prepared for

countersink style tamper proof screws.

2.04 FRAME ANCHORS

A. Jamb Anchors: 1. Exterior Opening at Concrete Walls: Provide type and quantity of jamb

anchors in accordance with requirements of the applicable Miami-Dade County Product Control Notice of Acceptance (NOA).

2. Interior Opening at Concrete Walls, where such opening is subject to wind load and/or missile impact: Provide type and quantity of jamb anchors in accordance with requirements of the applicable Miami-Dade County Product Control Notice of Acceptance (NOA).

3. Interior Opening at Concrete Walls, where such opening is not subject to wind load or missile impact: a. Provide concealed existing opening type anchors with 3/8 inch

(minimum) diameter bolt and expansion shield; provide plastic plug at each anchor hole.

b. Provide one jamb anchor at 6 inches from top of jamb and one at 6 inches from bottom, plus one jamb anchor per 24 inches of jamb height or fraction thereof between top and bottom anchors; not less than 4 anchors per jamb.

2. Interior Opening at Stud-framed Drywall Partition: a. Manufacturer's standard compression type anchors, to accommodate

frame jamb depth and face dimension on fully-welded frame; galvanized.

b. Provide one jamb anchor per 30 inches of jamb height or fraction thereof; not less than 3 anchors per jamb.

B. Head/ Ceiling Strut Anchors: Provide where indicated in drawings; if not indicated, provide per manufacturer's recommendations.

C. Floor/ Mullion Stirrup Anchors: Steel angle clip type; provide one anchor per jamb. 1. Metal Thickness: 16 gage, minimum. 2. Fasteners: Two per jamb, minimum. 3. Weld anchor to bottom of each jamb, except as otherwise indicated; weld

prior to galvanizing of frame assembly.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that project conditions are suitable before beginning installation of frames. 1. For wrap-around frames, verify that completed openings are of correct size

and thickness. 2. For butt type frames, verify that completed openings are of correct size.

B. Correct unsatisfactory condition before proceeding with installation.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install doors plumb and in true alignment and fasten to achieve the maximum


operational effectiveness and appearance of the unit. 1. Install frames as recommended in ANSI A250.11 and DHI A115.1G. 2. Maintain clearances specified in ANSI A250.8 and NFPA 80, whichever is

more restrictive. 3. Shim as indicated in DHI A115.1G and SDI 122.

B. Grouting of Frames: 1. Preparation:

a. Brace or fasten frame in such a way to prevent pressure of the grout from deforming frame

b. Prior to installation, field coat the inside of frames with a bituminous compound to prevent corrosion.

c. Mix grout to provide 4-inch (100 mm) maximum consistency and hand trowel into place. Do not use grout mixed to thin "pumpable" consistency.

2. Frames at openings in precast concrete wall panels shall be cast-in-place with the wall, except as otherwise indicated.

3. Frames at openings in stud-framed drywall partitions shall be filled with grout as work progresses.

C. Install hardware in accordance with hardware manufacturer's recommendations and templates. 1. Consult DHI A115.1G and ANSI A250.6 as necessary. 2. Install stainless steel slip-on spats at food service doorframes.

3.03 ADJUST AND CLEAN

A. Prime Coat Touch-Up: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touch-up of compatible air-drying primer.

B. Protection Removal: Immediately before final inspection, remove protective plastic wrappings from prefinished doors.

C. Fill all dents, holes, etc. with metal filler and sand smooth flush with adjacent surfaces-paint to match.

D. Adjust doors for proper operation, free from binding or other defects.

E. Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating finish hardware items, leaving steel doors and frames undamaged and in complete and proper operating condition. Provide final adjustment as follows: 1. Door Contact With Silencers: Doors shall strike a minimum of two silencers

without binding lock or latch bolts in the strike plate. 2. Head, Strike, and Hinge Jamb Margin: 1/8 inch. 3. Meeting Edge Clearance, Pairs of Doors: + 1/16 inch. 4. Bolts and Screws: Leave tight and firmly seated. 5. Soundseal gasketing. 6. Vermin Protection:

a. Drop Seal: Full contact with no gaps. b. Brush weatherstripping.

F. Clean and restore soiled surfaces.

G. Remove scraps and debris, and leave site and a clean condition.

END OF SECTION

RENOVATION OF HISTORIC FIRE STATION NO. 2 (Phase II-A) City of Miami Project No. B-30579 08520 - 1 of 6 ALUMINUM WINDOWS

SECTION 08520

ALUMINUM WINDOWS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Extruded aluminum windows with operating sash.

B. Factory glazing.

C. Operating hardware.

D. Insect screens.


A. Section 03371 - Shotcrete: Preparation of adjacent work to receive work of this section.

B. Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry: Wood perimeter blocking and shims.

C. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers: Perimeter sealant and back-up materials.


A. Performance Requirements: Fabricate units to comply with applicable requirements of governing building code and the following: 1. Design Wind Velocity Pressures: Comply with requirements of governing

building code and ASCE 7. 2. Requirements of testing and certification by AAMA/NWWDA 101 for

commercial or higher rated windows complying with AAMA/NWWDA 101, Table 2.1 Gateway Performance listed values as determined by ASCE 7.

B. Design windows to withstand the following load requirements, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 330 using test loads equal to 1.5 times the design wind loads with 10 second duration of maximum load: 1. Design Wind Loads: Comply with requirements of ASCE 7 and Florida

Building Code, but not less than the following: a. Positive Design Wind Load: 80 PSF. b. Negative Design Wind Load: 80 PSF.

2. Member Deflection: Limit member deflection to flexure limit of glass in any direction, with full recovery of glazing materials.

C. Movement: Windows shall accommodate the following movements without damage to components, deterioration or failure of seals, buckling stress on glass, damaging loads on structural elements, damaging loads on fasteners, reduction in performance or other detrimental effects: 1. Differential movement between window and perimeter framing and/or

deflection of lintel. 2. Expansion and contraction caused by surface temperature variance of up to

180 degrees F.

D. Air Infiltration: Limit air infiltration through assembly to 0.07 cu ft/min/sq ft of wall


area, measured at a specified differential pressure across assembly in accordance with ASTM E 283. 1. Air Infiltration Test Pressure Differential: 6.24 PSI.

E. Water Infiltration (Leakage): None, when measured in accordance with ASTM E 331 and E 547. 1. Water Infiltration Test Pressure Differential: 16.5 pounds per square foot.

F. System Internal Drainage: Drain to the exterior by means of a weep drainage network any water entering joints, condensation occurring in glazing channel, or migrating moisture occurring within system.

G. Forced Entry Resistance: 1. Window assemblies shall be tested in accordance with the requirements of

FBC-B SECTION 2411.3.2, FBC-TPHVHZ TAS 202 and provisions from ANSI/AAMA/MWWDA 101/IS 2, and the forced entry prevention requirements of the AAMA 1302.5.

2. Conform to ASTM F 588 requirements for performance level 40 for window type A.

H. Missile Impact: Windows shall be tested and approved for large and small missile impact without use of hurricane shutters, in accordance with applicable requirements of the governing building code.

1.04 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Provide component dimensions, information on glass and glazing, internal drainage details, and descriptions of hardware and accessories.

C. Shop Drawings: Indicate opening dimensions, elevations of different types, framed opening tolerances, method for achieving air and vapor barrier seal to adjacent construction, anchorage locations,, and installation requirements.

D. Certificates: Certify that windows meet or exceed specified requirements.

E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Include complete preparation, installation, and cleaning requirements.


A. Manufacturer and Installer: Company specializing in fabrication of commercial aluminum windows of types required, with not fewer than three years of experience.


A. Comply with requirements of AAMA CW-10.

B. Protect finished surfaces with wrapping paper or strippable coating during installation. Do not use adhesive papers or sprayed coatings that bond to substrate when exposed to sunlight or weather.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Basis of Design: See below under description of products. 1. CGI Windows & Doors; 10100 NW 25 Street; Miami, FL 33172; Product:

a. Casement Windows: Series 238 Outswing Aluminum Casement Window, LMI (Miami-Dade County Product Approval NOA No. 08-1010.02).

b. Project Out Windows: Series 238 Project Out Window, LMI (Miami-Dade County Product Approval NOA No. 08-1010.03).

c. Fixed Windows: (1) Series 238 Aluminum Fixed Window, LMI (Miami-Dade County

Product Approval NOA No. 08-1114.06). (2) Series 238 Designer Aluminum Fixed Window, LMI (Miami-Dade

County Product Approval NOA No. 09-0303.01). d. Transom Windows: Series 450 Transom Aluminum Fixed Window, LMI

(Miami-Dade County Product Approval NOA No. 06-1027.01).

B. Other Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to Contract requirements, equivalent products by the following manufacturers may be submitted as a Substitution: 1. YKK AP America, Inc: www.ykkap.com. 2. TRACO: www.traco.com. 3. Substitutions: See Section 01600 - Product Requirements.

2.02 MATERIALS


B. Sheet Aluminum: ASTM B 209, 5005 alloy, H12 or H14 temper.

2.03 COMPONENTS

A. Frame and Vent Members: Extruded aluminum in profiles indicated on Drawings, with matching snap-on type glazing bead. 1. Frame Depth: 1.75 inches, nominal. 2. Metal Thickness:

a. Frame: 0.080 inch. b. Vent: 0.090 inch. c. Glazing Bead: 0.045 inch.

B. Vision Glass: Tinted Laminated Safety Glass meeting Product Approval and the following: 1. General:

a. Impact Safety Rating: Comply with ANSI Z97.1 and CPSC 16 CFR 1201 (Cat. I & II); obtain safety glazing ANSI Z97.1 and SGCC label.

b. Comply with ASTM C 1172, and with other requirements as specified (UL 972, ASTM F 1233, etc.).

c. Fabricate in autoclave with heat, plus pressure, free of foreign substances and air pockets.

2. Glass Assembly: a. Inner Ply:

(1) Glass Type: Tinted Heat Strengthened Glass (ASTM C 1048, Kind HS, Condition A, Type I, Class 2, Quality q3).

(2) Color: Solargray or equal, to be selected by Consultant.


(3) Thickness: 3/16 inch. b. Interlayer:

(1) Interlayer Type: ASTM C 1172. Use heat and light stable polyvinyl butyral (PVB) plasticized resin sheeting.

(2) Nominal Thickness: As required to meet specified Wind Load (Maximum Design Pressure) per applicable Product Approval NOA, but not less than 0.090-inch Solutia Saflex (or equal).

c. Outer Ply: (1) Glass Type: Tinted Heat Strengthened Glass (ASTM C 1048, Kind

HS, Condition A, Type I, Class 2, Quality q3); 3/16 inch thick. (2) Nominal Thickness: Same as Inner Ply.

3. Performance Requirements: a. Visible Light Transmittance: 40 percent. b. Visible Light Reflectance: 7 percent. c. U-Value (winter): 0.47. d. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient (SHGC): 0.45.

C. Glazing: 1. Glazing Sealant: Manufacturer’s standard silicone sealant, per Product

Approval NOA. 2. Glazing Accessories: Manufacturer’s standard, per Product Approval NOA.

a. As required to supplement the accessories provided with the items to be glazed and to provide a complete installation.

b. Ferrous metal accessories exposed in the finished work shall have a finish that will not corrode or stain while in service.

D. Aluminum Buck System: Extruded aluminum in profiles indicated on Drawings.

E. Reinforced Mullion: Nominal 2 x 6 inch tubular profile of extruded aluminum with integral reinforcement, per Product Approval NOA.

F. Sills: Brake formed aluminum; sloped for positive wash; fit under sash leg to 1/2 inch (12 mm) beyond wall face; one piece full width of opening jamb angles to terminate sill end. 1. Thickness (metal gage): As recommended by window manufacturer.

G. Insect Screen Frame: Rolled aluminum frame of rectangular sections; fit with adjustable hardware; nominal size similar to operable glazed unit.

H. Operable Sash Weatherstripping: Manufacturer's standard, per Product Approval NOA; permanently resilient, profiled to achieve effective weather seal.

I. Fasteners: Stainless steel; per Product Approval NOA.

J. Sealant and Backing Materials: As specified in Section 07900.

2.04 HARDWARE

A. Operator: Geared rotary handle fitted to projecting sash arms with limit stops.

B. Projecting Sash Arms: Cadmium plated steel, friction pivot joints with nylon bearings, removable pivot clips for cleaning.

C. Limit Stops: Resilient rubber.

2.05 FABRICATION


A. Fabricate components with smallest possible clearances and shim spacing around perimeter of assembly that will enable window installation and dynamic movement of perimeter seal.

B. Accurately fit and secure joints and corners. Make joints flush, hairline, and weatherproof.

C. Prepare components to receive anchor devices.

D. Arrange fasteners and attachments to ensure concealment from view.

E. Prepare components with internal reinforcement for operating hardware.

F. Provide steel internal reinforcement in mullions as required to meet loading requirements.

G. Provide internal drainage of glazing spaces to exterior through weep holes.

H. Assemble insect screen frames with mitered and reinforced corners. Secure wire mesh tautly in frame. Fit frame with four, spring loaded steel pin retainers.

I. Double weatherstrip operable units.

J. Factory glaze window units.

2.06 FINISHES

A. Aluminum: 1. Exterior Finish: AAMA 2605 multiple coat, thermally cured polyvinylidene

fluoride system; custom simulated wood color and pattern as selected by Consultant.

2. Interior Finish: AAMA 2604; multiple coats, thermally-cured fluoropolymer system;

3. Apply 1 coat of bituminous coating to concealed aluminum and steel surfaces in contact with dissimilar materials.

B. Shop and Touch-Up Primer for Steel Components: SSPC-Paint 25, zinc oxide, alkyd, linseed oil primer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that wall openings and adjoining air and vapor seal materials are ready to receive aluminum windows.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install windows in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Attach window frame and shims to perimeter opening to accommodate construction tolerances and other irregularities. 1. Wood bucks must be pressure treated and fully bedded in sealant.

C. Align window plumb and level, free of warp or twist. Maintain dimensional tolerances and alignment with adjacent work.

D. Install sill and sill end angles.


E. Provide thermal isolation where components penetrate or disrupt building insulation. Pack fibrous insulation in shim spaces at perimeter of assembly to maintain continuity of thermal barrier.

F. Coordinate attachment and seal of perimeter air barrier and vapor retarder materials.

G. Install operating hardware not pre-installed by manufacturer.

H. Install glass in accordance with requirements specified in Section 08800.

I. Install perimeter sealant in accordance with requirements specified in Section 07900.

3.03 TOLERANCES

A. Maximum Variation from Level or Plumb: 1/16 inches every 3 ft non-cumulative or 1/8 inches per 10 ft, whichever is less.


A. Test installed windows for compliance with performance requirements for water penetration, in accordance with ASTM E 1105 using uniform pressure and the same pressure difference as specified for laboratory testing. 1. Test 10 percent of installed windows. 2. If any window fails, test additional windows at Contractor's expense.

B. Replace windows that have failed field testing and retest until performance is satisfactory.

3.05 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust hardware for smooth operation and secure weathertight closure.

3.06 CLEANING

A. Remove protective material from factory finished aluminum surfaces.

B. Wash surfaces by method recommended and acceptable to sealant and window manufacturer; rinse and wipe surfaces clean.

C. Remove excess sealant by moderate use of mineral spirits or other solvent acceptable to sealant and window manufacturer.

END OF SECTION

RENOVATION OF HISTORIC FIRE STATION NO. 2 (Phase II-A) City of Miami Project No. B-30579 08710 - 1 of 12 DOOR HARDWARE

SECTION 08710

DOOR HARDWARE

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Door hardware for steel doors specified in Sections 08110.

B. Lock cylinders for doors for which hardware is specified in other sections.

C. Thresholds, weatherstripping, seals and door gaskets.



B. Section 01700 - Execution Requirements.

C. Section 08110 - Steel Doors and Frames.

1.03 REGULATORY AND PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. General: Door hardware shall comply with applicable requirements Federal, State, and local codes, and the following standards: 1. Accessibility: Governing building code, including but not limited to FBC-B

CHAPTER 11. a. ANSI/ICC A117.1.

2. Life Safety: Governing building code, including but not limited to the following: a. FBC-B SECTIONS 1008, and 1027. b. FBC-B CHAPTER 36, and FLORIDA FIRE PREVENTION CODE.

1) Applicable provisions of NFPA 1 (FL). 2) Applicable provisions of NFPA 101 (FL).

3. Structural: Governing building code, including but not limited to FBC-B SECTION 1714.5.

4. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by UL as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.

B. Hardware for Fire-Rated Openings: Door hardware shall comply with the following: 1. Provide hardware for fire-rated openings in compliance with FLORIDA

BUILDING CODE (FBC), NFPA 80, and UL 10C. a. This requirement takes precedence over other requirements for such

hardware. b. Provide only hardware that has been tested and listed by UL for the

types and sizes of doors required, and complies with the requirements of the door and door frame labels. 1) Where panic exit devices are required on fire-rated doors, provide

supplementary marking on door UL label indicating Fire Door to be equipped with fire exit hardware, and provide UL label on exit device indicating "Fire Exit Hardware".

C. Hardware for Smoke and Draft Control Doors: Provide hardware that enables


door assembly to comply with air leakage requirements of UBC Std 7-2, Part II.

D. Hardware for Exterior Door/Frame Assemblies: Door hardware shall comply with the following: 1. Wind Load Resistance (HVHZ): Provide hardware that enables door

assembly to withstand the following load requirements without damage or permanent set, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 330, using loads 1.5 times the design wind loads and 10 second duration of maximum load. a. Design Wind Loads: Comply with requirements of ASCE 7 and FBC-B

CHAPTER 17. b. After each specified loading, there shall be no permanent damage to

fasteners, hardware parts, or any other damage that causes the door or hardware components to be inoperable.

2. Product Approval (Miami-Dade County Product Control Notice of Acceptance): Exterior and designated interior door and frame assemblies shall comply with requirements for Product Approval indicating compliance with applicable requirements of the governing building code, including but not limited to wind velocity pressure values and missile impact criteria. Provide hardware that enables door assembly to meet the following: a. Impact Resistance: Exterior door/frame assembly and related door

hardware shall be tested to meet the FBC-TPHVHZ TAS 201 Large Missile Impact, and approved by Miami Dade Building Code Compliance Department.

b. Performance Criteria (Uniform Static Air Pressure and Cyclic Wind Pressure Loading): Exterior door/frame assembly and related door hardware shall be tested to meet the FBC-TPHVHZ TAS 202 and FBC-TPHVHZ TAS 203, and approved by Miami-Dade Building Code Compliance Department.

3. Forced Entry Resistance: Provide hardware that has been tested and approved for forced entry resistance, in accordance with FBC-B SECTION 1707.4.2.

1.04 SUBMITTALS


B. Hardware Schedule: Detailed hardware schedule, vertical format. 1. Prepare under the supervision of a registered Architectural Hardware

Consultant. 2. List and describe each opening separately. Include all doors with identical

hardware, except hand, in a single heading. Include door number, room designations, degree of swing, and hand.

3. List related details. Include dimensions, door and frame material, and other considerations affecting hardware.

4. List all hardware items to be supplied. Include manufacturer's name, quantity, product name, catalog number, size, finish, and related details needed to specifically identify what is being supplied.

5. Attach copies of catalog information for each item that include graphics to help visually identify each item.

6. For each opening with electrical hardware: Prepare and include a riser


diagram showing each electrical item in its rough location in relation to the door, all conductor requirements, and the type of back box needed to be supplied by electrical. Each riser diagram should include a detailed written description of the operation of the opening.

7. Resubmit (5) copies of the corrected schedule when required.

C. Keying Schedule: Submit keying schedule after completion of the following: 1. Receipt of approved hardware schedule. 2. Keying meeting between the Owner and the hardware supplier

D. Shop Drawings: 1. Indicate locations and mounting heights of each type of hardware,

schedules, catalog cuts, electrical characteristics and connection requirements.

2. Submit manufacturer's parts lists and templates.

E. Samples: 1. Submit 1 sample of hinge, latchset, lockset, and closer illustrating style,

color, and finish. 2. Samples will be incorporated into the Work.

F. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures, perimeter conditions requiring special attention.

G. Keys: Deliver with identifying tags to Owner by security shipment direct from hardware supplier.

H. Warranty: Submit manufacturer's warranty and ensure that forms have been completed in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years of documented experience.

B. Hardware Supplier Qualifications: Company specializing in supplying commercial door hardware with five years of documented experience. 1. Hardware Supplier Personnel: Employ an Architectural Hardware

Consultant (AHC) to assist in the work of this section.

C. Fasteners: 1. Hardware as furnished, shall conform to published templates generally

prepared for machine screw installation. 2. Furnish each item complete with all screws required for installation. 3. Insofar as practical, concealed type fasteners for hardware units that have

exposed screws shall be furnished with Phillips flat head screws, finished to match adjacent hardware.


A. Package hardware items individually; label and identify each package with door opening code to match hardware schedule.

B. Wrap, protect finishing hardware items for shipment. Deliver to manufacturing contractors, all hardware items required by them for their application; deliver


balance of hardware to the job site. Each item shall be clearly marked with its intended location.

C. Keys: Do not package keys with the individual hardware sets.

D. Store hardware in a secure location.

1.07 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate the work with other directly affected sections involving manufacture or fabrication of internal reinforcement for door hardware.

B. Furnish templates for door and frame preparation.

C. Sequence installation to ensure utility connections are achieved in an orderly and expeditious manner.

D. Coordinate Owner's keying requirements during the course of the Work.

1.08 MAINTENANCE PRODUCTS

A. Provide special wrenches and tools applicable to each different or special hardware component.

B. Provide maintenance tools and accessories supplied by hardware component manufacturer.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Hinge: Hager, except as otherwise indicated.

B. Lock and Latch: Schlage. 1. Keying and Cylinder: Everest Primus.

C. Exit Device (Panic Hardware): Von Duprin.

D. Closer: LCN.

E. Overhead Stop / Holder: Architectural Builders Hardware Mfg. Inc.

F. Wall Stop / Floor Stop: Hager or Trimco (Triangle Brass Mfg Co., Inc.).

G. Manual Bolt: Rockwood or Hager.

H. Gasketing / Weatherstripping / Threshold: Hager or Pemko.

I. Overhead Drip Guard: Hager, Zero or Pemko.

J. Protection Plates: Rockwood or Hiawatha.

K. Substitutions: See Section 01600.

2.02 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR DOOR HARDWARE PRODUCTS

A. Provide products that comply with the following: 1. Applicable provisions of Federal, State, and local codes. 2. Fire-Rated Doors: NFPA 80. 3. All Hardware on Fire-Rated Doors: Listed and classified by UL as suitable


for the purpose specified and indicated. 4. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by UL as

suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.

B. Finishes: Identified in schedule at end of section.

2.03 BUTT HINGES

A. General Requirements: 1. Size: 4.5 x 4.5 inches, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Quantity per Door Leaf: Furnish number of hinges indicated in Door

Hardware Schedule, but not fewer than the following: a. Exterior Doors: For each door, furnish number of hinges indicated in

Door Hardware Schedule or current Product Approval NOA, which ever is greater.

b. Interior Doors: For each door, furnish number of hinges indicated in Door Hardware Schedule or as follows, which ever is greater. 1) Doors that are 60 inches or less in height: Two (2) hinges per door

leaf, except as otherwise indicated. 2) Doors that are more than 60 inches to 90 inches in height: Three

(3) hinges per door leaf, except as otherwise indicated. 3) Doors that are more than 90 inches to 120 inches in height: Four

(4) hinges per door leaf, except as otherwise indicated.

B. Hinges at Interior Doors: Full mortise, standard weight; five knuckle; two ball bearings; non-rising removable concealed pin and plug. 1. At interior doors, except doors to rooms that are exposed to high humidity

and/or water: a. Product: Hager BB1279BB. b. Finish: 652 (US26D).

2. At interior doors to rooms that are exposed to high humidity and/or water (e.g., Toilet Rooms): a. Product: Hager BB1191BB. b. Finish: 630 (US32D).

C. Hinges at Exterior Doors: Full mortise, standard weight; five-knuckle; two ball bearings; stainless steel with non-removable stainless steel pin; shall be approved for statewide acceptance by the Florida Building Commission pursuant to Rule 9B-72.090, F.A.C., for approval of products and systems for use on Exterior Swinging Door Assemblies, in compliance with the structural requirements of the governing building code. 1. Product: Hager BB1191BB x NRP. 2. Finish: 630 (US32D).

2.04 LOCKS, LATCHES AND CYLINDERS

A. Bore-In Deadbolt Locks: 1. General:

a. Deadbolt locks shall not be used on labeled doors. b. Backset: 2-3/4 inches. c. Finish: 626 (US26D), unless otherwise indicated.

2. Product: Schlage B860P. a. Function: Single cylinder.


B. Locksets: 1. General:

a. Locksets shall be furnished and assembled with cylinder and labeled with door tag number and key symbol from hardware supplier, and shall meet Regulatory and Performance Requirements.

b. Backset: 2-3/4 inches. c. Tactile Warning (knurling) is required on outside levers at doors into

Mechanical Rooms, Electrical Rooms, and other hazardous rooms. d. Finish: 626 (US26D), unless otherwise indicated.

2. Product: Schlage D Series, Rhodes lever design. a. Non-keyed Locks: Not applicable.

1) Passage Lock: Schlage ND10S-RHO. 2) Bath/Bed Privacy: Schlage ND40S-RHO.

b. Keyed Locks: 1) Entrance/Office Lock: Schlage ND50PD-RHO. 2) Entrance: Schlage ND53PD-RHO. 3) Classroom Function: Schlage ND70PD-RHO. 4) Storeroom Function: Schlage ND80PD-RHO (or ND80PD-8RO,

where tactile warning is required). 5) Entrance/Office Lock w/ VandalGuard feature (locked lever freely

rotates up and down while remaining securely locked): Schlage ND91PD-RHO.

6) Entrance Lock w/ VandalGuard feature (locked lever freely rotates up and down while remaining securely locked): Schlage ND92PD-RHO.

7) Classroom Lock w/ VandalGuard feature (locked lever freely rotates up and down while remaining securely locked): Schlage ND94PD-RHO.

2.05 EXIT DEVICES

A. General: 1. Comply with applicable Regulatory and Performance Requirements,

including but not limited to specified accessibility requirements, wind load pressure ratings (exit devices at exterior doors), and Product Approval requirements (exit devices at exterior doors).

2. Special Features: a. Glass Bead Kit: Provide glass bead kit for use on doors with raised

glass beads. b. Vertical Rod and Latch Guard: Where surface-mounted vertical rod is

installed, provide Vertical Rod and Latch Guard to protect the bottom rod and latch.

3. Finish: a. Lock Stile Cover, Touch Bar End Cap, and Mechanism End Cap:

Stainless steel. b. Touch Bar: 630 (US32D). c. Mechanism Housing: Aluminum, clear anodized finish.

B. Products: 1. Exterior Steel Doors: Falcon/Monarch/Dor-O-Matic HH1590 Series Rim

Touchbar Exit Device with keyed cylinder and pull, or equal.


a. Exit Device shall comply with door manufacturer’s Miami-Dade County Product Approval NOA.

2.06 DOOR BOLTS

A. General: 1. Comply with applicable Regulatory and Performance Requirements,

including but not limited to specified accessibility requirements, wind load pressure ratings (door bolts at exterior doors), and Product Approval requirements (door bolts at exterior doors).

2. Install head/foot bolts at LHR leaf in each pair of doors without a center mullion, at openings into telephone closets, mechanical rooms, electrical rooms, and interior storage rooms. a. Comply with NFPA 80, section 2.8-2.5.

3. Provide dustproof strikes for bottom bolts, except for doors having metal thresholds.

B. Surface-Mounted Head/Foot Bolts: 1. Shall meet BHMA A156.16 requirements for L04161 or L84161. 2. Finish: 630 (US32D). 3. Product: Hager 275D (UL).

C. Flush Head/Foot Bolts: 1. Shall meet BHMA A156.16 requirements for L14251.

a. Dustproof floor strikes shall meet BHMA A156.16 requirements for L04251.

2. Finish: 626 (US26D). 3. Product: Rockwood 555, with 570 Dust Proof Strike (to prevent dirt blocking

bottom strike).

2.07 CLOSERS

A. General: 1. Provide closer(s) at fire-rated doors and other designated doors.

a. Pair Doors: Install one closer at each leaf in pair of doors, except when leaf is equipped with head and foot bolts.

3. Provide closers with metal covers, extra-duty arms, installation accessories (e.g., plates, brackets, supports, spacers, shoes, adaptors), fasteners, and other components necessary for complete installation at each particular application.

4. Size: Non-sized cylinder shall be fully adjustable (i.e., Sizes 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 and 6) for exterior doors to 48 inches wide, and for interior doors to 60 inches wide.

5. Reduced Opening Force: Shall be adjustable; maximum opening force shall comply with applicable accessibility requirements of ANSI/ICC A117.1 and FBC-BUILDING CHAPTER 11.

6. Closers shall be UL listed for self-closing doors; tested and certified under BHMA A156.4, Grade 1.

7. Warranty: Provide manufacturer's 10-year warranty.

B. Product: LCN Series P4041 x EDA.

2.08 AUXILIARY HARDWARE - DOOR PULLS, DOOR PROTECTION PLATES,


DOORSTOPS AND HOLDS

A. Protection Plates: 1. General:

a. Material: 18-gage (0.050 inch) thick stainless steel. b. Plates at fire labeled doors shall be UL-labeled. c. Shall meet the following BHMA A156.6 requirements:

1) Metal Armor Plate: J101. 2) Metal Kickplate: J102.

d. Finish: 630 (US32D). 2. Kick Plates:

a. Size: 1) 8 inches high x width of door less 2 inches, except at doors with

louvers or as otherwise indicated. 2) 4 inches high x width of door less 2 inches, at doors with louvers.

b. Product: Hiawatha metal kick plate.

B. Doorstops and Holds: 1. General:

a. Wall-Mounted Doorstop and Hold: Provide at all doors, except at doors where a wall-mounted stop is impractical. 1) Include adequate concealed backing reinforcement where doorstop

is to be installed on drywall or plaster wall surface. 2) Finish - Base: US32D.

b. Floor-Mounted Doorstop and Hold: Provide at doors only where wall-mounted stop is impractical. 1) At carpeted floors, provide 3/8-inch (10 mm) thick riser plate, with

machined finish. 2) Finish: US26D.

c. Overhead Doorstop and Hold: Provide at doors only where wall-mounted stop and floor-mounted stop is impractical. 1) Surface mounted. 2) Finish: US26D.

2. Products: a. Wall-Mounted Doorstop:

1) Convex Type (for doors not having push button lockset): Hager 230W.

2) Concave Type (for doors having office function or push-button lockset): Hager 234W.

b. Floor-Mounted Doorstop and Hold: Hager 258F. c. Overhead Doorstop and Hold: ABH 3324.

2.09 SILENCERS, WEATHER STRIPPING, THRESHOLDS, AND MISCELLANEOUS TRIM

A. Silencers: 1. General:

a. Provide three silencers for each single door, two for each pair. 2. Product: Hager 307D.

B. Weather Stripping, Thresholds, Door Bottoms, and Astragals: 1. General:


a. Thresholds shall comply with accessibility requirements specified in Regulatory and Performance Requirements; in addition, thresholds installed at exterior openings shall comply with Product Approval requirements.

b. Provide rain drips for all exterior doors not having overhead roof protection.

c. Stop-applied soundseals or weather stripping shall not exceed 5/16-inch thickness.

2. Product: a. Thresholds:

1) Panic Type Thresholds, 5 inches wide x 1/2 inch high (for exterior and sound control use): Hager 520SAS. Pemko 2005AV, or equal.

2) Saddle Type Thresholds: (a) 3 inches wide x 1/4 inch high (only for interior use at change of

floor finishes): Hager 418SA, Pemko 151A, or equal. (b) 5 inches wide x 1/4 inch high (only for interior use at change of

floor finishes): Hager 413SA, Pemko 271A, or equal. 3) Marble Threshold (for toilet rooms): Marble, white or gray, honed

finish; 2 inches (50 mm) wide by full width of wall or frame opening; 1/2 inch (12 mm) thick thick; beveled one long edge with radiused corners on top side; without holes, cracks, or open seams.

b. Door Bottoms: 1) Brush Type Sweep: Hager, 801S, or equal. 2) Automatic, Low Closing Force: Hager 740S, Pemko 4131CSL, or

equal. c. Weather Stripping / Soundseals:

1) Rigid Weather Stripping: Hager 891SAS, Pemko 303DS, or equal. 2) Press-On Weather Stripping: Hager 736S, Pemko S88W, or equal. 3) Brush Type Weather Stripping: Hager 801S, or equal. 4) Soundproofing: Hager 862-SXN or -SDN, Pemko

d. Astragals: Hager 837SAV.

C. Miscellaneous Fasteners and Trim: 1. Fasteners:

a. Hollow Metal Doors: Accepted machine. b. Kick Plates: O.H. Phillips recess Type A SMS. c. Thresholds: Hager FHSL 25-1/4 x 1/4-20 x 2 inches cadmium-plated

expansion screw in one unit, or accepted equivalent. d. Brush Type Weather Stripping: As recommended by manufacturer. e. Finish: Match finish of surfaces to which fastener is applied.

2. Viewfinder (Peephole): a. Product: Hager 1755 x 26D.

3. Overhead Drip Guards: a. General:

1) Material: Extruded aluminum, not less than 0.08 inch (2.03 mm) thick.

2) Finish: Clear anodized aluminum. 3) Overhead Drip Guards: Approximately 1.5 inches (38 mm) high x

2.5 inches (64 mm) projection, with length equal to width of door frame; align bottom of drip guard with door frame rabbet, unless


otherwise indicated. 4) Door Rain Drips: Approximately 1.5 inches (38 mm) high x 5/8-inch

(16 mm) projection, with length equal to width of door; align bottom edge of drip with bottom edge of door.

b. Product: 1) Overhead Drip Guards: Hager 810S.

2.10 CYLINDERS AND CORES

A. Provide cylinders and cores for new locks, including locks provided under other sections. Provide cylinders and cores with six pin tumblers. 1. Product: Schlage Full Size Interchangeable Core.

a. Exterior Doors: Schlage Everest Primus Level 9 keys (keys that are exclusive to their facility).

b. Interior Doors: Schlage Everest Primus conventional keys.

B. Provide cylinders from products of one manufacturer, and provide cores from the products of one manufacturer.

C. Rim cylinders, mortise cylinders, and knobs of bored locksets shall have interchangeable cores which are removable by special control keys.

D. Stamp each interchangeable core with a key control symbol in a concealed place on the core.

2.11 PADLOCKS

A. General: Laminated steel padlock with the following characteristics: 1. 1-3/4 inch (44mm) wide laminated steel body. 2. 5-pin tumbler cylinder. 3. Removable cylinder. 4. At least 9,000 key changes available. 5. Shackle Diameter: 5/16 inch (8 mm). 6. Hardened steel shackle:

(a) Vertical clearance: 1-1/2 inch (38 mm). (b) Horizontal clearance: 3/4 inch (19 mm).

B. Product: Master Lock 21 Series padlock (or equal). 1. Where two padlocks are used on a single door, they shall be “keyed

alike”. 2. Where padlocks are used on more than one door opening to a single

space, they shall be “keyed alike”.

2.12 KEYING

A. Meeting: The Hardware Supplier shall prepare a preliminary keying schedule, then meet with the Owner’s Representative and Architect to review it and make changes to accommodate the Owner’s requirements. 1. Prior to meeting, submit proposed keying schedule to Architect and Owner’s

Representative.

B. Master key cylinders and key in groups, unless otherwise specified. Factory-masterkey with manufacturer retaining permanent keying records. 1. Provide 6 masterkeys for each masterkey set. 2. Provide 3 change keys for each lock.


3. Provide 2 control keys for core removal. 4. Stamp keys "DO NOT DUPLICATE."

C. Cylinders shall meet the requirements of UL 437.

D. Delivery of Keys: Change keys shall be packed and delivered with each lock or cylinder. Master keys shall be sent by Registered Mail, or otherwise as requested by the owner, to the individual and address that the owner specifies at the keying meeting.

2.13 KEY CABINET

A. Cabinet Construction: Sheet steel construction, piano hinged door with lock master keyed to building system.

B. Cabinet Size: Size for project keys plus 10 percent growth.

C. Horizontal metal strips for key hook labeling with clear plastic strip cover over labels.

D. Finish: Baked enamel, color as selected.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that doors and frames are ready to receive work and dimensions are as indicated on shop drawings.

B. Verify that electric power is available to power operated devices and of the correct characteristics.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. General: 1. Install hardware in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and Florida

Building Code. 2. Use templates provided by hardware item manufacturer. 3. Install hardware on fire-rated doors and frames in accordance with Florida

Building Code and NFPA 80. 4. Mounting heights for hardware from finished floor to center line of hardware

item: a. For Steel Doors and Frames: Comply with DHI (LOCS).

1) Exterior Doors and Designated Interior Doors: Where mounting height(s) indicated in applicable Product Approval Installation Instructions conflict with mounting height(s) recommended in DHI (LOCS), the requirements of the Product Approval Installation Instructions shall prevail.

b. Push Plates: 1-inch above pushpad, and 1-inch from exit device head. c. Push Plate with a Vision Panel: 1-inch above exit device, and centered

between vision panel and edge of door. d. Door Pulls: Top hole of door pull shall be 2 inches above the bottom of

exit device casing, at casing centerline. e. Kick Plates / Armor Plates:

1) Push side of single-acting doors; both sides of double acting doors.


2) 1-inch from door bottom, or 1/2-inch from top of surface mounted automatic door bottom.

f. Mop Plates: Bottom, flush with bottom of door. g. Key Cabinet: Locate where directed. Tag one set of file keys and one

set of duplicate keys; place other keys in appropriately marked envelopes, or tag each key. Furnish complete instructions for setup and use of key control system. On tags and envelopes, indicate door and room numbers, or master or grand master key.

3.03 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust work under provisions of Section 01700.

B. Adjust hardware for smooth operation.


A. Protect finished Work under provisions of Section 01700.

B. Do not permit adjacent work to damage hardware or finish.

3.05 HARDWARE SCHEDULE (See attached Appendix 1 - Hardware Schedule).

END OF SECTION

RENOVATION OF HISTORIC FIRE STATION NO. 2 (Phase II-A) City of Miami Project No. B-30579 08710a - 1 of 2 DOOR HARDWARE

APPENDIX 1 - HARDWARE SCHEDULE

SECTION 08710 – APPENDIX 1 HARDWARE SCHEDULE

EXTERIOR DOORS Hardware Group No. 1 Door Type: PR 3-0 x 7-0, flush stl Door #: 202. Room: 2nd Floor South (202). Exterior Requirements: M-D County Product Approval (LMI-rated; MDP per C&C

Design Wall Pressures indicated on Structural Drawings). Full Mortise Butt Hinge: 6 EA HAG BB1191BB x NRP 4.5 x 4.5 630 Lockset (Active Leaf, LHR): 1 EA SCH ND92PD-RHO (entrance function) 626 Deadlock (Active Leaf, LHR): 1 EA SCH B860P (single cylinder) 626 Cylinder: 2 EA SCH Everest Primus 626 Flush Bolts, Top & Bottom (Inactive Leaf, LHR):

2 EA ROC Series 555 626 Closer (Active Leaf, LHR): 1 EA LCN P4041 x EDA Series x MC AL Weatherstripping (Head and Jambs):

1 SET PEM S88 x LAR ___ Overhead Drip Guard: 1 EA HAG 810s x 74” MIL Kickplate: 2 EA HIA 8” x 2” LDW 630 Door Stop (Active Leaf, LHR):

1 EA HAG 230W 626 Door Stop (Inactive Leaf, RHR):

1 EA ABH 3324 US26D Silencers: 2 EA HAG 307D GRY Bumper Threshold w/ PVC Bulb Weatherstripping:

1 EA PEM 2005 x LAR AL Split Astragal: 1 EA PEM 305 MIL Hardware Group No. 2 Door Type: 3-0 x 7-0, flush stl w/ panic exit device. Door #: 001, 101B, 005. Rooms: 1st Floor North (101); Elevator Lobby (101B);

1st Floor South (102). Exterior Requirements: M-D County Product Approval (LMI-rated; MDP per C&C

Design Wall Pressures indicated on Structural Drawings). Full Mortise Butt Hinge: 4 EA HAG BB1191BB x NRP 4.5 x 4.5 630 Exit Device: 1 EA VON CD-98-L-2 x SNB 630 Cylinder: 2 EA SCH Everest Primus (coordin w/ exit device) 626 Closer: 1 EA LCN P4041 x EDA Series AL Weatherstripping (Head and Jambs):

1 EA DOOR MFR STANDARD, PER PRODUCT APPROVAL Overhead Drip Guard: 1 EA HAG 810s x 40” MIL Kickplate: 1 EA HIA 8” x 2” LDW 630 Door Stop: 1 EA HAG 230W 626 Silencers: 3 EA HAG 307D GRY

RENOVATION OF HISTORIC FIRE STATION NO. 2 (Phase II-A) City of Miami Project No. B-30579 08710a - 2 of 2 DOOR HARDWARE

APPENDIX 1 - HARDWARE SCHEDULE

Bumper Threshold w/ PVC Bulb Weatherstripping: 1 EA DOOR MFR STANDARD, PER PRODUCT APPROVAL

Hardware Group No. 3 Door Type: 3-0 x 7-0, fire-rated (C Label), flush stl w/ panic exit device. Door #: S2B, 004. Rooms: Stair 2 (S2); 1st Floor South (102). Exterior Requirements: M-D County Product Approval (LMI-rated; MDP per C&C

Design Wall Pressures indicated on Structural Drawings). Full Mortise Butt Hinge: 4 EA HAG BB1191BB x NRP 4.5 x 4.5 630 Exit Device: 1 EA VON 98-EO-F x SNB 630 Closer: 1 EA LCN P4041 x EDA Series AL Weatherstripping (Head and Jambs):

1 EA DOOR MFR STANDARD, PER PRODUCT APPROVAL Overhead Drip Guard: 1 EA HAG 810s x 40” MIL Kickplate: 1 EA HIA 8” x 2” LDW 630 Door Stop: 1 EA HAG 230W 626 Silencers: 3 EA HAG 307D GRY Bumper Threshold w/ PVC Bulb Weatherstripping:

1 EA DOOR MFR STANDARD, PER PRODUCT APPROVAL

INTERIOR DOORS Hardware Group No. 4 Door Type: 3-0 x 7-0, fire-rated (C Label), flush stl w/ panic exit device. Door #: S2A, S2C. Rooms: Stair 2 (S2). Full Mortise Butt Hinge: 3 EA HAG BB1279BB x NRP 4.5 x 4.5 630 Panic Exit Device: 1 EA VON 98-L-BE-F 630 Closer: 1 EA LCN P4041 x EDA Series AL Kickplate: 1 EA HIA 18” x 2” LDW 630 Door Stop: 1 EA HAG 230W 626 Silencers: 3 EA HAG 307D GRY Bumper Threshold w/ PVC Bulb Weatherstripping:

1 EA HAG 520SAS x LAR AL Weatherstripping (Head and Jambs):

1 SET HAG 862-SXN or -SDN MIL Hardware Group No. 5 Door Type: Curb-mounted roof scuttle. Door #: N/A Rooms: Stair 2 (S2) Padlock: 2 EA MAS 21 Series Weatherstripping (perimeter): 1 SET DOOR MFR STANDARD

RENOVATION OF HISTORIC FIRE STATION NO. 2 (Phase II-A) City of Miami Project No. B-30566A 09206 - 1 of 5 METAL LATH

SECTION 09206

METAL LATH

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Metal lath for Portland cement plaster / stucco.

B. Stucco and plaster beads, screeds, joint accessories, and other trim.

C. Access panels.


A. Section 01600 - Product Requirements

B. Section 09220 - Portland Cement Plaster.

1.03 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Furnish and install framing and lath systems to limit deflection of finished assembly as follows: 1. Maximum Deflection of Vertical Assemblies: 1/360, under lateral point load

of 100 lbs (445 N). 2. Maximum Deflection of Horizontal Assemblies: 1/240, under dead loads and

wind uplift, except where 1/360 is required for compliance with applicable requirements of the governing building code.

1.04 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Provide data on metal lathing components, structural characteristics, material limitations, and finish.


A. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum five years documented experience.

1.06 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate work with installation of access panels specified in other sections.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Metal Lath: 1. Alabama Metal Industries Corporation: www.amico-online.com. 2. Clark Steel: www.clarksteel.com. 3. Western Metal Lath, Inc: www.wmlinc.com. 4. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01600.


B. Beads, Screeds, Joint Accessories, and Other Trim: 1. Plastic Components, Inc. (PCI): 9051 NW 97 Terrace, Miami, FL 33178; Tel.

305-885-0561. 2. Vinyl Corp.: 8255 NE 70 Street; Miami, FL 33166; Tel. 305-477-6464. 3. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01600.

C. Underlayment: 1. Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing Incorporated: www.carlisle-ccw.com. 2. GAF 3. Owens-Corning 4. TAMKO 5. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01600.

D. Access Doors: 1. Acudor Products Inc: www.acudor.com. 2. Karp Associates, Inc: www.karpinc.com. 3. Milcor Inc: www.milcorinc.com. 4. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01600.

2.02 FRAMING MATERIALS

A. General: 1. Framing materials shall comply with applicable requirements of the

governing building code, including but not limited to the following: a. Main runners or carriers for ceiling framing shall be rolled steel channels

not less than the sizes and weights set forth in FBC-B TABLE 2514.5.2. b. Cross furring, or spacers, for various spacing of main runners or other

supports shall be not less than as set forth in FBC-B TABLE 2514.5.3. c. Hangers supporting suspended ceilings shall be not less than as set

forth in FBC-B TABLE 2514.5.4.

2.03 METAL LATH

A. Metal Lath: Metal lath shall comply with applicable requirements of FBC-B Chapter 25. 1. Diamond Mesh Metal Lath: ASTM C 847; galvanized; minimum 2.5 lbs/sq

yd. 2. Self-Furring Metal Lath: ASTM C 847; galvanized.

a. Flat Expanded Metal Lath: Minimum 2.5 lbs / sq ft. b. Flat Rib Metal Lath: 1/8 inch (3 mm) thick; minimum 2.75 lbs / sq ft. c. Ribbed Metal Lath: 3/8 inch (9 mm) thick; minimum 3.4 lbs / sq ft.

B. Welded Wire Lath: ASTM C 933; galvanized; with 2 inch (50 mm) square openings, paper or felt backing, of weight to suit application and as specified in FBC-B TABLE 2514.3.2 for framing spacing.

C. Corner Mesh: Formed sheet steel, minimum 0.018 inch (0.5 mm) thick, expanded flanges shaped to permit complete embedding in plaster, minimum 2 inch (50 mm) size; galvanized.

D. Strip Mesh: Expanded metal lath, same weight as lath, 2 inch (50 mm) wide x 24 inch (600 mm) long; galvanized.

2.04 ACCESSORIES


A. Beads, Screeds, and Joint Accessories: 1. General:

a. Material: PVC conforming to ASTM D 1784, ASTM C 1063 and ASTM D 4216.

b. Refer to Section 09206 for additional requirements. 2. Casing Bead: Prefabricated casing bead shall terminate plaster against

dissimilar materials (e.g., door frame, fixed wall louver frame); perforated flange. a. Product:

(1) 1.75 inch Flange: PCI 66xx, or equal; ground dimension to match thickness of plaster.

(2) 2.25 inch Flange: PCI 66xxL, or equal; ground dimension to match thickness of plaster.

3. Drip Screed Reveal: Prefabricated screed shall join soffit and fascia while providing a drip joint to prevent water stains on soffit and vertical wall of building; 1/2 inch reveal width; perforated flanges. a. Product: PCI DCSxx-50, or equal; ground dimension to match thickness

of plaster. 4. Control Joint: Designed to relieve stress and assist in controlling cracking in

large areas of walls; One-piece accordion profile with 2 inch perforated flange at both sides; overall width 4 inches; furnish with removable tape. a. Product: PCI 15xx, or equal; ground dimension to match thickness of

plaster.

B. Access Panels - Non-Fire Rated: Formed steel shop primed, except as otherwise indicated.

C. Anchorage: Tie wire, nails, and other metal supports, of type and size to suit application; to rigidly secure materials in place, galvanized. Refer to Section 09111 for additional requirements.

D. Fasteners: ASTM C 1002 self-piercing tapping screws.

E. Underlayment: 1. Description: Composite membrane consisting of fiberglass reinforced

rubberized asphalt laminated to an impermeable polyethylene film layer, providing dual-barrier moisture protection.

2. Physical and Performance Requirements: a. Thickness (ASTM D 1970): 55 mils b. Tensile Strength (ASTM D 412): 25 lbf/in, min. c. Moisture Vapor Permeability (ASTM E 96): 0.03 perms. d. Water Absorption (ASTM D 1970): 0.1 percent, max.

3. Product: "CCW WIP 200" by Carlisle Coatings and Waterproofing, Inc., or equal.

F. Tie Wire: Annealed galvanized steel.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify existing conditions before starting work.


B. Verify that substrates are ready to receive work and conditions are suitable for application.


A. Install lath and furring for plaster work in accordance with ASTM C 841.

3.03 CONTROL JOINTS

A. Locate joints as indicated on drawings.

B. Construct control joints of back-to-back casing beads set 1/4 inch (6 mm) apart. Set both beads over 4 inch (100 mm) wide strip of self-adhering roofing underlayment.

3.04 ACCESS PANELS

A. Install access panels and rigidly secure in place.

B. Install frames plumb and level in opening. Secure rigidly in place.

C. Position to provide convenient access to concealed work requiring access.

3.05 LATH INSTALLATION

A. General: 1. Apply metal lath taut, with long dimension perpendicular to supports. 2. Lap ends minimum 1 inch (25 mm). Secure end laps with tie wire where they

occur between supports. 3. Lap sides of diamond mesh lath minimum 1-1/2 inches (38 mm). 4. Nest outside ribs of rib lath together. 5. Attach metal lath to wood supports using nails at maximum 6 inches (150

mm) on center. a. Metal and wire lath shall be attached to vertical wood supports with the

equivalent of 4d galvanized common nails driven to a penetration of at least 3/4 inch (19 mm) and bent over to engage not less than three strands of lath.

b. Metal and wire lath shall be attached to ceiling joists or other horizontal wood supports with the equivalent of No. 11-gauge, barbed, galvanized nails 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) long having a head not less than 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) in diameter.

6. Attach metal lath to metal supports using screws at maximum 6 inches (150 mm) on center. 1. Metal and wire lath shall be attached to horizontal and vertical metal

supports with the equivalent of No. 8 galvanized sheet-metal screws. 7. Attach metal lath to concrete and concrete masonry using wire hair pins.

Attach anchors to backup surface; space at maximum 24 inches (600 mm) on center.

8. Continuously reinforce internal angles with corner mesh, except where the metal lath returns 3 inches (75 mm) from corner to form the angle reinforcement; fasten at perimeter edges only.

9. Place corner bead at external wall corners; fasten at outer edges of lath only. 10. Place base screeds at termination of plaster areas; secure rigidly in place. 11. Place 4 inch (100 mm) wide strips of metal lath centered over junctions of

dissimilar backing materials. Secure rigidly in place.


12. Place lath vertically above each top corner and each side of door frames to 6 inches (150 mm) above ceiling line.

13. Place casing beads at terminations of plaster finish. Butt and align ends. Secure rigidly in place.

14. Place additional strip mesh diagonally at corners of lathed openings. Secure rigidly in place.

B. Control (Expansion and Contraction) Joints: Install where indicated, where expansion joints occur in the structural walls and ceilings and where ceiling framing or furring changes direction. Terminate lath at each side of joint and fasten joints securely to lath.

C. Plastering Beads: 1. Install edge trim (casing bead):

a. At the edges of plaster which abuts or adjoins an unplastered surface. b. On each surface at the internal angle formed by load bearing and non-

load bearing walls and partitions abutting structural walls, columns, or floor-ceiling slabs.

c. On each side of the joint between walls or partitions constructed of dissimilar materials which require plastering.

2. Fill voids formed in corners with sealant. 3. Install corner beads at all vertical external corners of plaster walls.

D. Fire-Resistant Assemblies: Wherever fire-resistant construction is indicated, provide all materials and application methods, including types and spacing of fasteners, in accordance with the specifications contained in the UL Fire Resistance for the Design Number(s) indicated.

E. Access Panels: Install in suspended ceilings and plastered walls at locations indicated.

3.06 ERECTION TOLERANCES

A. Maximum Variation from True Lines and Levels: 1/8 inch in 10 feet (3 mm in 3 m).

B. Maximum Variation from True Position: 1/8 inch (3 mm).

END OF SECTION

RENOVATION OF HISTORIC FIRE STATION NO. 2 (Phase II-A) City of Miami Project No. B-30579 09222 - 1 of 9 PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER & STUCCO

SECTION 09222

PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER & STUCCO

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Portland cement plaster for installation over new metal lath, masonry, and concrete.

B. Repairs and refinishing of existing Portland cement plaster.


A. Section 02223 - Selective Demolition for Remodeling: Removal of portions of existing Portland cement plaster from existing walls, beams, columns and other surfaces.

B. Section 03300 - Cast-In-Place Concrete.

C. Section 03371 - Shotcrete.

D. Section 04810 - Unit Masonry Assemblies.

E. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers: Sealant for plaster control joints.

F. Section 09206 - Metal Lath: Metal furring and lathing for plaster.

G. Section 09900 - Paints and Coatings: Field-applied finish for plaster and stucco.

1.03 SUBMITTALS


B. Documentation of survey of existing conditions, including identification of areas of defective plaster to be removed. Coordinate with submittals for Section 02223.

C. Product Data: 1. Provide data on plaster materials, characteristics and limitations of products

specified. a. Plaster materials. b. Stucco patch materials. c. Accessories for plaster, each type. d. Fasteners. e. Bonding compounds, including application instructions. f. Admixtures, including mixing and application instructions.

2. Provide data on paint removal materials and processes, including instructions.

D. Samples: 1. Submit two samples, 24 x 24 inch (600 x 600 mm) in size illustrating finish

and texture.



A. Stucco repair work shall conform to recommendations of the following: 1. PCA IS526. 2. Stucco patch mix manufacturer.

B. Perform Work in accordance with ASTM C 926.

C. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum five years of documented experience.

D. MOCK-UP 1. Construct mock-up of exterior wall, 10 feet (3 m) long by 10 feet (3 m) wide,

illustrating surface finish. 2. Locate where directed. 3. Accepted mock-up may remain as part of the Work.


A. Where lead-based paint hazards are found to be present on surfaces designated for refinishing, such lead-based paint shall be removed in accordance with standards established by the EPA Administrator pursuant to Title IV of the Toxic Substances Control Act (TSCA).

B. Conform to governing building code and applicable regulatory requirements for paint stripping materials and procedures, and for disposal or waste products generated by such processes.


A. Protection: 1. Protect all adjacent building surfaces from damage, staining or deterioration

resulting from work of this Section.

B. Safety: 1. Contractor shall use all means necessary to ensure that no person (whether

involved in the work of this Section or not) is harmed or injured due to the work of this section. Comply with all applicable laws, codes and regulations.

2. Lead: a. Existing paint may contain lead. Take all necessary precautions to

ensure the safety of all persons engaged in removing lead-based paint. b. Dispose of all residues generated from lead-based paint stripping in a

legal manner in accordance with all local, state and federal codes.

C. Do not apply plaster when substrate or ambient air temperature is under 50 degrees F (10 degrees C) or over 80 degrees F (27 degrees C).

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 PLASTER MATERIALS

A. Compatibility: Provide products recommended by the manufacturers to be fully compatible with indicated substrate and finish materials specified in related sections.

B. Comply with applicable requirements of governing building code, including but not limited to the following:


1. Lathing and plastering materials shall conform to the standards listed in FBC-B TABLE 2507.2 and FBC-B CHAPTER 35 and, where required for fire protection, shall also conform to the provisions of FBC-B CHAPTER 7.

2. Exterior and interior cement plaster and lathing shall be done with the appropriate materials listed in FBC-B TABLE 2507.2 and FBC-B CHAPTER 35.

C. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I.

D. Masonry Cement: ASTM C 91 Type N.

E. Lime: Lime shall conform to the following: 1. ASTM C 5. 2. ASTM C 206, Type S.

F. Aggregate: In accordance with ASTM C 926 and as follows: 1. Inorganic aggregates used for plaster and stucco shall conform to ASTM C

35, except that graduation of locally produced sand shall be such that the fineness modulus is between 1.20 and 2.35.

G. Water: Clean, fresh, potable and free of mineral or organic matter which can affect plaster.

H. Admixture: Air entrainment type, conforming to ASTM C 260.

I. Stucco Patch Mix: ASTM C 926, durable, fast-setting patching material designed specifically for stucco repair; formulated with premium grade hydraulic cement, high-performance water-soluble polymers, and high quality aggregates. When mixed with water, stucco patching material shall produce a rich, non-shrink formulation with excellent bonding characteristics, designed for full-depth repairs in a single application. Stucco patching material shall be specially formulated to provide a simple, user friendly application that can easily be textured to match a variety of stucco surfaces; shall be paintable as soon as it is dry to provide a one-hour stucco repair solution. 1. Product: Rapid Set Stucco Patch, or equal.

J. Bonding Agent: One-time re-emulsifiable type, recommended for bonding plaster to concrete surfaces in interior or exterior locations. 1. Shall meet or exceed ASTM C 1059 Type I and ASTM C 932 specifications. 2. Product: Lambco Primer, or equal.

2.02 PLASTER MIXES

A. General: 1. All plaster work shall be three-coat application, mixed and proportioned in

accordance with ASTM C 926. a. Portland cement plaster shall be mixed and proportioned in accordance

with Tables 1, 2, 3 and 4 and accompanying requirements of ASTM C 926, using measuring devices of known volume with successive batches proportioned alike. (1) Admixtures shall be proportioned, mixed and applied in accordance

with printed directions of the admixture manufacturer. b. All plaster shall be prepared in a mechanical mixer, using sufficient

water to produce a workable consistency and uniform color.


2. Mix only as much plaster as can be used prior to initial set. 3. Mix materials dry, to uniform consistency, before adding water, unless

otherwise indicated. 4. Exterior Plaster: Add air entrainment admixtures to all coats to provide 5-7

percent entrainment. 5. Protect mixtures from contamination and excessive evaporation. 6. Do not retemper mixes after initial set has occurred.

a. First coat (base coat) plaster that has stiffened because of evaporation of water may be retempered one time only to restore the required consistency. Plaster not used within 1.5 hours from start of initial mixing shall be discarded.

b. Third coat (finish coat) plaster shall not be retempered.

B. Mixing Stucco Patch Materials: Follow manufacturer's mixing instructions.

2.03 METAL LATH

A. Metal Lath and Accessories: As specified in Section 09206.

B. Beads, Screeds, and Joint Accessories: As specified in Section 09206.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. General: 1. Verify the suitability of existing conditions before starting work. 2. Verify that surfaces to receive plaster are straight and true within 1/4 inch in

10 ft. 3. Verify that no substances detrimental to plaster bond (e.g., bituminous or

water repellent coatings, form release agents, etc.) exist on concrete or concrete masonry surfaces.

B. Masonry: 1. Verify surface is ready to receive work of this section.

a. Joints shall be cut flush, not tooled or floated. b. Mortar shall be fully cured, and shall be carrying its design dead load

before plaster is applied.

C. Concrete: 1. New concrete should be cured for a minimum of 28 days. 2. Verify surfaces are flat, honeycomb areas are filled flush, and surfaces are

ready to receive work of this section.

D. Existing Plaster: After removal of defective plaster, paint and other materials detrimental to plaster bond, verify that existing plaster to remain is sound and ready to receive work of this section.

E. Metal Lath and Accessories: Verify lath is flat, secured to substrate, and joint and surface perimeter accessories are in place.

F. Mechanical and Electrical: Verify services within walls have been tested and approved.

3.02 PREPARATION


A. Surfaces that are to receive plaster shall be prepared and conditioned in accordance with ASTM C 926, except as otherwise specified. 1. Surfaces to receive plaster shall be straight and true within 1/4 inch in 10 ft,

and shall be free of form oil or other elements which would interfere with bonding. a. Fill holes, cracks and similar small voids flush with Portland cement

plaster to provide uniform substrate within the specified tolerance. b. Deviations from the true plane of the wall will lead to variable plaster

thickness. If misalignment is excessive (i.e., where plaster thickness will exceed the total thickness specified in ASTM C 926 Table 1 for solid bases), self-furring metal base shall be installed in accordance with ASTM C 1063.

2. Surfaces shall have adequate suction (ability to absorb water) or surface roughness, or both, to provide the bond required for the plaster.

3. Smooth or nonabsorbent solid surfaces (e.g., cast-in-place concrete) shall be prepared to receive plaster by one or both of the following methods: a. Sandblasting, wire brushing, acid etching, or chipping or a combination

thereof. b. Application of a surface-applied bonding compound suitable for exterior

exposure solid surfaces in accordance with the manufacturer’s written directions.

4. Where bond cannot be obtained over the entire surface to receive plaster by one or more of the methods above, or where plaster thickness will exceed the total thickness specified in ASTM C 926 Table 1 for solid bases, self-furring metal base shall be installed in accordance with ASTM C 1063.

B. Remove projections or other elements which would interfere with bonding. 1. Form ties or other obstructions shall be removed or trimmed back even with

the surface of the solid base.

C. Concrete: Clean concrete surfaces of foreign matter. Wash surfaces with clean water. 1. Refer to ASTM D 4258, D 4259, D 4262 and D 4263 for the recommended

practice for cleaning and preparation of concrete surfaces. 2. Cleaning agents can be used to remove most surface contaminants.

a. Careful attention to manufacturer’s directions is necessary. b. Particular care is required to insure complete wash down and

neutralization of the substrate. 3. Laitance, form release agents, and curing compounds can be removed by

light sandblasting. 4. Wire brushes, hammer and chisel, and other hand or power tools can be

used to remove mortar and concrete from the surface. 5. Water blasting and dry blasting are also effective methods of removing

contaminants. a. Care must be taken to avoid cutting too deeply.

D. Concrete Masonry: Clean concrete masonry surfaces of foreign matter. Wash surfaces with clean water. 1. Refer to ASTM D 4261 for the recommended practice for cleaning and

preparation of concrete unit masonry surfaces. 2. Prior to application of plaster, dampen masonry surfaces to reduce


excessive suction.

E. Existing Plaster Surfaces: 1. Remove paint and coatings from plaster and stucco surfaces by mechanical

methods; do not use heat guns or chemical strippers. 2. Survey and test all existing plaster surfaces.

a. Examine all existing plastered surfaces to identify spalled or missing plaster, cracks, delamination, and other existing plaster defects.

b. Test all plaster surfaces for delamination by tapping surface with a coin or marble, and listening for differences in the sounds made by that tapping. (1) Delamination can be detected by a hollow sound.

c. As survey and testing progresses, cut out and remove existing plaster with defects (e.g., spalling, delamination, cracking). Only sound plaster that is securely bonded to the structural substrate and suitable for new plaster base may remain.

3. Surface Preparation: a. Chip back perimeter to expose enough substrate area to provide proper

bonding. b. Maintain an irregular, fractured edge. c. Do NOT install against a saw cut edge. d. Concrete must be free of materials such as paint, oil, curing compound,

bond breaker, etc. that will inhibit bonding. e. Open cracks to minimum width of 1/4 inch. f. Thoroughly clean extraneous material such as dirt, loose chips, and dust

from concrete surface. If compressed air is used, it shall be free of oil. g. In hot, dry, or windy conditions, pre-wet the adjoining stucco. h. Allow surface to dry.

4. Mixing Stucco Patch Materials: a. Organize personnel and equipment before mixing. b. See product package for amount of water to use. c. Mixed material should have a temperature of about 70 degrees F.

Warmer material will set faster than expected and cooler material will have slower strength gain. Control the mixed temperature by protecting the bags of repair material from temperature extremes and adjust the mixed temperature by using hot or cold water.

d. Add potable water first, then add material while mixing mechanically or by hand.

e. Do NOT add any other admixtures. Do NOT add sand, aggregate, or cement.

f. Mix until smooth, uniform, and lump-free (usually 3 to 5 minutes). g. Do NOT re-temper. h. Clean mixing bucket and tools between batches.

3.03 PLASTERING

A. General: 1. Comply with applicable requirements of the governing building code,

including but not limited to the following: a. Minimum thickness of plaster shall conform to the requirements

specified in FBC-B TABLE 1405.2.


b. Cement plaster applied to exterior walls shall conform to the requirements specified in FBC-B CHAPTER 25.

c. Portland cement-based plaster shall be applied in accordance with ASTM C 926, excluding Table 4 of that standard.

d. The second coat shall be brought out to proper thickness, rodded and floated sufficiently rough to provide adequate bond for the finish coat. The second coat shall have no variation greater than 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) in any direction under a 5-foot (1524 mm) straight edge.

e. First and second coats of cement plaster shall be applied and moist cured as set forth in ASTM C 926 and FBC-B TABLE 2512.6.

2. Apply plaster in accordance with ASTM C 926. 3. Two-Coat Application Over Existing Stucco (surfaces where portions of

existing stucco have been removed, and portions of existing stucco remain): After stucco patch application, apply two coats as follows: a. Apply first coat to nominal thickness of 3/8 inch (9 mm). b. Apply finish coat to nominal thickness of 1/8 inch (3 mm).

4. Three-Coat Application Over Metal Lath: a. Apply first coat to a nominal thickness of 3/8 inch (9 mm). b. Apply second coat to a nominal thickness of 3/8 inch (9 mm). c. Apply finish coat to a nominal thickness of 1/8 inch (3 mm).

5. Three-Coat Application Over Solid Bases: a. Apply first coat to a nominal thickness of 1/4 inch (6 mm). b. Apply second coat to a nominal thickness of 1/4 inch (6 mm). c. Apply finish coat to a nominal thickness of 1/8 inch (3 mm).

6. Moist cure base coats. 7. Apply second coat immediately following initial set of first coat. 8. After curing, dampen previous coat prior to applying finish coat.

B. Stucco Patch Application: 1. Place material onto the surface dry substrate. 2. Surface and ambient temperatures must be at least 45 degrees F and rising. 3. Protect adjacent surfaces with drop cloths, waterproof paper, or other means

to maintain them free of material splashes, water, and debris. 4. Place material immediately after mixing. 5. Use a trowel or putty knife to finish smooth and flush with the surface. 6. Use a trowel, float, or sponge to match the texture of the surrounding area. 7. Material may be primed and painted as soon as it has dried because the Ph

matches the concrete Ph at that time.

C. Finishing: 1. Finish Textures:

a. Fine Sand Float Texture: (1) Trowel on a finish coat and double back with a second a

application. Plaster mix is to be formulated with a blend of 20-30 mesh aggregate.

(2) Using circular motion, rub surface with float to achieve uniform pattern, bringing sand particles to surface, to achieve a uniform texture. An absolute minimum of water should be used in floating.

b. Light Lace (skip trowel or modified Spanish) Texture: (1) Trowel, float or dash on a first coat to completely cover base.


(2) When surface moisture leaves, trowel apply light second coat in random directions.

(3) Knock down surfaces lightly with trowel. c. California Mission (sacked or brushed) Texture: Match existing

plaster/stucco finish at exterior wall surfaces. (1) Apply brown coat with a rounded trowel, creating undulation in the

brown coat. (2) When applying the finish, trowel, float or dash on a first coat to

completely cover base, apply second coat and steel trowel to a smooth finish.

d. Refer to ACI 524R for additional information. 2. Avoid excessive working of surface. Delay troweling as long as possible to

avoid drawing excess fines to surface. 3. Moist cure finish coat for minimum period of 48 hours.

D. Tolerances: 1. Maximum Variation from True Flatness: 1/8 inch in 10 feet (3 mm in 3 m).

3.04 PLASTER DETAILS

A. Relief from Stresses: 1. Installation of control joints and perimeter relief shall conform to ASTM C

926, ASTM C 1063, and manufacturer’s instructions. 2. Control Joints:

a. Install prefabricated control joint members prior to the application of plaster, using longest practical lengths. Where splicing is required, provide matching prefabricated connector clips designed to align control joint and provide a surface area for sealing butt joints. At spliced connections, fully embed control joint ends in sealant.

b. Fasten prefabricated control joint members to wall substrate in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. Embed control joint ends and butts in sealant at time of installation.

c. On exterior walls to be finished with plaster, provide control joints where indicated on Drawings.

d. After plastering work is completed, clean excess material from the joint area, remove protective tape, and apply joint sealant along full length of the joint. Refer to Section 07900 for joint sealant information.

3. Dissimilar Base Materials: Where dissimilar base materials abut and are to receive a continuous coat of plaster, the juncture shall be covered with a 6-inch wide strip of Diamond Mesh Metal Lath extending 3 inches on either side of the juncture.

B. Joints at Wall Openings: a. To reduce spalling at locations where plaster work abuts a metal frame

within a wall opening (e.g., door frame, fixed wall louver frame), use one of the following methods: (1) The abutting edge of plaster shall be tooled through the second and

finish coats, to produce a continuous small V-groove joint of uniform depth and width, OR

(2) The abutting edge of plaster shall be finished with a continuous Casing Bead to produce a 1/4 inch (nominal) wide continuous joint of uniform


depth. Casing Bead must be installed prior to the application of plaster, using longest practical lengths.

b. Provide sealant at joints, V-grooves, exposed ends and edges of plaster panels to prevent entry of water. Refer to Section 07900 for joint sealant information.

C. Sills at Wall Openings: At horizontal surface of sill in wall openings (e.g., fixed wall louver), finished surface of plaster shall be sloped at uniform pitch of 1/4 inch per foot to drain and prevent accumulation of water.

D. Drip Edge: Where vertical and horizontal exterior plaster surfaces meet (e.g., fascia to soffit), provide a continuous Drip Screed Reveal to form a continuous drip edge. Drip Screed Reveal must be installed prior to the application of plaster, using longest practical lengths.

3.05 PLASTER FINISH TEXTURE SCHEDULE

A. Exterior: 1. Existing Plaster Surfaces: California Mission (sacked or brushed) Texture,

unless otherwise indicated. 2. New (Previously Unplastered) Concrete / CMU Surfaces: Light Lace (skip

trowel or modified Spanish) Texture, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Interior: Fine Sand Float Texture, unless otherwise indicated.

3.06 CLEAN UP:

A. Clean excess material from surrounding areas immediately.

END OF SECTION

RENOVATION OF HISTORIC FIRE STATION NO. 2 (Phase II-A) City of Miami Project No. B-30579 09900 - 1 of 16 PAINTS AND COATINGS

SECTION 09900

PAINTS AND COATINGS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Surface preparation and field painting of the following: 1. Exposed exterior items and surfaces. 2. Exposed interior items and surfaces.

B. Surface preparation, priming, and finish coats specified in this Section are in addition to shop priming and surface treatment specified in other Sections.


A. Section 01400 - Quality Requirements.

B. Section 01600 - Product Requirements.

C. Section 03300 - Cast-In-Place Concrete.

D. Section 04810 - Unit Masonry Assemblies.

E. Section 05500 - Metal Fabrications: Shop-primed items.

F. Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry.

G. Section 06130 - Heavy Timber Construction.

H. Section 06150 - Wood Decking.

I. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers.

J. Section 08110 - Steel Doors and Frames: Shop-primed items.

K. Section 09220 - Portland Cement Plaster.

1.03 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Provide data on all finishing products, including VOC content and Gloss Level.

C. Samples: 1. Selection Samples: Submit two paper chip samples, 3 x 3 inches (75 x 75

mm) in size illustrating range of colors and textures available for each surface finishing product scheduled.

2. Verification Samples: Submit two painted samples, illustrating selected colors and textures for each color and system selected with specified coats cascaded. Submit on aluminum sheet, 12 x 12 inch (300 x 300 mm) in size.

D. Certification: By manufacturer that all paints and coatings comply with VOC limits specified.

E. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate special surface preparation procedures and


substrate conditions requiring special attention.


A. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum five years documented experience and approved by manufacturer.

B. Flame and smoke rating requirements for products and finishes shall conform to applicable requirements of the governing building code.

C. Safety during construction and the protection of adjacent public and private properties shall conform to applicable requirements of the following: 1. The governing building code, including but not limited to FBC-B CHAPTER

13. 2. Industrial Health and Safety Regulations (current edition), issued by the

authorities having jurisdiction. 3. Local, State and Federal regulations.

D. Storage, mixing, application and disposal of all paint and related waste materials shall conform to requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction.

E. Definitions: Conform to ASTM D 16 for interpretation of terms used in this Section.

F. Source Limitations: Obtain block fillers, primers and undercoat materials for each coating system from the same manufacturer as the finish coats.

G. Mock-Ups 1. General:

a. See Section 01400, for general requirements for mock-up. b. Locate where directed. c. Mock-ups may remain as part of the Work.

2. Plaster Walls: Provide panel, 10 feet (3 m) long by 10 feet (3 m) wide, illustrating coating color, sheen, and finish.

3. Steel Doors and Frames: Provide door and frame assembly illustrating paint coating color, sheen, and finish.


A. Deliver products to site in sealed and labeled containers; inspect to verify acceptability.

B. Container Label: Include manufacturer's name, type of paint, brand name, lot number, brand code, coverage, surface preparation, drying time, cleanup requirements, color designation, and instructions for mixing and reducing.

C. Paint Materials: Store at minimum ambient temperature of 45 degrees F (7 degrees C) and a maximum of 90 degrees F (32 degrees C), in ventilated area, and as required by manufacturer's instructions.


A. Do not apply materials when surface and ambient temperatures are outside the temperature ranges required by the paint product manufacturer.

B. Do not apply exterior coatings during rain, or when relative humidity is outside the


humidity ranges required by the paint product manufacturer.

C. Minimum Application Temperatures for Paints: 1. Apply water-based paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be

painted and surrounding air temperatures are between 50 and 90 degrees F (10 and 32 degrees C).

2. Apply solvent-thinned paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air temperatures are between 45 and 95 degrees F (7.2 and 35 degrees C).

3. Do not apply paint in rain, fog or mist, or when the relative humidity exceeds 85 percent, or at temperatures less than 5 degrees F (3 degrees C) above the dew point, or to damp or wet surfaces. a. Painting may continue during inclement weather if surfaces and areas to

be painted are enclosed and within temperature limits specified by manufacturer during application and drying periods.

D. Provide lighting level of 80 ft candles (860 lx) measured mid-height at substrate surface. 1. Perform no painting or decorating work unless a minimum lighting level of

323 Lux (30 foot candles) is provided on surfaces to be painted. 2. Adequate lighting facilities shall be provided by the Contractor.

E. Follow manufacturer's recommended procedures for producing best results, including testing of substrates, moisture in substrates, and humidity and temperature limitations.

F. Concrete surfaces must be installed at least 28 days prior to painting and decorating work, and must be visually dry on both sides.

1.07 WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL

A. Paint, stain and wood preservative finishes and related materials (thinners, solvents, etc.) are regarded as hazardous products and are subject to regulations for disposal. Obtain information on these controls from applicable government authorities having jurisdiction.

B. All waste materials shall be separated and recycled. Where paint recycling is available, collect waste paint by type and provide for delivery to recycling or collection facility. Materials that cannot be reused must be treated as hazardous waste and disposed of in an appropriate manner.

C. Place materials defined as hazardous or toxic waste, including used sealant and adhesive tubes and containers, in containers or areas designated for hazardous waste.

D. To reduce the amount of contaminants entering waterways, sanitary/storm drain systems or into the ground the following procedures shall be strictly adhered to: 1. Retain cleaning water for water-based materials to allow sediments to be

filtered out. In no case shall equipment be cleaned using free draining water.

2. Retain cleaners, thinners, solvents and excess paint and place in designated containers and ensure proper disposal.

3. Return solvent and oil soaked rags used during painting operations for contaminant recovery, proper disposal, or appropriate cleaning and


laundering. 4. Dispose of contaminants in an approved legal manner in accordance with

hazardous waste regulations. 5. Empty paint cans are to be dry prior to disposal or recycling (where

available). 6. Close and seal tightly partly used cans of materials including sealant and

adhesive containers and store protected in well ventilated fire-safe area at moderate temperature.

E. Set aside and protect surplus and uncontaminated finish materials not required by the City and deliver or arrange collection for verifiable re-use or re-manufacturing.


A. See Section 01600, for additional provisions.

B. Supply 1 gallon (4 L) of each color, type, and surface texture; store where directed.

C. Label each container with color, type, texture, and room locations in addition to the manufacturer's label.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Basis of Design Manufacturer: PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc: www.ppgaf.com.

B. Other Manufacturers. 1. Duron, Inc: www.duron.com. 2. ICI Paints North America: www.icipaintsinna.com. 3. Benjamin Moore & Co: www.benjaminmoore.com. 4. The Flood Company: www.flood.com. 5. Minwax Company: www.minwax.com.

C. Substitutions: See Section 01600.

2.02 PAINTS AND COATINGS - GENERAL

A. Material Compatibility: Provide block fillers, primers, undercoaters, and finish-coat materials that are compatible with one another and the substrates indicated under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by manufacturer based on testing and field experience.

B. Paints and Coatings: Ready mixed, except field-catalyzed coatings. Prepare pigments: 1. To a soft paste consistency, capable of being readily and uniformly

dispersed to a homogeneous coating. 2. For good flow and brushing properties. 3. Capable of drying or curing free of streaks or sags.

C. Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content: 1. Provide coatings that comply with the most stringent requirements specified

in the following:


a. 40 CFR 59, Subpart D. b. Architectural coatings VOC limits of State of Florida.

2. Determination of VOC Content: Testing and calculation in accordance with 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24), exclusive of colorants added to a tint base and water added at project site; or other method acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

D. Provide Premium Grade systems (2 top coats) as defined in MPI (APSM), except as otherwise indicated. 1. Where a specified paint system does not have a Premium Grade, provide

Custom Grade system.

E. Gloss Level: Paint gloss shall be defined as the sheen rating of applied paint, in accordance with the following MPI values: 1. Gloss Level G1: Matte or Flat finish.

a. Units at 60 degrees: 0 to 5. b. Units at 85 degrees: 10 maximum.

2. Gloss Level G2: Velvet finish. a. Units at 60 degrees: 0 to 10. b. Units at 85 degrees: 10 to 35.

3. Gloss Level G3: Eggshell finish. a. Units at 60 degrees: 10 to 25. b. Units at 85 degrees: 10 to 35.

4. Gloss Level G4: Satin finish. a. Units at 60 degrees: 20 to 35. b. Units at 85 degrees: 35 minimum.

5. Gloss Level G5: Semi-Gloss finish. a. Units at 60 degrees: 35 to 70.

6. Gloss Level G6: Gloss finish. a. Units at 60 degrees: 70 to 85.

7. Gloss Level G7: Gloss finish. a. Units at 60 degrees: Greater than 85.

F. Colors: Provide colors as directed by Consultant. 1. Allow for minimum of three colors for each system, unless otherwise

indicated, without additional cost to City. 2. Extend colors to surface edges; colors may change at any edge as directed

2.03 CONCRETE MASONRY UNIT BLOCK FILLERS

A. Concrete Masonry Unit Block Fillers: 1. Factory formulated high-performance latex block filler. 2. Product:

a. Type 1: PPG 6-15 SPEEDHIDE Interior/Exterior Acrylic Masonry Block Filler (47.5 g/L VOC), or equal.

b. Type 2: PPG 6-7 SPEEDHIDE Interior/ Exterior Masonry Latex Block Filler (14 g/L VOC), or equal.

2.04 EXTERIOR PRIMERS

A. Exterior Concrete and Masonry Primer: 1. Factory-formulated alkali-resistant acrylic-latex primer for exterior

application.


2. Product: PPG 4-603 PERMA-CRETE Interior/Exterior Alkali Resistant Primer (99 g/L VOC), or equal.

B. Exterior Wood Primer for Acrylic Enamels: 1. Factory-formulated alkyd or latex wood primer for exterior application. 2. Product: PPG SEAL GRIP Interior/Exterior 100% Acrylic Universal

Primer/Sealer 17-921 (89 g/L VOC), or equal.

C. Exterior Ferrous-Metal Primer: 1. Factory-formulated rust-inhibitive metal primer for exterior application. 2. Product: PPG 90-715 Pitt-Tech One Pack Interior/Exterior Primer Finish

DTM Industrial Enamel (123 g/L VOC; anti-corrosive), or equal.

D. Exterior Galvanized Metal Primer: 1. Factory-formulated galvanized metal primer for exterior application. 2. Product: PPG Pitt-Tech Int/Ext Industrial DTM Primer/Finish Enamel 90-712

Series (123 g/L VOC; anti-corrosive), or equal.

2.05 INTERIOR PRIMERS

A. Interior Concrete and Masonry Primer: 1. Factory-formulated alkali-resistant acrylic-latex interior primer for interior

application. 2. Product:

a. Type 1: PPG 4-603 PERMA-CRETE Interior/Exterior Alkali Resistant Primer (99 g/L VOC), or equal.

b. Type 2: PPG 9-900 Pure Performance Interior Latex Primer Sealer (0.0 g/L VOC), or equal.

B. Interior Water-Based Primer: 1. Factory-formulated water-based primer for interior concrete floor application. 2. Product:

a. PPG 98-6637 MegaSeal WBPG Water Based Primer Gray (0.0 g/L), or equal.

C. Interior Plaster Primer: 1. Factory-formulated latex-based primer for interior application. 2. Product:

a. Type 1: PPG 4-603 PERMA-CRETE Interior/Exterior Alkali Resistant Primer (99 g/L VOC), or equal.

b. Type 2: PPG 9-900 Pure Performance Interior Latex Primer (0.0 g/L VOC), or equal.

D. Interior Wood Primer for Acrylic-Enamel and Semi-gloss Alkyd-Enamel Finishes: 1. Factory-formulated acrylic-latex-based interior wood primer. 2. Product:

a. Type 1: PPG SEAL GRIP Interior Latex Enamel Undercoater 17-955 (96 g/L VOC), or equal.

b. Type 2: PPG 9-900 Pure Performance Interior Latex Primer (0.0 g/L VOC), or equal.

E. Interior Wood Primer for Full-Gloss Enamel Finishes: 1. Factory-formulated acrylic-latex-based interior wood primer. 2. Product:


a. Type 1: PPG SEAL GRIP Interior Latex Enamel Undercoater 17-955 (96 g/L VOC), or equa).

b. Type 2: PPG 9-900 Pure Performance Interior Latex Primer (0.0 g/L VOC).

F. Interior Ferrous-Metal Primer: 1. Factory-formulated quick-drying rust-inhibitive alkyd-based metal primer. 2. Product: PPG Pitt-Tech Int/Ext Industrial DTM Primer/Finish Enamel 90-712


G. Interior Zinc-Coated Metal Primer: 1. Factory-formulated galvanized metal primer. 2. Product: PPG Pitt-Tech Int/Ext Industrial DTM Primer/Finish Enamel 90-712


2.06 EXTERIOR FINISH COATS

A. Exterior Flat Acrylic Paint: 1. Factory-formulated flat acrylic-emulsion latex paint for exterior application. 2. Gloss Level: G1. 3. Product: PPG 6-610 Series SpeedHide Exterior House Paint Flat Latex (96

g/L VOC), or equal.

B. Exterior Low-Luster Acrylic Paint: 1. Factory-formulated low-sheen (eggshell) acrylic-latex paint for exterior

application. 2. Gloss Level: G3. 3. Product:

a. Type 1: PPG 6-2045 Series SpeedHide Exterior House & Trim Satin--Acrylic Latex (104 g/L VOC), or equal.

b. Type 2: PPG 90-474 Series Pitt-Tech One Pack High Performance Waterborne Satin DTM Industrial Enamels (227 g/L VOC; anti-corrosive), or equal.

C. Exterior Semi-gloss Acrylic Enamel: 1. Factory-formulated semi-gloss waterborne acrylic-latex enamel for exterior

application. 2. Gloss Level: G5. 3. Product: PPG 6-900 Series SpeedHide Exterior House & Trim Semi-Gloss

Acrylic Latex Paint (131 g/L VOC), or equal.

D. Exterior Full-Gloss Acrylic Enamel for Concrete and Wood: 1. Factory-formulated full-gloss waterborne acrylic-latex enamel for exterior

application. 2. Gloss Level: G6. 3. Product: PPG 90-374 Series Pitt-Tech One Pack Interior/Exterior High

Performance Waterborne High Gloss DTM Industrial Enamels (192 g/L VOC; anti-corrosive), or equal.

E. Exterior Full-Gloss Acrylic Enamel for Ferrous and Other Metals: 1. Factory-formulated full-gloss waterborne acrylic-latex enamel for exterior

application. 2. Gloss Level: G6.


3. Product: PPG 90-374 Series Pitt-Tech One Pack Interior/Exterior High Performance Waterborne High Gloss DTM Industrial Enamels (192 g/L VOC; anti-corrosive), or equal.

2.07 INTERIOR FINISH COATS

A. Interior Flat Acrylic Paint: 1. Factory-formulated flat acrylic-emulsion latex paint for interior application. 2. Gloss Level: G1. 3. Product:

a. Type 1: PPG 6-70 Line SpeedHide Interior Wall Flat Latex Paint (17 g/L VOC), or equal.

b. Type 2: PPG 9-100 Series Pure Performance Interior Flat Latex Paint (0.0 g/L VOC), or equal.

B. Interior Flat Latex-Emulsion Size: 1. Factory-formulated flat latex-based interior paint. 2. Gloss Level: G1. 3. Product:

a. Type 1: PPG 6-70 Line SpeedHide Interior Wall Flat Latex Paint (17 g/L VOC), or equal.

b. Type 2: PPG 9-100 Series Pure Performance Interior Flat Latex Paint (0.0 g/L VOC), or equal.

C. Interior Low-Luster Acrylic Enamel: 1. Factory-formulated eggshell acrylic-latex interior enamel. 2. Gloss Level: G3. 3. Product:

a. Type 1: PPG 6-411 Series SpeedHide Eggshell Acrylic Latex Enamel (73 g/L VOC), or equal

b. Type 2: PPG 9-300 Series Pure Performance Interior Eggshell Latex Paint (0.0 g/L VOC), or equal.

D. Interior Satin Acrylic Enamel: 1. Factory-formulated satin acrylic-latex interior enamel. 2. Gloss Level: G4. 3. Product: PPG 6-3511 Series SpeedHide Satin Acrylic Latex Enamel (46 g/L

VOC), or equal.

E. Interior Semi-gloss Acrylic Enamel: 1. Factory-formulated semi-gloss acrylic-latex enamel for interior application. 2. Gloss Level: G5. 3. Product:

a. Type 1: PPG 6-500 Series SpeedHide Interior Semi-Gloss Latex (90 g/L VOC), or equal.

b. Type 2: PPG 9-500 Series Pure Performance Interior Semi-gloss Latex Paint (0.0 g/L VOC), or equal.

F. Interior Full-Gloss Acrylic Enamel: 1. Factory-formulated full-gloss acrylic-latex interior enamel. 2. Gloss Level: G6. 3. Product:


a. Type 1: PPG 6-8534 SpeedHide Interior Latex 100 Percent Acrylic Gloss Enamel (90 g/L VOC), or equal.

b. Type 2: PPG 90-374 Pitt-Tech One Pack Interior/Exterior Latex High Performance Waterborne High Gloss DTM Industrial Enamel (192 g/L VOC; anti-corrosive), or equal.

2.07 ACCESSORY MATERIALS

A. Accessory Materials: Linseed oil, shellac, turpentine, paint thinners and other materials not specifically indicated but required to achieve the finishes specified; commercial quality.

B. Patching Material: Latex filler.

C. Fastener Head Cover Material: Latex filler.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive Work as instructed by the product manufacturer.

B. Examine surfaces scheduled to be finished prior to commencement of work. Report any condition that may potentially affect proper application.

C. Test shop-applied primer for compatibility with subsequent cover materials.

D. Measure moisture content of surfaces using an electronic moisture meter. Do not apply finishes unless moisture content of surfaces is within acceptable tolerances recommended by the coating manufacturer.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. General: 1. Remove dirt, splinters, loose particles, grease, oil, disintegrated coatings,

and other foreign matter and substances deleterious to coating performance as specified for each substrate before application of paint or surface treatments. a. Oil and grease shall be removed prior to mechanical cleaning. b. Cleaning shall be programmed so that dust and other contaminants will

not fall on wet, newly painted surfaces. 2. Exposed ferrous metals such as nail heads on or in contact with surfaces to

be painted with water-thinned paints, shall be spot-primed with a suitable corrosion-inhibitive primer capable of preventing flash rusting and compatible with the coating specified for the adjacent areas.

B. Additional Requirements for Surfaces with Existing Coatings: 1. Before application of new coatings, perform the following on surfaces

covered by soundly-adhered coatings, defined as those which cannot be removed with a putty knife: a. Wipe previously painted surfaces to receive solvent-based coatings,

except stucco and similarly rough surfaces clean with a clean, dry cloth saturated with mineral spirits, ASTM D 235.


1) Allow surface to dry. Wiping shall immediately precede the application of the first coat of any coating, unless specified otherwise.

b. Sand existing glossy surfaces to be painted to reduce gloss. 1) Brush, and wipe clean with a damp cloth to remove dust.

c. The requirements specified are minimum. Comply also with the application instructions of the paint manufacturer.

d. Previously painted surfaces specified to be repainted or damaged during construction shall be thoroughly cleaned of all grease, dirt, dust or other foreign matter.

e. Blistering, cracking, flaking and peeling or other deteriorated coatings shall be removed.

f. Chalk shall be removed so that when tested in accordance with ASTM D 4214, the chalk resistance rating is no less than 8.

g. Slick surfaces shall be roughened. Damaged areas such as, but not limited to, nail holes, cracks, chips, and spalls shall be repaired with suitable material to match adjacent undamaged areas.

h. Edges of chipped paint shall be feather edged and sanded smooth. i. Rusty metal surfaces shall be cleaned as per SSPC requirements.

1) Solvent, mechanical, or chemical cleaning methods shall be used to provide surfaces suitable for painting.

j. New, proposed coatings shall be compatible with existing coatings. 2. Existing Coated Surfaces with Minor Defects:

a. Sand, spackle, and treat minor defects to render them smooth. 1) Minor defects are defined as scratches, nicks, cracks, gouges,

spalls, alligatoring, chalking, and irregularities due to partial peeling of previous coatings.

b. Remove chalking by sanding or blasting so that when tested in accordance with ASTM D 4214, the chalk rating is not less than 8.

3. Removal of Existing Coatings: Remove existing coatings from the following surfaces: a. Surfaces containing large areas of minor defects. b. Surfaces containing more than 20 percent peeling area. c. Surfaces designated by the Consultant, such as surfaces where rust

shows through existing coatings. 4. Substrate Repair:

a. Repair substrate surface damaged during coating removal. b. Sand edges of adjacent soundly-adhered existing coatings so they are

tapered as smooth as practical to areas involved with coating removal. c. Clean and prime the substrate as specified.

C. Additional Requirements for New (Previously Uncoated) Surfaces: 1. Surface Appurtenances: Remove electrical plates, hardware, light fixture

trim, escutcheons, and fittings prior to preparing surfaces or finishing. 2. Surfaces:

a. Correct defects and clean surfaces that affect work of this section. b. Remove or repair existing coatings that exhibit surface defects. c. Mask surfaces that are not to be finished, or that are to be finished at a

later time. 3. Marks: Seal with shellac that which may bleed through surface finishes.


4. Impervious Surfaces: a. Remove mildew by scrubbing with solution of tetra-sodium phosphate

and bleach. b. Rinse with clean water and allow surface to dry.

5. Plaster Surfaces to be Painted: a. Fill hairline cracks, small holes, and imperfections with latex patching

plaster. b. Make smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces. c. Wash and neutralize high alkali surfaces.

6. Galvanized Surfaces to be Painted: a. Remove surface contamination and oils and wash with solvent. b. Apply coat of etching primer.

7. Uncoated Steel and Iron Surfaces to be Painted: a. Remove grease, mill scale, weld splatter, dirt, and rust. b. Where heavy coatings of scale are evident, remove by hand wire

brushing or sandblasting; clean by washing with solvent. c. Apply a treatment of phosphoric acid solution, ensuring weld joints,

bolts, and nuts are similarly cleaned. d. Prime paint entire surface; spot prime after repairs.

8. Shop-Primed Steel Surfaces to be Finish Painted: a. Sand and scrape to remove loose primer and rust. b. Feather edges to make touch-up patches inconspicuous. c. Clean surfaces with solvent. Prime bare steel surfaces. d. Re-prime entire shop-primed item.

9. Exterior Wood to be Painted: a. Remove dust, grit, and foreign matter. b. Seal knots, pitch streaks, and sappy sections. c. Fill nail holes with tinted exterior caulking compound after prime coat has

been applied. d. Back prime concealed surfaces before installation.

10. Metal Doors to be Painted: Prime metal door top and bottom edge surfaces.

3.03 APPLICATION

A. Apply products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Where adjacent sealant is to be painted, do not apply finish coats until sealant is applied.

C. Do not apply finishes to surfaces that are not dry. Allow applied coats to dry before next coat is applied.

D. Apply each coat to uniform appearance. Apply each coat of paint slightly darker than preceding coat unless otherwise approved.

E. Sand wood and metal surfaces lightly between coats to achieve required finish.

F. Vacuum clean surfaces of loose particles. Use tack cloth to remove dust and particles just prior to applying next coat.

G. Where clear finishes are required, tint fillers to match wood. Work fillers into the grain before set. Wipe excess from surface.

3.04 CLEANING


A. Collect waste material that may constitute a fire hazard, place in closed metal containers, and remove daily from site.

3.05 SURFACES TO BE FINISHED

A. Paint the surfaces as specified in the Painting Schedule at end of this Section.

B. Do Not Paint or Finish the Following Items: 1. Items fully factory-finished unless specifically noted. 2. Fire rating labels, equipment serial number and capacity labels. 3. Stainless steel items. 4. Interior surfaces, except as follows:

a. Steel doors and door frames shall be painted as specified in the Painting Schedule at end of this Section.

b. Ferrous metal shall be painted as specified in the Painting Schedule at end of this Section.

c. Galvanized steel shall be painted as specified in the Painting Schedule at end of this Section.

3.06 PAINT SYSTEMS, EXTERIOR

A. Concrete / Plaster / Stucco: 1. Paint CE-OP-3A-G1 (Flat Acrylic Finish):

a. Primer: Exterior Concrete Primer; 1.2 to 1.5 mils dry film thickness. b. Intermediate Coat: Exterior Flat Acrylic Paint; 1.0 to 1.2 mils dry film

thickness. c. Finish Coat: Exterior Flat Acrylic Paint; 1.0 to 1.2 mils dry film thickness.

2. Paint CE-OP-3A-G3 (Low-Luster Acrylic Finish): a. Primer: Exterior Concrete Primer; 1.2 to 1.5 mils dry film thickness. b. Intermediate Coat: Exterior Low Luster Acrylic Paint (Type 1); 0.8 to 1.1

mils dry film thickness. c. Finish Coat: Exterior Low Luster Acrylic Paint (Type 1); 0.8 to 1.1 mils

dry film thickness. 3. Paint CE-OP-3A-G5 (Semi-gloss Acrylic-Enamel Finish):

a. Primer: Exterior Concrete Primer; 1.2 to 1.5 mils dry film thickness. b. Intermediate Coat: Exterior Semi-gloss Acrylic Enamel; 0.9 to 1.1 mils

dry film thickness. c. Finish Coat: Exterior Semi-gloss Acrylic Enamel; 0.9 to 1.1 mils dry film

thickness. 4. Paint CE-OP-3A-G6 (Full-Gloss Acrylic-Enamel Finish):

a. Primer: Exterior Concrete Primer; 1.2 to 1.5 mils dry film thickness. b. Intermediate Coat: Exterior Full Gloss Acrylic Enamel for Concrete and

Wood; 2.0 to 3.0 mils dry film thickness. c. Finish Coat: Exterior Full Gloss Acrylic Enamel for Concrete and Wood;

2.0 to 3.0 mils dry film thickness. B. Wood:

1. Paint WE-OP-3A-G1 (Flat Acrylic Finish): a. Primer: Exterior Wood Primer for Acrylic Enamels; 1.2 to 1.5 mils dry

film thickness. b. Intermediate Coat: Exterior Flat Acrylic Paint; 1.0 to 1.2 mils dry film



2. Paint WE-OP-3A-G3 (Low-Luster Acrylic Finish): a. Primer: Exterior Wood Primer for Acrylic Enamels; 1.2 to 1.5 mils dry

film thickness. b. Intermediate Coat: Exterior Low Luster Acrylic Paint (Type 1); 0.8 to

1.1 mils dry film thickness. c. Finish Coat: Exterior Low Luster Acrylic Paint (Type 1); 0.8 to 1.1 mils

dry film thickness. 3. Paint WE-OP-3A-G5 (Semi-gloss Acrylic-Enamel Finish):

a. Primer: Exterior Wood Primer for Acrylic Enamels; 1.2 to 1.5 mils dry film thickness.

b. Intermediate Coat: Exterior Semi-gloss Acrylic Enamel; 0.9 to 1.1 mils dry film thickness.

c. Finish Coat: Exterior Semi-gloss Acrylic Enamel; 0.9 to 1.1 mils dry film thickness.

4. Paint WE-OP-3A-G6 (Full-Gloss Acrylic-Enamel Finish): a. Primer: Exterior Wood Primer for Acrylic Enamels; 1.2 to 1.5 mils dry

film thickness. b. Intermediate Coat: Exterior Full-Gloss Acrylic Enamel for Concrete

and Wood; 2.0 to 3.0 mils dry film thickness. c. Finish Coat: Exterior Full-Gloss Acrylic Enamel for Concrete and

Wood; 2.0 to 3.0 mils dry film thickness.

C. Ferrous Metal: 1. Paint ME-OP-3A-G1 (Flat Acrylic Finish):

a. Primer: Exterior Ferrous Metal Primer; 2.0 to 3.0 mils dry film thickness. b. Intermediate Coat: Exterior Flat Acrylic Paint; 1.0 to 1.2 mils dry film


2. Paint ME-OP-3A-G3 (Low-Luster Acrylic Finish): a. Primer: Exterior Ferrous Metal Primer; 2.0 to 3.0 mils dry film thickness. b. Intermediate Coat: Exterior Low-Luster Acrylic Paint (Type 2); 2.0 to 3.0

mils dry film thickness. c. Finish Coat: Exterior Low-Luster Acrylic Paint (Type 2); 2.0 to 3.0 mils

dry film thickness. 3. Paint ME-OP-3A-G5 (Semi-gloss Acrylic-Enamel Finish):

a. Primer: Exterior Ferrous Metal Primer; 2.0 to 3.0 mils dry film thickness. b. Intermediate Coat: Exterior Semi-gloss Acrylic Enamel; 0.9 to 1.1 mils

dry film thickness. c. Finish Coat: Exterior Semi-gloss Acrylic Enamel; 0.9 to 1.1 mils dry

film thickness. 4. Paint ME-OP-3A-G6 (Full-Gloss Acrylic-Enamel Finish):

a. Primer: Exterior Ferrous Metal Primer; 2.0 to 3.0 mils dry film thickness. b. Intermediate Coat: Exterior Full-Gloss Acrylic Enamel for Ferrous and

Other Metals; 2.0 to 3.0 mils dry film thickness. c. Finish Coat: Exterior Full-Gloss Acrylic Enamel for Ferrous and

Other Metals; 2.0 to 3.0 mils dry film thickness.

D. Zinc-Coated / Galvanized Metal: 1. Paint MgE-OP-3A-G1 (Flat Acrylic Finish):

a. Primer: Exterior Ferrous Metal Primer; 2.0 to 3.0 mils dry film thickness.


b. Intermediate Coat: Exterior Flat Acrylic Paint; 1.0 to 1.2 mils dry film thickness.

c. Finish Coat: Exterior Flat Acrylic Paint; 1.0 to 1.2 mils dry film thickness. 2. Paint MgE-OP-3A-G3 (Low-Luster Acrylic Finish):

a. Primer: Exterior Ferrous Metal Primer; 2.0 to 3.0 mils dry film thickness. b. Intermediate Coat: Exterior Low-Luster Acrylic Paint (Type 2); 2.0 to 3.0


dry film thickness. 3. Paint MgE-OP-3A-G5 (Semi-Gloss Acrylic-Enamel Finish):

a. Primer: Exterior Ferrous Metal Primer; 2.0 to 3.0 mils dry film thickness. b. Intermediate Coat: Exterior Semi-gloss Acrylic Enamel; 0.9 to 1.1 mils

dry film thickness. c. Finish Coat: Exterior Semi-gloss Acrylic Enamel; 0.9 to 1.1 mils dry

film thickness. 4. Paint MgE-OP-3A-G6 (Full-Gloss Acrylic-Enamel Finish):

a. Primer: Exterior Ferrous Metal Primer; 2.0 to 3.0 mils dry film thickness. b. Intermediate Coat: Exterior Full-Gloss Acrylic Enamel for Ferrous and

Other Metals; 2.0 to 3.0 mils dry film thickness. c. Finish Coat: Exterior Full-Gloss Acrylic Enamel for Ferrous and

Other Metals; 2.0 to 3.0 mils dry film thickness.

3.07 PAINT SYSTEMS, INTERIOR

A. Ferrous Metal: 1. Paint MI-OP-3A-G1 (Flat Acrylic Finish):

a. Primer: Interior Ferrous Metal Primer; 2.0 to 3.0 mils dry film thickness. b. Intermediate Coat: Interior Flat Acrylic Paint (Type 1); 1.1 to 1.3 mils dry

film thickness. c. Finish Coat: Interior Flat Acrylic Paint; 1.1 to 1.3 mils dry film thickness.

2. Paint MI-OP-3A-G3 (Low-Luster Acrylic Finish): a. Primer: Interior Ferrous Metal Primer; 2.0 to 3.0 mils dry film thickness. b. Intermediate Coat: Exterior Low-Luster Acrylic Paint (Type 2); 2.0 to 3.0


dry film thickness. 3. Paint MI-OP-3A-G4 (Satin Acrylic Enamel Finish):

a. Primer: Interior Ferrous Metal Primer; 2.0 to 3.0 mils dry film thickness. b. Intermediate Coat: Interior Satin Acrylic Enamel (Type 1); 0.9 to 1.2 mils

dry film thickness. c. Finish Coat: Interior Satin Acrylic Enamel (Type 1); 0.9 to 1.2 mils dry

film thickness. 4. Paint MI-OP-3A-G5 (Semi-gloss Acrylic-Enamel Finish):

a. Primer: Interior Ferrous Metal Primer; 2.0 to 3.0 mils dry film thickness. b. Intermediate Coat: Interior Semi-gloss Acrylic Enamel (Type 1); 0.9 to

1.2 mils dry film thickness. c. Finish Coat: Interior Semi-gloss Acrylic Enamel (Type 1); 0.9 to 1.2 mils

dry film thickness. 5. Paint MI-OP-3A-G6 (Full-Gloss Acrylic-Enamel Finish):

a. Primer: Interior Ferrous Metal Primer; 2.0 to 3.0 mils dry film thickness.


b. Intermediate Coat: Interior Full-Gloss Acrylic Enamel (Type 2); 2.0 to 3.0 mils dry film thickness.

c. Finish Coat: Interior Full-Gloss Acrylic Enamel (Type 2); 2.0 to 3.0 mils dry film thickness.

B. Zinc-Coated / Galvanized Metal: 1. Paint MgI-OP-3A-G1 (Flat Acrylic Finish):

a. Primer: Interior Ferrous Metal Primer; 2.0 to 3.0 mils dry film thickness. b. Intermediate Coat: Interior Flat Acrylic Paint (Type 1); 1.1 to 1.3 mils dry

film thickness. c. Finish Coat: Interior Flat Acrylic Paint; 1.1 to 1.3 mils dry film thickness.

2. Paint MgI-OP-3A-G3 (Low-Luster Acrylic Finish): a. Primer: Interior Ferrous Metal Primer; 2.0 to 3.0 mils dry film thickness. b. Intermediate Coat: Exterior Low-Luster Acrylic Paint (Type 2); 2.0 to 3.0


dry film thickness. 3. Paint MgI-OP-3A-G4 (Satin Acrylic Enamel Finish):

a. Primer: Interior Ferrous Metal Primer; 2.0 to 3.0 mils dry film thickness. b. Intermediate Coat: Interior Satin Acrylic Enamel (Type 1); 0.9 to 1.2 mils

dry film thickness. c. Finish Coat: Interior Satin Acrylic Enamel (Type 1); 0.9 to 1.2 mils dry

film thickness. 4. Paint MgI-OP-3A-G5 (Semi-gloss Acrylic-Enamel Finish):

a. Primer: Interior Ferrous Metal Primer; 2.0 to 3.0 mils dry film thickness. b. Intermediate Coat: Interior Semi-gloss Acrylic Enamel (Type 1); 0.9 to

1.2 mils dry film thickness. c. Finish Coat: Interior Semi-gloss Acrylic Enamel (Type 1); 0.9 to 1.2

mils dry film thickness. 5. Paint MgI-OP-3A-G6 (Full-Gloss Acrylic-Enamel Finish):

a. Primer: Interior Ferrous Metal Primer; 2.0 to 3.0 mils dry film thickness. b. Intermediate Coat: Interior Full-Gloss Acrylic Enamel (Type 2); 2.0 to

3.0 mils dry film thickness. c. Finish Coat: Interior Full-Gloss Acrylic Enamel (Type 2); 2.0 to 3.0 mils

dry film thickness.

3.08 PAINTING SCHEDULE

A. Exterior: 1. Wood: Provide Paint WE-OP-3A-G5; two (2) colors to be selected by

Consultant 2. Concrete / Plaster / Stucco: Provide Paint CE-OP-3A-G3; two (2) colors to

be selected by Consultant. 3. Metal:

a. On surfaces of Steel Doors and Frames, provide Paint MI-OP-3A-G5; two (2) colors to be selected by Consultant.

b. On surfaces of Ferrous Metal components and assemblies, provide Paint MI-OP-3A-G5; one (1) color to be selected by Consultant.

c. On surfaces of Galvanized Steel components and assemblies, provide Paint MgI-OP-3A-G5; one (1) color to be selected by Consultant.


B. Interior: 1. Metal:

a. On surfaces of Steel Doors and Frames, provide Paint MI-OP-3A-G5; two (2) colors to be selected by Consultant.

b. On surfaces of Ferrous Metal components and assemblies, provide Paint MI-OP-3A-G5; one (1) color to be selected by Consultant.

d. On surfaces of Galvanized Steel components and assemblies, provide Paint MgI-OP-3A-G5; one (1) color to be selected by Consultant.

END OF SECTION

RENOVATION OF HISTORIC FIRE STATION NO. 2 (Phase II-A) City of Miami Project No. B-30579 10210 - 1 WALL LOUVERS

SECTION 10210

FIXED WALL LOUVERS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Louver and control damper assemblies installed in exterior walls, including frames, and accessories.


A. Section 01600 - Product Requirements

B. Section 01780 - Closeout Submittals.

C. Section 03300 - Cast-In Place Concrete: Prepared exterior wall opening.

D. Section 04810 - Unit Masonry Assemblies: Prepared exterior wall opening.

E. Section 07620 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim.

F. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers.


A. Design Loads: Louver and control damper assemblies shall comply with applicable requirements of the governing building code, including but not limited to FBC-B CHAPTERS 15 and 16 (including HVHZ provisions), and as follows: 1. Louver and control damper assemblies shall be designed and constructed to

be of sufficient strength to support the estimated or actual imposed dead, live, wind, and any other loads, both during construction and after completion of the structure, without exceeding the allowable materials stresses specified by the governing building code.


1) Basic Wind Speed (3-second gust): 146 miles per hour. 2) Building Classification (FBC-B TABLE 1604.5 and ASCE 7 Table 1-

1): Category II. 3) Wind Importance Factor (FBC-B TABLE 1604.5): 1.00. 4) Wind Exposure Category (FBC-B SECTIONS 1609.4 and 1602.3):

C. b. Maximum Design Pressure Ratings of wall louver and control damper

assemblies shall be not less than the following criteria, whichever is most stringent: 1) Design pressure requirements indicated on the Structural Drawings;

refer to Wind Pressure Diagrams on Structural Drawings 2) Maximum Design Pressure Ratings: +160 PSF (7.66 kPa) / -140

PSF (6.70 kPa).

B. Performance Testing Requirements: Comply with applicable testing requirements of the governing building code, including but not limited to FBC-B SECTIONS 1626 and 2410.4, and as follows: 1. FBC-BCCO TEST PROTOCOLS PA-100(A)-95 Wind Driven Rain

Resistance Test: No water penetration at 35, 70 and 90 MPH (56, 113 and


145 kph) wind velocities, and only 0.3 ml of water penetration at 110 MPH (177 kph). a. Simulated rainfall applied in each test shall be 8.8 inches (223.5 mm)

per hour. 2. FBC-TPHVHZ TAS 201 (or BCCO TEST PROTOCOL PA 201-94) Large

Missile Impact Test: No interior penetration after at least six impacts with a 9.0 lb. (4.08 kg) Southern Pine 2 x 4 inches (51 x 102 mm) board traveling at a minimum of 50 ft/sec (15.24 m/sec).

3. FBC-TPHVHZ TAS 202 (or BCCO TEST PROTOCOL PA 202-94) Uniform Static Air Pressure Test: a. Louver/damper must withstand pressure tests of each of the following

loads: 1) +120 PSF (5.7 kPa) and -120 PSF (5.7 kPa). 2) +160 PSF (7.7 kPa) and -140 PSF (6.7 kPa). 3) +240 PSF (11.5 kPa) and -210 PSF (10.1 kPa).

b. Duration of tests must be at least 30 seconds per load. Louver/damper components shall recover 100 percent after loading.

4. FBC-TPHVHZ TAS or BCCO TEST PROTOCOL PA 203-94 Cyclic Wind Pressure Test: a. Louver/damper must withstand the following pressure cycles:

1) 600 cycles at +80.0 PSF (3.83 kPa) and -70 PSF (3.35 kPa). 2) 70 cycles at +96.0 PSF (4.60 kPa) and -84 PSF (4.02 kPa). 3) 1 cycle at +208.0 PSF (9.96 kPa) and -182 PSF (8.71 kPa).

b. Duration of loads shall be 1 to 3 seconds per cycle. Louver/damper components shall recover 100 percent after loading.

C. Movement: 1. Louver and control damper assemblies shall be designed and installed to

accommodate the following movement without damage to components or deterioration of seals: a. Movement of wall louver and control damper assemblies relative to

perimeter framing. b. Deflection of structural support framing, under permanent and dynamic

loads. 2. Thermal Movement: Provide for thermal movement caused by 180 degrees

F surface temperature, without causing buckling stresses on glass, joint seal failure, undue stress on structural elements, damaging loads on fasteners, reduction of performance, or detrimental effects.

1.04 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Provide data describing design characteristics, maximum recommended air velocity, design free area, materials and finishes.

C. Shop Drawings: Indicate louver layout plan and elevations, opening and clearance dimensions, tolerances; head, jamb and sill details; blade configuration, screens, blank-out areas required, and frames.

D. Samples: Submit two samples 6 x 6 inches (150 x 150 mm) in size illustrating finish and color of exterior and interior surfaces.


E. Test Reports: Independent agency reports showing compliance with specified performance criteria.

F. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products of the type specified in this section, with minimum five years of documented experience.

B. Louver and control damper assemblies shall be approved by the Miami-Dade County BCCO for use in closed structures that do not have the ability to drain water that may penetrate. Approval shall be based on tests and procedures performed in accordance with FBC-TPHVHZ or BCCO TEST PROTOCOLS PA 100(A)-94, PA 201, PA 202 and PA 203.


A. Coordinate work of this section with installation of wall openings.

B. Coordinate work of this section with installation of mechanical ductwork and electrical services to motorized devices.

1.07 WARRANTY

A. See Section 01780, for additional warranty requirements.

B. Provide twenty-year manufacturer warranty against distortion, metal degradation, and failure of connections. 1. Finish: Include coverage against degradation of finishes.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Wall Louvers and Control Dampers: Subject to contract requirements, provide products manufactured by one of the following: 1. Basis of Design Manufacturer: Ruskin: www.ruskin.com. 2. Other Manufacturers:

a. The Airolite Company: www.airolite.com. b. American Warming and Ventilating: www.american-warming.com. c. Conspec Systems, Inc: www.c-sgroup.com.


2.02 MATERIALS


B. Formed Aluminum: Formed sheet, ASTM B 209.

C. Steel Sheet: Hot-dipped galvanized steel sheet, ASTM A 653, with G90/Z275 coating.

D. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666 Type 304 or 316, soft temper, smooth surface, No. 4 finish.

E. Bird Screen: Interwoven wire mesh of aluminum, 0.063 inch (1.6 mm) diameter


wire, 1/2 inch (13 mm) open weave, square design.

F. Insect Screen: 18 x 16 size aluminum mesh.

G. Primer: Zinc chromate, alkyd type.

2.03 WALL LOUVERS AND LOUVER/DAMPER ASSEMBLIES

A. General: Factory fabricated and assembled, complete with frame, mullions, and accessories; AMCA Certified under AMCA 511.

B. Product: Ruskin EME6625D/CD50 (Miami-Dade County, Florida Notice of Acceptance No. 07-0501.13), or equivalent product with current product approval (NOA) for use in closed structures without provisions to manage weather infiltration (dry rooms), regardless of height above ground level.

C. Wall Louvers: 1. Components and Fabrication:

a. Frame: 1) Material: Extruded aluminum. 2) Wall Thickness: 0.125 inch (3.2 mm), nominal. 3) Depth: 6 inches (152 mm).

b. Blades: 1) Style: Vertically mounted. 2) Material: Extruded aluminum. 3) Wall Thickness: 0.081 inch (2.1 mm), nominal. 4) Centers: 1.5 inches (38 mm), nominal.

c. Bird Screen: 1) Provide bird screen at each air exhaust and intake louvers that

terminate at exterior of building, in accordance with requirements of FBC-M SECTION M401.6; openings in screen shall be sized in accordance with FBC-M TABLE M401.6.

2) Frame shall be of same material as louver, with mitered and welded corners; removable, screw attached; installed on inside face of louver frame.

d. Sill Flashing: Formed aluminum, 0.063 inch (1.6 mm) thick, upturned sides to prevent water leakage.

e. Installation Subframes: 1) Material: 0.125 inch (3.2 mm) thick extruded aluminum channel

(continuous), with integral 0.188 inch (4.7 mm) thick extruded aluminum fastening angle (continuous) to allow installation in any wall system.

f. Finish: Superior Performance Organic Coating System. 1) Finish welded units after fabrication. 2) Color to be selected by Consultant.

2.04 FINISHES

A. Comply with AA DAF-45 for aluminum finishes required.

B. Class I Natural Anodized Finish: AAMA 611 AA-M12C22A41 Clear anodic coating not less than 0.7 mils (0.018 mm) thick.

C. Class II Natural Anodized Finish: AAMA 611 AA-M12C22A31 Clear anodic coating not less than 0.4 mils (0.01 mm) thick.


D. Superior Performance Organic Coating System: AAMA 2605 multiple coat, thermally cured polyvinylidene fluoride system. 1. Colors: Available colors shall not be limited to manufacturer’s standard

range. If requested by Consultant or Project Manager, provide custom color at no additional cost to City.

E. Touch-Up Materials: As recommended by coating manufacturer for field application.

2.05 ACCESSORIES

A. Miscellaneous Metal Components: 1. Aluminum Sleeve: 1/8 inch (3 mm) thick formed aluminum, for installation

around louver/damper assembly; 2. Aluminum Cover Strip: 1/8 inch (3 mm) thick formed aluminum, attached to

rear of louver. 3. Aluminum Sleeve Brace: 1/8 inch (3 mm) thick formed aluminum, attached

to angles and supporting damper. 4. Aluminum Attachment Angles: 3/16 inch (5 mm) thick formed aluminum. 5. Finish: Class II Natural Anodized Finish; finish welded units after fabrication.

B. Aluminum Installation Channels: 1. 1/8 inch (3 mm) thick formed aluminum channels with 2 inch flanges, for

installation around perimeter of wall opening; channel depth to match thickness of wall where louver/damper is to be installed.

2. Finish: Superior Performance Organic Coating System; color to match louver.

C. Lifting Lugs: Louver/damper manufacturer's standard.

E. Fasteners and Anchors: Stainless steel.

F. Head and Sill Flashings: See Section 07620.

G. Sealant: Silicone type, as specified in Section 07900.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that prepared openings and flashings are ready to receive work and opening dimensions are as indicated on shop drawings.

B. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install louver and control damper assemblies in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Install louver and control damper assemblies level and plumb.

C. Install flashings and align louver and control damper assembly to ensure moisture shed from flashings and diversion of moisture to exterior.

D. Secure louver frames in openings with concealed fasteners.

E. Install perimeter sealant and backing rod in accordance with Section 07900.


3.03 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust control dampers for freedom of movement of control mechanism. Lubricate operating joints.

3.04 CLEANING

A. Strip protective finish coverings.

B. Clean surfaces and components.

END OF SECTION

RENOVATION OF HISTORIC FIRE STATION NO. 2 (Phase II-A) City of Miami Project No. B-30579 15421 - 1 of 2 DRAINS

SECTION 15421 DRAINS PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and

Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work in this section.

1.02 SUMMARY

A. This section includes storm drainage, including drains and drain specialties.

B. Related Sections:

1. Division 7 - Thermal and Moisture Protection.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit properly identified manufacturer's literature before starting work.

B. Submit Shop Drawings/Catalog cuts on the following:

1. Area Drains. 2. Roof drains


A. Regulatory Requirements: comply with the provisions of the Florida Building Code,

latest editions.

1.05 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING

A. Coordinate the installation of roof drains, flashing and roof penetrations.

B. Coordinate flashing materials installation of roofing, waterproofing and adjoining substrate work.

C. Coordinate the installation of drains in poured in place concrete slabs, to include

proper drain elevations, installation of flashing and slope of slab to drains. PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide drainage from one of the following:

1. Accepted equivalents:

a. Marathon Roofing Products

RENOVATION OF HISTORIC FIRE STATION NO. 2 (Phase II-A) City of Miami Project No. B-30579 15421 - 2 of 2 DRAINS

b. Jay R. Smith Mfg. Co. c. Blucher-Josam.

2.02 ABOVE GROUND DRAINAGE PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Hubless Cast-Iron Soil Pipe: CISPI Standard 301, Service weight, cast-iron soil

pipe and fittings, with neoprene gaskets conforming to CISPI Standard 310.

B. Copper DWV Pipe: ASTM B306.

2.03 UNDERGROUND BUILDING DRAIN PIOE AND FITTINGS A. Cast-Iron Soil Pipe: ASTM A74, Extra-Heavy weight, hub and spigot soil pipe and

fittings. Pipe and fittings shall have a heavy coating of coal tar varnish or asphaltum on both inside and outside surfaces. 1. Neoprene Compression Gaskets: ASTM C564.

2.04 DRAINS A. Area Drain

1. Coated cast iron floor drain with double drainage flange, weepholes, bottom outlet inside caulk connection, square top, medium duty grate, and sediment bucket. If drain occurs over occupied area use flashing clamp option. No.35440-81-X by Josam or accepted equivalent.

B. Roof Drain 1. Coated cast iron roof drain with sealing gasket, large vandalproof cast iron

locking dome, non-puncturing clamp ring with internal gravel stop, adjustable top with wide roof flange, under deck clamp assembly, large sump with anchor flange and bottom outlet inside caulk connection.

2. No. RD200, Small Area Roof Drain by Marathon Roofing Products or accepted equivalent.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Provide drains as indicated on drawings.

B. Exterior Unfinished Grade Mounted: 1. Cast iron, inside caulk outlet, bronze internal recessed plug mounted flush

with grade. Surround cleanout with concrete doughnut.

C. Exterior Finished Grade Mounted: 1. Ductile iron scoriated heavy duty cover, flush with walkway or floor.

No.56040-15 by Josam or accepted equivalent. END OF SECTION